JP6900108B2 - Pachinko machine - Google Patents

Description

The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

Conventionally, a game machine equipped with a ROM for storing image data such as a design, various background images, characters, characters, a production control board on which a CPU for controlling a display device for displaying various images, etc. is mounted has been proposed. (For example, Patent Document 1).

Japanese Unexamined Patent Publication No. 2016-116667 (Fig. 2)

By the way, the game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall to the game machine are charged with static electricity by rubbing the game balls against each other when circulating between the island equipment of the game hall and the game machine. It is necessary to take measures against electromagnetic noise caused by electrostatic discharge from the ball.

The present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of reducing the influence of electromagnetic noise.

Effective solutions to achieve the above objectives are shown below. In addition, the operation and the like will be explained as necessary. Further, for the sake of easy understanding, the corresponding configurations and the like in the embodiments of the invention are appropriately shown, but the present invention is not limited thereto.

(Solution 1)
The effect control means capable of controlling the progress of the effect based on the lottery result is a gaming machine housed in a protective case made of transparent resin, and the effect control means includes at least a first substrate and a second substrate. It is divided into a substrate and a third substrate, the at least three substrates are housed in one protective case made of the transparent resin, and the first substrate stores a ROM in which data related to a game effect is stored in advance. The second board can receive the data of the ROM provided on the first board through the first connector and create a video signal, and the video signal is transmitted through the second connector to the third. Output to the substrate, the third substrate outputs a signal of a video signal system suitable for the display device to the display device, and further, a first metal plate having conductivity and conductivity. The first metal plate is provided with a second metal plate provided with, and a conductive elastic portion having conductivity and elasticity, and the first metal plate is formed of the three substrates inside the protective case made of transparent resin. The area of the transparent resin is substantially the same as the area of the configured effect control means, is arranged so as to overlap the effect control means, and is partially exposed to the outside of the transparent resin protective case. While the second metal plate is provided on the protective case, the second metal plate is provided outside the transparent resin protective case without being provided on the transparent resin protective case, and the transparent resin protective case is provided. A gaming machine characterized in that when attached to the gaming machine, the first metal plate and the second metal plate are electrically connected via the conductive elastic portion.

(Solution 1-2)
The effect control means capable of controlling the progress of the effect based on the lottery result is a gaming machine housed in a protective case made of transparent resin, and the effect control means includes at least a first substrate and a second substrate. It is divided into a substrate and a third substrate, the at least three substrates are housed in one protective case made of the transparent resin, and the first substrate stores a ROM in which data related to a game effect is stored in advance. The second board can receive the data of the ROM provided in the first board through the first connector and create a video signal, and the video signal can be transmitted to the third through the second connector. Output to the substrate, the third substrate outputs a signal of a video signal system suitable for the display device to the display device, and further, a first metal plate having conductivity and conductivity. The first metal plate is provided with a second metal plate provided with, and a conductive elastic portion having conductivity and elasticity, and the first metal plate is connected to a ground line which is a reference potential of the effect control means. Further, at least a part of the protective case is provided on the transparent resin protective case so as to be exposed to the outside of the transparent resin protective case, while the second metal plate is provided on the transparent resin protective case. Instead, it is provided outside the transparent resin protective case, and when the transparent resin protective case is attached to the gaming machine, the first metal plate and the second metal plate become the same. through the conductive elastic portion are electrically connected, before Symbol effect control Te near smell of the first location metal plate which is electrically connected to the second metal plate via the conductive elastic portion A gaming machine characterized in that the ground line, which is the reference potential of the means, is connected to the first metal plate.

In this gaming machine, an effect control means capable of controlling the progress of the effect based on the lottery result is housed in a protective case. Further, the effect control means includes at least a first substrate, a second substrate, and a third substrate.
The first board includes a ROM in which data related to the game effect is stored in advance, and the second board receives the data of the ROM provided in the first board through the first connector and transmits a plurality of types of video signals. The video signal can be produced by a method, and the video signal is output to the third board through the second connector, and the third board outputs a signal of the video signal method suitable for the display device to the display device. It is a thing.
This gaming machine further includes a first metal plate, a second metal plate, and a conductive elastic portion having elasticity. The first metal plate is provided on the protective case so that at least a part thereof is exposed to the outside of the protective case, while the second metal plate is not provided on the protective case and is provided on the outside of the protective case. When the protective case is attached to the game machine, the first metal plate and the second metal plate are electrically connected to each other via the conductive elastic portion.

As described above, in the gaming machine of the present invention, the first metal plate and the second metal plate having conductivity are electrically connected via the conductive elastic portion, so that the effect control means can be obtained. The influence of electromagnetic noise can be reduced by the first metal plate and the second metal plate. Therefore, the influence of electromagnetic noise can be reduced.

In the present embodiment, for example, the normal lottery result, the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result correspond to the lottery result, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 of FIG. 119 corresponds to the first board, and the peripheral control board 1510. Corresponds to the second substrate, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 corresponds to the third substrate, the peripheral control unit 1500 in which the three substrates are combined corresponds to the effect control means, and the pachinko machine 1 in FIG. 1 is a gaming machine. The metal shield plate 1540 of FIG. 119 corresponds to the first metal plate, the metal back cover in the effect display device 1600 of FIG. 123 corresponds to the second metal plate, and the conductivity of FIG. 123. The elastic member 1545 corresponds to the conductive elastic portion.

In the gaming machine of the present invention, the influence of electromagnetic noise can be reduced.

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one Embodiment of this invention. It is a right side view of a pachinko machine. It is a left side view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front right. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front left. It is a perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. It is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation part of the production operation unit is in the raised position. It is a perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the right front when the pressing operation part of a production operation unit was in an ascending position. It is a perspective view of a pachinko machine seen from the front in a state where the door frame is opened from the main body frame and the main body frame is opened from the outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled a pachinko machine into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of a pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame and viewed from behind. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the outer frame. It is a right side view of the outer frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the outer frame for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which looked at from the front by disassembling each of the outer frame left assembly and the outer frame right assembly of the outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the assembly under the outer frame of the outer frame and looked at from the front. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame 2 disassembled and viewed from the front upper side, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from the front lower side. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a left side view of a door frame. It is a right side view of a door frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is a perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame for each main member and looked at from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for each main member and looked at from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as viewed from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit after removing the rear case and the fraud prevention member. (A) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as viewed from the back. It is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame disassembled and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. It is a perspective view which looked at the dish unit of a door frame. It is a perspective view which looked at the dish unit from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish unit for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish unit for each main member and looked at from the back. It is a perspective view of the dish base unit in the dish unit as seen from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the dish base unit in the dish unit from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the dish base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish base unit for each main member and looked at from the back. It is a perspective view of the plate decoration unit in the plate unit as seen from the front. It is a perspective view which looked at the dish decoration unit from the back. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish decoration unit for each main member and looked at from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the dish decoration unit for each main member and looked at from the back. It is a top view which looked at the effect operation unit in the dish unit from the advancing / retreating direction of the effect operation part button unit. (A) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled each main member of an effect operation unit and looked at from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring of the effect operation unit viewed from the top front, and (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring viewed from the bottom front. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from the upper front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from the lower front. (A) is a perspective view of the rotation drive unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the rotation drive unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit disassembled and viewed from the front right. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the rotary drive unit and looked at from the left front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the effect operation button unit of the effect operation unit and looked at from the front upper part. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the effect operation button unit and looked at from the front lower part. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is in the descending position, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is in the ascending position. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the effect operation ring and the rotation drive unit in the left side view of the effect operation unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the effect operation ring and the effect operation ring decorative substrate in the plan view which saw the effect operation unit from the pressing direction of a pressing operation part. (A) is a front view of the plate unit shown in a normal state, (b) is a front view of the plate unit when the pressing operation unit is in the raised position, and (c) is a central pressing operation unit of the pressing operation unit. It is a front view of the dish unit when is pressed. (A) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from behind. (A) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from behind. (A) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the back, and (c) is a state in which the top lower cover is removed. It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown by. It is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the front and above. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and looked at from the front lower part. It is a front view of the door frame shown together with each decorative substrate. It is a front view of the main body frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the main body frame in a pachinko machine. It is a perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the right front. It is a perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the left front. It is a perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the back. It is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the main body frame for each main member and looked at from the back. (A) is an enlarged perspective view showing the lower left corner of the front surface of the main body frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the lower left corner of the front surface of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows the operation of the connection cable guide member of a main body frame at the time of opening and closing of a door frame with respect to a main body frame. (A) is a perspective view of the ball launching device in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball launching device as viewed from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the payout base unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the payout base unit as viewed from the back. (A) is a perspective view of the payout unit in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the payout unit as viewed from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. It is a rear sectional view which cut the payout device of a payout unit at the center in the front-rear direction of a payout vane. (A) is a rear sectional view of the payout device cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the payout blade when the ball-extracting movable piece is in the open state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along the line AA in (a). .. It is a rear view of the payout device for demonstrating the rotation position of a payout vane. It is a rear view of the payout device for demonstrating the prevention of ball clogging and ball dropout. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the foul cover unit of a door frame, and the lower full tank path unit. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball in the main body frame. (A) is a perspective view of the board unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the board unit as viewed from the back. It is a perspective view which looked at the board unit from the rear lower part. It is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front. It is an exploded perspective view which disassembled the board unit for each main structure and looked at from the back. It is an enlarged side sectional view which shows the lower part of the pachinko machine which cut at the center in the left-right direction. (A) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the locking unit as viewed from the back. It is a front view of the game board in a pachinko machine. It is a front view which shows in the game area where a game ball is distributed in a game board. It is a front view of a center role and a table production unit in a table unit of a game board. It is a side sectional view seen from the right by cutting the front effect unit together with the center accessory at the center in the left-right direction. It is explanatory drawing which shows typically the relationship between the LED in the table effect unit, and the reflection concave part of a table light guide plate. It is a front view which shows the light emitting mode of the front light guide plate. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which the front light guide plate of a table effect unit is made to emit light. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state in which the lower front center decorative body is made to emit light in the lower movable production unit. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state in which the lower central elevating base is raised in the lower movable effect unit, and the lower front central decorative body and the lower rear central decorative body are made to emit light. In the lower movable production unit, the lower center elevating base, the lower left side elevating base and the lower right side elevating base are raised to emit light from the lower front center decoration, the lower rear center decoration, the lower left side decoration, and the lower right side decoration. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state of being made. It is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the effect operation unit is in the raised position while the game board is in the state of FIG. 110. The four rotating decorative bodies, the left side rotating decorative body, the left sub-side rotating decorative body, the right side rotating decorative body, and the right sub-side rotating decorative body in the lower movable production unit are each developed to outline the decoration of the decorative part on each side. It is explanatory drawing. It is explanatory drawing which shows the type (size) of the arrow which is light-emitting and displays in the lower movable production unit. It is a front view of the game board which shows in the state which the upper rear left decorative body and the upper rear right decorative body of the upper rear movable effect unit are lowered. It is explanatory drawing which shows the drive mechanism of the upper rear movable production unit roughly from the front. It is explanatory drawing which shows the structure of the clutch mechanism of the upper rear movable production unit. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which the upper front movable decorative body of the upper front movable production unit is lowered. It is explanatory drawing which shows the movement of the upper front movable decorative body of the upper front movable production unit. It is a front view exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit. It is a rear view exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit. It is a front view of the peripheral control unit. It is sectional drawing of XX line of FIG. 121. It is a view of arrow A of FIG. 121. It is a block diagram which shows the control structure of a pachinko machine schematicly. It is a figure which shows the structure of the frame grounding board. This is a modified example of the payout device. It is a schematic perspective view of a slot machine.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
The pachinko machine 1 according to the embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 12. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. FIG. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front right, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front left, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the back. FIG. 8 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the effect operating unit is in the raised position, and FIG. 9 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the effect operating unit is in the raised position. is there. Further, FIG. 10 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame opened from the main body frame and the main body frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 11 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame, and FIG. 12 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine as a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame. It is an exploded perspective view seen from the back by disassembling into.

The pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 for opening and closing the front surface of the outer frame 2, and a door frame 3. The main body frame 4 which is supported so as to be openable and closable and is attached to the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and the main body frame 4 which is detachably attached from the front side and is visible from the player side through the door frame 3. It includes a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball B (see FIG. 90) is hit.

The outer frame 2 is formed in a quadrangular frame whose front view shape extends vertically. The outer frame 2 connects the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other to the left and right and extend vertically, and the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20. The outer frame upper member 30 is attached to the outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, and the upper left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right surface of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 are provided.

The outer frame 2 is attached to the island equipment of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60 make up the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body of the main body frame 4. The hinge assembly 520 under the frame is rotatably supported on the same axis, and the main body frame 4 is attached so as to be openable and closable forward centering on the left side in the front view.

Further, in the door frame 3, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 to form a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. Is formed, and the sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 is phase-inverted and radiated forward, so that the player can hear a deeper bass sound.

The door frame 3 visibly closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is driven, stores the game ball B for driving into the game area 5a, and stores the stored game. It is provided with a handle 182 operated by a player to drive the ball B into the game area 5a. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

Further, the door frame 3 is provided with an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player separately from the handle 182, and the player operates the effect operation unit 301 when the player participation type effect is executed. The player can participate in the production, and the player can be entertained by operating the production operation unit 301 in addition to the game by the game ball B.

The main body frame 4 has a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear portion can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and which can support the outer circumference of the game board 5, and the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. The metal body frame reinforcement frame 530 that reinforces the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 and the main body frame base unit 500 for opening and closing the door frame 3 so as to be openable and closable. A ball launching device 540 for driving the game ball B into the game area 5a of the game board 5, a payout base unit 550 for receiving the game ball B supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a payout base unit 550. After the payout unit 560 for paying out the received game ball B to the player side, the board unit 620 having the power supply board 630 and the payout control board 633, and the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501. It includes a back cover 640 that covers the side, an outer frame 2 and a main body frame 4, and a locking unit 650 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

The main body frame 4 holds the game board 5 having the game area 5a in which the game is played by hitting the game ball B, and pays out the game ball B to the player side, or the game ball B used for the game. Is for discharging to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (on the island equipment side of the game hall). The main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is detachably housed inside from the front. Further, the main body frame 4 is attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island equipment of the game hall above and below the front end on the left side of the front side so as to be openable and closable, and the door frame 3 is closed so that the opened front side is closed. Can be installed so that it can be opened and closed.

The game board 5 includes a game area 5a in which a game ball B is played by a player's operation, a front component 1000 that divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially square outer shape in front view, and a front component 1000. A plate-shaped game panel 1100 attached to the rear side and partitioning the rear end of the game area 5a, a board holder 1200 attached to the lower part of the rear side of the game panel 1100, and a board holder 1200 attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 having the main control board 1310, the function display unit 1400 that displays the game status based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, and the center of the game area 5a in front view are arranged. A game display device 1600 capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, a peripheral control unit 1500 configured as a transparent board box arranged on the back side of the game panel 1100 and on the back side of the effect display device 1600, and a game. It includes a front unit 2000 attached to the front surface of the panel 1100 and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100. The back unit 3000 is provided with various effect units capable of performing a movable effect and a light emitting effect according to the game state.

In the game area 5a of the game board 5, a plurality of obstacle nails that are in contact with the game ball B and are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and a predetermined privilege for the player by accepting or passing the game ball B ( For example, a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, a gate portion 2003, a second starting opening 2004, a first big winning opening 2005 and a second big winning opening 2006, which give a predetermined number of game balls B). It has. Obstacle nails are planted in front of the game panel 1100. The general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate portion 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the first large winning opening 2005, and the second large winning opening 2006 are provided in the table unit 2000.

The game ball B can be driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by the player operating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. As a result, the game ball B is placed in the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate portion 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the first major winning opening 2005, the second major winning opening 2006, etc. in the game area 5a. It is possible to entertain the player with the driving operation of the handle 182 so as to be accepted or passed.

Further, the game board 5 causes the effect display device 1600 to display a predetermined effect image according to the game state that changes by hitting the game ball B into the game area 5a, or displays the front effect unit 2600 and the lower movable effect. The player can be entertained by performing a movable effect and a light emitting effect by the unit 3100, the upper rear movable effect unit 3200, the upper front movable effect unit 3300, and the like.

[2. Overall composition of the outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 to 18. FIG. 13 is a front view of the outer frame of the pachinko machine, FIG. 14 is a rear view of the outer frame, and FIG. 15 is a right side view of the outer frame. Further, FIG. 16 is a perspective view of the outer frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the outer frame viewed from the back. FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) in which a pachinko machine 1 is installed, such as a game hall. The outer frame 2 is formed in a quadrangular frame whose front view shape extends vertically.

As shown in the figure, the outer frame 2 includes an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated from each other to the left and right and extend vertically, and an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20. The outer frame upper member 30 connecting the upper ends, the outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, and the upper surface of the outer frame upper member 30. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 attached to the left end, and the outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 are provided. ing.

In the outer frame 2, when the main body frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 to form a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. At the same time, the sound output to the rear of the main body frame speaker 622 can be phase-inverted and radiated forward.

In the outer frame 2, the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 can detachably support the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4. The outer frame 2 coaxially and rotatably supports the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable forward centering on the left side in the front view.

[2-1. Outer frame left assembly and outer frame right assembly]
The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame left assembly and the outer frame right assembly of the outer frame as viewed from the front by disassembling them. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 extend vertically, and are arranged so as to be separated from each other on the left and right. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 coaxially and rotatably support the main body frame upper hinge member 510 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2. This is for attaching the main body frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed.

First, in the outer frame left assembly 10, the outer frame left member 11 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction and the upper left connecting member 12 attached to the upper end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 And a lower left connecting member 13 attached to the lower end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11.

The outer frame left member 11 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy mold material. The outer frame left member 11 has a recess 11a that is flatly recessed to the right in the rear portion of the left side surface divided into three equal parts in the front-rear direction, and a portion on the right side surface that is opposite to the recess 11a to the right. It includes a bulging portion 11b that bulges toward the direction and a hollow portion 11c that vertically penetrates the bulging portion 11b. The strength and rigidity of the outer frame left member 11 are increased by the recess 11a and the bulging portion 11b, and the weight is reduced by the cavity 11c.

Further, the outer frame left member 11 is formed with a plurality of grooves extending vertically on both the left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame left member 11 is formed in a symmetrical shape with the outer frame right member 21 of the outer frame right assembly 20, which will be described later.

The upper left connecting member 12 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper left connecting member 12 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 12a, a flat plate-shaped upper and horizontal fixing portion 12b extending upward from the middle in the front-rear direction on the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 12a, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of flat plate-shaped lower horizontal fixing portions 12c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b on the left side of 12a are provided. The upper left connecting member 12 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the upper left connecting member 12, the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c on the rear side is inserted into the cavity portion 11c of the outer frame left member 11, the horizontal fixing portion 12a is brought into contact with the upper end of the outer frame left member 11, and further, the front side. In a state where the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c on the rear side is in contact with the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11, a screw is screwed into the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11. , Attached to the outer frame left member 11. Further, in the upper left connecting member 12, the horizontal fixing portion 12a is brought into contact with the lower surface on the left end side of the outer frame upper member 30, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b is inserted into the notch 30a on the left side surface of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame upper member 30 by screwing a screw into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 12a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b.

The lower left connecting member 13 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower left connecting member 13 has a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 13a and a flat plate-shaped upper side extending upward from the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 13a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 13a. The fixed portion 13b, the flat plate-shaped lower lateral fixing portion 13c extending downward from the portion posterior to the horizontal fixing portion on the lower side of the upper lateral fixing portion 13b, and the upper lateral fixing portion 13b to the right from the rear side. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped contact portion 13d extending shortly to. The lower left connecting member 13 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the lower left connecting member 13, the rear surface of the contact portion 13d is brought into contact with the front surface of the bulging portion 11b of the outer frame left member 11, and the left surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b is in contact with the right surface of the outer frame left member 11. With the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 13a in contact with the lower end of the outer frame left member 11, a screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11 to remove the outer frame. It is attached to the frame left member 11. Further, in the lower left connecting member 13, the horizontal fixing portion 13a is brought into contact with the upper surface on the left end side of the outer frame lower member 41, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c is inserted into the cutout portion 41a on the left side surface of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing a screw into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 13a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c.

Next, the outer frame right assembly 20 has an outer frame right member 21 extending vertically with a constant width (depth) in the front-rear direction and an upper right connecting member attached to the upper end of the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. 22, the lower right connecting member 23 attached to the lower end of the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, the upper hook member 24 attached to the upper part of the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, and the outer frame right member 21. It includes a lower hook member 25 attached to the lower part of the left side surface.

The outer frame right member 21 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy mold material. The outer frame right member 21 has a recess 21a that is flatly recessed to the left in the rear portion of the right side surface divided into three equal parts in the front-rear direction, and a recess 21a on the left side surface that is opposite to the recess 21a to the left. It includes a bulging portion 21b that bulges toward the direction and a hollow portion 21c that vertically penetrates the bulging portion 21b. The strength and rigidity of the outer frame right member 21 are increased by the concave portion 21a and the bulging portion 21b, and the weight is reduced by the hollow portion 21c.

Further, the outer frame right member 21 is formed with a plurality of grooves extending vertically on both the left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the right side surface are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the left side surface are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame right member 21 is formed symmetrically with the outer frame left member 11 of the outer frame left assembly 10.

The upper right connecting member 22 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper right connecting member 22 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 22a, a flat plate-shaped upper and horizontal fixing portion 22b extending upward from the middle in the front-rear direction on the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 22a, and a horizontal fixing portion. A pair of flat plate-shaped lower horizontal fixing portions 22c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b on the right side of 22a are provided. The upper right connecting member 22 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the upper right connecting member 22, the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c on the rear side is inserted into the hollow portion 21c of the outer frame right member 21, the horizontal fixing portion 22a is brought into contact with the upper end of the outer frame right member 21, and further, the front side. In a state where the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c on the rear side is in contact with the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, a screw is screwed into the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21. , Attached to the outer frame right member 21. Further, in the upper right connecting member 22, the horizontal fixing portion 22a is brought into contact with the lower surface on the right end side of the outer frame upper member 30, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b is inserted into the notch 30a on the right side surface of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame upper member 30 by screwing a screw into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 22a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b.

The lower right connecting member 23 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (outer frame lower member 41). The lower right connecting member 23 has a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 23a and a flat plate-shaped upper portion extending upward from the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 23a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 23a. The horizontal fixing portion 23b, the flat plate-shaped lower horizontal fixing portion 23c extending downward from the portion posterior to the horizontal fixing portion on the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b, and the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b from the rear side to the left. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped contact portion 23d that extends shortly toward the direction. The lower right connecting member 23 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

In the lower right connecting member 23, the rear surface of the contact portion 23d is brought into contact with the front surface of the bulging portion 21b of the outer frame right member 21, and the right surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b is brought into contact with the left surface of the outer frame right member 21. By abutting and aligning the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 23a with the lower end of the outer frame right member 21, a screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b from the outside of the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21. It is attached to the outer frame right member 21. Further, in the lower right connecting member 23, the horizontal fixing portion 23a is brought into contact with the upper surface on the right end side of the outer frame lower member 41, and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c is inserted into the cutout portion 41a on the right side surface of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, it is attached to the outer frame lower member 41 by screwing a screw into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 23a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c.

The upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 are for hooking the outer frame hook 653 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4, which will be described later. The upper hook member 24 extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction, and extends to the left from the front side of the flat plate-shaped mounting portion 24a to be mounted on the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21 and the mounting portion 24a. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped hooking piece portion 24b on which the hook 653 for the outer frame on the upper side of the cage is hooked.

The lower hook member 25 extends vertically with a constant width in the front-rear direction, and has a flat plate-shaped mounting portion 25a attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21 and extending from the front side of the mounting portion 25a to the left. Insertion that allows the lower outer frame hook 653 to be inserted through the flat plate-shaped hook piece portion 25b on which the lower outer frame hook 653 is hooked and the hook piece portion 25b. It has a mouth 25c and.

[2-2. Outer frame upper member]
The outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame upper member 30 is for connecting the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated from each other to the left and right. The width of the outer frame upper member 30 in the front-rear direction is substantially the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, the thickness in the vertical direction is constant, and the width extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by. The outer frame upper member 30 is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is the same as the length in the left-right direction of the outer frame lower member 41 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 described later.

The outer frame upper member 30 is provided with a notch 30a that is recessed toward the center side in the left-right direction while penetrating vertically at the center in the front-rear direction on both the left and right side surfaces. The upper lateral fixing portion 12b of the upper left connecting member 12 and the upper lateral fixing portion 22b of the upper right connecting member 22 are inserted into the cutout portions 30a at both left and right ends, respectively.

Further, the outer frame upper member 30 includes a mounting step portion 30b whose upper surface and front surface are recessed from the general surface at the left end portion. A hinge assembly 50 on an outer frame, which will be described later, is attached to the attachment step portion 30b.

[2-3. Assembly under the outer frame]
The outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is an exploded perspective view of the lower assembly of the outer frame as viewed from the front by disassembling the assembly. The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated to the left and right, and closes the lower side of the pachinko machine 1 below the door frame 3. It is for decoration.

The outer frame lower assembly 40 includes an outer frame lower member 41 that connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated to the left and right and extends to the left and right, and the outer frame lower assembly 40. A box-shaped front curtain plate member 42 that is arranged in front of the member 41 and extends to the left and right along the lower member 41 of the outer frame and is open at the rear, and is attached to the rear side of the front curtain plate member 42. A box-shaped rear curtain plate member 43 that is attached to the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 and has an open front, and a ball bite prevention formed at the left end on the upper surface of the rear curtain plate member 43. It includes a mechanism 44 and.

The width of the outer frame lower member 41 in the front-rear direction is substantially the same as the width in the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, the thickness in the vertical direction is constant, and the width extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by. The outer frame lower member 41 is formed so that the length in the left-right direction is the same as the length in the left-right direction of the outer frame upper member 30.

The outer frame lower member 41 includes notches 41a that are recessed toward the center side in the left-right direction in a state of penetrating vertically at the center in the front-rear direction on both the left and right side surfaces. The lower lateral fixing portion 13c of the lower left connecting member 13 and the lower lateral fixing portion 23c of the lower right connecting member 23 are respectively inserted into the cutout portions 41a at both left and right ends. As a result, the lower ends of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21 can be connected to each other.

Further, the outer frame lower member 41 is recessed from the upper surface, and includes a recess 41b into which the lower portion of the curtain plate rear member 43 is inserted. The recess 41b extends to the left and right, and is pulled out from a position closer to the rear in the center in the front-rear direction toward the front end side. The recess 41b makes the volume of the curtain plate internal space 40a formed by the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43 as large as possible.

The curtain plate front member 42 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped shape in which the length in the left-right direction extends to the same length as the outer frame lower member 41 and the depth in the front-rear direction is short with respect to the height. The entire rear side is open. The curtain plate front member 42 is closed on the open rear side by the curtain plate rear member 43, so that the curtain plate front member 42 becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 in cooperation with the curtain plate rear member 43. The space 40a is formed. The curtain plate front member 42 includes an elongated hole-shaped opening 42a that penetrates the front and rear and extends to the left and right on the front surface near the right end.

The curtain plate rear member 43 has a length in the left-right direction slightly shorter than that of the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a box shape with an open front. By attaching the curtain plate front member 42 to the front surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, the curtain plate front member 42 cooperates with the curtain plate front member 42 to form a curtain plate internal space 40a that becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622. The curtain plate rear member 43 has a tubular connecting cylinder portion 43a that extends left and right and projects upward at the central portion in the left-right direction on the upper surface and communicates with the curtain plate internal space 40a. The upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a is inclined so as to be positioned upward from the front end side, which coincides with the general upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, toward the rear. In the present embodiment, the upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees.

The length of the connecting cylinder portion 43a in the left-right direction is formed to be about 1/3 of the length of the entire curtain plate rear member 43, and the depth in the front-rear direction is greater than the depth of the entire curtain plate rear member 43. Is also formed slightly shorter. A plurality of ribs 43b connecting the front end side and the rear end side are provided in the connecting cylinder portion 43a. When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 in the speaker unit 620a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 is connected to the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43a to connect the speaker unit. It communicates with the internal space of the 620a and forms the enclosure 624.

In the ball biting prevention mechanism 44, the game ball B stays at the portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 at the left end on the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, so that the game ball B is between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. Is to prevent being pinched.

The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is formed at the left end on the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43, and is a mounting portion 44a formed flat so that the hinge member 60 under the outer frame, which will be described later, is highlighted, and a mounting portion. The first discharge port 44b that opens upward at the left end of 44a and the second discharge port 44c that opens upward to the right of the first discharge port 44b in the mounting portion 44a are mounted. A vertical wall portion 44d extending upward from the rear side and the right side of the placement portion 44a, and an upper end protrusion protruding forward from the upper end of the vertical wall portion 44d and being inclined so that the upper surface is positioned upward as the upper surface is directed backward. A part 44e and a part 44e are provided.

The first discharge port 44b is formed at a position corresponding to the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60, which will be described later. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c are formed in a size that allows the game ball B to pass through. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c do not communicate with the curtain plate internal space 40a and are open to the rear surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. Therefore, the game ball B that has entered the first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43.

The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is a case where an illegal tool such as a piano wire is inserted through the gap between the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 described later. The standing wall portion 44d rising from the rear end of the mounting portion 44a can prevent an unauthorized tool from entering. Even if the tip of an illegal tool abuts on the standing wall portion 44d and bends upward, it abuts on the upper end protruding portion 44e provided at the upper end of the standing wall portion 44d and further invades. Can be blocked. Therefore, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts from being performed through the portion of the hinge member 60 under the outer frame.

By the way, when the standing wall portion 44d is provided at the rear end of the mounting portion 44a, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B that has fallen on the mounting portion 44a for some reason is the standing wall portion. Since the movement of the outer frame 2 to the rear is prevented by the 44d, the game ball B is likely to stay on the mounting portion 44a. If the game ball B stays on the mounting portion 44a, the game ball B is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. This causes a problem that the main body frame 4 cannot be closed.

On the other hand, in the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 of the present embodiment, the game ball B that has fallen on the outer frame lower hinge member 60 or the mounting portion 44a is first referred to as the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The game ball B can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43 (behind the outer frame 2) through the discharge port 44b or the second discharge port 44c, and is between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being pinched.

The outer frame lower assembly 40 closes a pair of guide members 45 arranged apart from each other on the upper surfaces of the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43, and the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 from the rear side. A flat plate-shaped grill member 46 and a port member 47 having two cylinders extending back and forth, which are attached to the inside of the curtain plate front member 42 so as to close the opening 42a with the grill member 46 sandwiched between them. A frame-shaped seal member 48 arranged at the upper end of the connecting cylinder portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43 is provided.

The pair of guide members 45 are such that the lower end of the door frame 3 comes into contact with the outer frame 2 when the main body frame 4 is closed. The guide member 45 is made of a low friction material having low frictional resistance, and makes the lower end of the main body frame 4 slippery to facilitate opening and closing.

The grill member 46 is formed of a punching metal having innumerable small holes. The port member 47 communicates the curtain plate internal space 40a (enclosure 624) with the front of the outer frame 2 via the grill member 46 by two cylinders. The port member 47 has two cylinders formed with a predetermined inner diameter and a predetermined length, and resonates and amplifies the bass emitted from the main body frame speaker 622 to the rear (inside the enclosure 624) by the principle of Helmholtz resonance. Therefore, rich bass can be radiated to the front (player side) of the outer frame 2. That is, in the present embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is a bass reflex type, and the player can hear the deep bass.

The seal member 48 is sandwiched and compressed between the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43a and the lower end of the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 in the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2. This is to prevent the sound in the speaker enclosure from leaking from between the connection cylinder portion 43a and the connection portion 621c.

[2-4. Hinge assembly on outer frame]
The hinge assembly 50 on the outer frame of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 21 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame 2 disassembled and viewed from the front upper side, and FIG. 21 (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from the front lower surface. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30, and is for attaching the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so that the hinge can be rotated. Is. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51 attached to the upper end of the recess 11a of the outer frame left member 11 and the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and to the outer frame upper hinge member 51. The lock member 52 is provided, and a mounting screw 53 for attaching the lock member 52 to the hinge member 51 on the outer frame is provided.

The outer frame upper hinge member 51 has an upper fixing portion 51a which is horizontally extended and is attached to the upper surface of the mounting step portion 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and extends forward from the front side of the upper fixing portion 51a. A flat plate-shaped front extending portion 51b, a bearing groove 51c extending from the middle of the right side of the front extending portion 51b to the left and right center of the front extending portion 51b and penetrating vertically, and an upper fixing portion. The flat plate-shaped horizontal fixing portion 51d extending downward from the left side of the 51a and the end edge extending downward from the left side of the front extending portion 51b to the portion where the bearing groove 51c is opened around the front side. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped edge wall portion 51e that is continuous with the cage horizontal fixing portion 51d. The hinge member 51 on the outer frame is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 can rotatably support the main body frame upper hinge pin 512, which will be described later, of the main body frame upper hinge member 510 in the bearing groove 51c.

The lock member 52 includes a strip-shaped lock body 52a extending back and forth, an operation piece 52b protruding to the right from the rear end of the lock body 52a, and after extending to the left from the rear end of the lock body 52a. It is provided with an elastically deformable rod-shaped elastic portion 52c extending diagonally to the left front and a mounting hole 52d penetrating vertically near the rear end of the lock body 52a. The lock member 52 is made of synthetic resin. The lock member 52 is rotatably attached to a portion rearward of the bearing groove 51c on the lower surface of the front extending portion 51b of the hinge member 51 on the outer frame by the attachment screw 53.

When the lock member 52 is attached to the hinge member 51 on the outer frame, the lock body 52a can block the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, and the right surface near the front end is the end of the hinge member 51 on the outer frame. It extends forward so that it can come into contact with a portion of the edge wall portion 51e that extends to the opening of the bearing groove 51c. Further, the tip of the elastic portion 52c extending to the left from the rear end of the lock body 52a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the end edge wall portion 51e of the hinge member 51 on the outer frame. The lock member 52 is urged by the urging force of the elastic portion 52c in a direction in which the front end rotates to the left around the mounting hole 52d. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface of the lock member 52 near the front end of the lock body 52a is in contact with the edge wall portion 51e. In this state, a space is formed in the bearing groove 51c on the front side of the lock main body 52a so that the hinge pin 512 on the main body frame of the hinge member 510 on the main body frame can be accommodated.

By operating the operation piece 52b, the lock member 52 can rotate the lock body 52a against the urging force of the elastic portion 52c. Then, by operating the operation piece 52b, the lock body 52a is rotated in the direction in which the front end thereof moves to the left, so that the lock body 52a can be retracted from the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, and the bearing groove 51c can be retracted. Can be in a state of being fully passed. As a result, the hinge pin 512 on the main body frame can be inserted into the bearing groove 51c, and the hinge pin 512 on the main body frame can be removed from the bearing groove 51c.

[2-5. Hinge member under the outer frame]
The hinge member 60 below the outer frame of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped horizontal portion 60a and a flat plate-shaped rising portion 60b rising upward from a portion rearward of the center in the front-rear direction on the left side of the horizontal portion 60a. A hinge pin 60c under the outer frame that protrudes upward from the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 60a, and a discharge hole 60d that penetrates the horizontal portion 60a up and down and allows only one game ball B to pass through. ing. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding.

The horizontal portion 60a of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed in a trapezoidal shape with the left side as the base in a plan view. The lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame has a columnar shape, and is formed in a truncated cone shape in which the upper end is narrowed above the center in the vertical direction. The lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame is attached to a position on the left side near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a. The discharge hole 60d is formed in the horizontal portion 60a so as to be in contact with the central portion of the rising portion 60b in the front-rear direction and extend from the left side of the horizontal portion 60a to the right in an inverted U shape. The discharge hole 60d is formed to have substantially the same size as the first discharge port 44b of the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40.

In the state where the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is assembled on the outer frame 2, the rear portion of the horizontal portion 60a is mounted on the mounting portion 44a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40, and a screw (not shown) is provided. It is fixed to the rear member 43 of the curtain plate. Further, the rising portion 60b is attached to a portion on the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 on the front side of the bulging portion 11b by a screw (not shown). The outer frame lower hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c into the outer frame lower hinge hole 521a in the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4. Then, the main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable.

Further, in the state where the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge hole 60d coincides with the first discharge port 44b of the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40. As a result, the game ball B on the horizontal portion 60a can be dropped (discharged) to the rear of the outer frame 2 through the discharge hole 60d and the first discharge port 44b. More specifically, when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game ball B that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 is moved between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame as the main body frame 4 is closed. Since the distance from 4 is gradually narrowed, the ball is rolled to the rear side where the interval is wide, and the ball can be discharged from the discharge hole 60d. At this time, since the discharge hole 60d is formed at a position substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in the state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. By discharging the game ball B that has fallen between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the discharge hole 60d, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball B from rolling to the rear side of the main body frame 4, and the outer frame can be easily prevented from rolling. The game ball B can be made difficult to stay at the portion of the lower hinge member 60.

[3. Overall configuration of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 22 to 30. 22 is a front view of the door frame in the pachinko machine, FIG. 23 is a rear view of the door frame, FIG. 24 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 25 is a right side view of the door frame. FIG. 26 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 28 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the back. FIG. 29 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear.

The door frame 3 has substantially the same size as the inside of the outer frame 2 and is formed in a quadrangle extending vertically in front view, and the inside of the outer frame 2 can be opened and closed from the front side via the main body frame 4. Has been done. The door frame 3 visibly closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game ball B is driven, stores the game ball B for driving into the game area 5a, and stores the stored game. It is provided with a handle 182 operated by a player to drive the ball B into the game area 5a. Further, the door frame 3 decorates the entire front surface of the pachinko machine 1.

The door frame 3 is a square and frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 whose outer shape extends vertically when viewed from the front, and a game board 5 which is detachably attached to the door frame base unit 100 and is attached to the main body frame 4. A glass unit 160 that visibly closes the game area 5a from the front, a security cover 170 that is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear side, and a door frame base unit 100. The handle unit 180 attached to the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame, the dish unit 200 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100, and the upper side of the dish unit 200 attached to the front left portion of the door frame base unit 100. The door frame left side unit 400, the door frame right side unit 410 attached to the front right part of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the dish unit, the door frame left side unit 400, and the door frame right side unit 410. The door frame top unit 450, which is attached to the upper part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the door frame, is provided.

The door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame base 101 having a door window 101a which is formed in a square shape (rectangular shape) whose outer shape extends vertically and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a front right side of the door frame base 101. The handle mounting member 102 mounted below, the speaker duct 103 mounted in the lower right corner of the rear view on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and the speaker duct 103 mounted in the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101 near the right end of the rear view. The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub-relay board 105 attached to the left side of the door frame main relay board 104, and the door frame sub-relay board 105 attached to the left side of the rear view. Covers the rear relay board 106 after the handle, the door frame relay board cover 107 that covers the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and the door frame rear relay board 106 from the rear side. It includes a relay board cover 108 after the handle and a cable cover 109 that covers the wiring cable.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a hinge assembly 120 on the door frame attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a door. The hinge member 125 under the frame, the cylinder lock 130 for opening and closing attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and the ball feeding unit 140 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and above the relay board 106 after the handle. And a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the rear view at the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the door frame base 101 and impart rigidity. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 are for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable. The cylinder lock 130 is used in cooperation with the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4 to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is for supplying the game balls B in the upper plate 201 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball), which is launched by the ball launcher 540 and does not reach the game area 5a of the game board 5, to the lower plate 202 and is paid out from the payout device 580. This is for guiding the game ball B to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202.

The glass unit 160 has a transparent glass plate 162 and closes the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. The security cover 170 is attached to the door frame base 101 so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 160 from the rear. The handle unit 180 includes a handle 182 that can be rotated by the player, and by operating the handle 182, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is moved into the game area 5a of the game board 5 by the ball launcher 540. It is for playing a game of driving into.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. FIG. 31 (a) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 31 (b) is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. is there.

The door frame base unit 100 is attached so that the left side of the front view can be hinged with respect to the main body frame 4, and the front surface of the main body frame 4 is closed so as to be openable and closable. The game area is visible from the front. The door frame base unit 100 includes a quadrangular and flat door frame base 101 whose outer shape extends vertically, a handle mounting member 102 mounted on the lower right front of the door frame base 101 for mounting the handle unit 180, and the like. It is provided with a speaker duct 103 attached to the lower right corner of the rear view on the rear side of the door frame base 101.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame main relay board 104 attached near the right end of the rear view at the lower rear side of the door frame base 101, and a door frame main relay at the lower rear side of the door frame base 101. The door frame sub-relay board 105 attached to the left side of the board 104 in the rear view, and the rear handle relay board attached to the left side of the door frame sub-relay board 105 in the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101. The door frame relay board cover 107, which is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers a part of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and the door frame base 101. The rear relay board cover 108, which is attached to the rear side and covers the rear relay board 106 from the rear side, and the cable cover 109, which is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covers the wiring cable, are attached. I have.

Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcing unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a hinge assembly 120 on the door frame attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and a door. The hinge member 125 under the frame, the cylinder lock 130 for opening and closing attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and the ball feeding unit 140 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and above the relay board 106 after the handle. And a foul cover unit 150 attached to the right side of the rear view at the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101.

The door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 180 in the lower front corner, a dish unit 200 in the lower front surface of the door window 101a, a door frame left side unit 400 in the left outer front surface of the door window 101a, and a door window 101a. The door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the right outer front surface, and the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper outer front surface of the door window 101a.

Further, a glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the door window 101a from the rear, and a transparent security cover 170 is attached so as to cover the lower portion of the glass unit 160 from the rear. ..

[3-1-1. Door frame base]
The door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame base 101 is formed in a quadrangle (rectangle) whose outer shape in front view extends vertically. The door frame base 101 penetrates back and forth, and includes a door window 101a formed in a substantially quadrangular shape having an inner peripheral shape extending vertically in a front view. In the door window 101a, the upper side and the left and right sides forming the inner circumference are close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 101, respectively, and the lower side forming the inner circumference is up and down from the lower end of the door frame base 101. It is located at a height of about 1/3 in the direction. As described above, the door frame base 101 is entirely formed in a frame shape by the door windows 101a penetrating the front and rear. The door frame base 101 is integrally molded with a synthetic resin.

The door frame base 101 is formed in the lower right corner of the front view and is inclined so that the left end side slightly protrudes forward from the right end side, the handle mounting seat surface 101b, the handle mounting seat surface 101b, and the door window 101a. The insertion recess 101c, in which the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is inserted, and the insertion recess 101c, which are recessed from the rear surface to the front near the right end of the front view, penetrate the front and rear of the cylinder lock 130. The cylinder insertion hole 101d through which the cylinder body 131 is inserted, the cylinder insertion hole 101d, and the handle mounting seat surface 101b penetrate the front and rear on the left side of the front view, and the entry entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 are forward. It is equipped with a ball feeding opening 101e for facing the cylinder.

Further, the door frame base 101 is to the left of the center in the left-right direction and penetrates back and forth at substantially the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 101b, so that the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150 faces forward. The passage port 101f, the upper plate ball passage port 101g that penetrates the front and rear so as to be adjacent to the lower side of the door window 101a near the left end of the front view and faces the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 to the front, and the door. It is provided with a glass unit mounting portion 101h that is recessed from the rear surface to the front along the inner circumference of the window 101a and into which the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted.

Further, the door frame base 101 is formed in the lower left corner of the front view (below the upper plate ball passage port 101 g), and is provided with a plurality of vertically long slits 101i penetrating the front and rear. A speaker duct 103 is attached to the rear side of the plurality of slits 101i. Further, in the plurality of slits 101i, in the state where the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the speaker port 211b of the dish unit base 211 in the dish unit 200 is located in front, and the main body frame in the speaker unit 620a of the main body frame 4 is located in the rear. The speaker 622 is located, and the sound from the main body frame speaker 622 can be radiated forward.

Further, the door frame base 101 is provided with a through hole 101j penetrating back and forth below the door window 101a and above the handle mounting seat surface 101b. A wiring cable (not shown) connecting the door frame base unit 100 side and the dish unit 200 side is inserted through the through hole 101j, and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110 described later is penetrated. It is formed so as to coincide with the portion 114b.

[3-1-2. Handle mounting member]
The handle mounting member 102 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The handle mounting member 102 is for mounting the handle unit on the front surface of the door frame base 101, and is mounted on the handle mounting seat surface 101b on the front surface of the door frame base 101.

The handle mounting member 102 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 102a extending in the front-rear direction, an annular flange portion 102b extending outward in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the tubular portion 102a from the rear end of the tubular portion 102a, and a cylinder. With a plurality of (three in this example) ridges 102c that protrude into the portion 102a and extend over the entire length of the tubular portion 102a in the axial direction and are arranged at unequal intervals in the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 102a. The outer peripheral surface of the tubular portion 102a and the front surface of the flange portion 102b are connected to each other, and a plurality of reinforcing ribs 102d arranged in the circumferential direction of the tubular portion 102a are provided.

The handle mounting member 102 is mounted on the handle mounting seat surface 101b with screws in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 102b is in contact with the front surface of the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101.

The inner diameter of the tubular portion 102a is formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 in the handle unit 180. One of the three ridges 102c is provided on the upper portion of the tubular portion 102a, and the other two are provided on the lower portion of the tubular portion 102a. These three ridges 102c are formed at positions corresponding to the three groove portions 181c in the handle base 181. Therefore, the handle mounting member 102 can insert the base portion 181a of the handle base 181 into the tubular portion 102a only when the three ridges 102c and the three groove portions 181c of the handle base 181 are aligned with each other. The rotation position of the handle base 181 (handle unit 180) can be regulated with respect to the door frame base 101.

Since the axis of the tubular portion 102a extends perpendicularly to the rear surface of the flange portion 102b, the handle mounting member 102 can be attached to the inclined handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101. The axis of the tubular portion 102a is tilted so as to extend to the front right, and the handle unit 180 can be attached to the door frame base 101 in the same tilted state.

[3-1-3. Speaker duct]
The speaker duct 103 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The speaker duct 103 is formed in a tubular shape, and is attached to a portion where a plurality of slits 101i are formed on the rear side of the door frame base 101. In the speaker duct 103, when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled, the rear end of the tubular portion is located in front of the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4. As a result, the sound (sound) radiated (output) from the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4 can be guided forward without being diffused, and the plurality of slits 101i of the door frame base 101 and the dish unit 200 can be guided. Through the speaker port 211b in the dish unit base 211, the pachinko machine 1 can be satisfactorily guided to the front (player side).

Further, the speaker duct 103 is provided with a cable holder 103a for holding the connection cable 503 on the lower rear surface of the tubular portion. The cable holder 103a is arranged on the left side of the door frame relay board cover 107 when viewed from the front, and the connection cable 503 connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 is connected to the door frame 3. It is held so as to extend to the left end side.

[3-1-4. Door frame main relay board, door frame sub relay board, rear relay board after handle]
The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub-relay board 105, and the rear-handle relay board 106 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 32 and 33. The door frame main relay board 104 is formed in a quadrangle whose outer shape extends vertically, and is attached to the lower right corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101 when viewed from the rear. The door frame main relay board 104 is for relaying the connection between the relay board 106 after the handle and the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4, and the connection cable 503 extending from the main body frame 4 (FIG. 83). And a part of (see FIG. 84) are connected.

The door frame sub-relay board 105 is formed in an inverted L shape in which the quadrangles extending to the left and right are combined on the right side of the front view of the upper part of the quadrangles extending vertically, and the door frame is formed in an inverted L shape. It is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to be adjacent to the left side of the frame main relay board 104 when viewed from the rear. The door frame sub-relay board 105 is a handle decorative board 184 of the handle unit 180, a dish unit relay board 214 of the dish unit 200, a door frame left side decorative board 402 of the door frame left side unit 400, and a side of the door frame right side unit 410. It is for relaying the connection between the decorative substrate 413 of the window decoration, the decorative substrate 418 on the right side of the door frame, the door frame top relay substrate 467 of the door frame top unit 450, and the interface substrate 635 of the main body frame 4. The rest of the connection cable 503 extending from the main body frame 4 is connected.

The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 are attached to the door frame base 101 so that the connection terminals project rearward. In the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105, when the door frame base unit 100 is assembled, the door frame main relay board 104 and the parts extending vertically of the door frame sub-relay board 105 are doors. The rear side is covered by the frame relay board cover 107, and the remaining portion of the door frame sub-relay board 105 is covered by the foul cover unit 150.

The rear handle relay board 106 is formed in a quadrangle whose outer shape extends to the left and right, and is mounted on the rear side of the handle mounting seat surface 101b below the ball feeding opening 101e on the rear side of the door frame base 101. The rear-handle relay board 106 is connected to the door frame main relay board 104, the handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180, the handle touch sensor 192, the single-shot button operation sensor 194, and the ball feed solenoid 145 of the ball feed unit 140. Is for relaying. The rear side of the rear-handle relay board 106 is covered with the rear-handle relay board cover 108 in a state where the door frame base unit 100 is assembled.

[3-1-5. Door frame relay board cover / rear relay board cover / cable cover]
The door frame relay board cover 107, the rear relay board cover 108 after the handle, and the cable cover 109 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. By attaching the door frame relay board cover 107 to the rear side of the door frame base 101, it is behind a part of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board (a portion extending vertically in an inverted L shape). It covers the side. The door frame relay board cover 107 is formed in a box shape with the front side and the left side when viewed from the front open. In the state of being assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the connection terminals of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 covering the rear side are exposed inside the door frame relay board cover 107 and are open. The connection cable 503 can be inserted into the inside from the left side and connected to those terminals.

The rear-handle relay board cover 108 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to cover the rear side of the rear-handle relay board 106. The cable cover 109 is attached to the rear side of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and provides a wiring cable (not shown) that connects the door frame main relay board 104 and the ball rental operation unit 220 of the dish unit 200. It is for covering. The cable cover 109 is formed in a box shape extending to the left and right, and openings for passing wiring cables are formed in the vicinity of the left end of the front surface and in the center of the lower surface in the left-right direction.

[3-1-6. Door frame reinforcement unit]
The door frame reinforcing unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the flat plate-shaped door frame base 101 and impart rigidity to the door frame base unit 100. The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is provided on the left and right sides connecting the left and right reinforcing frames 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112, which are arranged apart from each other on the left and right, and the upper ends of the left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112. The extended upper reinforcing frame 113, the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 having the left end side attached at a position upward from the lower end of the left reinforcing frame 111 and extending to the right to the vicinity of the right reinforcing frame 112, and the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114. A cylinder mounting frame 115 connecting the right reinforcing frame 112 and a plurality of mounted cylinder mounting frames 115 vertically separated from each other on the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112, and a hook 652 for the door frame of the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4 is hooked. The hook member 116 is provided.

The left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 have a constant width in the left-right direction, and extend vertically at substantially the same length as the vertical height of the door frame base 101. The right reinforcing frame 112 is formed with a plurality of insertion holes that are separated in the vertical direction and penetrate in the front-rear direction. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the tip of the door frame hook 652 of the locking unit 650 is inserted into these insertion holes. The upper reinforcing frame 113 has a constant width in the vertical direction, and extends to the left and right with substantially the same length as the left and right width of the door frame base 101.

The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 extends horizontally in the vertical direction with a width wider than the vertical width of the upper reinforcing frame 113. The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 has a notch 114a that is squarely cut downward from the upper end near the left end, and a penetrating portion 114b that penetrates back and forth near the right end. The cutout portion 114a is formed at a position corresponding to the upper plate ball passage port 101g of the door frame base 101, and the penetrating portion 114b is formed at a position corresponding to the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101.

The cylinder mounting frame 115 is arranged so as to be separated from each other on the left and right sides, and has a pair of rear piece portions that are formed in a rectangular flat plate shape that extends vertically when viewed from the front, and a pair of rear piece portions that face each other. It includes a pair of side pieces extending in a flat plate shape from the side to the front, and a flat plate-shaped front piece portion connecting the front end sides of the pair of front extending portions. The cylinder mounting frame 115 is formed in a convex shape in which the shape in a plan view protrudes forward. The left rear piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115 is attached to the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, and the right rear piece is attached to the right reinforcing frame 112. A cylinder lock 130 is attached to the front piece of the cylinder attachment frame 115.

The hook member 116 is attached to the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 at a portion of an insertion hole penetrating the front and rear. The hook 652 for the door frame of the locking unit 650 is hooked on these hook members 116.

The left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, the upper reinforcing frame 113, the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, the cylinder mounting frame 115, and the hooking member 116 constituting the door frame reinforcing unit 110 are punched metal plates by press molding. It is formed by bending. These are assembled by rivets.

In the door frame reinforcing unit 110, the left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, and the upper reinforcing frame 113 are assembled along the left side, the right side, and the upper side of the door frame base 101, and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 is assembled. , It is assembled so as to be located below the door window 101a of the door frame base 101.

The door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 by a plurality of screws (not shown). In the state where the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the door frame base 101, the cutout portion 114a and the penetrating portion 114b of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 coincide with the upper plate ball passage port 101g and the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101. The cylinder mounting frame 115 is inserted into the insertion recess 101c of the door frame base 101.

[3-1-7. Door frame hinge assembly]
The hinge assembly 120 on the door frame of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is attached to the front upper left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the door frame lower hinge member 125 so that the hinge can be rotated. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 includes a hinge bracket 121 attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110, a door frame upper hinge pin 122 attached to the hinge bracket 121 so as to be movable in the vertical direction, and a flange attached to the door frame upper hinge pin 122. It includes a member 123 and a lock spring 124 that urges the hinge pin 122 on the door frame to move upward.

The hinge bracket 121 includes a flat plate-shaped mounting piece 121a having a quadrangular front view, and a flat plate-shaped protruding piece 121b extending forward from the upper and lower sides of the mounting piece 121a. In the hinge bracket 121, the mounting piece 121a is mounted on the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The hinge bracket 121 is formed by bending a metal plate.

The hinge pin 122 on the door frame is a columnar metal rod bent into an L shape. When the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is assembled to the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, a portion extending vertically penetrates from below near the front end of a pair of projecting pieces 121b in the hinge bracket 121, and the upper end is on the upper side. A portion extending upward from the protruding piece 121b and extending horizontally is in contact with the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 121b. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge main body 511 in the main body frame upper hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4.

The collar member 123 is an E-ring, and is attached to a portion of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame between the pair of projecting pieces 121b. The lock spring 124 is formed in a coil shape, and is placed around a portion extending vertically on the hinge pin 122 on the door frame between the flange member 123 and the lower protruding piece 121b of the hinge bracket 121. The lock spring 124 urges the hinge pin 122 on the door frame upward via the collar member 123.

In the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is in a state of being urged upward by the lock spring 124, and the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is a lower protruding piece. Further upward movement is restricted by abutting on the lower surface of 121b. In this state, the upper end of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame protrudes a predetermined amount above the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b.

When the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is moved downward against the urging force of the lock spring 124, the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 moves the door frame upper hinge pin 122 as a whole. The upper end of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame can be immersed below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b. Therefore, in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 may be inserted from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510, or may be pulled out downward. it can. As a result, the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main body frame upper hinge member 510, so that the upper left end of the door frame 3 in front view is hinged with respect to the main body frame 4. It can be supported as much as possible.

Further, in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, a portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 extending vertically is located coaxially with the door frame lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 described later. As a result, the door frame 3 can be hinged with respect to the main body frame 4 by the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126.

[3-1-8. Hinge member under the door frame]
The hinge member 125 under the door frame of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the front left lower corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 so that the hinge can be rotated.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the door frame reinforcing unit 110 and has a quadrangular front view flat plate-shaped mounting piece 125a, a flat plate-shaped projecting piece 125b extending forward from the lower side of the mounting piece 125a, and a projecting piece. The door frame lower hinge pin 126 (see FIG. 22 and the like) projecting downward from the lower surface near the front end of 125b is provided.

The mounting piece 125a and the protruding piece 125b of the hinge member 125 under the door frame are formed by bending a metal plate. The hinge pin 126 under the door frame is a columnar metal rod having a tapered chamfer on the outer periphery of the lower end portion. When the door frame lower hinge pin 126 is assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the hinge pin 126 is located on the protruding piece 125b so as to be coaxial with the portion extending vertically of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120. It is installed.

The door frame lower hinge member 125 supports the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 so as to be rotatable by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 126 into the door frame hinge hole of the main body frame side lower hinge member. Can be done.

[3-1-9. Cylinder lock]
The cylinder lock 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 31 to 33. The cylinder lock 130 is attached to the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and cooperates with the locking unit 650 described later to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is used for opening and closing locks. The cylinder lock 130 is a regular cylinder lock 130 that is attached to the rear side of a cylindrical cylinder body 131 extending forward and backward, a keyhole 132 formed on the front end surface of the cylinder body 131, and a keyhole 132 that is inserted into the keyhole 132. It includes a rotation transmission member 133 that rotates with the rotation of the key.

The cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 penetrates the front piece portion of the cylinder mounting frame 115 from the rear, and the rear end is attached to the front piece portion. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear (specifically, a conical cylinder whose diameter increases toward the rear), and faces forward from the rear end to positions facing each other across the central axis. It has a pair of notches that are notched. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed so that the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from the rear, and the rotation is rotated by inserting the pair of protrusions of the transmission cylinder 654 into the pair of notches. The rotation of the transmission member 133 (the key inserted in the keyhole 132) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder 654 to rotate.

When the cylinder lock 130 is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end of the cylinder body 131 is in a state of substantially coincident with the front end of the cylinder insertion port 252h of the dish unit main body 252 in the dish unit 200 (see FIG. 22 and the like).

[3-1-10. Ball feeding unit]
The ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 34 and 35. FIG. 34 (a) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 34 (b) is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 35 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 35 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit after removing the rear case and the fraud prevention member. is there. The ball feeding unit 140 can supply the game balls B supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4, and the game stored in the upper plate 201. The ball B can be pulled out to the lower plate 202 by operating the upper plate ball removal button 222.

The ball feeding unit 140 has an entrance 141a through which the game ball B is supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a ball outlet 141b that opens below the entrance 141a. A box-shaped front cover 141 with an open front cover and a box-shaped front cover with the rear end of the front cover 141 closed and the front open, and a game ball entered from the entrance 141a of the front cover 141 penetrating in the front-rear direction. The front cover is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the rear cover 142 having a ball hitting supply port 142a for supplying B to the ball launcher 540, the rear cover 142, and the front cover 141. A ball pulling member 143 having a partition portion 143a for partitioning between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b on the rear side of 141, and a game ball B on the partition portion 143a of the ball pulling member 143 are covered one by one. The ball feeding member 144, which is rotatably supported around the axis extending in the vertical direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and the ball feeding member 144 are rotated. It is provided with a ball feeding solenoid 145.

As shown in the figure, in the ball feeding unit 140, the ball feeding member 144 is arranged on the right side of the entrance 141a in the front view, and the ball feeding member 143 is ball feeding on the left side of the ball feeding member 144. Ball feeding solenoids 145 are arranged on the right side of the feeding member 144, respectively.

The front cover 141 of the ball feeding unit 140 is provided with an arc-shaped slit 141c formed concentrically with respect to the rotation center of the ball pulling member 143 on the left side of the ball pulling port 141b when viewed from the front. From 141c, the operating rod 143c of the ball pulling member 143, which will be described later, extends forward. Further, the front cover 141 extends upward from the upper edge of the entrance 141a, and when the door frame 3 is assembled, the ball feeding guide path 241b of the rear base 241 in the upper plate ball removing unit 240 The portion of the ball-extracting guide path 241c that is open to the rear on the upstream end side is closed from the rear side.

The ball pulling member 143 has a partition portion 143a and a partition portion 143a whose upper surface is lowered toward the ball feeding member 144 as a partition between the entrance entrance 141a and the ball ejection port 141b below the entrance 141a. Around the axis that extends downward from the end opposite to the ball feeding member 144 and bends in a dogleg shape from the vicinity of the middle in the vertical direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 141b, and the lower end extends in the front-rear direction. A rotating paddle portion 143b that is rotatably supported, a rod-shaped operating rod 143c that protrudes forward from the upper end of the rotating rod portion 143b, and a rotating rod portion 143b that is below the operating rod 143c. It is provided with a weight portion 143d projecting from the side surface to the side opposite to the partition portion 143a. The working paddle 143c of the ball pulling member 143 is formed so as to project forward through the arcuate slit 141c formed in the front cover 141 (see FIG. 34 (a)). The operation paddle 143c is the upper end of the operation transmission portion 242b of the upper plate ball removal slider 242 that moves downward by the pressing operation of the upper plate ball removal button 222 of the plate unit 200 through the ball feeding opening 101e of the door frame base 101. Contact with the upper surface).

The ball feeding member 144 is after the blocking portion 144a and the blocking portion 144a having a fan-shaped plan view centered on the rotation axis extending in the vertical direction toward the partition portion 143a of the entrance / exit 141a and the ball pulling member 143. It is provided with a ball holding portion 144b recessed in an arc shape from the end toward the center of rotation axis, and a rod-shaped paddle portion 144c extending downward from the rear end of the ball holding portion 144b. The blocking portion 144a and the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 are formed adjacent to each other within an angle range of about 180 ° about the center of rotation axis. Further, the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 has a size capable of holding one game ball B. The ball feeding member 144 rotates around the rotating shaft core by moving the paddle portion 144c arranged at a position eccentric to the rotating shaft core in the left-right direction by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145.

The ball feeding member 144 has a supply position in which the blocking portion 144a faces the direction of the partition portion 143a and at the same time the ball holding portion 144b faces the direction in which the ball holding portion 144b communicates with the hit ball supply port 142a, and the ball holding portion 144b faces the partition portion 143a. It is designed to rotate with and from the holding position facing in the direction. When the ball feeding member 144 is in the supply position, the game ball B held by the ball holding portion 144b is supplied to the ball launching device 540 from the hit ball supply port 142a and enters the partition portion 143a from the entrance 141a. The game ball B is blocked from moving toward the ball holding portion 144b (striking ball supply port 142a) by the blocking portion 144a, and remains on the partition portion 143a. On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 144 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 144b faces the direction of the partition portion 143a, and the end of the ball holding portion 144b on the paddle portion 144c side closes the ball hitting supply port 142a. Therefore, only one game ball B on the partition portion 143a is held in the ball holding portion 144b.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 has a ball feeding operating rod 146 whose tip swings in the vertical direction by driving (energizing) the ball feeding solenoid 145 and a tip swinging in the vertical direction in the ball feeding operating rod 146. It is provided with a ball feeding crank 147 that rotates around an axis extending in the front-rear direction and rotates a ball feeding member 144 around an axis extending in the vertical direction.

The ball feeding operation paddle 146 is provided with an iron plate 146a at a portion below the ball feeding solenoid 145. The ball feeding operation paddle 146 extends to the left and right, and is attached to the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 so that the end (right end) opposite to the ball feeding crank 147 can rotate around the axis extending back and forth. Has been done. In the ball feeding operation paddle 146, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the iron plate 146a is attracted toward the ball feeding solenoid 145 (upward) by the generated magnetic force, and the ball feeding is centered on the right end portion. The left end side near the crank 147 rotates so as to move upward. After that, when the drive of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released, the magnetic force disappears and the weight of the iron plate 146a acts, and the left end side close to the ball feeding crank 147 moves downward around the right end. It rotates in this way and returns to the initial state. As a result, in the ball feeding operation paddle 146, the left end portion (tip) near the ball feeding crank 147 swings in the vertical direction by the ball feeding solenoid 145.

The ball feeding crank 147 engages with the engaging portion 147a extending in the left-right direction so as to be able to engage with the vertically moving tip of the ball feeding operating rod 146 and the ball feeding operating rod 146 of the engaging portion 147a. A shaft portion 147b that is arranged on the opposite side to the side and is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and extends upward from the shaft portion 147b. The ball feeding member 144 includes a transmission portion 147c that engages with a rod-shaped rod-shaped rod portion 144c (see FIG. 35B) that protrudes downward from a position eccentric with respect to the center of rotation.

The ball feeding unit 140 moves the tip (left end) of the ball feeding operation paddle 146 upward by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145, thereby moving the ball feeding crank 147 via the ball feeding operating paddle 146. It can be rotated around an axis that extends back and forth.

In the ball feeding unit 140, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is not driven (normal time), the ball feeding operation paddle 146 is separated from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip is positioned downward. Then, the ball feeding member 144 is in a state of being positioned at the feeding position. Further, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding operating rod 146 is attracted to the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 so that the tip (left end) is positioned upward, and the ball feeding member 144 is in the holding position. Rotate to. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 144 receives one game ball B, and the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released (OFF state). The game ball B received by the ball feeding member 144 can be sent (supplied) to the ball launching device 540 side. The drive of the ball feed solenoid 145 in the ball feed unit 140 is controlled by the launch control unit 633b (see FIG. 124) of the payout control board 633 in synchronization with the drive control of the launch solenoid 542.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is adapted to apply a moment that rotates in a counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front by a ball pulling member 143 that is rotatably supported by the ball or a weight portion 143d. However, the operating rod 143c projecting forward of the ball removing member 143 comes into contact with the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper plate ball removing slider 242 that operates by pressing the upper plate ball removing button 222 of the plate unit 200. Since the rotation is restricted, the partition portion 143a of the ball pulling member 143 is located between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b to partition the ball pulling member 143, and the ball pulling port 141b side. The game ball B does not invade.

Then, when the player presses the upper plate ball removal button of the plate unit downward, the upper plate ball removal slider slides downward together with the operation transmission unit, and the operation paddle 143c slides downward as the operation transmission unit moves downward. Will move relatively downward. When the operating rod 143c moves downward together with the operation transmitting portion, the ball pulling member 143 rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, and the partition portion 143a moves from between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b to partition. Is released. As a result, the game ball B that has entered from the entrance 141a falls to the ball extraction port 141b side, and is discharged from the ball extraction port 141b to the ball extraction guide path 241c of the upper plate ball extraction unit 240 in the plate unit 200. It can be discharged (supplied) to the lower plate 202 via the lower plate ball supply port 211c.

Since the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 in which the working transmission portion 242b with which the working paddle 143c of the ball pulling member 143 abuts is formed is urged upward by the spring 243, the game ball B is placed on the partition portion 143a. Even if the ball is supplied vigorously, the impact can be absorbed by the spring 243 via the operating rod 143c, the ball pulling member 143 and the like can be prevented from being damaged, and the game ball B is a partition portion. It is possible to prevent the bounce at 143a.

Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is formed with a rectangular mounting recess 142b (see FIG. 35B and the like) recessed forward in the upper right corner when viewed from the rear of the ball hitting port 142a in the rear cover 142. The fraud prevention member 148 is mounted in the mounting recess 142b. The fraud prevention member 148 of the ball feeding unit 140 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the inside of the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142 from the rear side.

The fraud prevention member 148 is formed in a rectangular shape with the outer shape of the front view extending to the left and right, and the upper piece portion 148a and the upper piece portion 148a which are separated vertically at substantially the center in the vertical direction within a predetermined distance from the right side to the left. It is provided with a lower piece portion 148b and an inclined portion 148c formed in a C chamfer shape on the tip end side (right end side in the front view) of the side facing each other of the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b. .. The upper piece 148a of the fraud prevention member 148 is bent so that the right end in front view projects rearward with respect to the general surface of the fraud prevention member 148. The lower piece portion 148b extends on the same surface as the general surface of the fraud prevention member 148. As a result, in a plan view, the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b form a V-shaped groove that expands toward the right.

The fraud prevention member 148 is attached to the mounting recess 142b of the rear cover 142 so that the V-shaped groove formed by the upper piece portion 148a and the lower piece portion 148b communicates with the inside of the ball striking supply port 142a. Become.

According to the fraud prevention member 148, the fraudulent game ball B to which the string is attached is driven into the game area 5a by the ball launching device 540 from the upper plate via the ball feeding unit 140 and attached to the fraudulent game ball B. The momentum of the illegal game ball B launched (struck) by the ball launcher 540 when a fraudulent act such as operating the string to move the illegal game ball B in and out of the first starting port or the like is performed. A string attached to the illegal game ball B is inserted between the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b, and then a V-shape formed by the upper piece 148a and the lower piece 148b. It can be cut by the narrowed portion of the ball, and it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts using the fraudulent game ball B to which the string is attached.

[3-1-11. Foul cover unit]
The foul cover unit 150 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 36 and 37. FIG. 36A is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 36B is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 37 is a front view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed. The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the right side in the rear view at the lower part of the rear side of the door frame base 101. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball), which is launched by the ball launcher 540 and does not reach the game area 5a of the game board 5, to the lower plate 202 and is paid out from the payout device 580. This is for guiding the game ball B to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202. As shown in the figure, the foul cover unit 150 includes a shallow box-shaped unit main body 151 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and an open front side, and a flat plate-shaped lid member attached to the front surface of the unit main body 151. It is equipped with 152.

The foul cover unit 150 penetrates back and forth in the upper left corner of the front view, and communicates with the normal guide path of the lower full tank path unit of the main body frame 4 and the upper dish ball supply port of the dish unit, and the through ball passage 150a. The through-ball passage 150a is provided with a full-tan ball receiving port 150b which is open to the rear on the lower right side of the front view and can communicate with the full-tan guide path of the lower full-tan ball path unit of the main body frame 4. ..

Further, the foul cover unit 150 was opened upward on the right side of the front view of the full tank ball receiving port 150b, and although it was launched by the ball launching device of the main body frame 4, it did not reach the game area 5a. The foul ball receiving port 150c that receives the game ball B (foul ball), and the game ball B that is open forward near the lower right corner of the front view and is received by the full tank ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c. It is provided with a ball discharge port 150d that discharges forward and communicates with the lower plate ball supply port of the dish unit.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is formed by the unit body 151 and the lid member 152 between the full tank ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c and the ball discharging port 150d, and stores a predetermined amount of the game ball B. It is provided with a storage passage 150e having a possible size.

The penetrating ball passage 150a is formed so as to straddle both the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152. The full tank ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving port 150c are formed in the unit main body 151. The ball discharge port 150d is formed on the lid member 152. The storage passage 150e is formed by the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 constitutes a part of the inner wall of the storage passage 150e, and has a flat plate-shaped movable piece 153 and a movable piece 153 whose lower end is rotatably attached to the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152. It is provided with a full tank detection sensor 154 that detects rotation in a direction away from the storage passage 150e, and a spring 155 that urges the movable piece 153 toward the storage passage 150e.

In this foul cover unit 150, when the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 is filled with the game ball B and the game ball B is not discharged from the ball discharge port 150d to the lower plate 202 side, the storage passage 150e is filled to some extent. The number of game balls B can be stored. Then, when a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the upper end of the movable piece 153 moves in a direction away from the storage passage 150e against the urging force of the spring 155 due to the weight of the game balls B. The movable piece 153 rotates so as to do so, and the rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154. As a result, it can be determined that the lower plate 202 is full with the game ball B. Therefore, when the full tank detection sensor 154 detects that the lower plate 202 is full, the payout of the game ball B is stopped. At the same time, it is possible to notify the player, the staff of the game hall, and the like to that effect, and urge the player to eliminate the fullness of the lower plate 202.

Further, the foul cover unit 150 is attached to the lower side of the penetrating ball passage 150a on the rear side of the unit main body 151, and the payout passage opening / closing door of the lower full tank path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 described later in the main body frame 4. The door opening / closing contact portion 150f to which the actuating protrusion 613a of 613 can come into contact is provided (see FIG. 93). The door opening / closing contact portion 150f is inclined so as to move forward as the rear surface moves downward. When the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 comes into contact with the door opening / closing contact portion 150f, the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is rotated to rotate the lower end of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b. The front opening) can be opened.

[3-2. Glass unit]
The glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30 and the like. The glass unit 160 is inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 101h from the rear and is detachably attached so as to close the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the glass unit 160 makes the game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 visible from the player side (front), and also makes the game visible. It closes the front of the region 5a.

The glass unit 160 has a frame-shaped glass frame 161 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 and can be attached to the glass unit mounting portion 101h, and the glass frame 161 is closed and the outer periphery is a glass frame. Two transparent glass plates 162 attached to 161 and a pair of glass units rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100 to attach the glass frame 161 to the door frame base 101. It includes a mounting member 163.

The glass frame 161 includes a pair of mounting pieces 161a extending outward in a flat plate shape from a position below the upper left and right corners in the front view, and a band extending downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. It has a plate-shaped locking piece 161b and. The mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161 can be brought into contact with the protruding portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163. The locking piece 161b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 (see FIG. 99). The two glass plates 162 are attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 161, respectively, and are separated from each other in the front-rear direction so as to form a space between them (see FIG. 99).

The glass unit mounting member 163 has a disk-shaped base 163a that is rotatably mounted around an axis extending back and forth on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and a rod-shaped protrusion from the base 163a in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. It has a protruding portion 163b and a protruding portion 163b. The glass unit mounting member 163 is rotatably mounted on the outside of the upper two corners of the four corners of the door window 101a on the rear surface of the door frame base 101.

To attach the glass unit 160 to the door frame base 101, first, the glass unit attachment member 163 attached to the door frame base 101 is rotated so that the protruding portion 163b is located above the base portion 163a. To do. Then, from the rear side of the door frame base 101, the locking piece 161b of the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 was inserted from above into the gap between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. Above, the front end of the glass frame 161 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 101h of the door frame base 101. After that, the glass unit mounting member 163 is rotated so that the protruding portion 163b is located below the base portion 163a, and the protruding portion 163b is brought into contact with the rear surface of the mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161. As a result, the glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base 101.

When the glass unit 160 is removed from the door frame base 101, it can be removed by reversing the procedure described above. As a result, the glass unit 160 can be attached to and detached from the door frame base 101 (door frame base unit 100).

In the glass unit 160, when the protruding portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163 is in the rotational position located below the base portion 163a, the protruding portion 163b restricts the movement of the glass frame 161 to the rear. Therefore, even if vibration or the like acts on the glass unit mounting member 163, the protruding portion 163b does not rotate to a position above the base portion 163a. Therefore, the restriction on the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 is not naturally lifted, and the glass unit 160 is not naturally disengaged from the door frame base 101.

[3-3. Security cover]
The security cover 170 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 29 and 30 and the like. The security cover 170 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower part of the rear surface of the glass unit 160, and is made of a transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 170 is arranged separately from the left and right sides of a flat plate-shaped main body 171 having a predetermined outer circumference and a flat plate-shaped rear projecting piece 172 projecting rearward along the outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. It is provided with a pair of locking pieces 173 that project forward from the main body 171 and are lockable on the rear side of the door frame base 101.

The main body 171 of the security cover 170 is formed so that the lower end thereof protrudes downward from the lower end of the glass unit 160 when attached to the door frame base unit 100. Further, the upper end of the main body 171 is formed in a shape along the lower end of the game area 5a in the game board 5 in a state where the upper end is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body 171 is formed in a shape along a part of the inner rail 1002 of the front component 1000 described later, an out guide part 1003, a part of the lower right rail 1004, and the right rail 1005. The rails are formed so as not to protrude into the game area 5a when assembled in the pachinko machine 1.

The rear projecting piece 172 is formed over substantially the entire circumference of the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 171. Therefore, the security cover 170 is formed in a shallow box shape that is opened rearward by the main body portion 171 and the rear projecting piece 172, and has high strength and rigidity. Further, the rear projecting piece 172 also protrudes rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body portion 171 which is different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body portion 171. The rear projecting piece 172 projecting rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 is formed along a part of the outer rail 1001 in the front component 1000 of the game board 5 in a state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. ing.

The rear projecting piece 172 is not formed at a portion of the game board 5 located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in a state of being assembled on the pachinko machine 1. As a result, the game ball B (the game ball B launched by the ball launching device 540) passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 does not come into contact with the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170, and the game area. It does not hinder the driving of the game ball B into 5a.

The pair of locking pieces 173 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 (speaker duct 103 and cable cover 109). As a result, the security cover 170 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base unit 100.

When the security cover 170 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the front surface of the main body 171 is in contact with the rear surface of the glass unit 160 (the rear end of the glass frame 161), and the portion protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 171 is formed. The removed rear projecting piece 172 is in a state of being inserted into the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Further, the security cover 170 is in a state in which the rear projecting piece 172 projecting rearward from the lower side of the main body 171 projects rearward from the front surface of the front component 1000 so as to come into contact with the lower surface of the front component 1000. .. As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire is allowed to enter the game area 5a from below the front surface of the board 5 through between the security cover 170 and the front component 1000, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 172 and the security recess 1009. , It is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 5a.

[3-4. Handle unit]
The handle unit 180 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 38 and the like. FIG. 38 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 38 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle mounting member 102 of the door frame base unit 100, and by being operated by the player, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 can be driven into the game area 5a of the game board 5. It is a thing.

The handle unit 180 covers the handle base 181 attached to the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 in the door frame base unit 100, the handle 182 rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 181 and the front end side of the handle 182. Covers the disk-shaped cover pedestal 183 attached to the handle base 181 and the handle decorative substrate 184 attached to the front side of the cover pedestal 183 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side, and the front side of the handle decorative substrate 184. It is provided with a handle cover 185 attached to a cover pedestal 183.

Further, the handle unit 180 has an inner base 186 attached to the front side of the handle base 181 on the rear side of the handle 182, and a handle 182 attached to the front end thereof, and is rotatably attached to the outer periphery by the inner base 186 and the handle base 181. The handle base 181 and the inner have a shaft member 187 having a drive gear portion 187a, a transmission gear 188 meshing with the drive gear portion 187a of the shaft member 187, and a detection shaft 189a that rotates integrally with the transmission gear 188. It includes a handle rotation detection sensor 189 sandwiched between the base 186 and the base 186.

Further, the handle unit 180 is attached so that one end side is attached to the handle base 181 and the other end side is attached to the handle 182 so that the handle 182 returns to the initial rotation position (rotation end in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front). The steering wheel return spring 190 and the other end side are attached to the inner base 186 and the other end side is attached to the transmission gear 188, and the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is clockwise in front view via the transmission gear 188. It is equipped with an auxiliary spring 191 that is urged in the direction.

Further, the handle unit 180 includes a handle touch sensor 192 attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186, and a tip side protruding outward from the left side of the outer peripheral surface of the front end of the handle base 181 when viewed from the front. A single-shot button 193 whose end side is rotatably attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186 around an axis extending back and forth, and a single-shot button that detects the pressing operation of the single-shot button 193 and is attached to the handle base 181. It is equipped with an operation sensor 194.

The handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 is recessed from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base 181a extending in the front-rear direction, the disk-shaped front end 181b protruding radially from the front end of the base 181a, and the cylindrical base 181a. It also has three groove portions 181c that extend in the axial direction and are formed at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction. The base portion 181a of the handle base 181 is formed so that the outer diameter is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102. Further, the three groove portions 181c are formed at positions corresponding to the three ridges 102c of the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102. Therefore, with the three groove portions 181c aligned with the three ridges 102c, the base portion 181a can be inserted into the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102, and the ridges 102c are formed in the three groove portions 181c, respectively. When inserted, the handle base 181 becomes unable to rotate relative to the handle mounting member 102.

The handle 182 has four first protrusions 182a, a second protrusion 182b, a third protrusion 182c, and a fourth protrusion 182d protruding outward from the outer peripheral surface in the circumferential direction, and a rotation shaft (shaft member 187). Two slits 182e extending in an arc shape as the center and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and protruding rearward from a position inside the rotation center with respect to the slit 182e, the other end side of the handle return spring 190 is locked. It is provided with a locking protrusion 182f to be formed.

The four first protrusions 182a, the second protrusions 182b, the third protrusions 182c, and the fourth protrusions 182d are provided in order in the clockwise direction in the front view. More specifically, the first protrusion 182a bulges outward so that the side surface in the front-view clockwise direction of the portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 bulges outward, and is the opposite side around the anti-city decision. The side surface in the direction of is dented (cut) so as to curve inward. In the second protrusion 182b, the most protruding portion from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the most protruding portion of the first protrusion 182a in the clockwise direction at a rotation angle of about 85 degrees, and the second protrusion 182b is separated from the first protrusion 182a. It protrudes slightly low. The second protrusion 182b bulges so that the side surface in the front-view clockwise direction of the most protruding portion bulges outward, and the side surface in the counterclockwise direction on the opposite side curves inward. It is recessed in the shape and is formed in a shape similar to the first protrusion 182a.

In the third protrusion 182c, the most protruding portion from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the most protruding portion of the second protrusion 182b in the clockwise direction at a rotation angle of about 70 degrees, and the third protrusion 182a has a rotation angle of about 70 degrees. It protrudes at about half the height. The side surfaces of the third protrusion 182c are inclined substantially linearly on both sides, and the side surface in the clockwise direction is inclined more gently than the side surface in the counterclockwise direction on the opposite side. In the fourth protrusion 182d, the most protruding portion from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the most protruding portion of the third protrusion 182c in the clockwise direction at a rotation angle of about 55 degrees, and the fourth protrusion 182d is separated from the first protrusion 182a. It protrudes slightly higher. The fourth protrusion 182d has side surfaces on both sides that are inclined in a substantially straight line, and is formed in a substantially isosceles triangle.

The cover pedestal 183 is formed in a disk shape and includes three mounting bosses 183a projecting rearward from the rear surface. The three mounting bosses 183a penetrate the slit 182e of the handle 182 from the front and are mounted on the front surface of the handle base 181. Since the mounting boss 183a of the handle cover 185 penetrates the slit 182e of the handle 182, the mounting boss 183a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 182e, which regulates the rotation angle of the handle 182. In this example, the handle 182 can be rotated within a rotation angle of about 120 degrees.

The front surface of the handle cover 185 is bulged forward and has translucency. The handle cover 185 is provided with a lens member three-dimensionally formed of a transparent member inside. The handle cover 185 can be decorated by emitting light by appropriately emitting an LED on the front surface of the handle decoration substrate 184.

The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via the handle mounting member 102. The handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 is inclined so that the right end side is located behind the left end side in a plan view and faces the outside (open side). The handle unit 180 attached via the slingshot unit 180 is also tilted outward in a plan view (in other words, its tip is tilted toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). It is attached and fixed to the door frame 3. As a result, the player can easily grip the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 and perform the rotation operation without a sense of discomfort.

The handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180 is a variable resistor, and when the handle 182 is rotated, the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 rotates via the shaft member 187 and the transmission gear 188. The internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 189a, and the driving force of the launch solenoid 542 in the ball launcher 540 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the handle rotation detection sensor 189. , The game ball B is driven into the game area 5a with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182.

The handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting on the handle unit 180, and when the player comes into contact with the handle 182 or the like, it detects static electricity acting on the handle 182 or the like of the player and applies the static electricity to the handle 182 or the like of the player. Detect contact. Then, when the handle 182 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 192 is detecting the contact of the player, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is received, and the firing solenoid has a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182. The drive of 542 is controlled, and the game ball B can be driven. That is, even if the player tries to drive the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 182 in some way without touching the handle 182, the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the player's contact. Therefore, the firing solenoid 542 is not driven, and the game ball B cannot be driven. As a result, it is possible to prevent the player from rotating the handle 182 by a method different from the original one to play the game, and it is possible to reduce the load (burden) on the game hall in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed. ..

Further, in the handle unit 180, when the player presses the single-shot button 193 while the player is rotating the handle 182, the single-shot button operation sensor 194 detects the operation of the single-shot button 193, and the firing control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 detects the operation of the single-shot button 193. The drive of the firing solenoid 542 is stopped. As a result, the firing of the game ball B can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotation operation of the handle 182, and by releasing the pressing operation of the single-shot button 193, before operating the single-shot button 193. The game ball B can be driven into the game area 5a again with the driving strength.

Further, the handle unit 180 includes four first protrusions 182a, second protrusions 182b, third protrusions 182c, and fourth protrusions 182d on the handle 182, and rotates the handle 182 most in the front-view clockwise direction. When the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a most strongly (so-called "right-handed"), the fourth protrusion 182d of the first protrusion 182a when the handle 182 is not rotated. Since the position is substantially the same as the position, by changing the handle 182 with the fourth protrusion 182d as the first protrusion 182a, the player can maintain the handle 182 in the "right-handed" position in a comfortable state. It is possible to reduce the player's feeling of fatigue and suppress the decline in interest in the game.

[3-5. Overall configuration of the dish unit]
The dish unit 200 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42. FIG. 39 is a perspective view of the plate unit of the door frame, and FIG. 40 is a perspective view of the plate unit as viewed from behind. FIG. 41 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 42 is an exploded perspective view of the dish unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. The dish unit 200 is attached to a portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the front surface of the door frame base 101 below the door window 101a. The plate unit 200 has an upper plate 201 for storing a game ball B for driving into the game area 5a, and a game ball arranged below the upper plate 201 and supplied from the upper plate 201 and the foul cover unit 150. It is provided with a lower plate 202 capable of storing B.

The plate unit 200 has an upper plate 201 and is attached to the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and the lower plate 202 is attached to the front surface of the plate base unit 210. It is provided with a plate decoration unit 250 having a plate decoration unit 250, and a production operation unit 300 attached to the front surface of the plate decoration unit 250 and the plate base unit 210 and operated by a player.

The plate base unit 210 includes a flat plate-shaped plate unit base 211 extending to the left and right, an upper plate main body 212 attached to the upper front surface of the plate unit base 211 and having an upper plate 201, and the right side of the upper plate main body 212. The mounting base 213 mounted on the mounting base 213 and protruding forward, the dish unit relay board 214 mounted on the right side of the mounting base 213, and the ball lending operation unit 220 mounted on the upper surface of the mounting base 213. The upper plate ball removal unit 230 mounted below the mounting base 213 and the upper plate ball removal unit 240 mounted behind the upper plate ball removal unit 230 are provided.

The plate decoration unit 250 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 so as to cover the lower plate body 251 having the lower plate 202 and the outer periphery of the lower plate body 251. The dish unit main body 252, the lower dish ball pulling unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower dish main body 251 and the dish upper left decorative unit 270 attached to the upper part of the front surface of the dish unit main body 252, respectively. It includes a plate upper right decoration unit 275, a plate upper left decoration unit 270, and a plate upper left decoration unit 280 and a plate lower right decoration unit 285 attached below each of the plate upper right decoration unit 275.

The effect operation unit 300 includes a rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player and a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player as the effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player. The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the upper surface of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 mounted on the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250, the operation unit base 320 housed in the effect operation unit cover unit 310, and the operation unit base 320. For an annular effect operation ring 330 having a rotation operation unit 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation unit 302, and an operation ring for transmitting the rotation of the rotation drive unit 340 to the rotation operation unit 302. It includes a transmission gear 350 and a gear mounting member 351 that rotatably mounts the transmission gear 350 for an operation ring.

Further, the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 that emits and decorates the effect operation ring 330, the decorative substrate cover 353 that covers the upper side of the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352, and the lower surface of the operation unit base 320. The vibrating speaker 354, the effect operation button unit 360 attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to face the inside of the ring of the effect operation ring 330, and the operation unit relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320. And have.

The plate unit 200 bulges forward as a whole, and the effect operation unit 300 is arranged so that the upper surface of the effect operation unit 301 faces diagonally upward and forward at the center in the left-right direction, and the left side of the effect operation unit 300 on the upper surface. The upper plate 201 is arranged on the right side of the effect operation unit 300, and the ball lending operation unit 220 is arranged on the right side, and the lower plate 202 is arranged on the lower side of the upper plate 201 and on the left side of the effect operation unit 300.

[3-5-1. Upper plate]
The upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. The upper plate 201 is formed by the plate unit base 211 and the upper plate main body 212, and is formed in a container shape in which the left side side bulges forward more than the center of the left and right sides of the front view and is opened upward. In the upper plate 201 (upper plate main body 212), a portion of about 1/3 from the left end to the right with respect to the width of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction bulges most forward. The front end of the upper plate 201 recedes backward from the most bulging portion toward the right in the front view, and the depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. See). The entire bottom surface of the upper plate 201 including the guide passage portion 201a is inclined so that the right end side is lowered, and the front view right end side of the guide passage portion 201a is recessed below the ball lending operation unit 220.

When the upper plate 201 is assembled in the plate unit 200, the bottom surface of the upper plate 201 is a game ball from a position lower than the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 with respect to the upper end of the upper plate ball supply port 211e. It is inclined so as to be slightly lower than the outer diameter of B. As a result, the game ball B discharged forward from the upper plate ball supply port 211a can be received and stored in the upper plate 201, and the received game ball B can be received from the right end side of the guide passage portion 201a. It can be supplied to the ball feeding unit 140 side through the upper plate ball feeding port 211e.

The guide passage portion 201a is provided with a metal ground fitting 201b that is electrically grounded in the pachinko machine 1, and the game ball B comes into contact with (rolls) the game ball. The static electricity charged in B can be removed.

[3-5-2. Lower plate]
The lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 42 and the like. The lower plate 202 is arranged below the upper plate 201 and on the left side of the center of the plate unit 200 (door frame 3) in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. The lower plate 202 is formed of a lower plate main body 251 and a plate unit base 211. The lower plate 202 is formed in a container shape capable of storing the game ball B, and is provided with a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a that penetrates the bottom wall up and down so that the game ball B can be discharged. The lower plate ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 is closed by the lower plate ball extraction unit 260 so as to be openable and closable.

The lower plate 202 is formed in a substantially quadrangle shape in a plan view extending to the left and right, and the front end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward from the right side. In the lower plate 202, a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a penetrating vertically is arranged near the front end near the right end. The bottom surface of the lower plate 202 is inclined so as to be lowered toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The lower plate ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 is located in front of the lower plate ball supply port 211c and below the effect operation unit 300 in a state of being assembled in the plate unit 200.

The lower plate 202 can store the game ball B discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c in a state where the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is closed, and at the same time, the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is opened. The game ball B stored in the plate unit 200 can be discharged below the plate unit 200 (for example, a dollar box). Further, in the state where the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 is open, since the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is arranged in front of the lower plate ball supply port 211c, the lower plate ball supply port 211c is forward. The released game ball B can be quickly discharged downward from the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a by moving the shortest distance.

[3-5-3. Plate base unit]
The dish base unit 210 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 43 to 46. FIG. 43 is a perspective view of the plate base unit of the plate unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 44 is a perspective view of the plate base unit of the plate unit as viewed from the rear. Further, FIG. 45 is an exploded perspective view of the dish base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 46 is an exploded perspective view of the dish base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. is there. The plate base unit 210 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and the plate decoration unit 250 and the effect operation unit 300 are attached to the front surface.

The plate base unit 210 has a flat plate-shaped plate unit base 211 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and extending to the left and right, and an upper plate attached to the upper part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and having an upper plate 201. The main body 212, the mounting base 213 which is mounted on the right side of the upper dish main body 212 on the upper front surface of the dish unit base 211 and protrudes forward, and the mounting base 213 which is mounted on the front surface of the dish unit base 211 on the right side of the mounting base 213. The dish unit relay board 214 is provided.

Further, the dish base unit 210 includes a ball lending operation unit 220 mounted on the upper surface of the mounting base 213 and an upper dish ball pulling-out unit 230 mounted on the front surface of the dish unit base 211 below the mounting base 213. A unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball, which is attached to the rear side of the plate unit base 211 behind the unit 230 before removing the upper plate ball.

[3-5-3a. Dish unit base]
The dish unit base 211 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. The dish unit base 211 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and has a flat plate shape (shallow with the rear open) extending to the left and right over the entire width of the door frame base 101. It is formed in a box shape).

The plate unit base 211 penetrates back and forth near the upper left corner of the front view and also penetrates back and forth below the upper plate ball supply port 211a and the upper plate ball supply port 211a extending rearward in a tubular shape. A speaker port 211b with a punching metal attached to the front side, a lower plate ball supply port 211c that penetrates back and forth at the lower part on the left side of the center of the left and right sides of the front view, and extends rearward in a tubular shape, and a lower plate. A notch 211d that is cut out to a size that allows the game ball B to pass through the right wall of a portion that extends cylindrically to the rear of the ball supply port 211c, and front and rear on the upper right side of the front view of the lower plate ball supply port 211c. It is provided with an upper plate ball feeding port 211e whose upper portion is located at the right end of the upper plate main body 212.

Further, the plate unit base 211 protrudes forward on the right side of the upper plate ball feeding port 211e, and is upper on the left side of the mounting protrusion 211f on which the mounting base is placed and the upper plate ball feeding port 211e. It penetrates back and forth below the plate body and penetrates back and forth at the lower right corner of the front view with the slider insertion port 211g through which the operation transmission portion 242b of the upper plate ball removal slider 242 in the upper plate ball removal slider 242 is inserted. The handle insertion port 211h through which the tubular portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 of the cage door frame base unit 100 is inserted, and the cylinder insertion through which the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted through the front and rear near the right corner of the front view. It is equipped with a mouth 211i.

The upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 is assembled in the door frame 3, the front end opens to the rear wall of the upper plate 201, and the tubular rear end passes through the upper plate ball of the door frame base 101. The mouth 101g is penetrated from the front side and connected to the front end of the penetrating ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150. As a result, the game ball B paid out from the payout device 580 of the payout unit 560 is supplied (paid out) into the upper plate 201 through the upper plate ball supply port 211a.

The lower plate ball supply port 211c has a front end opening to the rear wall of the lower plate 202 and a tubular rear end having a lower plate ball passage port 101f of the door frame base 101 from the front side in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3. It penetrates and is connected to the front end of the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150. As a result, the game ball B circulating in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 is supplied into the lower plate 202 through the lower plate ball supply port 211c. Further, the downstream end of the ball extraction guide path 241c in the rear base 241 of the upper plate ball extraction unit 240 is connected to the notch portion 211d formed in the tubular portion of the lower plate ball supply port 211c. ing. As a result, the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 can be moved to the upper plate ball feeding port 211e, the entrance / entrance 141a and the ball removing port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 by operating the upper plate ball removing button 222. After the plate ball is removed, the unit 240 is discharged from the lower plate ball supply port 211c into the lower plate 202 via the ball feeding guide path 241b, the ball removal guide path 241c, and the notch 211d.

The upper plate ball feeding port 211e is located in front of the ball receiving port 241a of the rear base 241 in the unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball in a state of being assembled to the plate base unit 210, and is a game ball in the upper plate 201. B is supplied from the ball receiving port 241a of the unit 240 to the ball feeding guide path 241b after the upper plate ball is pulled out.

[3-5-3b. Upper plate body]
The upper plate main body 212 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46 and the like. The upper plate main body 212 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and cooperates with the plate unit base 211 to form the upper plate 201. The upper plate main body 212 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) with the upper and rear sides open. The upper plate main body 212 extends to the left and right, and the left side is larger and bulges forward than the center of the left and right in the front view. The front end of the upper plate main body 212 recedes rearward from the most forward bulging portion toward the right side of the front view, and the depth in the front-rear direction is formed to have a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. ing. The bottom surface of the upper plate body 212 is inclined so that the right end is the lowest. The upper plate main body 212 is closed above the right end.

In the state of being assembled to the plate unit 200, the upper plate main body 212 is attached so that the portion where the upper part is closed near the right end is recessed below the ball lending operation unit 220. Further, in the upper plate main body 212, an effect operation unit mounting portion 212a is formed in an intermediate portion in the left-right direction at the upper portion, and a part of the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 212a.

[3-5-3c. Mounting base]
The mounting base 213 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46. The mounting base 213 is mounted on the front surface of the dish unit base 211 in a state of being mounted on the upper surface of the mounting protrusion 211f of the dish unit base 211, and the ball lending operation unit 220 is mounted on the upper side. The mounting base 213 is formed in a shallow box shape with an open upper part. The mounting base 213 includes an insertion port 213a that penetrates vertically near the left end and a through opening 213b that penetrates vertically at the right corner of the rear end.

The front slider 232 of the upper plate ball pulling-out unit 230 is inserted into the insertion port 213a of the mounting base 213. Further, a wiring cable for connecting the ball lending operation unit 220 and the door frame main relay board 104 is inserted through the through port 213b.

[3-5-3d. Dish unit relay board]
The dish unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210 includes a door frame sub-relay board 105 in the door frame base unit 100, a dish upper left decorative board 273, a dish upper right decorative board 278, a dish lower left decorative board 283, and a dish lower right decorative board 288. , And for relaying the connection with the operation unit relay board 392. The dish unit relay board 214 is attached to the right side of the mounting protrusion 211f on the front surface of the dish unit base 211. When the dish unit relay board 214 is attached to the dish unit base 211, its rear surface faces the rear side of the dish unit base 211.

[3-5-3e. Ball rental operation unit]
The ball lending operation unit 220 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 39 to 46 and the like. The ball lending operation unit 220 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 via the attachment base 213. The ball lending operation unit 220 discharges the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate 202, or cashes the ball lending machine (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. After inserting a prepaid card or a prepaid card, a predetermined number of game balls B can be lent into the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200, the remaining amount of cash or prepaid card inserted in the ball lending machine can be displayed, or the ball lending machine can be used. The purpose is to deduct the amount of the loaned game ball B and return the cash or prepaid card inserted in the machine.

The ball lending operation unit 220 includes a base portion 221 mounted on the upper side of the mounting base 213, an upper plate ball removal button 222 arranged near the left end of the upper surface of the base portion 221 and an upper plate ball on the upper surface of the base portion 221. A disk-shaped ball lending operation base 223 that is arranged on the right side of the pull-out button 222 and has translucency, a ball lending button 224 that is arranged on the front left side of the ball lending operation base 223, and a ball lending operation. It includes a return button 225 arranged on the right side of the front part of the base 223, and a ball lending display unit (not shown) arranged below the rear part of the ball lending operation base 223.

The upper plate ball pulling button 222 projects upward in a columnar shape from the upper surface of the base portion 221 and can be moved downward by a pressing operation by the player. The ball lending button 224 is formed in a circular shape. The return button 225 is formed in a triangular shape. The ball lending display unit is composed of three 7-segment LEDs, and can be visually recognized through the transparent ball lending operation base 223 in a light emitting state.

The ball lending operation unit 220 can discharge the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate by pressing the upper plate ball removal button 222. Further, when a prepaid card having cash or a balance is inserted into the ball lending machine and then the ball lending button 224 is pressed, a predetermined number of game balls B are supplied to the upper plate 201. When the return button 225 is pressed, the rented game ball B is deducted from the cash or prepaid card inserted in the ball lending machine and returned. The ball lending display unit displays the remaining amount of cash and prepaid cards inserted in the ball lending machine. In addition, an error code is displayed on the ball lending display unit when the ball lending machine breaks down.

[3-5-3f. Unit before removing the upper plate ball and unit after removing the upper plate ball]
The unit 230 before removing the upper plate ball and the unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball in the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 45 and 46 and the like. The upper plate ball removal unit 230 and the upper plate ball removal unit 240 cooperate with the ball feeding unit 140 when the upper plate ball removal button 222 of the ball lending operation unit 220 is pressed, and the upper plate 201 This is for discharging the game ball B stored in the lower plate 202 to the lower plate 202.

The upper plate ball extraction unit 230 is attached below the ball lending operation unit 220 on the left side of the mounting protrusion 211f on the front surface of the plate unit base 211. The upper plate ball removal unit 240 is attached to a portion on the rear surface of the plate unit base 211 behind the upper plate ball removal unit 230.

The upper plate ball extraction front unit 230 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and has a tubular front base 231 extending vertically and a front base 231 that is movably inserted into the cylinder of the front base 231. It includes a slider 232 and. The front base 231 is attached to the front surface of the dish unit base 211 near the front of the upper dish ball feeding port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g. The front slider 232 extends vertically, and the upper end is in contact with the lower end of the upper plate ball removing button 222, and the lower end is the operation receiving portion 242a of the upper plate ball removing slider 242 of the upper plate ball removing slider 242 after removing the upper plate ball. It is in contact with the upper surface.

The unit 240 after removing the upper plate ball has a rear base 241 attached to the rear surface of the plate unit base 211 so as to close the upper plate ball feeding port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g from the rear, and the rear base 241 in the vertical direction on the front surface of the rear base 241. An upper plate ball pulling slider 242 attached so as to be slidable to, a spring 243 for urging the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 upward, and a rear cover 244 attached to the rear side of the rear base 241. It has.

The rear base 241 projects upward from the portion where the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 is slidably attached and is open forward so that the game ball B can pass through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball receiving port 241a. A game from a position below the ball feeding guide path 241b on the rear surface of the rear base 241 and a ball feeding guide path 241b that guides the received game ball B downward on the rear surface of the rear base 241 and then guides it backward. It is provided with a taxiing guide path 241c that guides the ball B downward and then to the right in the rear view.

The ball receiving port 241a is assembled in the plate base unit 210, and at the downstream end (right end in the front view) of the guide passage portion 201a of the upper plate 201, the ball receiving port 241a is directed forward through the upper plate ball feeding port 211e of the plate unit base 211. It is formed at the opening position. The ball feeding guide path 241b is formed so that the entrance / exit 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 is located behind the lower part in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3. As a result, the game ball B supplied to the upper plate 201 enters the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball feeding guide path 241b.

The portion extending to the left and right of the taxiing guide path 241c protrudes to the right in the rear view from the portion in which the upper plate ball removal slider 242 is slidably attached, and is inclined so that the right end side in the rear view is lower. It is open on the right side of the rear view. The rear side of the portion extending to the left and right of the taxiing guide path 241c is closed by the rear cover 244. In the state where the ball feeding guide path 241c is assembled to the door frame 3, the upper part of the portion extending vertically below the ball feeding guiding path 241b is located in front of the ball feeding port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140. At the same time, the right end of the portion extending to the left and right in the rear view is formed so as to be connected to the notch 211d of the lower plate ball supply port 211c in the plate unit base 211. As a result, the game ball B discharged from the ball ejection port 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 is discharged into the lower plate 202 from the lower plate ball supply port 211c via the ball extraction guide path 241c and the notch 211d.

The upper plate ball pulling slider 242 has a quadrangular shape in front view, and has an actuating receiving portion 242a projecting forward from the upper left corner and an actuating receiving portion 242a projecting rearward from a rear surface on the rear side of the actuating receiving portion 242a. It is provided with an operation transmission unit 242b. The upper surface of the actuating receiving portion 242a is formed to be flat. Further, the operation transmitting portion 242b is inclined so that the upper surface is positioned downward toward the rear, and the lower surface thereof extends horizontally so as to be connected to the rear end of the upper surface.

In the state where the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the operation receiving portion 242a penetrates the slider insertion port 211g of the plate unit base 211 from the rear side and protrudes forward, and the actuating receiving portion 242a. The lower end of the front slider 232 of the upper plate ball extraction unit 230 is in contact with the upper surface of the above. Further, in the state where the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 is assembled on the door frame 3, the operation transmitting portion 242b projects rearward of the rear base 241 and the ball feeding unit 140 operates on the ball pulling member 143 on the upper surface. The paddle 143c is in contact.

The upper end of the spring 243 is attached to the rear base 241 and the lower end is attached to the upper plate ball removal slider 242, and the upper plate ball removal slider 242 is urged upward. Therefore, the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 is located at the upward moving end by the urging force of the spring 243, and can move downward by resisting the urging force of the spring 243.

In the upper plate ball removal unit 230 and the upper plate ball removal unit 240, the upper plate ball removal slider 242 is positioned at the upward moving end by the urging force of the spring 243, and the upper plate ball removal slider 242 The upper plate ball pulling button 222 is positioned at the moving end upward via the front slider 232 that is in contact with the upper surface of the operation receiving portion 242a. Further, since the upper plate ball pulling slider 242 is positioned at the upward moving end by the urging force of the spring 243, the downward movement of the working paddle 143c which is in contact with the upper surface of the working transmission portion 242b is prevented. The partition portion 143a of the ball pulling member 143 is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b to partition the two.

Therefore, when the upper plate ball removal button 222 is not pressed, the ball feeding unit 140 is partitioned between the entrance 141a and the ball extraction port 141b, and is sent from the upper plate 201 to the ball receiving port 241a. The game ball B can be sent from the hit ball supply port 142a to the ball launcher 540 side via the entrance 141a and the ball feeding member 144.

On the other hand, when the upper plate ball removal button 222 is pressed downward against the urging force of the spring 243, the upper plate ball removal slider 242 moves downward via the front slider 232, and the upper plate ball removal slider 242 operates. The operating rod 143c of the ball pulling member 143 that is in contact with the upper surface of the transmission portion 242b can move downward, and the ball pulling member 143 rotates due to the load of the weight portion 143d of the ball pulling member 143 to rotate the partition portion 143a. Retreats from between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b. As a result, the game ball B that has entered the entrance 141a from the upper plate 201 through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball feeding guide path 241b is discharged forward from the ball outlet 141b that opens below the entrance 141a. Will be done. Then, the game ball B discharged forward from the ball extraction port 141b is guided from the notch portion 211d into the lower plate ball supply port 211c through the ball extraction guide path 241c, and then lower from the lower plate ball supply port 211c. It is discharged into the plate 202, and the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is discharged into the lower plate 202.

When the downward pressure of the upper plate ball removal button 222 is released, the upper plate ball removal slider 242 moves upward due to the urging force of the spring 243, and the upper plate is passed through the front slider 232 that is in contact with the actuating receiving portion 242a. As the ball pulling button 222 rises, the ball pulling member 143 rotates due to the operating rod 143c in contact with the operation transmitting portion 242b, and the partition portion 143a is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball pulling port 141b. It will return to the original state.

In this way, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 can be fed to the ball launching device 540 side via the ball feeding unit 140 by the upper plate ball extraction unit 230 and the upper plate ball extraction unit 240. It can be discharged to the lower plate 202 side.

[3-5-4. Plate decoration unit]
The dish decoration unit 250 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. FIG. 47 is a perspective view of the plate decoration unit in the plate unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 48 is a perspective view of the plate decoration unit as viewed from the back. Further, FIG. 49 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 50 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. is there. The plate decoration unit 250 has a lower plate 202 and is attached to the front surface of the plate base unit 210, and the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the center in the left-right direction from the front. The dish decoration unit 250 decorates substantially the entire dish unit 200.

The plate decoration unit 250 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 to form the lower plate 202 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211, and the plate unit base so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate body 251. The plate unit main body 252 attached to the front surface of 211, the lower plate ball removal unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251 and the plates attached to the upper front surface of the plate unit main body 252, respectively. The upper left decoration unit 270 and the upper right decoration unit 275 of the plate, and the lower left decoration unit 280 and the lower right decoration unit of the plate attached below the upper left decoration unit 270 and the upper right decoration unit 275 of the plate on the entire surface of the plate unit main body 252. 285 and.

[3-5-4a. Lower plate body]
The lower plate main body 251 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower plate main body 251 forms the lower plate 202 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210. The lower plate body 251 extends to the left and right, and is formed in a container shape (dish shape) with the upper and rear sides open. The lower plate main body 251 is attached to a portion of the lower part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 on the left side of the center in the left-right direction so that the open rear portion is closed.

The lower plate main body 251 is formed in a substantially quadrangular shape in a plan view extending to the left and right, and the front end on the left side from the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward from the right side. The lower plate main body 251 is formed with a lower plate ball extraction hole 202a that penetrates vertically in the vicinity of the front end at the right end in a plan view. The bottom surface of the lower plate main body 251 is inclined so as to be lowered toward the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is closed by the lower plate ball extraction lid 265 of the lower plate ball extraction unit 260 so as to be openable and closable.

The lower plate main body 251 is in a state of being assembled to the plate decoration unit 250, and the outer periphery and a part of the lower surface are covered with the plate unit main body 252. Further, in the state where the lower plate body is assembled in the plate unit 200, the bottom surface is located below the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211, and the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is the lower plate ball supply port. It is located in front of 211c. As a result, the game ball B discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c can be stored.

[3-5-4b. Dish unit body]
The plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The plate unit main body 252 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 in the plate base unit 210 to decorate the front surface of the plate unit 200. The dish unit main body 252 bulges so that the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the upper side, and the left side in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the lower side. Further, the upper surface of the dish unit main body 252 is curved so that the center in the left-right direction is the lowest. The dish unit main body 252 is formed in a box shape that is open to the rear.

The dish unit main body 252 has an upper side bulging portion 252a that bulges forward from both left and right ends toward the center in the left-right direction and extends downward and is separated from each other to the left and right, and a left side from the center in the left-right direction at the lower part. Includes a lower front decorative portion 252b that bulges forward so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate main body 251 and a bottom plate portion 252c that extends rearward from the lower end of the lower front decorative portion 252b in a flat plate shape. ..

The left and right upper side bulging portions 252a are formed in a box shape with the rear open, and the upper left decorative unit 270 and the lower left decorative unit 280 of the plate, the upper right decorative unit 275 of the plate, and the lower right decorative unit of the plate are formed on the front surfaces thereof. 285 is attached. The right end of the lower surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a on the left side is connected to the lower front decorative portion 252b. Further, the lower end of the upper side bulging portion 252a on the right side is connected to the lower front decorative portion 252b.

The plate unit main body 252 is formed with a lower plate opening 252d that penetrates back and forth between the upper side bulging portion 252a on the left side and the lower front decorative portion 252b. The lower plate opening 252d has a size that allows the player's fingers to be inserted, and is formed so that the upper and lower sides become wider toward the left. The lower plate opening 252d is formed in a tubular shape extending back and forth by the lower plate main body 251 and the lower surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a on the left side.

Further, the plate unit main body 252 includes a front notch portion 252e cut out upward from the lower front end of a portion covering the outer circumference of the lower plate main body 251 in the lower front decorative portion 252b, and a lower plate main body 251 in the bottom plate portion 252c. It is provided with a bottom surface notch 252f, which is notched at a portion below the above. The lower plate ball removing unit 260 is inserted into the front notch 252e and the bottom notch 252f.

Further, the dish unit main body 252 penetrates back and forth in the lower right corner of the lower front decorative portion 252b, and has a handle insertion port 252 g through which the cylinder portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 is inserted, and a lower front surface above the handle insertion port 252 g. A production operation unit formed between a cylinder insertion port 252h that penetrates the decorative portion 252b in the front-rear direction and into which the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted and a pair of upper side bulging portions 252a that are centered in the left-right direction. It is provided with an effect operation unit mounting portion 252i to which the 300 is mounted. The effect operation unit mounting portion 252i is formed to have a width of about 1/3 of the width in the left-right direction of the dish unit main body 252.

The plate unit main body 252 is formed so as to cover the entire front surface of the plate base unit 210 in a state of being assembled to the plate unit 200, and the speaker port 211b faces forward through the lower plate opening 252d. .. Further, in the state of being assembled to the plate decoration unit 250, the lower plate ball removal button 263 of the lower plate ball removal unit 260 faces forward from the front notch 252e, and the lower plate ball removal base 261 of the lower plate ball removal unit 260 faces forward. The bottom surface notch 252f is closed so that the bottom surfaces are on the same surface.

[3-5-4c. Lower plate ball removal unit]
The lower plate ball removing unit 260 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower plate ball removing unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251 and opens and closes the lower plate ball removing hole 202a to store the game ball B in the lower plate 202 and discharge the game ball B from the lower plate 202. It is for letting you do it.

The lower plate ball removal unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251 and has a flat plate-shaped lower plate ball removal base 261 having a through hole penetrating up and down in the right front corner in a plan view, and a lower plate ball removal unit 260. A slider 262 that is slidably attached back and forth on the upper surface side of the base 261, a lower plate ball removal button 263 that is attached to the front end of the slider 262, and a spring 264 that urges the slider 262 forward. It includes a lower plate ball removing lid 265 that opens and closes a through hole by moving the slider 262 in the front-rear direction, and a holding mechanism 266 that holds the lower plate ball removing lid 265 in an open state via the slider 262.

The lower plate ball removal base 261 is formed in a size that closes the bottom notch 252f of the plate unit main body 252, and is vertically positioned at a position corresponding to the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a of the lower plate 202 (lower plate main body 251). A through hole that penetrates is formed. The through hole of the lower plate ball extraction base 261 is formed to have the same size as the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a. The slider 262 is formed in a flat plate shape extending in the front-rear direction, and is slidably attached to a portion of the lower plate ball removal base 261 to the left from the center in the left-right direction. The slider 262 includes a protruding pin that projects upward in a columnar shape.

The lower plate ball removal lid 265 is attached to the lower plate ball removal base 261 so that the left end side can rotate around the axis extending vertically at a position to the left of the slider 262, and the right end side is the slider 262. It extends to the right beyond the above, and the right end side is formed so that the through hole can be closed. The lower plate ball removing lid 265 is formed with slits extending to the left and right into which the protrusion pin of the slider 262 is slidably inserted.

In the state where the lower plate ball removal unit 260 is assembled to the plate decoration unit 250, the lower plate ball removal base 261 closes the bottom notch 252f of the plate unit main body 252, and the lower surface of the lower plate ball removal base 261 It is located on the same surface as the lower surface of the bottom plate portion 252c. Further, the lower plate ball removal button 263 faces forward from the front notch 252e of the plate unit main body 252. In the lower plate ball removing unit 260, under normal conditions, the slider 262 is located at the moving end on the front side due to the urging force of the spring 264, and the right end side of the lower plate ball removing lid 265 is located directly above the through hole. The through hole (lower plate ball extraction hole 202a) is closed.

In this normal state, the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is closed by the lower plate ball extraction lid 265, and the game ball B can be stored in the lower plate 202. Further, in a normal state, the front surface of the lower plate ball pulling button 263 substantially coincides with the front surface around the front surface notch portion 252e on the front surface of the lower front surface decorative portion 252b.

In a normal state, when the lower plate ball removal button 263 is pressed backward and moved backward against the urging force of the spring 264, the slider 262 moves backward together with the lower plate ball removal button 263. It becomes. When the slider 262 moves backward, the protruding pin of the slider 262 pushes the lower plate ball removal lid 265 rearward through the slit, and the lower plate ball removal lid 265 is centered on the left end side and the right end side is rearward. It will rotate in the direction of movement. Then, the right end side of the lower plate ball removal lid 265, which was located directly above the through hole, moves rearward from the position of the through hole, so that the through hole is opened and the lower plate ball removal hole 202a is opened. The game ball B in the lower plate 202 can be discharged below the plate unit 200 through the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a.

When the slider 262 is moved backward by pressing the lower plate ball pulling button 263, the rear end of the slider 262 is held by the holding mechanism 266, and the pressing of the lower plate ball pulling button 263 is released. However, the slider 262 does not move forward due to the urging force of the spring 264. As a result, the right end side of the lower plate ball removal lid 265 remains rotated backward, the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a is maintained in an open state, and the game balls B in the lower plate 202 are continuously played. It can be discharged downward.

To close the lower plate ball extraction hole 202a from this state, press the lower plate ball extraction button 263, which is recessed from the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b, backward, and the holding of the slider 262 by the holding mechanism 266 is released. To. Then, when the pressure of the lower plate ball removal button 263 is released, the slider 262 moves forward by the urging force of the spring 264, and the front surface of the lower plate ball removal button 263 returns to the state where it coincides with the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b. At the same time, the lower plate ball removal lid 265 rotates so that the right end side is located directly above the through hole, and the lower plate ball removal hole 202a is closed by the lower plate ball removal lid 265. As a result, the game ball B can be stored in the lower plate 202.

[3-5-4e. Plate upper left decoration unit and plate upper right decoration unit]
The plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The dish upper left decorative unit 270 and the dish upper right decorative unit 275 are attached to the upper part of the front surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the dish unit main body 252. The plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the plate upper right decoration unit 275 decorate both the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300 at the upper part of the plate unit 200.

The dish upper left decorative unit 270 includes a dish upper left decorative body 271 that is semi-cylindrical and extends to the left and right and has translucency, and a dish upper left reflector 272 that is attached to the rear side of the dish upper left decorative body 271. It is provided with a dish upper left decorative substrate 273 which is attached to the rear side of the dish upper left reflector 272 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The dish upper left decorative body 271 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the left end to the right end, and is attached to the upper part of the left upper side bulging portion 252a. The upper left decorative body 271 of the plate has a semi-circular shape that bulges forward, and the central axis extends diagonally to the upper left at the left end, and the central axis extends to the left and right at the right end, giving the shape that the semi-cylinder is twisted. It is formed. The upper left decorative body 271 of the plate is formed in a milky white color.

The dish upper left reflector 272 is inserted into the dish upper left decorative body 271 from the rear, and a through hole is formed in a portion of the dish upper left decorative substrate 273 corresponding to the LED. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate upper left decorative substrate 273 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the plate upper left decorative body 271 can be light-emittingly decorated.

When the plate upper left decorative unit 270 is assembled to the door frame 3, the left end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame left side unit 400, and the right end is the left end of the plate center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the effect operation unit 300. Is continuous. Since the dish upper left decorative unit 270 does not have a rib in the middle of the dish upper left decorative body 271 in the longitudinal direction, when a plurality of LEDs of the dish upper left decorative substrate 273 are made to emit light, the entire front surface of the dish upper left decorative body 271 is emitted. The light emitting decoration can be made almost uniformly, and it can be made to appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The dish upper right decoration unit 275 has a semi-cylindrical shape that extends to the left and right and has translucency, a dish upper right decorative body 276, and a dish upper right reflector 277 attached to the rear side of the dish upper right decorative body 276. It is equipped with a dish upper right decorative substrate 278, which is attached to the rear side of the dish upper right reflector 277 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The dish upper right decorative body 276 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the right end to the left end, and is attached to the upper part of the upper right side bulge 252a. The dish upper right decorative body 276 has a semi-circular shape that bulges forward, and the central axis extends diagonally to the upper right at the right end, and the central axis extends to the left and right at the left end, giving the shape of a twisted semi-cylinder. It is formed. The upper right decorative body 276 of the plate is formed in a milky white color.

The dish upper right reflector 277 is inserted into the dish upper right decorative body 276 from the rear, and a through hole is formed in a portion corresponding to the LED of the dish upper right decorative substrate 278. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the plate upper right decorative substrate 278 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the plate upper right decorative body 276 can be light-emittingly decorated.

In the state where the plate upper right decorative unit 275 is assembled to the door frame 3, the right end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame right side unit 410, and the left end is the right end of the plate center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 in the effect operation unit 300. Is continuous. Since the dish upper right decorative unit 275 does not have a rib in the middle of the dish upper right decorative body 276 in the longitudinal direction, when a plurality of LEDs of the dish upper right decorative board 278 are made to emit light, the entire front surface of the dish upper right decorative body 276 is emitted. The light emitting decoration can be made almost uniformly, and it can be made to appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-5-4f. Lower left decoration unit of the plate and lower right decoration unit of the plate]
The lower left decorative unit 280 and the lower right decorative unit 285 of the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 47 to 50 and the like. The lower left decorative unit 280 and the lower right dish 285 are attached to the lower part of the front surface of the upper side bulge 252a of the dish unit body 252 so as to extend along the upper left decorative unit 270 and the upper right dish 275, respectively. Be done. The lower left decorative unit 280 and the lower right decorative unit 285 of the plate cooperate with the upper left decorative unit 270 of the plate and the upper right decorative unit 275 to decorate the front surface of the plate unit 200 and the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300. ..

The lower left dish decorative unit 280 has a semi-cylindrical shape extending to the left and right to have translucency, a lower left dish decorative body 281, and a lower left dish reflector 282 attached to the rear side of the lower left dish decorative body 281. It is provided with a dish lower left decorative substrate 283, which is attached to the rear side of the dish lower left reflector 282 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The lower left decorative body 281 of the plate extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the left end to the right end, and extends in an arc shape having a center in the rear in a plan view. It is attached to the lower part of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the above. The lower left decorative body 281 of the plate has a semicircular arc that bulges forward with a radius smaller than that of the upper left decorative body 271 of the plate and the upper right decorative body 276 of the plate. The shaft extends to the left and right, and is formed in a shape in which a semi-cylinder is bent. The left end of the lower left decorative body 281 of the plate is formed in a spherical shape. The curvature of the semicircular arc of the lower left decorative body 281 of the plate changes so as to become thinner toward the left end side. The lower left decorative body 281 of the plate is formed in a milky white color.

The lower left dish reflector 282 is inserted into the lower left dish decorative body 281 from the rear, and a through hole is formed in a portion of the lower left dish decorative substrate 283 corresponding to the LED. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower left decorative substrate 283 of the plate are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the lower left decorative body 281 of the plate can be light-emittingly decorated.

The lower left decorative unit 280 of the plate is assembled on the door frame 3, the left end is located below the left end of the upper left decorative unit 270 of the plate, and the right end is the lower left decorative unit 312b of the unit front cover 312 of the effect operation unit 300. It is continuous with the left end. Since the left end of the lower left decorative body 281 of the plate is formed in a spherical shape, the lower left decorative unit 280 of the plate seems to have the left end sunk into the door frame 3. Since the lower left decorative unit 280 of the dish does not have a rib in the middle of the lower left decorative body 281 in the longitudinal direction, when a plurality of LEDs of the lower left decorative substrate 283 of the dish are made to emit light, the entire front surface of the lower left decorative body 281 of the dish is emitted. The light emitting decoration can be made almost uniformly, and it can be made to appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The lower right decorative unit 285 of the plate has a semi-cylindrical shape extending to the left and right and has translucency, and the lower right decorative unit 286 of the plate and the lower right of the plate attached to the rear side of the lower right decorative body 286. It includes a reflector 287 and a dish lower right decorative substrate 288 that is attached to the rear side of the dish lower right reflector 287 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

The lower right decorative body 286 of the plate extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the right end to the left end, and also extends in an arc shape having a center at the rear in a plan view. It is attached to the lower part of the upper side bulge 252a on the right side. The lower right decorative body 286 of the plate has a semicircular arc that bulges forward with a radius smaller than that of the upper left decorative body 271 of the plate and the upper right decorative body 276 of the plate, and the central axis extends slightly diagonally to the upper right and rear at the right end, and at the left end. The central axis extends to the left and right, and the shape is such that the semi-cylinder is bent. The right end of the lower right decorative body 286 of the plate is formed in a spherical shape. The curvature of the semicircular arc of the lower right decorative body 286 of the plate changes so as to become thinner toward the right end side. The lower right decorative body 286 of the plate is formed in a milky white color.

The dish lower right reflector 287 is inserted into the dish lower right decorative body 286 from the rear, and a through hole is formed in a portion of the dish lower right decorative substrate 288 corresponding to the LED. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower right decorative substrate 288 of the plate are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the lower right decorative body 286 of the plate can be light-emittingly decorated.

The lower right decorative unit 285 of the plate is assembled on the door frame 3, the right end is located below the right end of the upper right decorative unit 275 of the plate, and the left end is the lower right decorative unit 312b of the unit front cover 312 of the effect operation unit 300. It is continuous with the right end of. Since the right end of the lower right decorative body 286 of the plate is formed in a spherical shape, the lower right decorative unit 285 of the plate seems to have the right end sunk into the door frame 3. Since the lower right decorative unit 285 of the plate does not have a rib in the middle of the lower right decorative body 286 in the longitudinal direction, when a plurality of LEDs of the lower right decorative substrate 288 of the plate are made to emit light, the lower right decorative unit 286 of the plate emits light. The entire front surface of the plate can be luminescent and decorated almost uniformly, and it can be made to appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-5-5. Overall configuration of the production operation unit]
The overall configuration of the effect operation unit 300 in the plate unit 200 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 51 to 54 and the like. FIG. 51 is a plan view of the effect operation unit in the plate unit as viewed from the advancing / retreating direction of the effect operation button. FIG. 52A is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the front, and FIG. 52B is a perspective view of the effect operation unit viewed from the back. FIG. 53 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 54 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear. The effect operation unit 300 is provided in the center of the plate unit 200 in the left-right direction, decorates the plate unit 200, and is operated by the player to participate in the effect when the player participation type effect is executed. It is something that can be done. The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the plate base unit 210 and the plate decoration unit 250.

The effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player. The effect operation unit 301 is composed of a rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player and a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. In the effect operation unit 301, the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in an annular shape having an inner diameter of about 3/5 of the outer diameter, and the pressing operation unit 303 is arranged in the ring. .. The pressing operation unit 303 is arranged at the center of the rotation operation unit 302, and has a central pressing operation unit 303a having a diameter slightly larger than half the inner diameter of the rotation operation unit 302, and an outer circumference of the central pressing operation unit 303a and the rotation operation unit 302. It is composed of an annular outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b arranged between the inner circumference and the outer circumference.

The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the upper surface of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 mounted on the front surface of the dish decoration unit 250, the operation unit base 320 housed in the effect operation unit cover unit 310, and the operation unit base 320. An annular effect operation ring 330 having a rotation operation unit 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330, and a rotation operation of the rotation drive unit 340 and the effect operation ring 330. It includes a transmission gear 350 for an operation ring that transmits rotation to and from the unit 302, and a gear mounting member 351 that rotatably attaches the transmission gear 350 for the operation ring to the operation unit base 320.

Further, the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the upper surface of the operation unit base 320 below the effect operation ring 330, and the effect operation ring decorative board 352 and the effect operation ring decorative board 352 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface. The decorative board cover 353 attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to cover the upper side of the operation unit base 320, the vibration speaker 354 attached to the lower surface of the operation unit base 320, and the operation unit so as to face the inside of the ring of the effect operation ring 330. It includes an effect operation button unit 360 attached to the base 320, and an operation unit relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320.

[3-5-5a. Production operation unit cover unit]
The effect operation unit cover unit 310 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 252i of the plate unit main body 252 of the plate decoration unit 250, and decorates the front surface of the effect operation unit 300 at the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit 200. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is formed in a container shape with the upper and rear sides open.

The effect operation unit cover unit 310 includes a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 that is recessed downward, a semi-annular unit front cover 312 that is attached to the front upper end of the unit lower cover 311 and bulges forward, and the front of the unit. A dish center upper reflector 313 mounted from the rear inside the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the cover 312, and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish center upper reflector 313 and capable of irradiating light toward the front are mounted. The dish center upper decorative substrate 314, the dish center lower reflector 315 attached to the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 from the rear, and the dish center lower reflector 315 attached to the dish center lower reflector 315, and light toward the front. It is provided with a dish center lower decorative substrate 316 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of illuminating the light are mounted.

The unit lower cover 311 is formed in a hemispherical shape in which the front side of the unit lower cover 311 bulges downward from the rear side in the center in the front-rear direction, and the rear side of the unit lower cover 311 is the effect operation unit mounting portion of the dish unit main body 252. It is attached to the 252i so as to be mounted from above. The unit lower cover 311 is attached in an inclined state so that the axis perpendicular to the virtual plane formed on the upper end edge extending in a semicircular shape at the front is positioned forward as it goes upward. In this embodiment, it is tilted at an angle of about 18 degrees (18.65 degrees) with respect to the vertical line. When the unit lower cover 311 is assembled into the dish unit 200, a plurality of drain holes 311a are formed at the lowest portion.

The unit front cover 312 is formed in a semicircular shape in which the plan view shape is bulged forward along the front end of the unit lower cover 311 and is formed on the upper end of the front portion of the unit lower cover 311. It is installed. The unit front cover 312 has a semicircular arc extending forward along the front end of the unit lower cover 311 in a semicircular shape, and a dish center upper decorative body 312a and a dish center upper decorative body 312a below the dish center upper decorative body 312a. It is provided with a dish center lower decorative body 312b in which a bulging semicircle extends in a semicircular shape along the front end of the unit lower cover 311. In the unit front cover 312, the lower end of the dish center lower decorative body 312b is attached to the unit lower cover 311.

The dish center upper decoration body 312a and the dish center lower decoration body 312b of the unit front cover 312 are formed by halving a cylinder having substantially the same thickness (radius) and extending the split surface toward the center in a semicircular shape. It is formed in such a bent shape. The dish center lower decoration 312b extends in a semicircular shape with a large curvature with respect to the dish center upper decoration 312a, and the dish center lower decoration 312b has a slightly thinner thickness than the dish center upper decoration 312a. It is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape. When the unit front cover 312 is assembled in the dish unit 200, the front end of the dish center upper decorative body 312a protrudes forward from the front end of the dish center lower decorative body 312b. Further, in the state of being assembled in the plate unit 200, the left and right ends of the plate center upper decoration unit 312a are continuous with the right end of the plate upper left decoration unit 270 and the left end of the plate upper right decoration unit 275, respectively, and the plate center lower decoration body. The left and right ends of the 312b are continuous with the right end of the lower left decorative unit 280 of the plate and the left end of the lower right decorative unit 285 of the plate. The unit front cover 312 is translucent and is formed in a milky white color.

Further, the unit front cover 312 is assembled to the door frame 3, and the front end thereof is the front end of the door frame 3, and the distance from the front surface of the door frame base 101 to the front end of the unit front cover 312 is the door frame. The distance is about 1/2 of the total width of the base 101 in the left-right direction.

The dish center upper reflector 313 is formed in a semicircular shape that bulges forward, and is inserted and attached from the rear into the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312. The dish center upper reflector 313 blocks the light from the LED mounted on the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 from leaking to the rear (inside). The decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate is formed in a semicircular shape along the decorative body 312a on the center of the plate, and a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light forward (outside) are mounted on the upper surface. The plurality of LEDs of the decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate are full-color LEDs, and the decorative body 312a on the center of the plate can be light-emittingly decorated by emitting light.

The dish center lower reflector 315 is formed in a semicircular shape that bulges forward, and is inserted and attached from the rear into the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312. The dish center lower reflector 315 blocks the light from the LED mounted on the dish center lower decorative substrate 316 from leaking to the rear (inside). The dish center lower decorative substrate 316 is formed in a semicircular shape along the dish center lower decorative body 312b, and a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light forward (outside) are mounted on the upper surface thereof. The plurality of LEDs of the dish center lower decoration substrate 316 are full-color LEDs, and the dish center lower decoration body 312b can be light-emittingly decorated by emitting light.

Since the effect operation unit cover unit 310 does not have a rib for reinforcement in the middle of the dish center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 extending in a semi-arc shape, the dish When the LED of the upper center decorative substrate 314 and the LED of the lower center decorative substrate 316 of the plate are made to emit light, the whole of each can be light-emitting and decorated substantially uniformly, and it can be made to appear as if a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

The front end of the effect operation unit cover unit 310 is greatly projected forward from the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 in a state of being assembled to the plate unit 200. Further, in the effect operation unit cover unit 310, the upper left decorative body 312a of the plate is continuous with the upper left decorative body 271 of the plate and the upper right decorative body 276 of the plate, and the lower upper decorative body 312b of the plate is the lower left decorative body 281 of the plate and the right of the plate. It is continuous with the lower decoration body 286. As a result, the production operation unit 300 is made to stand out, and the appearance is improved by the integrated decoration.

[3-5-5b. Operation unit base]
The operation unit base 320 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. The operation unit base 320 is inserted into the effect operation unit cover unit 310 from above, the lower end is attached to the effect operation unit cover unit 310, and the upper rear end is the effect operation unit attachment of the upper plate body 212 on the plate base unit 210. It is attached to the portion 212a. The operation unit base 320 is formed in the shape of a container with an open upper part.

The operation unit base 320 has a main body portion 321 whose outer shape is formed in a substantially cubic box shape and whose upper part is open, and a main body portion 321 which extends outward from the upper end of the main body portion 321 and has a circular outer circumference. The flange portion 322, the plurality of (four in this case) leg portions 323 protruding downward from the bottom surface of the main body portion 321, and the upper mounting formed at the rear end of the flange portion 322 and attached to the dish base unit 210. A portion 324 and a gear bearing portion 325 that rotatably supports the operation ring transmission gear 350 that penetrates the flange portion 322 and opens upward on the left outer side of the main body portion 321 are provided.

The operation unit base 320 is formed in such a size that the main body unit 321 can accommodate the effect operation button unit 360 inside. The vibration speaker 354 is attached to the bottom wall of the main body 321 from below, and the portion of the lower surface to which the vibration speaker 354 is attached is formed on a flat surface. The bottom wall of the main body 321 is formed so as to easily resonate with the vibration from the vibration speaker 354, and the vibration can be amplified and the vibration can be converted into a sound such as voice or music and output. it can.

The leg portion 361b of the button unit base 361 of the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the upper surface of the bottom wall of the main body portion 321. Further, the main body portion 321 is formed with a through hole on the outer peripheral edge of the bottom wall for discharging the liquid that has entered the main body portion 321. The rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side wall of the main body 321 and the operation unit relay board unit 390 is attached to the outside of the rear side wall.

The outer circumference of the flange portion 322 is formed to have a diameter substantially matching the inner circumference of the decorative body 312a on the center of the dish of the unit front cover 312. The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 and the decorative substrate cover 353 are attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322, and the ring attachment base 331 of the effect operation ring 330 is attached. The lower ends of the plurality of legs 323 are attached to the upper surface of the unit lower cover 311 in the effect operation unit cover unit 310.

The gear bearing portion 325 can rotatably mount the transmission gear for the operation ring around the axis extending to the left and right in cooperation with the gear mounting member. When the operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the gear bearing portion 325, the upper portion of the operation ring transmission gear 350 protrudes upward, and the drive side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350 is a flange portion. Below 322, it is exposed to the outside.

When the operation unit base 320 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the upper surface of the flange portion 322 is located slightly below the upper surface of the dish center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312. Further, in the state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the main body 321 in a state of being in contact with the lower surface.

[3-5-5c. Production operation ring]
The effect operation ring 330 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 55 and 56. FIG. 55 (a) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring of the effect operation unit viewed from the top front, and FIG. 55 (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring viewed from the bottom front. FIG. 56A is an exploded perspective view of the effect operating ring disassembled and viewed from the upper front, and FIG. 56B is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from the lower front. The effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation unit base 320, and has a rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player. The diameter (outer diameter) of the effect operation ring 330 (rotation operation unit 302) is about twice the size of the upper plate 201 in the front-rear direction, and the inner diameter is about 3/5 of the outer diameter. It is formed in an annular shape. In the present embodiment, the outer diameter of the effect operation ring 330 is about 13 cm.

The effect operation ring 330 includes an annular ring mounting base 331 mounted on the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operating portion base 320, an annular rotation base 332 rotatably mounted on the ring mounting base 331, and a rotation base. A plurality of bushes 333 that are rotatably mounted around an axis extending vertically and vertically on the ring mounting base 331 that abuts on the outer peripheral surface of the 332, and that is mounted on the ring mounting base 331 and moves upward of the rotating base 332. It is provided with a regulated ring retaining member 334.

Further, the effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 and is attached to the lower side of the ring outer upper cover 335 and the ring outer upper cover 335 which form a part of the rotation operation unit 302. The ring outer lower cover 336, which forms a part of the rotation operation unit 302, and the ring outer upper cover 335, which are attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 on the inner peripheral side, form a part of the rotation operation unit 302. It is provided with a ring inner cover 337. The ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are each formed in an annular shape having translucency.

The outer diameter of the ring mounting base 331 is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, and the inner diameter is formed to be substantially the same as the inner diameter of the flange portion 322. The ring mounting base 331 is separated from the mounting portion 331a on which the rotary base 332 is slidably mounted on the upper surface side along the inner peripheral edge in the circumferential direction on the outer side of the mounting portion 331a on the upper surface. The boss portion 331b, which protrudes upward in a cylindrical shape from a plurality of (here, four) parts and for rotatably mounting the bush 333, and the mounting portion 331a on the upper surface are spaced apart from each other in the circumferential direction. It is provided with a through-hole 331c that penetrates up and down at a plurality of parts. The plurality of through holes 331c are formed at positions corresponding to the LEDs of the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352.

The outer diameter of the rotary base 332 is slightly smaller than the diameter (outer diameter) of the mounting portion 331a of the ring mounting base 331, and the inner diameter is smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331. The rotary base 332 includes a ring gear 332a that projects downward from the lower surface and extends in the circumferential direction. The ring gear 332a is formed on the bevel gear so as to project downward toward the center side of the rotation base 332. The ring gear 332a is formed to have an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331, and when assembled to the effect operation ring 330, the ring gear 332a faces downward from the inner peripheral side of the ring mounting base 331. The ring gear 332a meshes with the ring-side gear portion 350a of the operation ring transmission gear 350 in a state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 300.

The ring outer upper cover 335 is three-dimensionally formed on the outer upper surface portion 335a and the outer upper surface portion 335a in which the arcs forming the outer and upper parts of the ring extend in an annular shape, and a plurality of ring outer upper covers 335 are arranged in the circumferential direction. The decorative portion 335b is provided, and the outer upper cover mounting portion 335c that extends downward from the inner peripheral end of the outer upper surface portion 335a and then extends toward the center side and is arranged in a plurality of circumferential directions. There is. The outer upper surface portion 335a of the ring outer upper cover 335 is formed in a shape in which an arc in a range of 1/4 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The decorative portion 335b has a hexagonal outer shape. The outer upper cover mounting portion 335c extends slightly downward from the lower end of the outer upper surface portion 335a, and is mounted on the upper surface of the rotation base 332.

The outer lower cover 336 of the ring has an outer lower surface portion 336a in which an arc constituting the outer and lower parts in a circle extends in an annular shape, and the outer lower surface portion 336a projecting upward and toward the center from the inside in the circumferential direction. A plurality of outer and lower cover mounting portions 336b, which are arranged in a plurality of units, are provided. The outer lower surface portion 336a of the ring outer lower cover 336 is formed in a shape in which an arc in a range of 1/8 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The outer lower cover attachment portion 336b is attached to the ring outer upper cover 335.

The ring inner cover 337 is a cylinder having an inner surface portion 337a in which an arc forming an inner and upper portion in a circle extends in an annular shape and a cylinder extending downward in parallel with the central axis from the inner end portion of the inner surface portion 337a. It is provided with a tubular surface portion 337b and an inner cover mounting portion 337c formed on the outer periphery of the tubular surface portion 337b and arranged in a plurality in the circumferential direction. The inner surface portion 337a of the ring inner cover 337 is formed in a shape in which an arc in a range of 1/8 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The cylindrical inner diameter of the cylinder surface portion 337b is the same as the inner diameter of the rotary base 332. The inner cover mounting portion 337c is mounted on the upper surface of the rotation base 332.

When the ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are assembled to the effect operation ring 330, the outer upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a are continuous. The outer upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a form a portion in a range of 1/2 or more of the circle, and the whole is donut-shaped. The effect operation ring 330 can be light-emitting decorated by the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352.

[3-5-5d. Rotation drive unit]
The rotation drive unit 340 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 57 to 59 and the like. FIG. 57A is a perspective view of the rotation drive unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 57B is a perspective view of the rotation drive unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit disassembled and viewed from the front right, and FIG. 59 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit disassembled and viewed from the front left. The rotation drive unit 340 is for rotating the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and detecting the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302. The rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320.

The rotation drive unit 340 includes a rotation drive base 341 attached to the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320, and an operation ring drive motor 342 attached to the rear portion of the right side surface of the rotation drive base 341 so that the rotation shaft projects to the left. , A drive gear 343 attached to the rotating shaft of the operation ring drive motor 342, a transmission gear 344 rotated by the drive gear 343, and a transmission detection gear member rotated by the transmission gear 344 and rotating the operation ring transmission gear 350. A gear cover that rotatably attaches the 345, the transmission gear 344, and the transmission detection gear member 345 to the rotary drive base, and covers the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344, and the transmission detection gear member 345 from the left side. It is equipped with 346 and.

Further, the rotation drive unit 340 includes a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348, which are attached to the gear cover 346 and detect the rotation position of the transmission detection gear member 345, and a first rotation detection sensor 347. And a sensor cover 349 attached to the gear cover 346 so as to cover the second rotation detection sensor 348 from the left side.

The rotary drive base 341 is formed in a shallow box shape that is short in the left-right direction and long in the front-rear direction and is open to the left. The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor. The drive gear 343 is a spur gear. The transmission gear 344 is composed of a spur gear-shaped first gear 344a that meshes with the drive gear, and a spur gear-shaped second gear 344b that rotates integrally with the first gear 344a and is formed to have a large diameter. There is. The second gear 344b of the transmission gear 344 meshes with the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345.

The transmission detection gear member 345 has a gear portion 345a having a diameter larger than that of the transmission gear 344 (twice the diameter of the second gear 344b) and a gear portion 345a projecting to the left from the left side surface of the gear portion 345a in the circumferential direction. A plurality of detection pieces 345b, which are arranged in a row at regular intervals, are provided. The gear portion 345a meshes with the second gear 344b of the transmission gear 344 and also meshes with the drive side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350. The plurality of detection pieces 345b have the same length as the interval in which the length in the circumferential direction is separated in the circumferential direction. In the present embodiment, eight detection pieces 345b are arranged in the circumferential direction at intervals of a rotation angle of 45 degrees. These detection pieces 345b are detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345b of the transmission detection gear member 345. The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are arranged so as to be spaced apart from each other in the circumferential direction at intervals different from an integral multiple with respect to the interval of the detection pieces 345b arranged in the circumferential direction. In this embodiment, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are separated by a rotation angle of 101.25 degrees. As a result, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 do not detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing, and one of them first detects the detection piece 345b. It has become like. Thereby, the rotation direction and the rotation speed of the rotation operation unit 302 in the effect operation ring 330 can be detected via the transmission detection gear member 345.

In the assembled state of the rotary drive unit 340, the upper portion of the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345 is exposed upward, and the exposed portion of the gear portion 345a is the drive side gear portion 350b of the transmission gear 350 for the operation ring. To mesh with. Further, the rotation drive unit 340 is entirely located in the effect operation unit cover unit 310 in a state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 300.

The rotation drive unit 340 arbitrarily drives the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 via the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344, the transmission detection gear member 345, and the operation ring transmission gear by driving the operation ring drive motor 342. Can be rotated in the direction of. Further, the rotation drive unit 340 can reciprocate and vibrate the rotation operation unit 302 by repeating forward rotation and reverse rotation of the drive gear 343 by the operation ring drive motor 342 within a range of a predetermined rotation angle. it can.

Further, in the rotation drive unit 340, when the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is rotated by the player, the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates via the operation ring transmission gear 350, and the transmission detection gear member 345 The detection piece 345b is detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and can detect the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302. Therefore, the content of the player participation type effect can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302.

Further, in the rotation drive unit 340, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, the operation ring is driven in the same direction as the rotation operation. By driving the motor 342, the player's rotation operation can be assisted, and by driving the operation ring drive motor 342 in the direction opposite to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302, the player's rotation operation Can be loaded. Therefore, by appropriately combining these, it is possible to give the rotation operation unit 302 an operation feeling or a click feeling according to the content of the player participation type production.

[3-5-5e. Transmission gear for operation ring]
The operation ring transmission gear 350 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. The operation ring transmission gear 350 transmits rotation between the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 and the rotation base 332 of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330, and is a gear of the operation unit base 320. It is rotatably attached to the bearing portion 325.

The transmission gear 350 for the operation ring rotates integrally with the ring-side gear portion 350a in the shape of a bevel gear that meshes with the ring gear 332a in the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330 and the ring-side gear portion 350a to detect transmission of the rotation drive unit 340. A spur gear-shaped drive-side gear portion 350b that meshes with the gear portion 345a of the gear member 345 is provided. The ring-side gear portion 350a and the drive-side gear portion 350b have pitch circles having the same diameter. The bevel gear-shaped ring-side gear portion 350a is narrowed in the direction of the rotation axis of the rotation base 332.

The operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the operation unit base 320 so that the rotation axis extends in the left-right direction and intersects the rotation axis of the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330. The transmission gear 350 for the operation ring is rotatably attached to the operation unit base 320 by being inserted into the gear bearing portion 325 of the operation unit base 320 from above and then the gear attachment member 351 is attached to the operation unit base 320. Be done.

In the state where the operation ring transmission gear 350 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the ring side gear portion 350a meshes with the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 in the effect operation ring 330, and the drive side gear portion 350b It meshes with the gear portion 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345 in the rotation drive unit 340. Therefore, the operation ring transmission gear 350 can transmit the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 to the rotation drive unit 340 side, and can also transmit the rotation drive of the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340. It can be transmitted to the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and rotated.

[3-5-5f. Production operation ring decorative board]
The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface. The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 is attached below the effect operation ring 330, and the effect operation ring 330 (rotation operation unit 302) can be light-emitting and decorated by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 is formed in a form in which an annulus is divided into front and rear parts, and is composed of a front decorative substrate 352a on the front side and a rear decorative substrate 352b on the rear side. A plurality of LEDs are arranged in rows along the outer periphery on each of the upper surfaces of the front decorative substrate 352a and the rear decorative substrate 352b. The plurality of LEDs of the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 are full-color LEDs.

The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 is located below the ring mounting base 331 of the effect operation ring 330 in a state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 300. The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 is covered with a decorative substrate cover 353 whose upper side is transparent. The decorative substrate cover 353 is formed in a front and rear divided form like the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352, and covers the front decorative substrate 352a from above and is attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320. It is composed of 353a and a rear substrate cover 353b that covers the rear decorative substrate 352b from above and is attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation unit base 320.

The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 emits light from a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface, thereby passing through the decorative substrate cover 353 and the through port 331c of the ring mounting base 331, and above the ring forming the rotation operation unit 302. The cover 335, the ring outer and lower covers 336, and the ring inner cover 337 can be light-emitting decorated from the inside. Therefore, it is possible to show the player a light emitting decoration as if an LED is provided in the rotation operation unit 302.

[3-5-5 g. Vibration speaker]
The vibration speaker 354 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. The vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 with the output direction facing upward, and can output vibrations of various frequencies in addition to sounds such as voice and music. Is.

The vibration speaker 354 can output a sound (sound) such as voice or music by vibrating the bottom wall of the operation unit base 320 as a diaphragm. Further, the vibration speaker 354 can vibrate the entire effect operation unit 300 via the operation unit base 320. At this time, the player feels as if the effect operation unit 300 trembled. The vibration speaker 354 can generate vibrations of various frequencies as compared with a vibration device that rotates an eccentric weight with a motor, and can provide a player with a wider variety of effects.

The vibration speaker 354 is intended to give sound information to vibrate the effect operation unit 301, and gives sound information so that vibration can be obtained by resonance. Here, in resonating, since it depends on the characteristics of the vibration speaker 354 attached to the game machine, the material and hardness of the member to which the vibration speaker is attached, and the attachment method, sound information of only a specific frequency should be input. In that case, vibration may not be obtained without resonance due to variations in characteristics. In the present embodiment, in order to absorb the variation in these characteristics, the frequency of the sound information to be input is not a single frequency but is input as a frequency having a width. Specifically, a sine wave of 40 Hz ± 2 Hz and 38 Hz to 42 Hz are changed (sweep) 8 times per second in 1 Hz units for each cycle. This is intermittently input by sweeping for 1 second, and then input again after 1 second.

In the assembly work of the gaming machine, the RAM clear switch provided on the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 that controls the progress of the game is operated for the inspection (operation check) of the vibration speaker at the time of shipment. It is supposed to be done based on. Specifically, when the inspector operates the RAM clear switch within a predetermined period when the power of the game machine is turned on (or when the inspector turns on the power of the game machine while operating the RAM clear switch), the main control board 1310 transmits (outputs) a command to clear and initialize the RAM to the peripheral control board of the peripheral control unit 1500, which will be described later. Upon receiving this command, the peripheral control board performs a vibration speaker operation confirmation process for inspecting (operation confirmation) the vibration speaker. By this vibration speaker operation confirmation process, the inspector can confirm the sound (sound) such as voice and music by the vibration speaker 354, and can also confirm the vibration of the effect operation unit 300 by the vibration speaker 354. ..

[3-5-5h. Production operation button unit]
The effect operation button unit 360 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 60 to 62 and the like. FIG. 60 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit of the effect operation unit disassembled and viewed from the front upper side, and FIG. 61 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit disassembled and viewed from the front lower side. FIG. 62 (a) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is in the descending position, and FIG. 62 (b) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is in the ascending position. The effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to face the inside of the ring of the effect operation ring 330, and has a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. The pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation button unit 360 is composed of a cylindrical central pressing operation unit 303a and a cylindrical outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b formed so as to cover the outer circumference of the central pressing operation unit 303a. ing.

The effect operation button unit 360 has a substantially circular outer circumference, and is arranged on a target with the button unit base 361 mounted in the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 and the central axis of the button unit base 361 as a boundary. A disk-shaped guide shaft 362 that extends upward in a columnar shape and the upper ends of the pair of guide shafts 362 are connected to each other and the outer circumference is formed in a circular shape smaller than the button unit base 361. It is attached to the upper base 363, the upper base 363, and the button unit base 361 so as to be movable in the vertical direction by a pair of guide shafts 362, and the outer circumference is formed in a circular shape having substantially the same size as the button unit base 361. It is provided with a disk-shaped elevating base 364 and a pair of elevating springs 365 through which a pair of guide shafts 362 are inserted and urging the elevating base 364 upward.

Further, the effect operation button unit 360 has a central shaft 366 that extends upward from the center of the button unit base 361 in a columnar shape and whose upper end is attached to the upper base 363, and a rotation shaft on the lower surface of the button unit base 361. The operation button elevating drive motor 367 attached so as to project upward, the spur gear-shaped elevating drive gear 368 attached to the rotating shaft of the operation button elevating drive motor 367, and the elevating drive gear 368 mesh with each other. A spur gear-shaped driven gear 369 rotatably attached to the upper side of the cage button unit base 361, and an elevating cam drive gear member rotatably attached by inserting a central shaft 366 rotated by the driven gear 369. The 370, the elevating cam drive gear member 370 and the lower end are connected, and the central shaft 366 is inserted and rotatably attached, and the elevating cam member 371 that elevates and elevates the elevating base 364 by rotating, and the elevating drive gear. It includes a 368, a driven gear 369, and a disk-shaped gear cover 372 attached to the upper side of the button unit base 361 so as to cover the elevating cam drive gear member 370 from above.

Further, the effect operation button unit 360 is formed in a bottomed tubular shape having an inner diameter larger than that of the upper base and extending vertically, and is mounted on the upper side of the elevating base 364 so as to be movable in the vertical direction by a pair of guide shafts 362. The center button body 373, the pair of button springs 374 that are arranged between the center button body 373 and the elevating base 364 and urging the center button body 373 upward, and the center button body 373 are substantially the same. The central button cover 375, which is formed in a bottomed tubular shape with the upper end side closed by diameter and is attached to the upper end of the central button body 373 so as to cover the upper part of the upper base 363, and is attached to the upper surface of the upper base 363. It is provided with a central button decorative substrate 376 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light upward are mounted. In the effect operation button unit 360, the central button main body 373 and the central button cover 375 form a central pressing operation unit 303a.

Further, the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to a portion of the upper surface of the elevating base 364 outside the central button body 373, and has an annular outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface, and an outer circumference. The outer peripheral board cover 378 attached to the elevating base 364 so as to cover the upper side of the button decorative board 377 and the outer circumference of the central button main body 373, and the portion of the outer peripheral board cover 378 that covers the outer circumference of the central button main body 373. A cylindrical outer peripheral decorative lens 379 that is arranged above the outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377 on the outer peripheral side and has a three-dimensional decoration and has translucency, and moves up and down so as to cover the outer circumference and the upper surface of the outer peripheral decorative lens 379. It is attached to the base 364 and has a transparent outer peripheral button cover 380 in which the central button cover 375 faces upward in the center. The effect operation button unit 360 includes an outer peripheral substrate cover 378, an outer peripheral decorative lens 379, and an outer peripheral button cover 380, and constitutes an outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b.

Further, the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the button unit base 361 and is attached to the pressure detection sensor 381 that detects the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303, and is attached to the button unit base 361 and is attached to the elevating cam drive gear member 370. It is provided with an elevating detection sensor 382 that detects the elevating of the elevating base 364 by detecting the rotation position.

The button unit base 361 includes a base body 361a formed in a disk shape, and a plurality of leg portions 361b protruding downward from the base body 361a. The outer diameter of the base main body 361a of the button unit base 361 is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner peripheral diameter of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320. A pair of guide shafts 362, a central shaft 366, a driven gear 369, an elevating cam drive gear member 370, and a gear cover 372 are attached to the upper surface of the base body 361a, and a pressure detection sensor 381 and an elevating detection sensor 382 are attached to the lower surface. Is installed. The lower end of the leg portion 361b of the button unit base 361 is attached to the bottom wall of the main body portion 321 of the operation portion base 320.

The pair of guide shafts 362 are attached to the upper surface of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361 from the center to the front and rear at a distance of half the diameter of the base body 361a, respectively. The pair of guide shafts 362 and the central shaft 366 are formed of metal rods. The pair of guide shafts 362 are formed thicker than the central shaft 366.

The outer diameter of the upper base 363 is formed to be about ½ of the outer diameter of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361. The pair of elevating springs 365 are coil springs, the lower end of which is in contact with the base body 361a of the button unit base 361, and the upper end of which is in contact with the elevating base 364. The elevating spring 365 is a spring having a stronger urging force than the button spring 374.

The elevating base 364 is formed so that the outer diameter is substantially the same as the outer diameter of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361. The elevating base 364 includes a pair of guide holes 364a into which a pair of guide shafts 362 are slidably inserted, and a central hole 364b in which the elevating cam member 371 penetrates vertically in a size that allows the elevating cam member 371 to pass therethrough. A vertical wall portion 364c protruding upward from the peripheral edge of the central hole 364b in a cylindrical shape, and a pair of guide pins 364d protruding upward from the peripheral edge of the central hole 364b so as to face each other in the central hole 364b near the lower end of the vertical wall portion 364c. There is. The pair of guide pins 364d face each other on the same shaft core and are rotatably attached around the shaft core.

The elevating base 364 is guided so as to be able to move up and down in the vertical direction by inserting a pair of guide shafts 362 into the pair of guide holes 364a. The elevating base 364 is restricted from moving upward by the upper end of the vertical wall portion 364c coming into contact with the upper base 363, and at the same time, a space where the bottom 373b of the central button body 373 can move is provided between the elevating base 364 and the upper base 363. Is forming. Further, the elevating base 364 is moved in the vertical direction by a pair of guide pins 364d being guided by the cam portion 371a of the elevating cam member 371.

The elevating cam drive gear member 370 includes a spur gear-shaped gear portion 370a that meshes with the driven gear 369, a connecting portion 370b that protrudes upward from the gear portion 370a and connects the lower end of the elevating cam member 371, and a gear portion 370a. It is provided with an elevating detection piece 370c, which protrudes downward from the top in a tubular shape and has two notches facing each other and is detected by the elevating detection sensor 382. The elevating cam drive gear member 370 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 into the center of the gear portion 370a.

The elevating cam member 371 is rotatably attached by inserting the central shaft 366 in the center. The elevating cam member 371 includes a pair of cam portions 371a that are separated by 180 degrees in the circumferential direction on the outer peripheral surface of the columnar column and protrude outward. The pair of cam portions 371a guide the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364.

The cam portion 371a is one of a first cam 371b extending in a direction perpendicular to the axis near the lower end, a locking portion 371c recessed upward in the middle of the first cam 371b, and one of the first cam 371b. A second cam 371d extending upward from the end in parallel with the shaft core, and a third cam 371e spirally extending upward from the end of the first cam 371b opposite to the second cam 371d. (See FIG. 62). The second cam 371d and the third cam 371e extend upward to the same height, and are separated from each other by a distance smaller than the diameter of the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 between the adjacent cam portions 371a.

Further, the elevating cam member 371 is provided with a connected portion 371f connected to the connecting portion 370b of the elevating cam drive gear member 370 at the lower end.

The elevating cam member 371 extends upward from the rear end side of the first cam 371b in the cam portion 371a when the second cam 371d rotates the elevating cam member 371 in the counterclockwise direction in a plan view. It is formed like this. By rotating the elevating cam member 371, the elevating base 364 can be moved up and down by guiding the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 by the cam portion 371a.

The center button body 373 is a pair of guide shafts that penetrate the cylindrical cylinder portion 373a extending vertically, the bottom portion 373b that closes the lower end side of the cylinder portion 373a, and the bottom portion 373b. A pair of guide holes 373c into which the 362 is slidably inserted, a central opening 373d penetrating at the center of the bottom 373b with a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the vertical wall portion 364c of the elevating base 364, and downward from the bottom 373b. It includes a pressure detection piece 373e that protrudes and is detected by the pressure detection sensor 381, and a pair of guide bosses 373f that protrude rearward from the bottom 373b and are inserted into the button spring 374.

The central button main body 373 is formed in a bottomed tubular shape by a tubular portion 373a and a bottom portion 373b. The central button body 373 is formed so that the bottom portion 373b is arranged between the upper base 363 and the elevating base 364, and the upper end of the tubular portion 373a projects upward from the upper base 363. The central opening 373d is formed in a cylindrical shape extending downward shortly, and the lower end abuts on the upper surface of the elevating base 364 to restrict the downward movement of the central button main body 373. The upper end of the vertical wall portion 364c of the elevating base 364 comes into contact with the upper base 363 through the central opening 373d of the central button main body 373.

The central button body 373 is urged upward by a pair of button springs 374 through which a pair of guide bosses 373f are inserted. The pair of guide bosses 373f are formed so that the lower end penetrates the elevating base 364 and extends downward, and a screw having a washer inserted is attached to the lower end. The washer attached to the lower end of the guide boss 373f comes into contact with the lower surface of the elevating base 364, thereby restricting the upward movement of the center button body 373.

The pressure detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 is a lifting base when the bottom portion 373b (lower end of the central port 373d) of the center button body 373 abuts on the upper surface of the lifting base 364 against the urging force of the pair of button springs 374. It is formed so as to penetrate 364 and project downward. The central button body 373 is opaquely formed. The pair of button springs 374 are coil springs having a weaker urging force than the elevating spring 365.

The central button cover 375 includes a disk-shaped top plate portion 375a having substantially the same diameter as the tubular portion 373a of the central button main body 373, and a tubular peripheral wall portion 375b extending downward from the outer periphery of the top plate portion 375a. It is provided and is formed to have translucency. The central button cover 375 is formed in a bottomed tubular shape by the top plate portion 375a and the peripheral wall portion 375b. The lower end of the peripheral wall portion 375b of the central button cover 375 is attached to the upper end of the tubular portion 373a of the central button main body 373.

In the central button decorative board 376, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface are full-color LEDs. The central button decoration substrate 376 can make the central button cover 375 emit light by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs. In the outer peripheral button decorative substrate 377, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface are full-color LEDs. The outer peripheral button decoration substrate 377 can illuminate and decorate the outer peripheral decorative lens 379 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The outer peripheral board cover 378 covers the upper side of the outer peripheral button decorative board 377 and has an annular board portion 378a attached to the elevating base 364 and a cylindrical board portion 378a extending upward from the inner circumference of the central button body 373. It is provided with a cylindrical portion 378b that covers the outer periphery. The outer peripheral substrate cover 378 is formed transparently.

In the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, twisted portions extending so as to move in the circumferential direction toward the upward direction are arranged in a row at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer peripheral decorative lens 379 is attached to the upper side of the substrate portion 378a of the outer peripheral substrate cover 378. The outer peripheral button cover 380 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 380a that covers the outer periphery of the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, and an annular annular portion 380b that extends from the upper end of the tubular portion 380a toward the center. The lower end of the tubular portion 380a of the outer peripheral button cover 380 is attached to the elevating base 364. The inner diameter of the annular portion 380b is formed to be substantially the same as that of the cylindrical portion 378b of the outer peripheral substrate cover 378.

In the assembled state of the effect operation button unit 360, as shown in FIG. 62A, the elevating base 364 is urged upward by the pair of elevating springs 365, and the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 It is inserted from below into the locking portion 371c of the cam portion 371a of the elevating cam member 371. In this state, the elevating base 364 is in the descending position where the elevating base 364 is moved downward, and the pair of elevating springs 365 are compressed. Further, in this state, the central button body 373 is located at the upward moving end due to the urging force of the button spring 374, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 projects upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. It has become.

Therefore, in the state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrudes slightly upward from the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. Also protrudes upward (see FIG. 63 and the like).

In this state (state of FIG. 62A), when the central button cover 375 (center pressing operation unit 303a) is pressed downward and moved downward against the urging force of the button spring 374, the central button main body 373 The pressing detection piece 373e is detected by the pressing detection sensor 381, and the pressing operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a is detected. When the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed, the upper surface of the central button cover 375 has a height that substantially coincides with the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 (see FIG. 65 (c)).

Further, in this state, even if the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b) is pressed downward, the outer peripheral button cover 380 does not move downward, and the pressing detection piece 373e of the central button main body 373 presses. It is not detected by the detection sensor 381. That is, the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is not detected.

In this lowered position, when the lift drive gear 368 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the plan view by the operation button lift drive motor 367, the lift cam is driven via the driven gear 369 meshing with the lift drive gear 368. The gear member 370 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in a plan view, and the elevating cam member 371 connected to the elevating cam drive gear member 370 also rotates in the same direction. When the elevating cam member 371 rotates in the counterclockwise direction, the cam portion 371a seen in the front in FIG. 62 moves to the right, and the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 moves from the locking portion 371c to the third. The cam 371b rolls to the left side of the locking portion 371c, and the elevating base 364 moves downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

Then, when the guide pin 364d that rolls relatively to the left along the first cam 371b with the rotation of the elevating cam member 371 is located from the left end of the first cam 371b to the second cam 371d side, the second cam Since the second cam 371d extends vertically upward with respect to the first cam 371b, the guide pin 364d moves upward along the second cam 371d due to the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the guide pin 364d and the guide pin 364d At the same time, the elevating base 364 rises and is in the ascending position.

In the raised position, as shown in FIG. 62B, the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 is in contact with the second cam 371d of one cam portion 371a and the third cam 371e of the remaining cam portion 371a. It is in a state. In this state, the drive of the operation button elevating drive motor 367 is temporarily stopped.

In the raised position, the upper end of the vertical wall portion 364c of the elevating base 364 is in contact with the lower surface of the upper base 363, and the elevating base 364 is restricted from moving further upward. Further, in the raised position, the positional relationship between the central button cover 375 (center pressing operation unit 303a) and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b) in the lowered position is maintained, and the central button cover 375 is maintained. The entire pressing operation unit 303 including the outer peripheral button cover 380 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 are moved upward, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 projects upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380.

When the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 are moved to the ascending position in the state of being assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 are in a state of protruding more than the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330 (FIG. 65 (b) and the like). reference).

When the center button cover 375 (center pressing operation unit 303a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the urging force of the button spring 374 in this raised position, the center button cover 375 and the center button body 373 are attached with the button spring 374. It moves downward against the force, and the central button body 373 comes into contact with the elevating base 364. In the state where the center button main body 373 is in contact with the elevating base 364, the pressure detection piece 373e of the central button main body 373 is in a state of protruding downward from the elevating base 364, but the elevating base 364 is the button unit base 361. Since the pressure detection piece 373e is separated from the pressure detection sensor 381, the pressure detection piece 373e is not detected by the pressure detection sensor 381.

When the central button cover 375 (center pressing operation unit 303a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the urging force of the elevating spring 365, the center button cover 375 and the center button body 373 resist the urging force of the button spring 374. After the central button body 373 comes into contact with the elevating base 364, the elevating base 364 moves downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the lower end of the elevating base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361. Become. When the elevating base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361, the elevating base 364 is in the lowered position, and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b) is also in the lowered position together with the elevating base 364.

In this way, when the elevating base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361 while the central button body 373 is in contact with the elevating base 364, the pressure detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 protruding downward from the elevating base 364e. Is detected by the press detection sensor 381, and the press of the center button cover 375 (center press operation unit 303a) is detected.

On the other hand, when the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b) is pressed downward by a force lower than the urging force of the elevating spring 365 in the raised position, the elevating base 364 is moved to the elevating spring via the outer peripheral button cover 380. It moves downward against the urging force of 365, and the lower end of the elevating base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361. In this state, the outer peripheral button cover 380 is in the lowered position together with the elevating base 364, but since the central button cover 375 (center pressing operation unit 303a) protrudes upward due to the urging force of the button spring 374, the center button main body The press detection piece 373e of 373 does not protrude downward from the elevating base 364, and the press detection piece 373e is not detected by the press detection sensor 381.

To return the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (pressing operation unit 303) from the ascending position to the descending position, the elevating cam member 371 is rotated counterclockwise in a plan view by the operation button elevating drive motor 367. Then, in FIG. 62B, the third cam 371e, which is in contact with the upper left of the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364, moves to the right (in the direction of the guide pin 364d), so that the third cam The guide pin 364d is pressed downward by the 371e, and the elevating base 364 moves downward against the urging force of the elevating spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

Then, when the guide pin 364d moves from the lower end of the third cam 371e to the first cam 371b side with the rotation of the elevating cam member 371, the downward movement of the elevating base 364 stops and the guide pin 364d moves to the first cam. It rolls along 371b. After that, when the guide pin 364d reaches the position of the locking portion 371c in the middle of the first cam 371b, the guide pin 364d is inserted into the locking portion 371c recessed upward by the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the operation is performed. By stopping the rotation of the elevating cam member 371 by the button elevating drive motor 367, the original descending position is restored.

[3-5-5i. Operation unit relay board unit]
The operation unit relay board unit 390 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 53 and 54. The operation unit relay board unit 390 is attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320. The operation unit relay board unit 390 includes a box-shaped substrate box 391 attached to the rear surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320, and an operation unit relay board 392 installed in the substrate box 391.

The board box 391 has a motor cover portion 391a that covers the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340 from the rear side when assembled into the effect operation unit 300. The operation unit relay board 392 includes a decorative substrate 314 on the center of the plate, a decorative substrate 316 below the center of the plate, an operation ring drive motor 342, a first rotation detection sensor 347, a second rotation detection sensor 348, an effect operation ring decorative substrate 352, and a vibration speaker. 354, operation button elevating drive motor 367, center button decorative board 376, outer peripheral button decorative board 377, pressure detection sensor 381, elevating detection sensor 382, and relaying the connection between the dish unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210 There is.

[3-5-5j. Action of production operation unit]
Next, the operation of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 63 to 65 and the like. FIG. 63 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the rotation drive unit in the left side view of the effect operation unit. FIG. 64 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the effect operation ring decorative substrate in a plan view of the effect operation unit viewed from the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit. FIG. 65A is a front view of the plate unit shown in a normal state, FIG. 65B is a front view of the plate unit when the pressing operation unit is in the raised position, and FIG. 65C is a central pressing of the pressing operation unit. It is a front view of the dish unit when the operation part is pressed.

The effect operation unit 300 is provided with an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player on the upper surface. The effect operation unit 301 is composed of a large annular rotation operation unit 302 and a pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302. The pressing operation unit 303 is an annular outer peripheral pressing operation unit arranged between the columnar central pressing operation unit 303a located at the center of the rotation operation unit 302 and the central pressing operation unit 303a and the rotation operation unit 302. It is composed of 303b.

The rotation operation unit 302 is formed by a ring outer upper cover 335, a ring outer lower cover 336, and a ring inner cover 337 of the effect operation ring 330. The central pressing operation unit 303a is formed by the central button cover 375 and the central button main body 373 of the effect operation button unit 360, and the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is formed by the outer peripheral button cover 380 and the outer peripheral substrate cover 378.

The effect operation unit 300 is assembled to the dish unit 200 in a state of being inclined so that the front side of the virtual plane formed by the upper surface of the annular rotation operation unit 302 (effect operation ring 330) is lowered. Therefore, the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring of the rotation operating unit 302 is inclined so as to move backward as it goes downward (in other words, it moves forward as it goes upward). ..

In the normal state, the effect operation unit 300 is in a state in which the pressing operation unit 303 slightly protrudes upward from the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302. Specifically, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 slightly protrudes upward from the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 protrudes upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. (See Fig. 63, etc.).

In this normal state, when the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated clockwise by the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340 in the left side view, the effect operation ring 330 is passed through the operation ring transmission gear 350. The rotation operation unit 302 of the above rotates in the clockwise direction in a plan view. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the left side view by the operation ring drive motor 342, the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in the plan view. ..

The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor, and the rotation operation unit 302 can be reciprocally rotated to vibrate by repeating forward rotation and reverse rotation within a predetermined rotation angle range. This vibration is different from the vibration caused by the vibration speaker 354, and only the rotation operation unit 302 vibrates.

The rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be rotated not only by the operation ring drive motor 342 but also by the player. When the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated in the clockwise direction in the plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 is rotated in the clockwise direction in the left side view via the transmission gear 350 for the operation ring and rotates. When the operation unit 302 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in the left side view. The transmission detection gear member 345 detects rotation by two sensors, a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348.

The rotation of the transmission detection gear member 345 is detected by detecting a plurality of detection pieces 345b by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348. More specifically, the distance between the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, which are separated in the circumferential direction, is equal to the distance between the plurality of detection pieces 345b arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. , The interval is not an integral multiple. As a result, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are configured so as not to detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing.

In the present embodiment, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates in the clockwise direction in the left side view, the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b, and then the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b. To do. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates in the counterclockwise direction in the left side view, the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b, and then the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b. Detect. Therefore, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 can detect the rotation direction of the transmission detection gear member 345 (rotation operation unit 302) in the order of detecting the detection piece 345b. Further, the rotation speed of the transmission detection gear member 345 (rotation operation unit 302) can be detected by the detection time of the detection piece 345b in the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

In this way, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected, the content of the player participation type effect can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302. Further, when the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is detected, the operation ring drive motor 342 drives the rotation operation unit 302 to rotate in the same direction as the rotation operation direction, so that the rotation operation can be lightened and assisted. At the same time, the rotation operation unit 302 is rotationally driven in the direction opposite to the rotation operation direction by the operation ring drive motor 342, so that the rotation operation can be made heavy and a click feeling can be imparted.

The rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is formed by a ring outer upper cover 335, a ring outer lower cover 336, and a ring inner cover 337, and is formed in a shape in which an arc of more than half of a circle extends in an annular shape. ing. In other words, the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in a donut shape. As shown in the figure, the rotation operation unit 302 is attached in a state where the outer peripheral surface, the upper surface, and a part of the inner peripheral surface are exposed, so that the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in a shape that can be easily grasped by the player's hand. ..

As a result, the player can touch the rotation operation unit 302 from various directions, so that the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated in a way that is easy for the player to do, and the rotation operation unit 302 can be operated. The sex is enhanced. Further, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated when the pressing operation unit 303 is in either the lower position or the ascending position. Since the lower surface side of the rotation operation unit 302 is attached to the operation unit base 320, the rotation operation unit 302 cannot be gripped like the steering wheel of an automobile.

As shown in FIG. 64, the effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 in which a plurality of LEDs are arranged in an annular shape below the effect operation ring 330. As a result, the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be light-emitting and decorated by emitting the LED of the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352. Further, in the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352, since a plurality of LEDs are arranged in a ring along the rotation operation unit 302, the plurality of LEDs arranged in a row are sequentially arranged according to the rotation of the rotation operation unit 302. By emitting light, it is possible to illuminate and decorate only a specific portion of the rotating rotation operation unit 302. This makes it possible for the player to have the illusion that an LED (decorative substrate) is provided in the rotating rotation operation unit 302.

In the normal state of the effect operation unit 300, as shown in FIG. 65 (a), the pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 has an upper surface thereof more than the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302. It is in a descending position that protrudes slightly upward. In this state, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated, and the central pressing operation unit 303a in the pressing operation unit 303 can be pressed. When the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed downward, the upper surface of the central pressing operation unit 303a (center button cover 375) is lowered to substantially the same height as the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b (outer peripheral button cover 380), and the pressure is detected. Pressing is detected by the sensor 381.

In this normal (lowering position) state, even if the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b in the pressing operation unit 303 is pressed downward, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b (outer peripheral button cover 380) does not move downward, and the pressure is detected. The pressure is not detected by the sensor 381.

In a normal state, when the elevating cam member 371 is rotated in the counterclockwise direction in a plan view by the operation button elevating drive motor 367, the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 is disengaged from the cam portion 371a (first cam 371b). Then, due to the urging force of the pair of elevating springs 365, the pressing operation unit 303 vigorously protrudes upward together with the elevating base 364 to be in the ascending position (see FIG. 65 (b)). In this raised position, the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 303 is located above the upper surface of the rotation operating unit 302. In other words, the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 project significantly upward from the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330.

When the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed downward while the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, the central pressing operation unit 303a first moves downward against the urging force of the button spring 374, and the central pressing operation unit 303a The upper surface and the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b are in a state of substantially the same height. In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 does not detect the pressure. Further, the central pressing operation unit 303a moves downward together with the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the upper surfaces of the central pressing operation unit 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b are the rotation operation unit 302. It is in a state of substantially the same height as the upper surface (see FIG. 65 (c)). In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 detects the pressure.

Further, when the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is pressed downward while the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, the upper surface of the central pressing operation unit 303a remains projected upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b. The outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b and the central pressing operation unit 303a move downward, and the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is in a state of substantially the same height as the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 (see FIG. 65 (a)). .. In this state, the pressure detection sensor 381 does not detect the pressure.

As described above, the pressing operation unit 303 of the present embodiment is not detected by the pressing detection sensor 381 unless the central pressing operation unit 303a is pressed to the downward moving end regardless of the descending position or the ascending position. ing. Therefore, since it is possible to urge the player to firmly press the central pressing operation unit 303a, it is possible to draw attention to the operation of the effect operation unit 301 in the player participation type production. , Player participation type production can be more enjoyed.

The rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated even when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position. Therefore, when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, depending on the player, the rotation operation becomes easier by using the pressing operation unit 303 as a clue, or the pressing operation unit 303 becomes an obstacle and the rotation operation becomes difficult. Therefore, the operability of the rotation operation unit 302 can be changed, and a wider variety of operations can be enjoyed.

[3-6. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 66 to 68. FIG. 66A is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 66B is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 67 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 68 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. The door frame left side unit 400 is attached to the front left portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the plate unit 200, and decorates the left outer side of the game area 5a in the front view.

The door frame left side unit 400 is attached to the front surface of the door frame left side base 401 and the door frame left side base 401 attached to the left outer side of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100. A door frame left side decorative board 402 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the cage, and a left side reflector 403 attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the door frame left side decorative board 402. A door frame left side decorative body 404 attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the left side reflector 403 is provided.

The door frame left side base 401 extends vertically and is formed in a box shape that is open forward. The door frame left side decorative substrate 402 is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically, and is composed of a left side upper decorative substrate 402a and a left side lower decorative substrate 402b. In the door frame left side decorative board 402, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full-color LEDs. The door frame left side decorative substrate 402 can illuminate and decorate the door frame left side decorative body 404 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The left side reflector 403 has a through hole 403a formed in the front and rear at a position corresponding to the LED mounted on the door frame left side decorative substrate 402. The door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a milky white color having translucency. The door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a form in which a semicircle bulging forward extends vertically. As a result, the door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is open to the rear.

The lower end of the door frame left side unit 400 is formed so as to be continuous with the left end of the dish upper left decorative unit 271 of the dish upper left decorative unit 270 in the dish unit 200, and the upper end is formed so as to be continuous with the left end of the dish upper left decorative unit 270 and the upper end of the door frame top unit 450 door frame top decorative body 453. It is formed so as to be continuous with the lower left end of the door.

The door frame left side unit 400 is formed so that the width in the left-right direction and the depth in the front-rear direction are substantially the same distance. The door frame left side unit 400 is assembled on the door frame 3 and decorates the left outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101, so that it looks as if a columnar fluorescent lamp is embedded in the door frame left side unit 400.

[3-7. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 410 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 69 to 71. FIG. 69A is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 69B is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit viewed from the rear. FIG. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 71 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from the rear. The door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the front right portion of the door frame base unit 100 on the upper side of the plate unit 200, and decorates the right outer side of the game area 5a in the front view.

The door frame right side unit 410 extends forward in a flat plate shape from the right side of the door frame 3 to substantially the same position as the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200, and the side window 410a penetrates in the left-right direction. And, a plurality of light emitting side window interior decoration portions 410b arranged in the side window 410a are provided. The door frame right side unit 410 makes it difficult to see the inside of the game area of the pachinko machine arranged on the right side in a game hall or the like where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, or a player playing a game with the pachinko machine on the right side. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult to see the inside of the game area 5a of the pachinko machine 1, and it is possible to form a personal space for the player that protects the privacy of the game.

The door frame right side unit 410 is a door frame right side base 411 attached to the right outside of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 and extending vertically, and a door frame right side base 411. A side window interior decoration member 412 having a plurality of side window interior decoration members 410b mounted on the front surface and extending forward in a cylindrical shape and arranged vertically, and a plurality of sides of the side window interior decoration member 412 on the front surface. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on the portion corresponding to the window interior decoration portion 410b, and the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 attached to the front side of the door frame right side base 411 and a plurality of side window interior decoration members 412. It is provided with an internal reflector 414, which is inserted into each of the side window interior decoration portions 410b.

Further, the door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the right side reflector 415, which is arranged in front of the front end of the side window interior decorative member 412 and extends vertically, and the door frame right side base 411, and is attached to the door frame. A door that extends in a flat plate shape in the vertical and front-rear directions so as to cover the right side surface of the right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415, and also has a through opening 416a that penetrates in the left-right direction and constitutes a side window 410a. It is attached to the frame right side outer panel 416, the door frame right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415, and is flattened in the vertical and front-rear directions so as to cover the left side surfaces of the door frame right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415. It is provided with an inner panel on the right side of the door frame and 417, which extend in a shape and penetrate in the left-right direction to form a through opening 417a forming a side window 410a.

Further, the door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the rear surface of the right side reflector 415 so as to cover the door frame right side decorative board 418 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface and the front side of the right side reflector 415. It includes a door frame right side decorative body 419 attached to the right side reflector 415.

The door frame right side base 411 extends vertically and is formed in a box shape that is open to the rear. The side window interior decoration member 412 has a flat plate-shaped connecting base 412a that connects the lower ends of a plurality of (here, three) side window interior decoration portions 410b arranged in a vertical direction. The side window interior decoration portion 410b of the side window interior decoration member 412 is formed into a truncated cone-shaped cylinder whose outer diameter is slightly smaller than that of the rear end side on the front end side, and the front end of the cylinder is formed in a hemispherical shape. ing. In the side window interior decoration member 412, the front end of the side window interior decoration portion 410b is attached to the door frame right side outer panel 416. The side window interior decorative member 412 is attached to a portion on the front surface of the door frame right side base 411 from a position lower to the center in the vertical direction to an upper portion. The decorative member 412 in the side window is formed in a milky white color having translucency.

The decorative substrate 413 for the decorative portion in the side window is attached to a portion on the front surface of the right side base 411 of the door frame, which is behind the connecting base 412a of the decorative member 412 in the side window. The plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative substrate 413 of the decorative portion in the side window are full-color LEDs. In the side window interior decoration portion decorative substrate 413, four LEDs are arranged in a cross shape up, down, left and right around the axis of the side window interior decoration portion 410b at a portion behind each of the plurality of side window interior decoration portions 410b. Has been done.

The internal reflector 414 has an X-shaped front view, and extends in the front-rear direction along the inner surface of the side window interior decoration portion 410b to be inserted. The internal reflector 414 divides the inside of the side window interior decoration portion 410b into four parts, top, bottom, left, and right.

The right side reflector 415 extends vertically at the same height as the door frame right side base 411, and the shape in the front-rear direction is formed in a wavy shape that moves forward and then backward as it goes from the upper end to the lower end. Has been done. The right side reflector 415 penetrates back and forth, and a plurality of through holes 415a are formed so that the LED of the door frame right side decorative substrate 418 faces forward.

The door frame right side outer panel 416 is flat and extends vertically and front and back, and the rear side extends vertically and linearly, and the front side extends in a wavy shape along the right side reflector 415. The door frame right side outer panel 416 has a through hole 416a penetrating in the left-right direction formed in a deformed elliptical shape extending vertically, and the front side of the connecting base 412a of the side window interior decorative member 412 and the door frame. It is formed so as to be able to cover the rear side of the right side decorative substrate 418 (right side reflector 415). The outer panel 416 on the right side of the door frame is formed to be translucent.

The inner panel 417 on the right side of the door frame is flat and extends vertically and front and back, and the rear side extends vertically and linearly, and the front side extends in a wavy shape along the right side reflector 415. In the door frame right side inner panel 417, the through hole 417a penetrating in the left-right direction is formed in a deformed elliptical shape extending vertically, and the front side of the connecting base 412a of the side window interior decorative member 412 and the door frame. It is formed so as to be able to cover the rear side of the right side decorative substrate 418 (right side reflector 415). The inner panel 417 on the right side of the door frame is formed to be translucent.

The door frame right side decorative substrate 418 is formed in the shape of a strip extending vertically, and is composed of a right side upper decorative substrate 418a and a right side lower decorative substrate 418b. In the door frame right side decorative board 418, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full-color LEDs. The door frame right side decorative substrate 418 can illuminate and decorate the door frame right side decorative body 419 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a milky white color having translucency. The door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a form in which a semicircle bulging forward extends vertically in a wavy shape along the right side reflector 415. As a result, the door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is open to the rear.

The lower end of the door frame right side unit 410 is formed so as to be continuous with the right end of the dish upper right decorative body 276 of the dish upper right decorative unit 275 in the dish unit 200, and the upper end is the door frame top decoration of the door frame top unit 450. It is formed so as to be continuous with the lower right end of the body 453.

The door frame right side unit 410 decorates the right outside of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 in a state of being assembled to the door frame 3, and the part of the door frame right side decorative body 419 is a cylindrical fluorescent lamp. Looks like it's embedded. The front end (front side) of the door frame right side unit 410 extends forward in a wavy shape so that a quarter portion from the top protrudes most forward, and is formed in a tsuitate shape. The door frame right side unit 410 has a side window 410a penetrating in the left-right direction, and the opposite side can be visually recognized through the side window 410a.

The door frame right side unit 410 includes a cylindrical (cylindrical) side window interior decoration portion 410b extending in the front-rear direction in the side window 410a, and causes the LED of the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 to emit light. Therefore, the decoration portion 410b in the side window can be light-emittingly decorated. Then, by illuminating the decoration portion 410b in the side window, the inside of the side window 410a can be dazzled, and the opposite side can be made difficult to see through the side window 410a.

According to the door frame right side unit 410 of the present embodiment, in a normal state, the LED of the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413 that emits and decorates the plurality of side window interior decoration portions 410b is turned off, so that the side window The inside of the game area 5a can be visually recognized from the side (edge of the island equipment) of the pachinko machine 1 through between the three side window interior decoration portions 410b in the 410a. Therefore, a player who is looking for the pachinko machine 1 (the game board 5) as a pachinko machine to play a game can easily use the pachinko machine 1 without moving to the front of the pachinko machine 1 along the island equipment. It can be found in, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the game with this pachinko machine 1 and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, even if the side window 410a penetrates the door frame right side unit 410, the line of sight of a player located in the vicinity can be blocked by other parts including the side window interior decoration portion 410b. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to see the entire game area 5a, and to make it difficult for the player to feel as if it is being seen by another player, so that the other player can play the game without hesitation. ..

Further, when the three side window interior decoration portions 410b are made to emit light by the LED of the side window interior decoration portion decoration substrate 413, the inside of the side window 410a can be dazzled by the light, and the visibility through the side window 410a is changed. Let me. At this time, since the three side window interior decoration portions 410b are columnar, the light is radiated in a band-like and radial manner. Therefore, the side window interior decoration portions 410b are dazzled and the opposite side is radiated. It is possible to make it difficult to see, and it is possible to make it difficult for other players such as those next to each other to look into the game area 5a. In this way, since it is possible to make it difficult for the inside of the game area 5a to be seen, it is possible to prevent other players from paying attention to the pachinko machine 1. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable because he / she cannot concentrate on the game, or feeling lost due to the induction of mistakes, and by devoting the player to the game, he / she can enjoy the game more. However, it is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

[3-8. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 72 to 74 and the like. 72 (a) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the back, and (c) is the top bottom cover removed. It is the bottom view of the door frame top unit shown in this state. FIG. 73 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the front upper side, and FIG. 74 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the front lower side. The door frame top unit 450 is attached to the upper front surface of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410.

The door frame top unit 450 covers the door frame top base 451 mounted on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 above the door window 101a, the left and right sides of the door frame top base 451 and the upper front surface. The top top cover 452 attached to the door frame top base 451, the door frame top decorative body 453 attached to the front end of the top top cover 452, the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453, and the door frame top base 451. The door frame top bottom plate 454, which is connected to the lower end of the door frame, is attached.

Further, the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the center of the front surface of the top top cover 452 behind the door frame top decorative body 453, and has a door frame top central decorative board 455 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface and a door. Door frame top left decorative board 456 mounted on the left side of the door frame top center decorative board 455 on the front side of the top top cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front, and a door The door frame top right decorative board 457, which is attached to the right side of the door frame top center decorative board 455 on the front side of the top top cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and has a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface. I have.

Further, the door frame top unit 450 includes a top center reflector 458 arranged between the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 and attached to the front surface of the top top cover 452, and the door frame top decoration. Between the top left reflector 459, which is arranged between the body 453 and the door frame top left decorative board 456 and attached to the front surface of the top top cover 452, and between the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top right decorative board 457. It is provided with a top right reflector 460, which is arranged in and attached to the front surface of the top top cover 452.

Further, the door frame top unit 450 includes a central speaker box 461 attached to the center of the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454, a pair of top central speakers 462 attached downward to the central speaker box 461, and a door. Cover the pair of speaker brackets 463 attached to the front left and right ends of the frame top base 451, the pair of top side speakers 464 attached to the pair of speaker brackets 463, and the door frame top bottom plate 454 from below. The top lower cover 465 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454, the lower cover frame 466 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454 so as to press the outer peripheral edge of the top lower cover 465 from below, and the door frame top. The door frame top relay board 467 attached near the upper right end of the base 451 and the door frame top top plate 468 attached to the top top cover 452 so as to cover the upper part of the door frame top base 451 are provided. There is.

The door frame top base 451 has a flat plate-shaped main body portion 451a extending to the left and right with the same length as the width in the left-right direction of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and from the vicinity of both left and right ends on the front surface of the main body portion 451a. It includes a front protruding portion 451b that protrudes forward. The main body portion 451a is formed in a curved shape so that the lower side thereof is aligned with the upper edge of the door window 101a in the door frame base 101 and the center in the left-right direction is positioned upward. The left and right front projecting portions 451b are inclined so as to move rearward as the front end moves downward, and are formed in a box shape open to the rear. The front protrusion 451b on the right side of the front view is also open upward.

The top top cover 452 is formed so that the front view shape is substantially the same as that of the door frame top base 451. The top top cover 452 is formed so as to cover the outside of each of the left and right front protrusions 451b of the door frame top base 451 and to connect the upper front ends of the left and right front protrusions 451b. The front end of the top top cover 452 projects most forward in the center in the left-right direction, and extends in a curved shape so as to move downward and rearward from the center in the left-right direction toward both ends in the left-right direction. Further, the top top cover 452 has an opening 452a on the upper surface, which is largely notched from the rear end to the front. The opening 452a is closed by the door frame top top plate 468.

The door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a milky white color having translucency. The door frame top decorative body 453 has a shape in which a semicircular arc that bulges forward decreases in curvature toward the center in the left-right direction from both left and right ends, and extends in the left-right direction along the front end of the top top cover 452. It is formed. As a result, the door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in a semi-tube shape that is open to the rear. The door frame top decorative body 453 is oriented so that both ends in the left-right direction extend downward, and is formed so as to be continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side decorative body 419, respectively.

The door frame top bottom plate 454 extends in the front-rear direction so as to connect the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453 and the lower end of the main body portion 451a of the door frame top base 451, and the center in the left-right direction bulges upward. It extends in the left-right direction. The door frame top bottom plate 454 is formed in a bent form so that the center in the front-rear direction protrudes downward. The door frame top bottom plate 454 penetrates vertically between the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a, which are separated in the left-right direction, connect the front end and the rear end, and extend upward in a flat plate shape, and the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a. It has a pair of central speaker ports 454b facing the top center speaker 462 and a pair of side speaker ports 454c penetrating vertically on the outside of each of the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a in the left-right direction and facing the top side speaker 464. ing. The central speaker box 461 is mounted between the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454.

The door frame top central decorative substrate 455 is formed in the shape of a strip extending to the left and right. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 are full-color LEDs. The door frame top central decorative substrate 455 can illuminate and decorate the central portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 is formed in a strip shape extending to the left and right. In the door frame top left decorative board 456, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full-color LEDs. The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 can illuminate and decorate the left portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 is formed in the shape of a strip extending to the left and right. In the door frame top right decorative board 457, a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface are full-color LEDs. The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 can illuminate and decorate the right portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting light from a plurality of LEDs.

The top center reflector 458, the top left reflector 459, and the top right reflector 460 extend in the left-right direction, respectively, to the door frame top center decorative substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457. Through holes are formed at positions corresponding to the mounted LEDs in the front-rear direction.

The central speaker box 461 is formed in a box shape extending to the left and right, and a pair of top central speakers 462 are attached so as to face downward and forward. The central speaker box 461 is mounted between a pair of reinforcing ribs 454a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454. The top center speaker 462 is a full-range speaker, and outputs sounds such as voice and music in a wide frequency band.

The speaker bracket 463 is attached to the lower surface of the left and right front protrusions 451b of the door frame top base 451. The top-side speaker 464 is a tweeter and outputs a high frequency range of sounds such as voice and music.

The top lower cover 465 is formed of a punching metal made of a metal plate having innumerable through holes. Through the top lower cover 465, the sound output from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 is radiated forward and downward.

The door frame top relay board 467 includes a door frame top central decorative board 455, a door frame top left decorative board 456, a door frame top right decorative board 457, a top center speaker 462, a top side speaker 464, and a door frame base unit 100. This is for relaying the connection with the door frame sub-relay board 105.

The door frame top top plate 468 closes the opening 452a of the top top cover 452, the front end is locked to the top top cover 452, and the rear end is attached to the door frame base unit 100.

The door frame top unit 450 is assembled on the door frame 3 and decorates the upper and outer sides of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. In the door frame top unit 450, the left and right ends of the door frame top decorative body 453 are continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side decorative body 419, respectively, forming an integral decoration. There is. Further, the door frame top unit 450 can output sounds such as voice and music to the player side by the pair of top center speakers 462 and the pair of top side speakers 464.

[3-9. Door frame decoration]
The decoration of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 75 and the like. FIG. 75 is a front view of the door frame shown together with each decorative substrate. As shown in the figure, the door frame 3 has a substantially quadrangular door window 101a extending vertically and closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 in the center of the front view. The door frame 3 includes a plate upper left decorative body 271 of the plate unit 200, a plate upper right decorative body 276, a plate center upper decorative body 312a of the production operation unit 300, a door frame left side decorative body 404 of the door frame left side unit 400, and a door frame. The outer periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by the door frame right side decorative body 419 of the right side unit 410 and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 over the entire circumference.

Plate upper left decorative body 271, dish upper right decorative body 276, dish center upper decorative body 312a, door frame left side decorative body 404, door frame right side decorative body 419, and door frame top decorative body surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a. Since the 453 is formed in a semi-tube shape, it is possible to show the player a decoration in which the entire circumference of the door window 101a is surrounded by a fluorescent lamp.

In the door frame 3, the upper left decorative body 271 of the plate, the upper right decorative body 276 of the plate, the upper upper decorative body 312a of the plate, the left side decorative body 404 of the door frame, the right side decorative body 419 of the door frame, and the right side decorative body 419, which surround the outer periphery of the door window 101a, and Behind the door frame top decorative body 453, the dish upper left decorative board 273, the dish upper right decorative board 278, the dish center upper decorative board 314, the door frame left side decorative board 402, the door frame right side decorative board 418, the door frame top center decoration Since the substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are arranged, the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a can be illuminated and decorated by appropriately emitting the LEDs of the decorative substrate. It is possible to show the player a light emitting effect so that the light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a.

In the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3, an annular and donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 having a diameter larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201 is arranged coaxially in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 on the upper surface. A pressing operation unit 303 including a cylindrical outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b and a cylindrical central pressing operation unit 303a is attached, and a semicircular arc similar to the rotation operation unit 302 is attached below the rotation operation unit 302. Two donut-shaped (semi-cylindrical or semi-tube-shaped) large diameter upper decorative bodies 312a and lower center of the dish 312b are attached vertically apart from each other, and above the center of the dish. The door frame left side decoration 404 of the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side decoration of the door frame right side unit 410 having the same shape so as to be continuous with both ends of the decoration 312a and the lower center decoration 312b of the plate. The 419 and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 are attached to the outside of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 so as to surround the outer periphery of the game area 5a.

As a result, in the plate unit 200, the rotation operation unit 302, the two plate center upper decorative bodies 312a, and the plate center lower decorative body 312b are arranged vertically with three donut-shaped members, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the outer circumference are arranged. Since the pressing operation unit 303b and the central pressing operation unit 303a are arranged concentrically, the impact of appearance can be enhanced, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made conspicuous.

Further, the dish upper left decorative body 271, the dish upper right decorative body 276, and the dish lower left decorative body 281, the dish lower right decorative body 286, and the dish center lower decorative body 312b arranged below the dish central upper decorative body 312a are half. The thickness of the tubular tube is slightly reduced, and a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 is provided below the dish center lower decorative body 312b. As a result, since the effect operation unit 300 becomes larger from the lower end toward the upper side, it is possible to emphasize the perspective in the vertical direction, and the rotation operation unit 302 arranged on the upper side can be operated by the player. The pressing operation unit 303 can be made to look large, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 in the effect operation unit 300 on the upper surface of the plate unit 200, and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed. it can.

Further, a donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is rotatably attached to the upper surface of the dish unit 200 around an axis extending so as to be positioned forward as it goes upward, and the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 has a front end side. Since the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are tilted so as to be lowered, the upper surfaces of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 face the direction of the player's head (face) seated in front of the pachinko machine 1, and the rotation operation unit 302 rotates from the player. The entire operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be easily seen, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made to look larger. Further, as described above, since the entire rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be easily understood, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the rotation operation unit 302 has a donut shape. Therefore, since the player can be made to immediately recognize that the donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is to be rotated, the player is immediately rotated when the player participation type production is executed. The operation unit 302 can be rotated, and the rotation operation unit 302 can be used to entertain the player-participatory production and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, the diameter of the rotation operation unit 302 is made larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201, and the diameters of the upper plate center upper decoration body 312a and the plate center lower decoration body 312b are made larger than the rotation operation unit 302. In the plate unit 200 of the pachinko machine 1, the front end side of the rotation operation unit 302, the plate center upper decorative body 312a, and the plate center lower decorative body 312b is in a state of protruding more forward than the upper plate 201, and is on the plate center. Since the decorative body 312a and the plate center lower decoration body 312b are in a state of decorating the outer periphery of the rotation operation unit 302, the rotation operation unit 302, the plate center upper decoration body 312a, and the plate center lower decoration body 312b should be greatly conspicuous. At the same time, the appearance around the rotation operation unit 302 can be improved by the decorative body 312a on the center of the plate and the decorative body 312b on the lower center of the plate. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is different from other pachinko machines at first glance, and it is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player and appeal to the player. This makes it easier to select the pachinko machine 1 as a pachinko machine to play.

[4. Overall configuration of the main body frame]
The overall configuration of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 82. FIG. 76 is a front view of the main body frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 77 is a rear view of the main body frame of the pachinko machine. FIG. 78 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 79 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 80 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the back. FIG. 81 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 82 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the rear.

The main body frame 4 holds the game board 5 having the game area 5a in which the game is played by hitting the game ball B, and pays out the game ball B to the player side, or the game ball B used for the game. Is for discharging to the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (on the island equipment side of the game hall). As shown in the figure, the main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and the game board 5 is detachably housed inside from the front. The main body frame 4 is vertically attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island equipment of the game hall above and below the front end on the left side of the front, and the door frame 3 is opened and closed so that the opened front side is closed. Can be installed.

The main body frame 4 has a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear portion can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and which can support the outer periphery of the game board 5, and the left side of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front. The hinge member 510 on the main body frame and the hinge member 510 on the main body frame, which are attached to the upper end of the outer frame 2 and rotatably attached to the hinge assembly 50 on the outer frame of the outer frame 2 and rotatably attached to the hinge assembly 120 on the door frame of the door frame 3, and the main body frame. Main body frame lower hinge assembly that is attached to the lower end on the left side of the front view of the base unit 500 and is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is rotatably attached. It has a three-dimensional 520 and.

Further, the main body frame 4 is attached to a metal main body frame reinforcing frame 530 attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front, and a game area 5a of the game board 5 attached to the lower front portion of the main body frame base unit 500. A ball launching device 540 for driving the game ball B inside, an inverted L-shaped payout base unit 550 attached along the upper side and the left side of the front view on the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500, and a payout base. A payout unit 560 attached to the rear side of the unit 550 for paying out the game ball B to the player side, a board unit 620 attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and a main body frame base unit 500. A back cover 640 that can be opened and closed on the rear side and covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame base 501, and an outer frame 2 and the main body that are attached to the right side surface of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front. It includes a frame 4 and a locking unit 650 that locks between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

The main body frame base unit 500 is a connection cable guide member that guides the main body frame base 501, which is formed in a rectangular frame shape whose front view shape extends vertically, and the connection cable 503 for connecting to the door frame 3 side. It includes a 502 and a game board lock member 505 for holding the game board 5 detachably.

The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a ball tank attached to the payout base 551 and open upward in a box shape extending to the left and right. A 552, a tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and having a single guide passage extending to the left in a groove shape open upward, and a second attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553. Between one rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 555 separated from the first rail cover 554 to the left in the front view, and between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. A ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 and a ball stopping member 557 attached to the downstream end of the tank rail 553 are provided at the position of.

The payout unit 560 includes a ball guidance unit 570 having a single guide passage for guiding the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a game ball guided by the one guide passage of the ball guidance unit 570. A payout device 580 that pays out B one by one based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, an upper full tank path unit 600 that guides the game ball B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and an upper full tank path. It includes a lower full tank path unit 610 that guides the game ball B that has passed through the unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or the board unit 620 side.

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, a base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b. It includes a 620c, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a.

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the main body frame base 501, a plurality of door frame hooks 652 that project forward from the unit base 651 and can be locked to the door frame 3, and project rearward from the unit base 651. A plurality of outer frame hooks 653 that can be locked with the outer frame 2, a transmission cylinder 654 that moves the door frame hook 652 or the outer frame hook 653 in the vertical direction, and a door frame hook 652 are attached downward. It is provided with a lock spring 655 that is urging and urging the outer frame hook 653 upward, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that moves the outer frame hook 653 downward.

[4-1. Body frame base unit]
The main body frame base unit 500 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 84 and the like. FIG. 83A is an enlarged perspective view showing a front left lower corner of the main body frame, and FIG. 83B is an enlarged perspective view showing a front left lower corner of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. FIG. 84 is an explanatory diagram showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the main body frame when the door frame is opened and closed with respect to the main body frame. The main body frame base unit 500 has a rear portion inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 from the front, and holds the outer circumference of the game board 5 inserted from the front.

The main body frame base unit 500 is attached to the main body frame base 501, which is formed in a rectangular frame shape in which the front view extends vertically, and the lower left corner on the front surface of the main body frame base 501, and guides the connection cable 503. A connection cable guide member 502 to be connected, and a game board lock member 505 rotatably attached to the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base 501 around an axis extending back and forth to hold the game board 5 detachably. ing.

The main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 has a base main body 501a whose front view shape is formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically and about 3/4 of the total height from a position slightly lower than the upper end of the base main body 501a. A game board that penetrates back and forth within the height range of the game board 5 and forms the lower side of the game board insertion port 501b into which the game board 5 is inserted from the front side and the game board insertion port 501b on which the game board 5 is placed. It includes a mounting portion 501c and a game board restricting section 501d that projects upward from the center of the game board mounting section 501c in the left-right direction and regulates the movement of the lower end of the game board 5 to the left and right and to the rear.

Further, the main body frame base 501 is recessed rearward on the lower right side of the front view of the game board mounting portion 501c on the front surface of the base main body 501a, and the launcher mounting portion 501e for mounting the ball launcher 540 and the launcher mounting portion 501e are mounted. The board unit penetrates back and forth on the right side of the front view of the unit 501e and penetrates back and forth on the lower left side of the front view of the cylinder insertion port 501f through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted and the game board mounting portion 501c. The circular speaker opening 501 g for the main body frame speaker 622 of the speaker unit 620a in the 620 and the main body frame base 501 are recessed rearward and extend to the left and right below the speaker opening 501 g. It is provided with a cable mounting recess 501h to which the connection cable guide member 502 is mounted, and a cable insertion port 501i penetrating back and forth at the upper right end of the cable mounting recess 501h in the front view.

Further, the main body frame base 501 extends in a plate shape from the right side of the game board insertion port 501b in the base main body 501a to the rear in a plate shape, the locking unit 650 is attached to the right side surface, and the back cover 640 is attached to the rear end. A rear extending portion 501j that can be rotatably attached and a rear extending portion 501j are formed near both upper and lower ends of the left end of the front view on the rear surface of the base main body 501a to attach the hinge member 510 on the main body frame and the hinge assembly 520 below the main body frame. It includes an upper hinge mounting portion 501k and a lower hinge mounting portion 501l.

The game board lock member 505 is rotatably attached to the main body frame base 501 at a position on the right side of the speaker opening 501 g below the game board mounting portion 501c on the front surface and around an axis extending back and forth. The game board lock member 505 makes it possible to restrict the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted through the game board insertion port 501b, so that the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion port 501b can be attached and detached.

The cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501 extends in the left-right direction from the right end side of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l to the position below the portion where the game board lock member 505 is mounted on the right side of the speaker opening 501g. .. The cable mounting recess 501h is formed in a size capable of accommodating the connecting cable guide member 502, and the right end side of the connecting cable guide member 502 can be rotatably mounted around an vertically extending axis.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame base unit 500 protrudes forward on both the upper and lower sides of the flat guide main body 502a extending to the left and right and the guide main body 502a, and extends to the right of the right end of the guide main body 502a. A pair of strip-shaped frame pieces 502b that are exposed, a columnar mounting shaft 502c that connects the right ends of the pair of frame pieces 502b, and the upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a that penetrate back and forth and are left and right. It is provided with a plurality of through holes 502d arranged in a row in the direction.

The length of the connection cable guide member 502 in the left-right direction is slightly shorter than the length in the left-right direction of the cable mounting recess 501h of the main body frame base 501, and has a size that can be accommodated in the cable mounting recess 501h. It is formed. The connection cable guide member 502 is rotatably mounted around a shaft whose mounting shaft 502c extends vertically near the right end in the cable mounting recess 501h. As a result, the connection cable guide member 502 can be rotated (hinge rotation) so that the left end side protrudes forward.

The connection cable guide member 502 is for guiding the connection cable 503. The connection cable 503 is composed of a plurality of wiring cords, one end of which is connected to the interface board 635 of the board unit 620, and the other end of the door frame 3 is the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub. It is connected to the relay board 105.

Subsequently, the action and effect of the connection cable guide member 502 will be described. As shown in FIG. 84 and the like, the connection cable guide member 502 has an end portion (right end portion) opposite to the side (left side) on which the door frame 3 is hinge-rotatably attached in the left-right direction with respect to the main body frame base 501. ) Is rotatably attached around an axis extending parallel to the hinge axis of the door frame 3.

The connection cable 503 that connects the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4 to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 of the door frame 3 has a connection cable guide member on the side connected to the interface board 635. The left and right directions of the plurality of through holes 502d formed on both the upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a are in contact with the front surface of the guide body 502a so as to extend from the right side to the left side of the guide body 502a. It is attached to the guide main body 502a by being tightened together with the guide main body 502a by a binding band 504 inserted through a set of through holes 502d at the same position.

The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame 4 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4. Behind the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub-relay board 105 of the door frame 3. (See FIG. 84 (a)). In this state, the connection cable 503 extends to the left from the connection cable guide member 502, is then bent back in front of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l, passes through the cable holder 103a of the door frame 3, and covers the door frame relay board. It extends into 107. The cable holder 103a of the door frame 3 is arranged to the left of the left end of the connection cable guide member 502.

In this state, when the door frame 3 is hinged to open with respect to the main body frame 4, the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pulled forward by the side of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3. The connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the rightmost mounting shaft 502c. At this time, in the present embodiment, the relationship between the opening angle α of the door frame 3 and the opening angle β of the connecting cable guide member 502 satisfies α / 2 ≧ β (preferably α / 3 ≧ β). (See FIG. 84 (b)).

The opening angle β of the connecting cable guide member 502 is 0 degrees when the door frame 3 is closed (when the opening angle α of the door frame 3 is 0 degrees). The opening angle β of the connecting cable guide member 502 increases as the opening angle α increases when the door frame 3 is opened, but the increase stops when the opening angle α becomes larger than a certain level (for example, about 90 degrees). It changes like this. In the present embodiment, the maximum opening angle β is set to be less than 45 degrees.

In this way, when the door frame 3 is opened, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 moves forward of the main body frame base 501, so that the connection cable guide member 502 By guiding the connection cable 503, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 from hanging between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

When the open door frame 3 is closed, the portion of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3 moves relatively rearward, so that the connection cable 503 presses the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 rearward. Then, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the mounting shaft 502c so that the left end side moves rearward. At this time, since the connecting cable guide member 502 is opened at an opening angle β of less than 45 degrees, the connecting cable guide member 502 does not hinder the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 is opened. It can be closed smoothly. Further, since the connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, the connection cable 503 is not sandwiched between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 when the door frame 3 is closed, and the connection cable 503 is not sandwiched between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent a problem from occurring in the door.

Further, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is folded 180 degrees, so that the connection cable 503 is folded at the folded portion. You can make a habit. As a result, when the door frame 3 is opened and the portion of the connecting cable 503 that is folded 180 degrees is changed to open, a force that tries to close the connecting cable 503 due to the folding habit acts. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction due to the bending habit, and the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) is closed. It can be guided in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be closed smoothly.

Further, on the door frame 3 side, the folded connection cable 503 is placed closer to the central axis (axis core) of the hinge pin 122 above the door frame and the hinge pin 126 below the door frame than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 held by the cable holder 103a causes the tip end side of the connection cable guide member 502 to be held by the hinge pin 122 on the door frame and the hinge pin 122 on the door frame. It can be pulled toward the central axis (axis core) side of the hinge pin 126 under the door frame.

Further, in the present embodiment, the door passes through the rotation center of the connection cable guide member 502, is centered on the central axis (axis core) of the hinge pin 122 above the door frame and the hinge pin 126 below the door frame, and is more door than the cable holder 103a in the speaker duct 103. The angle at which the tangent line tangent to the circle passing through the portion (pressing portion) protruding rearward on the central axis (axis core) side of the upper hinge pin 122 and the lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame intersects with the front surface of the main body frame 4 is 45 degrees. It is configured as follows. As a result, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the pressing portion abuts on the connection cable 503, thereby closing the tip end side of the connection cable guide member 502 that is open via the connection cable 503. Since it can be pressed in the direction, the connection cable guide member 502 can be smoothly closed as the door frame 3 moves in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be reliably closed. Further, since the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 that rotates (opens and closes) with the opening and closing of the door frame 3 can be set to 45 degrees or less, the connection cable guide member 502 is used when the door frame 3 is closed. Can be reliably rotated in the closing direction, and the same effect as described above can be obtained.

[4-2. Hinge member on the main body frame]
The hinge member 510 on the main body frame in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82 and the like. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame 3 The hinge assembly 120 on the door frame is rotatably attached.

The hinge member 510 on the main body frame has an upper hinge main body 511 in which the rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate is bent downward in an L shape, and the upper hinge main body 511 projects upward in a columnar shape from the front end. The hinge pin 512 on the main body frame, which is pivotally supported by the hinge assembly 50 on the outer frame, is provided. The upper hinge main body 511 penetrates in the vertical direction on the left side of the front view of the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 in a horizontally extended portion, and provides a door frame upper hinge hole 511a for axially supporting the door frame upper hinge assembly 120. I have.

In the main body frame upper hinge member 510, a portion of the upper hinge main body 511 that is bent downward and extends vertically is attached to the upper hinge mounting portion 501k of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. The main body frame upper hinge member 510 is pivotally supported by the main body frame upper hinge pin 512 being inserted into the bearing groove 51c of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 in the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50. The hinge pin 122 on the door frame of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably inserted into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge main body 511 from below.

The main body frame upper hinge member 510 can cooperate with the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 to attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so that the hinge can be rotated, and the door frame to the main body frame 4. 3 can be attached so that the hinge can be rotated.

[4-3. Hinge assembly under the main body frame]
The hinge assembly 520 under the main body frame in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82 and the like. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame 3 The hinge member 125 under the door frame is rotatably attached.

The lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame is arranged above the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge first main body 521 in which the rear portion of the horizontally extending flat plate material is bent upward in an L shape. It is provided with a lower hinge second main body 522 in which the rear portion of a flat plate-like plate extending horizontally is bent upward in an L shape. In the lower hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame, a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 522 is arranged at an upward interval from a horizontally extending portion of the lower hinge first main body 521, and a lower portion is arranged. The vertically extending portion of the lower hinge second main body 522 is in contact with the front surface of the vertically extending portion of the hinge first main body 521.

The lower hinge first main body 521 penetrates up and down near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is inserted from below. It has a hinge hole 521a. The lower hinge hole 521a for the outer frame is formed coaxially with the hinge pin 512 on the main body frame of the hinge member 510 on the main body frame.

The lower hinge second main body 522 penetrates up and down near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the lower hinge pin 126 of the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is inserted from above. A hinge hole 522a and a restricting piece 522b extending upward from a position rearward from the lower hinge hole 522a for the door frame on the left side of the horizontally extending portion to regulate the rotation range of the door frame 3. , Is equipped. The lower hinge hole 522a for the door frame is formed coaxially with the upper hinge hole 511a for the door frame in the upper hinge main body 511 of the main body frame upper hinge member 510.

In the main body frame lower hinge assembly 520, the vertically extending portions of the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge second main body 522 are attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. Be done. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 can attach the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so that the hinge can be rotated in cooperation with the main body frame upper hinge member 510, and the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4. Can be mounted so that the hinge can be rotated.

[4-4. Body frame reinforcement frame]
The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 81 and 82 and the like. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a cross-sectional shape in a plan view formed in a U-shape with the right side open, and extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape. In the present embodiment, the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is formed of an extruded metal material.

The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 regulates the movement of the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501 forward and up and down on the rear side of the portion extending from the front end to the right. Two left position regulating members 531 are attached vertically separated from each other.

The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 reinforces the left side (hinge side) of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and the inside of the main body frame 4 from the left side passing between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 ( It prevents unauthorized insertion of tools into the game board 5).

[4-5. Ball launcher]
The ball launching device 540 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 85 and the like. FIG. 85A is a perspective view of the ball launching device in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 85B is a perspective view of the ball launching device as viewed from the rear. The ball launcher 540 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 in the door frame 3 is attached to the main body frame 4. This is for driving into the game area 5a of 5. The ball launcher 540 can drive the game ball B with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3.

The ball launching device 540 is attached to a flat launching base 541 attached to the launching device mounting portion 501e of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and is attached to the rear surface of the right portion of the launching base 541 in front view and rotates. From the launch solenoid 542, which consists of a rotary solenoid whose shaft extends forward through the launch base 541, the ball hammer 543 whose base end is attached to the rotation shaft of the launch solenoid 542, and the vicinity of the tip of the ball mallet 543. It is equipped with a launch rail 544 that is attached to the front surface of the launch base 541 so as to extend diagonally upward to the left and on which the game ball B can roll.

In the ball launching device 540, the game ball B is supplied from the ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame 3 to the upper right end of the launch rail 544, and the game ball B is supplied to the upper right end of the launch rail 544. When the handle 182 is rotated in this state, the firing solenoid 542 is driven with a strength corresponding to the rotation operation angle, and the game ball B is hit by the hitting mallet 543. Then, the game ball B hit by the hitting mallet 543 is guided by the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 through the launch rail 544 and is driven into the game area 5a.

If the hit game ball B does not reach the game area 5a due to the driving strength of the game ball B or the like, the launch rail 544 and the game board 5 (outer rail 1001 and inner rail 1002) are used. From between, it falls into the foul ball receiving port 150c of the lower foul cover unit 150, passes through the inside of the foul cover unit 150, and is discharged to the lower plate 202.

[4-6. Payout base unit]
The payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 86 and the like. FIG. 86A is a perspective view of the payout base unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 86B is a perspective view of the payout base unit as viewed from the back. The payout base unit 550 is formed in an inverted L shape and is attached to the rear side of the main body frame base unit 500.

The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The payout base 551 is molded from a transparent synthetic resin and has a top plate portion 551a whose front-rear direction extends to the left and right with a substantially constant width, and a top plate portion whose width in the front-rear direction from the left side of the top plate portion 551a in the front-rear direction is the top plate portion. The left plate portion 551b having substantially the same width and extending downward long, and the right plate portion 551c having a width in the front-rear direction from the front view right side of the top plate portion 551a extending downward with substantially the same width as the top plate portion 551a. , The upper part 551d of the back plate extending downward from the rear side of the top plate portion 551a to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c, and the position closer to the front than the rear side of the left side plate portion 551b are substantially constant to the right. The left side plate portion 551e extending to the vicinity of the lower end in width, the inner plate portion 551f extending rearward from the right side of the left side portion 551e of the back plate portion to the same position as the rear side of the left side plate portion 551b, and the left side plate portion 551b. A connecting plate portion 551h that connects the bottom plate portion 551g extending from the front portion of the lower side to the right to substantially the same position as the right side of the back plate left portion 551e, and the right side of the bottom plate portion 551g and the lower side of the inner plate portion 551f. And have. The payout base 551 is formed in an inverted L shape in front view, and is formed in a box shape open to the front and inward of the L shape.

In the payout base 551, the top plate portion 551a extends to the left and right with substantially the same length as the width in the left-right direction of the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501, and the left plate portion 551b extends above and below the game board insertion port 501b. It extends up and down with approximately the same length as the height in the direction. In the payout base 551, the front ends of the top plate portion 551a, the left side plate portion 551b, and the right side plate portion 551c are attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501.

Further, the payout base 551 is provided with a shallow concave portion that is open rearward and extends vertically by the left plate portion 551b, the back plate left portion 551e, and the inner plate portion 551f, and the payout base 551 is provided in the portion. The unit 560 is mounted. Further, the payout base 551 projects to the right at the upper part of the right side surface of the inner plate portion 551f in the front view, and has a back cover mounting portion 551i to which the back cover 640 is mounted.

The payout base unit 550 is a box-shaped ball tank 552 attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551 and extending upward to the left and right, and a portion extending to the left and right of the payout base 551. It is provided with a tank rail 553 that is attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 on the upper side and extends to the left in a groove shape that is open upward.

Further, the payout base unit 550 is separated from the first rail cover 554 attached in the middle of the upper end of the tank rail 535 in the left-right direction and the first rail cover 554 to the left in the front view, and is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 535. A ball rectifying member 556 that is attached and is attached to the upper end of the tank rail 555 at a position between the second rail cover 555 that extends to the left end of the tank rail 555 and the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. And a ball stop member 557 attached near the left end of the front view at the lower end of the tank rail 553.

The ball tank 552 is made of a conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, is molded in an opaque black color, and is formed in the left-right direction to be approximately half the width of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551 in the left-right direction. In addition, the length in the front-rear direction is shorter than the depth in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a. The ball tank 552 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a at a position to the right in the left-right direction. The bottom surface of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the left end side is low. The left end side of the ball tank 552 communicates with the tank rail 553.

The tank rail 553 is molded from a transparent synthetic resin and is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551 near the rear end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction. The shape of the tank rail 553 in a plan view is diagonally to the left and rearward from the right end communicating with the ball tank 552, and the depth in the front-rear direction is about one from the depth of several times the outer diameter of the game ball B. After extending to the depth, the depth in the front-rear direction is formed in a shape that extends straight to the left with a depth slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B. The bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined so that the left end side is lowered, and the left end of the bottom surface is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B and opens downward to form a single guide passage. Has been done. The opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 communicates with the upper end opening of the one guide passage 570a in the ball guidance unit 570 of the payout unit 560.

Further, the tank rail 553 is steeper than the bottom surface so that the upper end of the portion extending straight to the left has a height slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B on the left end side. It is tilted so that the left end side is low at an angle. The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a so that the rear end of the portion extending straight to the left substantially coincides with the rear side of the top plate portion 551a. Further, in the tank rail 553, the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, the ball rectifying member 556, and the ball stopping member 557 are attached to the upper end of the portion extending straight to the left.

The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are made of polyamide (nylon) resin, are molded in an opaque white color, and are attached to the upper end of a portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight to the left. .. The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are for preventing the depth of the upper end of the tank rail 555 in the front-rear direction from expanding or narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B in the tank rail 553. It is a thing.

The ball rectifying member 556 is made of a polyamide (nylon) resin and is molded in an opaque white color, and is formed at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 at the upper end of the tank rail 555. (1) The end of the rail cover on the 554 side is rotatably attached around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. The ball rectifying member 556 includes a rectifying piece 556a that protrudes into the tank rail 553 and extends in the left-right direction (see FIG. 94). The rectifying piece 556a delays the flow of the game ball B on the upper side of the game ball B, which is distributed in two upper and lower stages, and rectifies the game ball B so that it flows in one stage on the downstream side. I try not to clog the ball even if the height becomes low.

The ball stop member 557 is made of polyamide (nylon) resin, is molded in an opaque red color, and is slidably attached to the left side in the vicinity of the left end of the front view on the lower surface of the tank rail 553. By sliding to, the opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 can be closed to prevent the game ball B from flowing from the tank rail 553 to the payout unit side downstream.

Further, the payout base unit 550 is formed with a substrate accommodating portion 551aa for mounting the external terminal plate 558 and the frame ground substrate 559 on the left side of the ball tank 552 in the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551 when viewed from the front. The external terminal plate 558 has a payout base 551 from the front so that its mounting surface and a plurality of external terminals (in this embodiment, ten external terminals called external terminals XCN1 to XCN10 are provided) are exposed. As seen, by mounting the mounting surface on the rear surface of the substrate accommodating portion 551aa so as to be perpendicular to the rear of the payout base 551, the mounting surface and the rear surface of the ball tank 552 are arranged in substantially the same plane. It has become so. On the other hand, the frame ground board 559 is horizontal with the mounting surface on which a plurality of ground terminals (in this embodiment, five ground terminals ECN1 to ECN5) are mounted facing downward. The payout base 551 is arranged in front of the external terminal plate 558 when viewed from the front so as to be housed and mounted inside the substrate accommodating portion 551aa. Since the payout base 551 is molded from a transparent synthetic resin, the substrate accommodating portion 551aa is also transparent, and the frame ground substrate 559 accommodated and mounted inside the substrate accommodating portion 551aa is visually recognized from the outside of the substrate accommodating portion 551aa. You can do it.

Of the ground terminals ECN1 to ECN5, the height of the ground terminals ECN2 to ECN4 is 13.4 mm (when the housing corresponding to the ground terminals ECN2 to ECN4 is inserted, the mounting height becomes 18.6 mm). On the other hand, the height of the ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5 is 7 mm (when the housing corresponding to the ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5 is inserted, the mounting height becomes 9.8 mm). In a state where the frame grounding board 559 is housed and mounted inside the board housing part 551aa and the external terminal board 558 is mounted on the rear surface of the board housing part 551aa, the frame grounding board 559 is viewed from the back of the pachinko machine 1. Is hidden by the presence of the external terminal board 558 and difficult to see, but among the ground terminals ECN1 to ECN5 of the frame ground board 559, only the ground terminals ECN2 and ECN4 are in a state of protruding from the lower side of the external terminal board 558, and the pachinko machine. It can be visually recognized from the back surface of No. 1 (see, for example, FIG. 77). Although the height of the ground terminal ECN3 is as high as 13.4 mm as described above, when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the back, it is hidden by the presence of the ball rectifying member 556 and is difficult to see. The heights of the ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5 are as low as 7 mm as described above, and cannot protrude from the lower side of the external terminal plate 558. When the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the back, it is hidden by the presence of the external terminal plate 558. It is difficult to see. A detailed description of the frame ground substrate 559 will be described later.

The external terminal plate 558 is for making an electrical connection between the pachinko machine 1 and the island equipment of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The frame grounding board 559 is for temporarily collecting electromagnetic noise generated in various places and grounding it to the island equipment of the game hall.

[4-7. Overall configuration of payout unit]
The overall configuration of the payout unit 560 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88 and the like. FIG. 87 (a) is a perspective view of the payout unit in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 87 (b) is a perspective view of the payout unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 88 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 88 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the payout unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. is there. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550.

The payout unit 560 is a ball guidance unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a game ball B that is arranged below the ball guidance unit 570 and is guided by the ball guidance unit 570. A payout device 580 that pays out one by one based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, an upper full tank path unit 600 that guides the game ball B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and an upper full tank path unit. It includes a lower full tank path unit 610 that guides the game ball B that has passed through 600 to the door frame 3 side or the substrate unit 620 side.

The ball guidance unit 570 supplies the game balls B arranged in a row by the guidance passage of one of the tank rails 553 to the payout device 580. The payout device 580 includes one payout passage 580a through which the game ball B supplied from the one guide passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 can be distributed, and one payout passage 580a branched from the middle of the payout passage 580a. It has a passage 580b, and in a normal state, the game ball B is discharged from the payout passage 580a to the upper full tank path unit 600 side based on the instruction from the payout control board 633, and the ball removal lever 593 is operated. The game ball B is discharged from the ball pulling passage 580b to the upper full tank path unit 600 side.

The upper full tank path unit 600 separately guides the game ball B discharged from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the game ball B discharged from the ball removal passage 580b downward. The lower full tank path unit 610 guides the game ball B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 to the door frame 3 side via the upper full tank path unit 600, and is discharged from the ball removal passage 580b. The game ball B is guided to the substrate unit 620 side.

[4-7-1. Ball guidance unit]
The ball guidance unit 570 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88 and the like. The ball guidance unit 570 is attached from the rear to the upper part of the rear surface of the left portion 551e of the back plate of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, receives the game ball B from the tank rail 553, and guides the game ball B to the payout device 580 side. It is for doing.

The ball guidance unit 570 has a box-shaped guidance unit base 571 that has a meandering guidance passage 570a through which the game ball B can flow and is open forward, and closes the front side of the guidance unit base 571. The movable piece member 573 that is movable by the flat plate-shaped guide passage front lid 572 and the game ball B that circulates in the guide passage 570a, and the game ball B in the guide passage 570a by detecting the movement of the movable piece member 573. It is provided with a ball cutting detection sensor 574 that detects the presence or absence of the (see FIG. 94).

The ball guidance unit 570 has a front view shape of the guidance unit base 571 and the guidance passage front lid 572 formed in a quadrangle extending vertically. The guidance passage 570a opens upward near the left end of the upper surface of the guidance unit base 571, extends vertically downward from the upper end to the vicinity of the center in the height direction of the guidance unit base 571, and then bends to the right to guide. It extends downward in a meandering manner while repeatedly folding back between the widths of the unit base 571 in the left-right direction, and opens downward near the left end of the lower surface of the induction unit base 571.

In the guidance passage 570a, the depth on the front-back right side and the width in the left-right direction are formed to be slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B with respect to the distribution direction in which the game ball B is distributed. It can be guided in a row.

In the ball guidance unit 570, a movable piece member 573 is attached in the vicinity of the upper portion so as to be able to move forward and backward into the guidance passage 570a. Specifically, the movable piece member 573 is rotatably attached around an axis whose upper portion extends forward and backward at a portion on the right outer side of the guide passage 570a when viewed from the front, and a part of its lower end protrudes into the guide passage 570a due to its own weight. It is formed to do. The movable piece member 573 is in a state in which the game ball B comes into contact with the portion protruding into the guidance passage 570a, so that the protruding portion is pushed by the game ball B and retracts from the guidance passage 570a and does not protrude. It becomes.

When a part of the movable piece member 573 protrudes into the guide passage 570a, the ball cutting detection sensor 574 does not detect the movable piece member 573, and a part of the movable piece member 573 retracts from the inside of the guide passage 570a. When it is not protruding, the movable piece member 573 is detected. Therefore, the ball cutting detection sensor 574 is in the detection state when the game ball B is present in the guidance passage 570a, and is in the non-detection state when the game ball B is not present in the guidance passage 570a.

In the state where the ball guidance unit 570 is assembled in the main body frame 4, the upstream end of the guidance passage 570a communicates with the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and the downstream end of the guidance passage 570a is the payout passage of the payout device 580. It communicates with the upstream end of 580a. In the ball guidance unit 570, since the guidance passage 570a for guiding the game ball B extends in a meandering shape, the guidance passage 570a extends longer than the total height of the ball guidance unit 570, and many games are played in the guidance passage 570a. The sphere B can be stored. Further, since the ball guidance unit 570 can detect the presence or absence of the game ball B in the guidance passage 570a by the ball cutting detection sensor 574, the presence or absence of the game ball B in the ball tank 552 is detected via the guidance passage 570a. can do.

[4-7-2. Payout device]
The payout device 580 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 89 to 92 and the like. FIG. 89 is a rear sectional view of the payout device of the payout unit cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the payout blade. FIG. 90 (a) is a rear sectional view of the payout device cut at the center of the payout blade in the front-rear direction when the ball-extracting movable piece is in the open state, and FIG. Is. FIG. 91 is a rear view of the payout device for explaining the rotation position of the payout blade. FIG. 92 is a rear view of a payout device for explaining prevention of ball clogging and ball dropout. In addition, in FIG. 91, in order to explain the rotation position of the payout blade, a payout gear member and a part of various gears that cannot be visually recognized from the back surface of the payout device are visibly described and are the subject of the explanation. A small circle is attached to the bottom portion of the ball accommodating portion 589b of the payout blade 589. Here, the configuration of the payout device 580 will be described first, and then the rotation position of the payout blade, the prevention of ball clogging, and the prevention of ball dropout will be described.

[4-7-2a. Disposal device configuration]
The payout device 580 is detachably attached to the lower side of the ball guidance unit 570 on the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550 from the rear. The payout device 580 includes a payout device main body 581 having a box-shaped payout passage 580a open to the rear and a ball ejection passage 580b branching from the middle of the payout passage 580a through which the game ball B can flow, and a payout device 581. It is provided with a flat plate-shaped payout device rear lid 582 that closes the device main body 581 from the rear side, and a shallow box-shaped payout device front lid 583 that is attached to the front side of the payout device main body 581 and is open to the rear. ing. The payout device main body 581 and the payout device front lid 583 are made of polycarbonate resin and are molded in an opaque black color. The rear lid 582 of the dispensing device is made of polycarbonate resin and is transparently molded. Therefore, the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the game ball B flowing down the payout passage 580a can be visually recognized from the back side of the payout device 580 through the transparent back lid 582 of the payout device.

Further, the payout device 580 is attached to the rear surface of the payout device main body 581, and the rotary shaft is projected on the payout motor 584 between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front lid 583, and the rotary shaft of the payout motor 584. The spur gear-shaped drive gear 585 (number of teeth Z0: 9) that is attached and the spur gear-shaped that is rotatably attached by the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front lid 583 that mesh with the drive gear 585. A spur gear-shaped second gear that meshes with the first transmission gear 586 (number of teeth Z1: 20) and is rotatably attached by the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front lid 583. A plurality of transmission gears 587 (number of teeth Z2: 20), spur gear-shaped payout gears 588a and payout gears 588a (number of teeth Z3: 24) meshing with the second transmission gear 587, which extend outward. The payout gear member 588 which has the detection piece 588b and is rotatably attached between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device front lid 583, and the payout gear between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582. Detects the payout blade 589 having a plurality of blade pieces 589a that rotate integrally with the member 588 and project into the payout passage 580a, and the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588 attached to the rear side of the payout device main body 581. It is equipped with a blade rotation detection sensor 590. The payout motor 584 is step-driven under the control of the payout control board 633. When the payout motor 584 is step-driven, the payout motor 584 steps-rotates the rotation shaft at a predetermined angle (18 degrees in the present embodiment) accordingly. That is, the payout motor 584 rotates its rotation axis by 18 degrees in one step. The detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 is input to the payout control board 633. The drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the payout gear member 588 are made of polyamide (nylon) resin and are molded in opaque black. The payout blade 589 is made of a polyamide (nylon) resin and is molded into an opaque white color.

Further, the payout device 580 is attached by a payout device main body 581 and a payout device rear lid 582 at the downstream end of the payout passage 580a, and a payout detection sensor 591 for detecting the game ball B, and a payout device main body 581 and after the payout device. A ball-extracting movable piece 592 attached so that the ball-extracting passage 580b can be opened and closed at a portion branched from the payout passage 580a by the lid 582, and a ball-extracting movable piece 592 can be held at a position where the ball-extracting passage 580b is closed. It is provided with a ball pulling lever 593 that is slidably attached in the vertical direction by the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582. The ball-extracting movable piece 592 is made of polyamide (nylon) resin and is molded into an opaque white color. The ball pulling lever 593 is made of polyamide (nylon) resin and is molded in an opaque red color.

The payout device 580 is formed in a quadrangle whose plan view shape extends vertically. The width of the payout device 580 in the left-right direction is formed to be larger to the right in the front view than the width in the left-right direction of the ball guidance unit 570.

As shown in FIG. 89, the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 has an upstream end opening upward from the center in the left-right direction to the left and a downstream end near the right end in the left-right direction. It opens downward. The payout passage 580a extends diagonally downward from the top to a height of about 1/3 of the total height so as to gradually move to the left from the upstream end, and then bends slightly diagonally downward to the right. It bends at about 1/3 of the left and right width and extends substantially vertically downward toward the center (rotation axis) of the payout blade 589. Then, above the center of the payout blade 589, after bending to the right in the rear view with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, a gap slightly larger than the game ball B is provided between the payout blade 589 and the outer circumference. It extends downward in an arc shape concentric with the payout blade 589 so as to form, and then extends vertically downward to the downstream end at a position on the right side of the rear view from the center of the payout blade 589.

In the payout passage 580a, the payout detection sensor 591 is arranged below the payout blade 589 and directly above the downstream end. A non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used for the payout detection sensor 591.

The ball-extracting passage 580b branches at a portion of the payout passage 580a that extends diagonally downward from the upstream end and bends to the right, and extends vertically to the lower end along the left side of the rear view. It opens downward near the left end. At this branching portion, a ball clogging prevention portion 581r is projected in a rib shape toward the ball ejection passage 580b with a part of the passage inner wall forming the payout passage 580a having a predetermined distance dimension, and the ball clogging prevention portion is provided. The upper surface of the 581r and the inner wall surface of the passage forming the payout passage 580a are formed in the same plane to form a downwardly inclined surface in the rear view. A detailed description of the ball clogging prevention unit 581r will be described later.

The payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 face each other on the side where the ball pulling movable piece 592 is attached at the portion where the payout passage 580a and the ball pulling passage 580b are branched, and the outer diameter of the game ball B is opposed to each other. The main body side guide wall 581a is formed so as to project rearward and forward from each so as to form a narrower gap, and to be continuous with the left side wall in the rear view of the payout passage 580a and the ball ejection passage 580b, respectively. And a rear lid side guide wall 582a is provided. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are rear view of the portion extending to the right side of the rear view at a height of about 1/3 from the top branching from the ball ejection passage 580b in the payout passage 580a. It is formed in the left position. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are curved so as to be recessed diagonally upward to the left in the rear view, and are mainly formed to form a side wall of the ball pulling passage 580b. The ball pulling movable piece 592 rotates between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

The payout motor 584 is attached to the right side of the rear view of the portion of the payout device main body 581 where the payout passage 580a extends diagonally downward from the upstream end. The drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the payout gear member 588 are arranged in front of the payout device main body 581, and the front side is covered with the payout device front lid 583. The payout gear member 588 is provided with three flat plate-shaped detection pieces 588b having an arc shape extending outward at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction.

The payout blade 589 is arranged between the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582. The payout blade 589 is provided with a plurality of blade pieces 589a having an arc shape extending concentrically outward from the rotation axis in a flat plate shape at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. The blade piece 589a extends from above toward the rotation axis in the payout passage 580a and then extends to the right in the rear view so that the distance between the blade piece 589a and the side wall of the payout passage becomes narrower than the outer diameter of the game ball B. In addition, it protrudes into the payout passage 580a. The payout blade 589 is provided with a ball accommodating portion 589b recessed in an arc with a radius younger than the radius of the game ball B toward the center between the three blade pieces 589a, and is recessed in the outer peripheral portion of the cylindrical shape with an arc. By forming the ball accommodating portions 589b at equal intervals, three blade pieces 589a forming a peak and three ball accommodating portions 589b forming a valley are formed alternately. Only one game ball B can be accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b. As a result, the payout blade 589 can be restricted from moving the game ball B in the payout passage 580a to the downstream side of the payout blade 589 by the blade piece 589a, and is rotated in the clockwise direction in the rear view. As a result, the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b can be moved to the downstream side.

The payout gear member 588 and the payout blade 589 are coaxially and integrally rotatably attached by the payout device rear lid 582 and the payout device front lid 583. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is arranged on the left side of the rotation shaft of the payout gear member 588 in the rear view. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is for detecting the rotation of the payout blade 589 by detecting the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588 that rotates integrally with the payout blade 589.

The ball pulling movable piece 592 is rotatably attached around an axis extending back and forth at the upper ends of the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. The ball-extracting movable piece 592 is bent in a dogleg shape, and is attached so that the recessed side faces the inside of the payout passage 580a. The ball-extracting movable piece 592 is formed so that the depth in the front-rear direction is smaller than the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, and the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. Through the gap between them, it is possible to project into the ball-extracting passage 580b or retreat to the outside of the ball-extracting passage 580b.

The ball pulling lever 593 is attached to the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction on the left side of the rear view near the upper end of the ball pulling movable piece 592. A part of the ball pulling lever 593 penetrates the rear lid 582 of the payout device and protrudes rearward, and can be slid by operating the protruding portion. By locating the ball pulling lever 593 at the descending end, the lower part can come into contact with the ball pulling movable piece 592, and the rotation of the ball pulling movable piece 592 in the clockwise direction in the rear view can be restricted. The ball pulling passage 580b can be closed by the ball pulling movable piece 592. Further, by locating the ball pulling lever 593 at the rising end, the ball pulling movable piece 592 can be rotated to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b, and the ball pulling passage 580b can be opened (FIG. FIG. 90). In this way, the ball can be pulled out by opening the ball pulling passage 580b using the ball pulling lever 593.

When the ball is pulled out by raising the ball pulling lever 593 to make the ball pulling movable piece 592 rotatable, the game ball B is in a state like a string of beads on the upstream side of the ball pulling movable piece 592. However, it will flow down to the ball pulling passage 580b side beyond the ball pulling movable piece 592. At this time, since the ball ejection passage 580b extends straight from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a, the game ball B flowing down from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a flows straight down to the ball ejection passage 580b side. At the same time, since the downstream side of the ball removal passage 580b communicates with the island equipment side, there is no such thing as a payout blade 589 that suppresses the flow of the game ball B, so that the game ball B is from the payout passage 580a side. Will flow down soon.

In this way, in the state where the ball pulling movable piece 592 is rotatable, the game ball B flows down in the ball pulling passage 580b at a high speed, so that the ball pulling movable piece 592 projecting into the ball pulling passage 580b. The game ball B vigorously abuts on the lower end side of the ball, but the ball pulling movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a of the payout device main body 581 and the rear lid side guide wall 582a of the payout device rear lid 582. Since the ball pulling passage 580b can be moved to the outside of the inner surface, the ball pulling movable piece 592 moves to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b due to the contact force, so that the ball pulling movable piece 592 is a ball. It is not sandwiched between the wall surface of the drawing passage 580b and the game ball B, and the game ball B can prevent a strong force from acting on the ball pulling movable piece 592, and the ball can be pulled out by the collision of the game ball B. It is possible to suppress a decrease in durability and damage of the piece 592.

Because of this, the movable ball-extracting piece 592 can be made less likely to be damaged, and more game balls B can be discharged to the island equipment side on the downstream side of the ball-extracting passage 580b more quickly. It is possible to suppress an increase in the time required for replacement and maintenance of the machine 1, and it is possible to reduce the burden on the game hall side.

Further, when the ball pulling movable piece 592 is in a rotatable state, the ball pulling movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a at a narrower interval than the game ball B, and the ball pulling passage 580b. In order to move to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b, the game ball B comes into contact with the ball pulling movable piece 592 protruding into the ball pulling passage 580b, so that the ball pulling movable piece 592 comes into contact with the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. Even if the game ball B moves to the side between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a together with the ball pulling movable piece 592 when moving outward through the space, the space is larger than that of the game ball B. Only the game ball B can be prevented from moving outward due to the narrow space between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a.

Then, the movement of the game ball B to the outside is blocked by the space between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a, so that the game ball B is separated from the ball pulling movable piece 592, and the subsequent ball. Since the movement of the movable ball-pulling piece 592 is due to the inertial force, a strong force does not act on the movable ball-pulling piece 592, the movable ball-pulling piece 592 can be made hard to be damaged, and the guide on the main body side. The game ball B does not jump out from between the wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b, and the game ball B can be reliably distributed to the downstream side of the ball pulling passage 580b.

[4-7-2b. Rotation position of payout blade]
As described above, the payout device 580 includes a spur gear-shaped drive gear 585 (number of teeth Z0: 9) attached to the rotating shaft of the payout motor 584, and a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 586 that meshes with the drive gear 585. Number of teeth Z1: 20), spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 587 that meshes with the first transmission gear 586 (number of teeth Z2: 20), spur gear-shaped payout gear 588a that meshes with the second transmission gear 587 (number of teeth) It is provided with a payout gear member 588 having Z3: 24) and a plurality of detection pieces 588b, a payout blade 589 that rotates integrally with the payout gear member 588, a blade rotation detection sensor 590 that detects the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588, and the like. When the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is rotationally driven, the rotation is transmitted so as to rotate the payout blade 589 via the drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the payout gear 588a of the payout gear member 588. Will be done.

Here, the rotation speed of the payout gear member 588 is such that the rotation speed of the payout motor 584 is reduced by the drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the payout gear 588a of the payout gear member 588. .. The reduction ratio n is set to the number of teeth Z0 (= 9) of the drive gear 585 / the number of teeth Z3 (= 24) of the payout gear 588a of the payout gear member 588 by calculation by mechanics. In the present embodiment, the payout motor 584 is a stepping motor excited by 2-2 phase excitation having a rotation shaft that rotates 18 degrees in one step rotation (the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 rotates 20 steps and 360 degrees ( The payout blade 589, which rotates integrally with the payout gear member 588, rotates 6.75 degrees (= 18 degrees x reduction ratio n) when the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 rotates one step. It will rotate. As a result, when the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 rotates 54 steps, the payout blade 589 rotates 364.5 degrees (= 6.75 degrees x 54 steps), and when it makes one rotation (360 degrees rotation), it rotates 4.5 degrees. It will rotate extra degrees.

As described above, in the present embodiment, when the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is rotated by 54 steps, the payout blade 589 is rotated by 364.5 degrees. It is necessary to rotate the rotation axis of the payout motor 584 in steps of 53.333 ... (= 360 degrees ÷ 6.75 degrees), and step drive to the payout motor 584 corresponding to one rotation (360 degree rotation) of the payout blade 589. The number of steps, which is the number of times of, is not an integer.

That is, in the present embodiment, three ball accommodating portions 589b are formed on the payout blade 589 at equal intervals, and the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is step-driven and rotated by 18 degrees as a predetermined angle. The payout blade 589 rotates by 6.75 degrees via the drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the payout gear 588a of the payout gear member 588 (that is, the rotation axis of the payout motor 584 is 1). When the step rotation (rotation by 18 degrees), the payout blade 589 rotates 6.75 degrees), so that the payout blade 589 can send out one game ball B every 120 degree rotation, and payout. In order to rotate the blade 589 by 120 degrees, it is necessary to rotate the rotation axis of the payout motor 584 in steps of 17.777 ... (= 120 degrees ÷ 6.75 degrees). Therefore, in the present embodiment, the 18-step rotation, which is an integer rounded up after the decimal point, is set as the number of step drives to the payout motor 584, which is commensurate with the delivery of one game ball by the payout blade 589. By rotating the 589 over 120 degrees (actually, 121.5 degrees (= 18 steps rotation x 6.75 degrees)), the rotation position of the payout blade 589 to the position where the next game ball B is received. Can be rotated.

The payout blade 589 can pay out three game balls B for each rotation (360 degree rotation), but there are cases where only one ball B is paid out, for example, tobacco tar and dust. Since the blade rotation detection sensor 590 may erroneously detect the rotation position of the payout blade 589 due to the above, the origin of the rotation position of the payout blade 589 is set every time one game ball B is paid out. Is preferable. In the present embodiment, as described above, the number of step drives to the payout motor 584 corresponding to the delivery of one game ball by the payout blade 589 is set to 18 step rotation, which is an integer rounded up after the decimal point. The payout blade 589 is rotated over 120 degrees (actually, it is rotated by 121.5 degrees (= 18 step rotation x 6.75 degrees)), and it is paid out every time one game ball B is paid out. The process of setting the origin of the rotation position of the blade 589 is performed to improve the accuracy of the rotation position of the payout blade 589.

Further, as described above, the number of step drives to the payout motor 584 corresponding to the delivery of one game ball B by the payout blade 589 is not an integer, so that every time one game ball is paid out. Even if the error is accumulated, the rotation angle of the payout blade 589 is detected by a plurality of detection pieces 588b of the payout gear member 588 provided coaxially with the rotation axis of the payout blade 589, so that one game ball can be obtained. The accumulated error can be reset each time it is paid out. As a result, even if an error occurs every time one game ball is paid out due to the influence of tobacco tar or dust, the accumulated error can be reliably reset every time one game ball is paid out. You can do it. Therefore, it is possible to make it difficult for an error to occur in the rotation position of the payout blade 589 that receives and sends out the game ball.

Further, as described above, the number of step drives to the payout motor 584 corresponding to the delivery of one game ball B by the payout blade 589 is not an integer, so that every time one game ball is paid out. The positioning position is different every time. As a result, the contact positions between the game ball and the payout blade 589 are different each time, so that the positions where tar and dust are attached can be dispersed. Of course, if the reduction ratio of the rotation transmission member is set so as to cause such a positioning error, the error is accumulated, but even if the error is accumulated every time one game ball is paid out, the rotation angle of the payout blade 589 is By detecting with a plurality of detection pieces 588b of the payout gear member 588 of FIG. 89 provided coaxially with the rotation axis of the payout blade 589, the cumulative error is reset when it accumulates to some extent. As a result, the accuracy of the number of game balls to be paid out is guaranteed. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, the rotation position of the ball feed rotating portion that receives and sends out the game ball is changed each time the game ball is discharged to disperse the position where the tar and dust adhere to the sling and dust. On the other hand, it is possible to have a strong payout device 580. As described above, the payout device 580 has one payout passage 580a. Therefore, when the payout speed of the game ball is the same as that of the payout device having the payout blades in the payout passages of Article 2, the payout blades 589 of the payout device 580 having the payout passage 580a of Article 1 in the present embodiment. Needs to rotate twice as fast. Then, the payout blade 589 of the payout device 580 having the first payout passage 580a in the present embodiment collides with the game ball and the payout blade 589 as compared with the payout device having the payout blades in each of the two payout passages. Since the number of times is doubled, there is a high possibility that tobacco tar and dust will adhere to the payout blade 589.

In the present embodiment, when the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is rotated by 54 steps, the payout blade 589 exceeds one rotation as described above. Therefore, one rotation of the payout blade 589 is regarded as 54 steps of rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584. When the control is performed to determine and manage the set as a set, an angle difference of 4.5 degrees is generated with respect to one rotation of the payout blade 589 every 54 steps of the rotation axis of the payout motor 584. For example, 80 sets. In the case of, the angle difference is finally accumulated up to 360 degrees (= 4.5 degrees × 80 sets), and the number of balls to be paid out of the game ball B is increased by 3.

As described above, the payout gear member 588 is provided with three flat plate-shaped detection pieces 588b extending outward at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. Specifically, three 120-degree regions having a 60-degree region in which the detection piece 588b is formed and a 60-degree region in which the detection piece 588b is not formed are arranged along the circumferential direction. .. As described above, the detection piece 588b is detected by the blade rotation detection sensor 590, and the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 is input to the payout control board 633.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the payout control board 633 rotates integrally with the payout gear member 588 based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 so that the above-mentioned angle difference does not occur. As a result, one game ball B is set as one management range by setting a 120-degree region having a 60-degree region where the detection piece 588b is formed and a 60-degree region where the detection piece 588b is not formed as one management range. It can be managed as an operation to pay out one by one.

Specifically, first, of the 120-degree region of the payout gear member 588 in the circumferential direction, the detection piece 588b blocks the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590 in the 60-degree region where the detection piece 588b is formed. Since it is in a state, the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is rotated in 9 steps as a light-shielding range (corresponding to 60.75 degrees (= 6.75 degrees x 9 steps) rotation of the payout blade 589 that rotates integrally with the payout gear member 588). Since the detection piece 588b does not block the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590 in the 60-degree region where the detection piece 588b is not formed, the light receiving range is the 9-step rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584. (It corresponds to 60.75 degrees (= 6.75 degrees x 9 steps) rotation of the payout blade 589 that rotates integrally with the payout gear member 588.).

That is, in the present embodiment, the region of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction of the payout gear member 588 is set as the light-shielding range of the region of 60 degrees in which the detection piece 588b is formed, and the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is rotated in 9 steps. It is managed by a total of 18 steps of rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584, with the region of 60 degrees where the piece 588b is not formed as the light receiving range, with respect to the payout of one ball of the game ball B. This is done by rotating the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 by 18 steps.

When the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 rotates 9 steps, the payout blade 589, which rotates integrally with the payout gear member 588, rotates 60.75 degrees (= 6.75 degrees x 9 steps), which is a light-shielding range of 60 degrees. Since the rotation axis of the payout motor 584 can rotate slightly larger than the light receiving range of 60 degrees, the 60 degree region (shading range) where the detection piece 588b is formed and It is possible to reliably discriminate the region (light receiving range) of 60 degrees in which the detection piece 588b is not formed.

Here, a method of setting the origin of the payout blade 589 that rotates integrally with the payout gear member 588 will be described with reference to FIG. 91. As shown in FIG. 91A, the payout control board 633 is in a state in which the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588 transitions the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590 from the cutoff state to the non-cutoff state (“first edge”). The "detection state") is set with the rotation position of the payout blade 589 as point A. At this point A, the blade piece 589a of the payout blade 589 restricts the movement of the game ball B in the payout passage 580a to the downstream side of the payout blade 589.

The payout control board 633 sets the rotation position of the payout blade 589, which is obtained by rotating the rotation axis of the payout motor 584 by 5 steps from the point A, as the origin as shown in FIG. 91 (b). At this origin, only one game ball B in the payout passage 580a is housed in the ball accommodating portion 589b of the payout blade 589. In this state, the center (center of gravity) of the game ball B housed in the ball accommodating portion 589b of the payout blade 589 and the rotation center axis of the payout blade 589 are arranged on the same vertical line.

The payout control board 633 sets the rotation position of the payout blade 589, which is obtained by rotating the rotation axis of the payout motor 584 from the origin by 4 steps, as point B. At this point B, the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588 is in a state in which the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590 is transitioned from the non-blocking state to the blocking state (referred to as “second edge detection state”). In the region where the rotation position of the payout blade 589, which rotates integrally with the payout gear member 588, rotates from the point A to the origin and the point B, as shown in FIG. 91 (d), the light receiving range (that is, the payout gear described above). Of the 120-degree region in the circumferential direction of the member 588, the 60-degree region in which the detection piece 588b is not formed).

The payout control board 633 sets the rotation position of the payout blade 589, which is obtained by rotating the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 by 9 steps from the point B, as the above-mentioned point A again. At this time, the game ball B housed in the ball accommodating portion 589b of the payout blade 589 at the origin is moved to the downstream side of the payout blade 589 in the payout passage 580a. In the region where the rotation position of the payout blade 589 that rotates integrally with the payout gear member 588 rotates from the point B to the point A, as shown in FIG. 91 (d), a light-shielding range (that is, the above-mentioned payout gear member 588). Of the 120-degree region in the circumferential direction of the above, the 60-degree region where the detection piece 588b is formed).

Here, the control of the payout device 580 by the payout control board 633 will be briefly described. The payout control board 633 executes the payout control side power-on processing at the time of power-on of the pachinko machine 1 or at the time of power recovery at the time of power recovery after a power failure (a momentary power failure in which a power failure occurs). The payout control board 633 repeatedly executes the steady-state process when the initial setting process and the interrupt start setting are executed in the payout control side power-on processing. The payout control board 633 generates an interrupt every 2 milliseconds (ms) after the interrupt start setting is set, and executes the payout control side 2 ms interrupt process. The payout control board 633 repeatedly performs various processes such as payout motor control process, history creation process, and origin setting process in the payout control side 2 ms interrupt process.

The payout control board 633 excites the payout motor 584 by 2-2 phase excitation with a pulse width of 4 ms by repeatedly executing the payout motor control process. The payout control board 633 repeatedly executes the history creation process to confirm whether or not a detection signal is input from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 every 2 ms. The payout control board 633 of the blade rotation detection sensor 590 is based on the detection signals from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 confirmed this time and the previous time, that is, every 4 ms when the payout motor 584 by 2-2 phase excitation is excited and switched. The result of confirming whether the detection piece 588b blocks or does not block the optical axis is obtained from the least significant bit to the most significant bit of the history information having an 8-bit width. After shifting the bits one by one toward the bits, if the confirmation results of this time and the previous time are in a state where the detection piece 588b blocks the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the value 0 is set to the least significant bit. On the other hand, when the confirmation results of this time and the previous time are both in a state where the detection piece 588b does not block the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590, or when the confirmation results of this time and the previous time are different (for example, this time and the previous time). One of the confirmation results is when the detection piece 588b blocks the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590, and the other is the state where the detection piece 588b does not block the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590. If there is), the value 1 is set to the least significant bit.

As described above, in the history creation process, the payout control board 633 updates and creates the history information having an 8-bit width every 4 ms when the payout motor 584 by 2-2 phase excitation is excited and switched. The payout control board 633 executes an origin setting process for setting the rotation position of the payout blade 589 as the origin based on the history information updated and created every 4 ms. When the payout control board 633 repeatedly executes the payout motor control process to rotate the rotation axis of the payout motor 584 by 5 steps from the state where the rotation position of the payout blade 589 is located at the point A, as described above, Since the rotation position of the payout blade 589 is the origin, the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590 is located in the region of 60 degrees where the detection piece 588b described above is not formed, and the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590 is detected. 588b is in a non-blocking state.

Then, in the information from the most significant bit to the least significant bit stored in the history information having an 8-bit width, the detection piece 588b is the blade rotation detection sensor 590 immediately before the rotation position of the payout blade 589 is located at the point A. Since the optical axis of the above is changed from the blocked state to the non-blocked state (first edge detection state), 00000001B (“B” indicates bit information. The same shall apply hereinafter) is set. .. Then, when the rotation position of the payout blade 589 advances from the point A to the origin, 00111111B is set in the information from the most significant bit to the least significant bit stored and held in the history information having an 8-bit width. In the origin setting process, the payout control board 633 extracts the data from 8 times before to 5 times before as the calculation result by performing the first mask processing on the history information with the first determination value of 11110000B. Later (here, the calculation result becomes 00110000B by the first mask processing), the second determination value of 00010000B is further subjected to the second mask processing on the extracted data, so that the history information is five times before. The data is taken out as the calculation result (here, the calculation result becomes 00010000B by the second mask processing), and when the value is 0, it is determined that the current rotation position of the payout blade 589 is not at the origin, and the payout blade is determined. While the current rotation position of the 589 is not set as the origin, if the value is not 0, it is determined that the current rotation position of the payout blade 589 is at the origin and the current rotation position of the payout blade 589 is set as the origin.

When the rotation position of the payout blade 589 is set as the origin in the origin setting process, the payout control board 633 rotates the rotation axis of the payout motor 584 by 5 steps from the state where the rotation position of the payout blade 589 is located at the origin. Then, the rotation position of the payout blade 589 is set to point B, and the rotation axis of the payout motor 584 is rotated by 9 steps from the state where the rotation position of the payout blade 589 is located at point B (that is, the light-shielding range is exceeded). This process is terminated as it is in a total of 13 steps of rotation in which the rotation position of the payout blade 589 is set to point A again. That is, in the present embodiment, when the payout control board 633 sets the rotation position of the payout blade 589 as the origin in the origin setting process, until the time until the rotation axis of the payout motor 584 is rotated by a total of 13 steps elapses. An origin detection prohibition time is provided for prohibiting the origin setting for the payout blade 589.

The payout control board 633 excites and switches the payout motor 584 by 2-2 phase excitation every 4 ms by executing the payout motor control process. As shown in FIG. 91, the payout control board 633 rotates the rotation axis of the payout motor 584 by 5 steps from the state where the rotation position of the payout blade 589 is located at point A, and the rotation position of the payout blade 589 is the origin. The time is 20 ms (= 4 ms × 5 step rotation), and the rotation axis of the payout motor 584 is rotated by 5 steps from the state where the rotation position of the payout blade 589 is located at the origin, and the rotation position of the payout blade 589 is set to B. The time to be a point is 16 ms (= 4 ms × 4 step rotation), and the rotation axis of the payout motor 584 is rotated by 9 steps from the state where the rotation position of the payout blade 589 is located at the point B (that is, the shading range is set. The time to set the rotation position of the payout blade 589 (which is within the light receiving range again) to point A again is 36 ms (= 4 ms × 9 step rotation). As described above, the payout of one ball of the game ball B is performed by 18-step rotation of the rotation axis of the payout motor 584. Therefore, the time required for paying out one ball of the game ball B is paid out. By performing the rotation by 18 steps of the rotation shaft of the motor 584, it becomes 72 ms (= 4 ms × 18 steps rotation).

Incidentally, conventionally, a gaming machine equipped with a payout device that pays out a number of game balls corresponding to the amount of rotation of a payout rotating body that receives and sends out game balls by driving a payout motor has been proposed (for example, special feature). Kai 2004-041261 (paragraph [0052], and FIG. 4)). In the gaming machine of this document, the rotation time of one step of the payout motor is set to 18 mS, and the payout motor is set to rotate 30 degrees by the output of the data drive data for four steps to pay out one game ball. ing. In pachinko machines installed in pachinko parlors, it is inevitable that tobacco tar and dust adhering to the game balls will adhere to the inside of the payout device. Further, since the dispensing device is not disassembled and cleaned, a dispensing device that is strong against tobacco tar and dust is required. By the way, in the gaming machine of this document, the payout motor is set to rotate 30 degrees by driving four steps of the payout motor to pay out one game ball, so that accurate operation can be expected, but the game is played. It can be seen that the contact position between the ball and the payout rotating body is the same every time. For this reason, there is a problem that the position where tobacco tar and dust adhere is fixed and easily accumulated.

[4-7-2c. Ball clogging prevention and ball dropout prevention]
Next, prevention of ball clogging and prevention of ball omission will be described with reference to FIG. 92. Here, the prevention of ball clogging at the time of ball removal will be described first, and then the prevention of ball removal due to the non-energized state of the payout motor 584 will be described.

By locating the ball pulling lever 593 at the rising end as described above, the ball pulling movable piece 592 can be rotated to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b, and the ball pulling passage 580b can be opened. You can do it. When the ball is pulled out, the ball pulling lever 593 is raised to make the ball pulling movable piece 592 rotatable. At this time, in a state where the rotation position of the payout blade 589 is stopped at the origin, as shown in FIG. 92 (a), a part of the passage inner wall forming the payout passage 580a from the ball accommodating portion 589b of the payout blade 589. A total of four game balls B are parked up to the rib-shaped ball clogging prevention portion 581r, which has a predetermined distance dimension and projects toward the ball removal passage 580b. As for this predetermined distance dimension, the center (center of gravity) position of the game ball B anchored on the upper surface of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r is on the right side of the left end side of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r and is downstream (that is, the payout blade 589 exists). It has a length located on the downstream side of the payout passage 580a). As a result, a rib-shaped ball clogging prevention portion in which a part of the inner wall of the passage forming the payout passage 580a is projected from the ball accommodating portion 589b of the payout blade 589 toward the ball ejection passage 580b having a predetermined distance dimension. When a plurality of game balls B are stopped in the payout passage 580a up to 581r, a part of the last game ball B to be stopped is in a state of protruding toward the ball removal passage 580b in the ball clogging prevention unit 581r. That is, the predetermined distance dimension is formed so as to form a side wall of the ball pulling passage 580b when the game ball B (that is, the last game ball B) is parked on the upper surface of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r. The game ball B flowing down along the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a described above collides with the game ball B (that is, the last game ball B) staying on the upper surface of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r. Even so, the length is such that it can flow down to the ball ejection passage 580b side. In this way, by stopping in a state where a part of the game ball B (that is, the last game ball B) protrudes toward the ball removal passage 580b on the upper surface of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r (in other words, ball clogging prevention). The width of the ball-extracting passage 580b is restricted to the width at which one game ball B can flow down (depending on the length at which a part of the game ball B staying on the upper surface of the portion 581r protrudes toward the ball-extracting passage 580b). You can do it.

Further, as described above, the ball clogging prevention portion 581r is formed so that the upper surface thereof and the inner wall surface of the passage forming the payout passage 580a are formed in the same plane so as to be a downwardly inclined surface in the rear view.

That is, when the ball is pulled out while the game ball B (that is, the last game ball B) is stopped on the upper surface of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r, the game ball B that has flowed down from the upstream of the payout passage 580a. However, even if the ball collides with the game ball B (that is, the last game ball B) that stays on the upper surface of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r, the upper surface of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r is a downwardly inclined surface in the rear view. The center (center of gravity) of the game ball B (that is, the rearmost game ball B) staying on the upper surface of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r is located on the right side of the left end side of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r and on the downstream side. It is possible to prevent the game ball B (that is, the last game ball B) stopped on the upper surface of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r from popping due to a collision and flowing down toward the ball removal passage 580b. You can do it. As a result, it is possible to prevent the game ball B flowing down from the upstream of the payout passage 580a from causing ball clogging in the vicinity of the left end of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r.

As a result, the game ball B (that is, the last game ball B) staying on the upper surface of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r is passed along the ball removal path (main body side guide wall 581a and rear lid side guide wall 582a). The flow path of the game ball B on the side) is restricted to the width at which one game ball B can flow down as the width of the ball removal passage 580b as shown by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 92 (a). This makes it possible to prevent ball clogging. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent ball clogging when the ball is pulled out. In the present embodiment, the width of the ball ejection passage 580b is set to be from the minimum width: 12 mm to the maximum width: 14 mm, although it varies depending on the rotation position of the payout blade 589, and the rotation of the payout blade 589. It is set to 13 mm when the position is stopped at the origin. Incidentally, ball clogging is likely to occur in a place where the width of various passages is narrowed from a place wider than twice the diameter of the game ball (11 mm) to a little narrower than twice the diameter of the game ball (for example, 21 mm).

Next, prevention of ball dropout due to the non-energized state of the payout motor 584 will be described. As shown in FIG. 92A, in the state where the rotation position of the payout blade 589 is stopped at the origin, only one game ball B in the payout passage 580a is accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b of the payout blade 589. At the same time, the game ball B is connected to the game ball B in a state where the subsequent game ball B is in contact with the game ball B and is stopped in the payout passage 580a. In this state, as described above, the center (center of gravity) of the game ball B housed in the ball accommodating portion 589b of the payout blade 589 and the rotation center axis of the payout blade 589 are arranged on the same vertical line. Further, as described above, the payout passage 580a extends diagonally downward from the top to a height of about 1/3 of the total height so as to gradually move to the left from the upstream end toward the bottom, and slightly to the right from there. After bending diagonally downward, it bends at about 1/3 of the left and right width and extends substantially vertically downward toward the center (rotation axis) of the payout blade 589.

Therefore, the center (center of gravity) position of the game ball B in contact with the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b of the payout blade 589 is the center of the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b of the payout blade 589 (the center of gravity). The position is slightly shifted to the left side of the position of the center of gravity), and in a state where the rotation position of the payout blade 589 is stopped at the origin, the game ball B housed in the ball accommodating portion 589b of the payout blade 589 is followed. Due to the ball pressure due to the weight of the game ball B, a rightward force (that is, a force that rotates clockwise) acts on the rotation center axis of the payout blade 589.

In such a state, when the payout motor 584 is de-energized, it naturally rotates clockwise with respect to the rotation center axis of the payout blade 589, and is housed in the ball accommodating portion 589b of the payout blade 589. The game ball B will flow down (delivered) to the downstream side of the payout passage 580a, and the ball will come off.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the payout motor 584 is in a non-energized state, the rotation axis of the payout motor 584 is the payout blade 589 even if it naturally rotates clockwise with respect to the rotation center axis of the payout blade 589. The shape of the payout passage 580a on the right side of the payout blade 589 is formed in the rear view so that it can be stopped by rotating 6 steps from the origin.

Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 92 (b) and 92 (c), when the payout motor 584 is in a non-energized state, the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 rotates 6 steps from the origin of the payout blade 589 and stops. The outer circumference of the blade piece 589a having an arc shape of the payout blade 589 and the S1 point where the game ball B abutting on the game ball B housed in the ball accommodating portion 589b of the payout blade 589 abuts on the side wall of the payout passage 580a. Of the surface, the ball accommodating portion 589b in which the game ball B is accommodated is closer to the side (that is, the ball accommodating portion 589b in which the game ball B is accommodated, and the ball accommodating portion 589b and the subsequent game ball B are not accommodated. Of the outer peripheral surface of the blade piece 589a connecting the portion 589b, the S2 point that comes into contact with the ball accommodating portion 589b (closer to the ball accommodating portion 589b side in which the game ball B is accommodated) is leaned against the center of the outer peripheral surface. The shape of the payout passage 580a is formed. As a result, a ball pressure that presses the outer peripheral surface of the blade piece 589a of the payout blade 589 can be generated, and the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 can be stopped by rotating 6 steps from the origin of the payout blade 589. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent the ball from coming off due to the non-energized state of the payout motor 584.

When the payout control board 633 starts controlling the payout motor 584 when the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 rotates 6 steps from the origin of the payout blade 589 and stops, it rotates 6 steps from the origin of the payout blade 589. Therefore, it is in a state of being rotated by 2 steps in the shading range (9 steps) beyond the point B which is rotated by 4 steps from the origin and advanced as shown in FIG. 91 (d). However, when the rotation axis of the payout motor 584 rotates 13 steps (the remaining 7 steps rotate + 5 steps from point A because it rotates 2 steps out of 9 steps shown in FIG. 91 (d)), the payout blade 589 rotates. The game ball B housed in the ball accommodating portion 589b of the payout blade 589 flows down (delivered) to the downstream side of the payout passage 580a, and is reliably detected by the payout detection sensor 591. ing. Therefore, even when the rotation axis of the payout motor 584 is deviated from the origin of the payout blade 589 (rotates by 6 steps and advances) and stops, the number of balls to which the game ball B is paid out does not become excessive.

Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the payout control board 633 can be used for pressing the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the dish unit 200, or for a payout command from the main control board of the game board 5. Accordingly, the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 is controlled to pay out the instructed number of game balls B to the player side (upper plate 201 or lower plate 202), so that the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or has a power failure. At the time of power recovery at the time of power recovery after (a momentary power failure in which a power failure occurs momentarily), the payout motor 584 is first controlled so as not to return the rotation position of the payout blade 589 to the origin. This causes an excessive number of balls to be paid out by the game ball B in a state where the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is deviated from the origin of the payout blade 589 (rotates by 6 steps and advances) and is stopped. This is to prevent this.

[4-7-3. Upper full tank path unit]
The upper full tank path unit 600 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88 and the like. The upper full tank path unit 600 is attached from the rear to the lower side of the payout device 580 at the lower part of the rear surface of the back plate left portion 551e of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550. The upper full tank path unit 600 is for guiding the game ball B downward from the payout device 580 to the lower full tank path unit 610. The upper full tank path unit 600 is formed in a quadrangle whose front view shape extends vertically.

The upper full tank path unit 600 has a box-shaped upper full tank base 601 attached to the payout base 551 and the rear side is open, and a box shape attached to the rear side of the upper full tank base 601 and the front side is open. The upper full tank cover 602 and the payout device pressing member 603 rotatably attached near the upper end of the upper full tank cover 602 and capable of pressing the payout device 580 upward are provided. The upper full tank base 601 projects from the right side in the front view to the right, and includes a back cover mounting portion 601a for mounting the back cover.

Further, the upper full tank path unit 600 is open upward near the left end of the front view on the upper surface, and extends downward along the left side from the bottom to a position of about 2/3 of the total height. It communicates with the ball receiving passage 600a and the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a, and extends to the right of the front view by about 3/4 of the total width and extends downward from the bottom to a height of about 1/6 of the total height. The upper sphere storage passage 600b, the upper normal payout passage 600c extending downward from the left side in the front view from the center of the upper sphere storage passage 600b in the left-right direction and opening downward on the lower surface, and the upper normal payout passage 600c adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c. The upper full tank discharge passage 600d extending downward from the right side of the front view and opening downward on the lower surface of the ball storage passage 600b from the center in the left-right direction, and the upper full tank payout passage 600d opening upward near the right end of the front view on the upper surface and substantially vertical downward. It is provided with an upper ball-extracting passage 600e which is opened downward near the right end of the lower surface after extending to (see FIG. 94).

On the lower surface of the upper full tank path unit 600, the upper normal payout passage 600c, the upper full tank payout passage 600d, and the upper ball removal passage 600e are opened downward in order from the left side in the front view. In the state where the upper full tank path unit 600 is assembled in the payout unit 560, the upstream end of the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a is opened just below the downstream end of the payout passage 580a in the payout device 580, and the upper ball is pulled out. The upstream end of the passage 600e opens just below the downstream end of the ball ejection passage 580b in the payout device 580. As a result, the game ball B released (paid out) from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 passes through the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a and the upper ball storage passage 600b, and passes through the upper normal payout passage 600c or the upper full tank payout passage 600d. It is emitted downward from any of the above. Further, the game ball B discharged downward from the ball pulling passage 580b of the payout device 580 is discharged downward through the upper ball pulling passage 600e.

[4-7-4. Lower full tank path unit]
The lower full tank path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 87 and 88 and the like. The lower full tank path unit 610 is placed on the bottom plate portion 551 g of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, and is attached to the lower part of the upper full tank path unit 600. The lower full tank path unit 610 guides the game ball B discharged downward from the upper full tank path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or to the substrate unit 620 side. The lower full tank path unit 610 extends in the front-rear direction so that the front end side is lowered, and the rear end extends upward.

The lower full tank path unit 610 has a lower normal payout passage 610a, a lower full tank payout passage 610b, and a lower ball removal passage 610c, and is a lower full tank base that extends in the front-rear direction and is open upward. 611, the lower full tank cover 612 attached to the upper side of the lower full tank base 611, and the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower normal payout passage 610a which are rotatably attached to the front end of the lower full tank base 611 around an axis extending back and forth. A payout passage opening / closing door 613 that can open and close the downstream end opening of the lower full tank payout passage 610b, and a payout passage opening / closing door 613 in the direction of closing the downstream end opening of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b are attached. It is equipped with a rushing closing spring 614.

In the lower full tank path unit 610, the lower normal payout passage 610a, the lower full tank payout passage 610b, and the lower ball removal passage 610c are arranged in this order from the left in the front view on the upper surface of the portion extending upward at the rear end. In the state, each upstream end opens upward. The lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b extend forward in a state of being arranged side by side, and then open forward at the front end of the lower full tank ball path unit 610. The lower full tank payout passage 610b extends forward in a state slightly lower than the lower normal payout passage 610a. The lower ball pulling passage 610c extends forward along the front right side surface of the lower full tank payout passage 610b, and opens to the right in the middle of the front-rear direction.

The payout passage opening / closing door 613 is rotatably attached at a position between the front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b. The payout passage opening / closing door 613 is urged in the clockwise direction when viewed from the front by a closing spring 614. Under normal conditions, the front end openings (downstream ends) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b are respectively. The opening) is closed. The payout passage opening / closing door 613 is provided with an actuating protrusion 613a projecting forward. The actuating protrusion 613a is formed in a front view shape in a short arc shape centered on the rotation center of the payout passage opening / closing door 613, and as the front end surface approaches the end side in the counterclockwise direction. It is tilted so that it protrudes forward. The actuating protrusion 613a is formed so as to come into contact with the door opening / closing contact portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4.

When the lower full tank path unit 610 is assembled to the payout unit 560, the lower normal payout passage 610a, the lower full tank payout passage 610b, and the lower ball removal passage 610c, which are open upward at the upper end of the rear portion, are respectively upper full. It is located directly below the downstream end of the upper normal payout passage 600c, the upper full tank payout passage 600d, and the upper ball removal passage 600e of the tongue ball path unit 600. As a result, the game ball B discharged downward from the upper normal payout passage 600c circulates in the lower normal payout passage 610a, and the game ball B discharged downward from the upper full tank payout passage 600d circulates in the lower full tank payout passage 610b. The game ball B discharged downward from the upper ball pulling passage 600e will circulate in the lower ball pulling passage 610c.

Further, in the state where the lower full tank path unit 610 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the front end (downstream end) of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b penetrates the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3. It opens immediately after the ball passage 150a and the full ball receiving port 150b. Further, the downstream end of the lower ball pulling passage 610c is opened so as to face the ball pulling guide portion 627 which is opened to the left in the base unit 620b of the substrate unit 620.

In the normal state (the state in which the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4), the lower full tank path unit 610 has the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 in contact with the door opening / closing contact of the foul cover unit 150. By abutting against the portion 150f, it rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front against the urging force of the closing spring 614. As a result, the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b are open, and communicate with the penetrating ball passage 150a and the full tank receiver 150b of the foul cover unit 150. It is in a state.

On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is separated from the door opening / closing contact portion 150f of the foul cover unit 150, and the payout passage opening / closing door 613 Is rotated in the clockwise direction in the front view by the urging force of the closing spring 614, and the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b are closed. In this state, the game balls B in the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b cannot move forward from their respective front end openings. As a result, even if the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the game ball B does not spill from the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b.

[4-7-5. Flow of game balls in the payout unit]
Subsequently, the flow of the game ball B in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 94. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the payout base 551 when assembled on the main body frame 4. In a normal state, the ball pulling lever 593 of the payout device 580 is located at the descending end, and the ball pulling passage 580b branching from the payout passage 580a is closed at the branch portion. Further, in the lower full tank path unit 610, the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is in the open state.

A predetermined number of ball tanks 552 opened upward are detected by the ball cutting detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570 from the island equipment of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Game ball B is supplied. The game balls B supplied and stored in the ball tank 552 are sent into the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 through the guide passage 570a of the ball guide unit 570 in a state of being arranged in a row by the tank rail 553. When the payout motor 584 is not rotating, the game ball B cannot move (flow down) to the downstream side of the payout blade 589, and a plurality of game balls B stay on the upstream side of the payout blade 589. It becomes.

Then, the game ball B in the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 presses the movable piece member 573, and the ball cutting detection sensor 574 detects the movable piece member 573. From this, it can be seen that the game ball B is stored in the passage between at least the movable piece member 573 and the payout blade 589.

In this state, when the payout blade 589 is rotated in the rear view clockwise direction by the payout motor 584, the game ball B housed in the ball accommodating portion 589b moves in the rear view clockwise direction, and the payout blade 580a in the payout passage 580a is moved. It is released to the downstream side of 589. Then, the game ball B released from the payout blade 589 (ball accommodating portion 589b) is sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full tank ball path unit 600 after being detected by the payout detection sensor 591.

The game ball B sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full tank path unit 600 is arranged directly under the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a through the upper ball storage passage 600b in a normal state. It flows down to the upper normal payout passage 600c. Then, the game ball B that has flowed down into the upper normal payout passage 600c passes through the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full tank path unit 610 and the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3, and the plate unit 200. Is discharged into the upper plate 201 from the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 in the above.

When a large number of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 and the inside of the upper plate 201 is filled with the game balls B, the game balls B cannot be discharged forward from the upper plate ball supply port 211a, so that the payout device The game ball B paid out from the 580 stays in the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full tank path unit 610, and when the game ball B is further paid out, the lower normal payout passage 610a and the upstream side It will also stay in the upper normal payout passage 600c of the upper full tank path unit 600 that communicates. Then, when the upper normal payout passage 600c is filled with the game ball B and the game ball B is further paid out, the upper normal payout passage 600c is communicated with the upper ball storage passage 600b on the upstream side. As the game ball B begins to stay, the game ball B begins to flow down to the upper full tank payout passage 600d adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c.

Then, the game ball B that has flowed down to the upper full tank payout passage 600d passes through the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the lower full tank path unit 610, and the full tank receiver 150b in the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3 Can be received by. After that, the game ball B received by the full tank ball receiving port 150b is discharged into the lower plate 202 through the storage passage 150e, the ball discharge port 150d, and the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211. As a result, when the upper plate 201 is filled with the game ball B and the game ball B is further paid out, the game ball B can be automatically paid out to the lower plate 202.

When the lower plate 202 is filled with the game ball B and the game ball B cannot be discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c, the lower plate B is further paid out. The game ball B is retained and stored in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 on the upstream side of the ball supply port 211c. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the movable piece 153 moves and is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154, and the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 are filled with the game balls B ( The player is informed that the tank is full), and the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 is temporarily stopped until the full tank detection sensor 154 is in a non-detection state.

When the game ball B stored in the ball tank 552 is discharged from the pachinko machine 1 during maintenance or replacement of the pachinko machine 1, the ball pulling lever 593 of the payout device 580 is moved upward from the position of the descending end. Slide it to the position of the rising end. After that, the lower end side of the ball-extracting movable piece 592 is pushed by the game ball B and rotates in the clockwise direction in the rear view, and the ball-extracting movable piece 592 becomes the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a. It is in a state of being pushed out to the outside of the ball pulling passage 580b through the space. As a result, the game ball B can enter the ball pulling passage 580b branching from the payout passage 580a, and the game ball B on the upstream side is discharged downward through the ball pulling passage 580b.

At this time, at the portion of the ball pulling movable piece 592, the flowing game ball B comes into contact with the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a more strongly than the ball pulling movable piece 592, so that the ball pulling movable piece 592 Is hard to break.

Then, the game ball B discharged downward from the ball pulling passage 580b of the payout device 580 passes through the upper ball pulling passage 600e of the upper full tank path unit 600 and the lower ball pulling passage 610c of the lower full ball path unit 610. After being discharged from the downstream end opening of the lower ball ejection passage 610c to the ball ejection guiding portion 627 of the substrate unit 620, it passes through the ejection ball receiving portion 628 and the ball ejection port 629 to the rear outside of the pachinko machine 1 (game hole). It is discharged to the island facility side).

[4-8. Board unit]
The substrate unit 620 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 95 to 99 and the like. FIG. 95 (a) is a perspective view of the substrate unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 95 (b) is a perspective view of the substrate unit as viewed from the rear. FIG. 96 is a perspective view of the substrate unit as viewed from the lower rear. FIG. 97 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 98 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the rear. FIG. 99 is an enlarged side sectional view showing the lower part of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. The board unit 620 is attached to the lower part of the rear surface of the main body frame base unit 500.

The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a mounted below the game board mounting portion 501c on the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a main body frame so as to cover a part of the speaker unit 620a from the rear. A base unit 620b mounted on the rear surface of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c mounted on the rear side of the base unit 620b, a payout control unit 620d mounted on the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control unit 620d. It includes an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to partially cover the speaker unit 620a from the rear.

The speaker unit 620a has a speaker cover 621 mounted below the game board mounting portion 501c on the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and the speaker unit 621 faces forward near the left end of the front view on the rear surface of the speaker cover 621. It is provided with a main body frame speaker 622 attached to the main body frame speaker 622, and a container-shaped speaker box 623 attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 and opened forward. ..

The speaker cover 621 extends in the left-right direction, penetrates back and forth near the left end of the front view, and has a circular speaker mounting portion 621a formed by a plurality of slits extending vertically, and the front surface of the speaker mounting portion 621a. The space front recess 621b, which is recessed so as to bulge from the rear to the front on the right side of the view, and the space front recess 621b, which protrudes downward from the lower surface and extends in the left-right direction, diagonally downward and backward. It is provided with an open connection portion 621c.

The main body frame speaker 622 is attached to the speaker mounting portion 621a of the speaker cover 621 from the rear side toward the front. Further, the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees so that the lower end coincides with the upper end of the connection cylinder portion 43a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2. .. The main body frame speaker 622 is a cone-type speaker that mainly outputs bass.

The speaker box 623 is formed in a container shape that is open to the front, and the portion on the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 protrudes most rearward. It is formed so that the protrusion of the speaker is small. As a result, a sufficient space behind the center of the front view of the speaker box 623 can be secured, and the base unit 620b, the power supply unit 620c, and the like can be arranged. The speaker box 623 is formed so as to cover (close) the entire rear surface of the speaker cover 621 except for the connecting portion 621c.

The speaker unit 620a is formed by a speaker cover 621 and a speaker box 623 as a part of an enclosure 624 for containing the sound output rearward from the main body frame speaker 622. Since the enclosure 624 has a front recess 621b for space that bulges forward to the right of the front view of the speaker mounting portion 621a in the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623 projects rearward as it moves to the right. Even if the speaker is formed in a stepped shape so that the amount is small, the space to the right of the main body frame speaker 622 is sufficiently widened.

When the main body frame 4 of the speaker unit 620a is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is connected to the connection cylinder portion 43a so as to sandwich the seal member 48, and is behind the main body frame speaker 622. And the space 40a inside the curtain plate of the outer frame 2 are in communication with each other. Therefore, an enclosure 624 in a wide space can be formed behind the main body frame speaker 622 by the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623, the curtain plate front member 42, and the curtain plate rear member 43, and behind the main body frame speaker 622. The sound output to can be output (radiated) forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42.

More specifically, as described above, in the speaker unit 620a, the space behind the main body frame speaker 622 (a part of the enclosure 624) is extended to the right side of the front view with a relatively wide depth, and the connection portion 621c and the connection portion 621c and Since the sound is communicated to the outer frame lower assembly 40 side via the connection cylinder portion 43a, the outer frame lower assembly 40 does not particularly attenuate the bass range in the sound output rearward from the main body frame speaker 622. It can be transmitted to the side, and the transmitted bass range can be resonated and amplified by passing through the two port members 47 and radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42.

At this time, since the sound radiated forward from the opening 42a of the curtain plate front member 42 is radiated in a state where the phase is inverted, it is output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and is a dish unit. The sound radiated from the speaker port 211b of 200 is resonated so as to be amplified, and even if the diameter of the main body frame speaker 622 is small, it is possible to output a large sound in which deep bass sounds.

That is, in the present embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main body frame speaker 622 is a bass reflex type, and the player can hear the deep bass. As a result, the sound output from the front surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the speaker port 211b of the dish unit 200 and the sound output from the rear surface of the main body frame speaker 622 and radiated from the grill member 46 of the outer frame 2 This makes it possible for the player to hear a sound having rich bass.

Further, in the speaker unit 620a, the speaker cover 621 is formed with a through hole 621d penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position between the lower portion of the speaker mounting portion 621a and the front recess 621b for space, and the speaker box 623. In addition, a through cylinder 623a that communicates with the through port 621d and extends in a tubular shape and penetrates back and forth is formed. In the state of being assembled to the speaker unit 620a, the through port 621d and the through cylinder 623a communicate with each other and become independent from the enclosure 624. A connection cable 503 is inserted through the through port 621d and the through cylinder 623a.

The base unit 620b of the board unit 620 has a front base 625 attached to the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 so as to cover a part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the front base 625. It is equipped with a rear base 626 to which the 620c is mounted.

Further, the base unit 620b is formed by the front base 625 and the rear base 626 in cooperation with each other, and receives the game ball B released from the lower ball removal passage 610c of the lower full tank path unit 610 and is viewed from the front. A ball ejection guidance unit 627 that guides to the right, and a discharge ball receiving portion that is open upward on the right side of the front view on the downstream side of the ball extraction guidance unit 627 and receives the game ball B discharged downward from the game board 5. It includes a 628, a ball discharge port 629 that discharges the game ball B that has passed through the ball pulling guidance unit 627 and the discharge ball receiving unit 628 downward.

The ball pulling guide portion 627 has an upstream end opening to the upper part of the left side surface toward the left in front view, and a downstream end opening to the left end side of the discharge ball receiving portion 628. In the state of being assembled to the main body frame 4, the ball pulling guide portion 627 faces the opening at the upstream end so as to coincide with the opening at the downstream end of the lower ball pulling passage 610c of the lower full tank path unit 610. The game ball B released from the ball removal passage 610c can be received and guided to the discharge ball receiving portion 628.

The discharge ball receiving portion 628 is open upward and extends long to the left and right. The bottom surface of the discharge ball receiving portion 628 is inclined so that the left end of the front view is continuous with the bottom surface of the ball ejection guiding portion 627 and becomes lower toward the right.

The base unit 620b guides the game ball B pulled out from the ball tank 552 and the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 to the right in the front view by the ball pulling guide unit 627 and the discharge ball receiving unit 628, and then the ball. Since the space is discharged downward from the discharge port 629, it is possible to easily secure a large space on the left side of the center in the left-right direction in the front view. As a result, the space of the enclosure 624 of the speaker unit 620a can be widened, and the player can hear the sound having richer bass than the conventional pachinko machine.

The power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 is a power supply board 630 attached to the rear side of the rear base 626 of the base unit 620b and a power supply board cover attached to the rear base 626 so as to cover the rear side of the power supply board 630. It is equipped with 631 and. There is a transformer (not shown) in the island equipment of the game hall, and the commercial power supply of AC100V is stepped down to AC24V. AC24V, which is stepped down in the island equipment of the game hall, is supplied to the power supply board 630 via a power supply wiring (not shown). The power supply board 630 creates various power sources (various DC voltages such as DC + 37V, DC + 12V, and DC 5V) from AC24V supplied from the island equipment of the game hall and supplies them to various boards.

The payout control unit 620d includes a box-shaped payout control board box 632 that is detachably attached to the rear side of the power supply board cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control board 633 housed in the payout control board box 632 (FIG. 99) and. The payout control board 633 controls the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 in response to a pressing operation of the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the dish unit 200 and a payout command from the main control board of the game board 5. Then, the instructed number of game balls B are paid out to the player side (upper plate 201 or lower plate 202).

The payout control board box 632 is composed of a cover body (not shown) and a base body (not shown). The cover body and the beta body are made of polycarbonate resin and are transparently molded. The payout control board 633 can be accommodated in the internal space formed by the cover body and the base body. Since the cover body and the beta body are transparently molded from the polycarbonate resin, the state of the front side and the back side of the payout control board 633 (whether or not it has been tampered with or the illicit IC is mounted). Whether or not it is done) can be confirmed from the outside of the payout control board box 632. Further, the payout control board box 632 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms corresponding to the cover body and the beta body, respectively, and when the payout control board box 632 is closed by using one sealing mechanism, the payout control board box 632 is then paid out. In order to open the control board box 632, it is necessary to destroy the sealing mechanism, and it is possible to leave a trace of opening and closing of the payout control board box 632. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the payout control board box 632, and the deterrent force against fraudulent acts on the payout control board box 632 is enhanced.

The interface unit 620e covers the substrate base 634 attached to the rear side of the speaker box 623 in the speaker unit 620a, the interface substrate 635 attached to the rear surface of the substrate base 634, and the rear side of the interface substrate 635. It includes an interface board cover 636 attached to the board base 634.

The board base 634 is attached to a portion on the rear surface of the speaker box 623 that protrudes most rearward, which is behind the main body frame speaker 622. One end (main body frame 4 side) of the connection cable 503 is connected to the interface board 635. The interface board 635 is connected to the power supply board 630, the payout control board 633, the main control board, the peripheral control board, and the like, and is also connected to the CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. The interface board cover 636 extends to the right in the front view from the board base 634 (interface board 635) so as to cover a part of the payout control unit 620d.

[4-9. Back cover]
The back cover 640 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 76 to 82. The back cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5 inserted and attached from the front into the game board insertion port 501b of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. The back cover 640 is rotatably attached to the rear end where the right side in front view extends vertically of the rear extending portion 501j of the main body frame base 501, and the left side is the payout base 551. It is attached to the back cover mounting portion 551i of the above and the back cover mounting portion 601a of the upper full tank path unit 600.

The back cover 640 is formed in a shape in which the right side of the flat plate extending vertically and horizontally is bent forward, and the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d of the payout base 551 is formed in a state of being assembled to the main body frame 4. It is formed so as to be located on substantially the same surface as the rear surface. The back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of slits 641 that penetrate the front and rear and extend vertically. In the present embodiment, the back cover 640 is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and the inside of the main body frame 4 can be visually recognized from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

[4-10. Locking unit]
The locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 100. FIG. 100A is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 100B is a perspective view of the locking unit as viewed from the rear. The locking unit 650 is attached to the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame 4 and locks between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2.

The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 that is attached to the right side surface of the rear extending portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 and extends vertically, and a plurality of units that project forward from the unit base 651 and can be locked to the door frame 3. Door frame hook 652, multiple outer frame hooks 653 protruding rearward from the unit base 651 and lockable to the outer frame 2, and door frame protruding forward from the lower front end of the unit base 651 depending on the direction of rotation. It is provided with a transmission cylinder 654 for moving the hook 652 or the hook 653 for the outer frame in the vertical direction.

Further, the locking unit 650 is more than a lock spring 655 that urges the door frame hook 652 downward and an outer frame hook 653 upward, and a transmission cylinder 654 at the front end of the unit base 651. It is provided with an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that projects forward from an upper position and slides downward to move the outer frame hook 653 downward.

When the locking unit 650 is assembled on the main body frame 4, a plurality of (three) door frame hooks 652, a transmission cylinder 654, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 are moved forward from the front surface of the main body frame base 501. It is protruding. The transmission cylinder 654 protrudes forward through the cylinder insertion port 501f of the main body frame base 501, and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, so that the front end of the cylinder lock 130 of the door frame 3 rotates. It engages with the transmission member 133, and the rotation of the key inserted in the keyhole 132 is transmitted and rotates.

In the locking unit 650, a plurality of (three) door frame hooks 652 are locked to the hook member 116 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, and the outside of the plurality (two). The frame hook 653 is locked to the upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 of the outer frame right assembly 20 in the outer frame 2.

When the lock unit 650 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1 and the key corresponding to the keyhole 132 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted and rotated in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the front, a plurality of lock units 650 are inserted via the transmission cylinder 654. The door frame hook 652 moves upward, and the door frame 3 is unlocked with respect to the main body frame 4. On the other hand, when the key is rotated in the clockwise direction in the front view, a plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward via the transmission cylinder 654, and the main body frame 4 is unlocked with respect to the outer frame 2. When the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, when the outer frame unlocking lever 656 is slid downward, a plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward, and the main body frame with respect to the outer frame 2 is moved downward. 4 is unlocked. In this way, the lock between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 can be unlocked.

When locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2, the tip side of the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 is inclined so as to be thin. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the door frame hook 652 and the outer frame hook 653 are replaced with the hook member 116 and the upper hook member. After moving downward or upward so as to get over the 24 and the lower hook member 25, the door is locked by the urging force of the lock spring 655.

[5. Overall configuration of the game board]
The overall configuration of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 101 and 102. FIG. 101 is a front view of a game board in a pachinko machine. FIG. 102 is a front view showing the inside of the game area in which the game balls are distributed on the game board. The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a in which the game ball B is hit by the player operating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. In the game area 5a, a general winning opening 2001, a first starting port 2002, and a gate portion that grant a predetermined privilege (for example, payout of a predetermined number of game balls B) to a player by accepting or passing the game ball B. 2003, a second starting port 2004, a first major winning opening 2005, and a second major winning opening 2006 are provided (see FIG. 102). Therefore, in the game board 5, the game ball B has a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, a gate portion 2003, a second starting opening 2004, a first big winning opening 2005, and a second big winning in the game area 5a. This is for performing a game that enjoys the driving operation of the handle 182 and the distribution of the game ball B in the game area 5a so as to be accepted or passed through the mouth 2006 or the like.

The game board 5 is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000, which divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially square outer shape in front view, and the rear end of the game area 5a. It is provided with a plate-shaped game panel 1100. A plurality of obstacle nails N that come into contact with the game ball B are planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion within the game area 5a on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (see FIG. 102). Further, the game board 5 is a game played by driving the game ball B into the game area 5a, which is attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear side of the game panel 1100 and the board holder 1200. It includes a main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIGS. 99, 124, etc.) for controlling the contents.

Further, the game board 5 displays a game status based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and has a function display unit 1400 and a game panel visibly attached to the player side in the upper left corner of the front component 1000. Peripheral control units (not shown) arranged on the rear side of the 1100, an effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and a game panel 1100. It further includes a front unit 2000 attached to the front surface and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100. The effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and the peripheral control unit is attached to the rear surface of the effect display device 1600.

The game panel 1100 holds the transparent flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 and the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110, which are formed to be slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front component 1000, and the front component 1000. It is provided with a frame-shaped panel holder (not shown), which is attached to the rear side and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

The effect display device 1600 is composed of a frame-shaped metal frame, a metal back cover that closes the entire rear surface of the metal frame, and a transparent synthetic resin box. A liquid crystal panel, a backlight, a drive circuit, and the like are housed in a frame-shaped metal frame. The entire rear surface of this frame-shaped metal frame is closed and fixed by a metal back cover, and is housed in a transparent synthetic resin box. A metal back cover is fixed to the frame-shaped metal frame to be electrically connected, and is also electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the drive circuit housed in the frame-shaped metal frame. It has become like.

The effect display device 1600 is controlled by the peripheral control unit 1500 mounted on the rear side of the display device 1600, and is the same by being electrically connected to the ground (GND) line such as the peripheral control board 1510 housed in the peripheral control unit 1500. It is supposed to be the ground (GND) of. In the effect display device 1600, the liquid crystal panel is surrounded by a frame-shaped metal frame, so that the area of the liquid crystal panel surrounded by the frame-shaped metal frame becomes a visible display area of the effect display device 1600. Double-sided adhesive tape is attached to the front surface of the frame-shaped metal frame, and a single transparent plate (in this embodiment, a plate thickness of 1 mm) covers the front surface of the frame-shaped metal frame and the inner region thereof. Has been attached (bonded).

A mounting portion for mounting the peripheral control unit 1500 on the rear side of the effect display device 1600 is formed on the back surface side of the transparent synthetic resin box, and one of the metal shield plates of the peripheral control unit 1500. A through hole is formed to expose the portion. When the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600, a detailed description thereof will be described later, but a part of the metal shield plate of the peripheral control unit 1500 is on the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box. The metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 is brought into contact with the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 through the formed through hole via the conductive elastic member. As a result, the metal shield plate of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 are electrically connected.

The table unit 2000 has a plurality of (here, four) general winning openings 2001 that are always open so that the game ball B driven into the game area 5a can be received, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are game areas. The first start port 2002, which is always open so that the game ball B can be received at different positions in 5a, and the gate portion 2003, which is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball B, The second starting port 2004, which enables acceptance of the game ball B according to the result of a normal lottery drawn by the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 based on the game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003, and the first (1) In either the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 based on the acceptance of the game ball B into the start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. It is provided with a first prize opening 2005 and a second prize opening 2006 capable of accepting the game ball B.

Further, the table unit 2000 is attached to the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction and directly above the lower end of the game area 5a, and has a first start port 2002 and a start port unit 2100 having one general winning port 2001. The side unit 2200, which is mounted along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the start port unit 2100 in the front view and has two general winning openings 2001, and the center in the vertical direction at the right end of the front view in the game area 5a. A gate unit 2300 which is attached to the lower side and has a gate portion 2003, and one general winning opening 2001 and a second starting opening 2004 which are attached to the center of the front view in the game area 5a. It is provided with a frame-shaped center accessory 2500 having a first prize opening 2005 and a second prize opening 2006.

The back unit 3000 is a box-shaped opening that is attached to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 (panel holder) and has an open front, and is closed by detachably attaching the effect display device 1600 to the rear wall from the rear side. It is provided with a back box (not shown), a lower movable effect unit 3100, an upper rear movable effect unit 3200, and an upper front movable effect unit 3300 installed in the back box.

[5-1. Front component]
The front component 1000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 101 and 102. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape in front view, and has a substantially circular inner shape penetrating in the front-rear direction, and the inner circumference of the inner shape divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a. The front component 1000 includes an outer rail 1001 that extends in an arc shape from the lower end to the left from the center in the left-right direction in the front view in an arc shape along the clockwise circumferential direction, passes through the upper end in the center in the left-right direction in the front view, and extends diagonally to the upper right. The game is played on the inner rail 1002, which is arranged inside the front component 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction in the front view to the diagonally upper left side in the front view, and the right side in the front view of the lower end of the inner rail 1002. It includes an out-guide portion 1003, which is formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and is inclined so as to be lowered toward the rear.

Further, the front component 1000 has a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the out guide portion 1003 in the front view to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000. Right rail 1005 extending from the right end of the front component 1000 to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component 1000, and the upper end curved inward of the front component 1000, and the upper end and outer rail of the right rail 1005. It is provided with an abutting portion 1006 that is connected to the upper end of the 1001 and is in contact with the game ball B that has rolled along the outer rail 1001.

Further, the front component 1000 is rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1002, and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close between the front component 1000 and the front view clock. A backflow prevention member urged by a spring (not shown) so that it can rotate only with the open position that rotates in the circumferential direction and opens between the outer rail 1001 and returns to the closed position side. It is equipped with 1007.

Further, the front component 1000 includes an out port 1008 that penetrates back and forth at the rear end of the out guide portion 1003 at the lower center in the left-right direction in the front view in the frame. The game ball B guided rearward by the out guide unit 1003 is discharged to the rear of the front component 1000 (game panel 1100) through the out port 1008.

Further, the front component 1000 is formed on the outside of the portion of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 extending substantially vertically from the lower end, the lower side of the out guide portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and the outer side of the right rail 1005. Each portion is provided with a security recess 1009 recessed from the front end to the rear. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the security recess 1009 has a rear projecting piece 172 protruding rearward of the security cover 170 in the door frame 3. It will be in the inserted state. As a result, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an illegal tool such as a piano wire is allowed to enter the game area 5a from below the front surface of the board 5 through between the security cover 170 and the front component 1000, it will be blocked by the rear projecting piece 172 and the security recess 1009. , It is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 5a.

Further, the front component 1000 includes a notch portion 1010 notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner of the front view. This notch 1010 coincides with the notch of the panel holder (not shown) in the game panel 1100, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the lower full ball path penetrates the notch 1010 and the notch. The front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the unit 610 face forward.

[5-2. Game panel]
The game panel 1100 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 101 and 100. The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front component 1000, to which the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 are attached. The game panel 1100 holds a flat plate-shaped panel plate 1110 whose outer circumference is slightly larger than the inner circumference of the frame-shaped front component 1000 and is made of a transparent synthetic resin, and the outer circumference of the panel plate 1110. It is provided with a frame-shaped panel holder (not shown) that is attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and to which the back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface.

The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as an acrylic resin, a polycarbonate resin, a polyarylate resin, or a methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The plate thickness of this panel plate 1110 is thinner than the panel holder, and is the minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently held even if the obstacle nail N is planted on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. It is said that. In this embodiment, the panel plate 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

Although not shown, the panel plate 1110 has an out recess 1111 which is the lowest position in the game area 5a and is recessed upward from the lower end at a position corresponding to the out port 1008 of the front component 1000. Further, the panel plate 1110 is formed with a plurality of openings for mounting the front unit 2000, which penetrate the panel plate 1110 in the front-rear direction.

The panel holder of the game panel 1100 has a size including the panel plate 1110 and has a substantially quadrangular outer shape, and is formed to be thicker than the panel plate 1110 (about 20 mm in this example). The panel holder is made of a synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). This panel holder is provided with a through hole that holds the panel plate 1110 detachably, is recessed from the front side to the rear side, and the inside is approximately the same size as the game area 5a and penetrates in the front-rear direction. ing.

Further, the panel holder is provided with a notch portion that is notched upward from the lower end in the lower left corner of the front view. This notch is formed so as to coincide with the notch 1010 of the front component 1000, and when the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, it penetrates through the notch 1010 and the notch and fills the lower part. The front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the tongue ball path unit 610 face forward.

[5-3. Board holder]
The substrate holder 1200 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 99. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the upper side and the front side open, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to be lowered toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 has a discharge portion 1201 notched from the front end to the rear at the center in the left-right direction on the bottom surface. The board holder 1200 covers the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from the lower side and the rear side in a state of being assembled on the game board 5, and the main control unit 1300 is on the rear surface. The main control board box 1320 is attached.

When the board holder 1200 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the discharge unit 1201 is located directly above the discharge ball receiving portion 628 of the base unit 620b in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. As a result, the game ball B discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1008 and the game ball B discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can all be received, and the bottom surface can be received. It can be discharged from the discharge unit 1201 formed in the above to the discharge ball receiving unit 628 below.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
The main control unit 1300 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 99. The main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 houses the main control board 1310 (see FIG. 124) that controls the game content and the payout of the game ball B, and the main control board 1310, and is attached to the board holder 1200. And have.

The main control board box 1320 is composed of a cover body (not shown) and a base body (not shown). The cover body and the beta body are made of polycarbonate resin and are transparently molded. The main control board 1310 can be accommodated in the internal space formed by the cover body and the base body. Since the cover body and the beta body are transparently molded from the polycarbonate resin, the state of the front surface side and the back surface side of the main control board 1310 (whether or not unauthorized modification has been performed, or an unauthorized IC is mounted. Whether or not it is done) can be confirmed from the outside of the main control board box 1320. Further, the main control board box 1320 is provided with a plurality of sealing mechanisms so as to correspond to the cover body and the beta body, respectively. When the main control board box 1320 is closed by using one sealing mechanism, the main control board box 1320 is then closed. In order to open the control board box 1320, it is necessary to destroy the sealing mechanism, and it is possible to leave a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrent force against illegal acts on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the interface board 635 and the peripheral control board 1510. Further, the main control board 1310 includes a function display unit 1400, a gate sensor 2301, a second start port sensor 2511, a first major winning opening sensor 2512, a second major winning opening sensor 2513, a starting port solenoid 2514, and a first attacker solenoid 2515. , The second attacker solenoid 2516, the general winning opening sensor 3001, the first starting opening sensor 3002, and the magnetic sensor 3003.

[5-5. Function display unit]
The function display unit 1400 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 101 and 102. The function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 on the outside of the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (player side) through the door window 101a of the door frame 3 in a state of being assembled in the pachinko machine 1. The function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on control signals from the main control board 1310 to display a game state (game status), a normal lottery result, a special lottery result, and the like.

The function display unit 1400 has a status indicator consisting of three LEDs for displaying the game status, and two normal lottery results for which the shin is drawn by passing the game ball B to the gate portion 2003. It includes a normal symbol display made of LEDs and a normal hold display made of two LEDs that display the number of holds related to the passage of the game ball B to the gate portion 2003.

Further, the function display unit 1400 includes a first special symbol display composed of eight LEDs for displaying the result of the first special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first starting port 2002, and the first starting port 2002. The first special hold number indicator consisting of two LEDs that display the number of holds related to the acceptance of the game ball B to the second start port 2004, and the second special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B to the second start port 2004. It is equipped with a second special symbol display consisting of eight LEDs to display, and a second special holding number display consisting of two LEDs displaying the number of holdings related to the acceptance of the game ball B into the second starting port 2004. ing.

Further, when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is a "big hit" or the like, the function display unit 1400 repeats the opening / closing pattern of at least one of the first big winning opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006 ( It is equipped with a round indicator, which consists of five LEDs that display the number of rounds.

In this function display unit 1400, the number of holds, symbols, and the like can be displayed by appropriately turning on, turning off, blinking, and the like the LEDs provided.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit in the game board 5 will be described. The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box of the back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 and the like that control the progress of the effect provided to the player based on the command from the main control board 1310.

The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit is connected to the main control board 1310, the effect operation unit 300, various decorative boards on the door frame 3 side, and other boards (peripheral data ROM board, liquid crystal output board described later) and the like. There is. The configuration of the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described later.

[5-7. Production display device]
The effect display device 1600 on the game board 5 will be described. The effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the game area 5a in the front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box of the back unit 3000. The effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to the rear surface at the substantially center of the rear wall of the back box. The effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front side (player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled. The effect display device 1600 is a 19-inch full-color liquid crystal display device backed by a white LED. The effect display device is connected to the peripheral control unit 1500, and can display a predetermined still image or moving image.

[5-8. Table unit]
The table unit 2000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 101 and 102. The front unit 2000 is attached to the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, the front end protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and a part of the rear end has an opening of the panel plate 1110. It penetrates and projects rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110.

The table unit 2000 is capable of accepting the game ball B driven into the game area 5a, and the plurality of (four in this case) general winning openings 2001 that are always open, and the plurality of general winning openings 2001 are games. A first start port 2002 that is always open so that the game ball B can be received at different positions in the game area 5a, and a gate portion 2003 that is attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detects the passage of the game ball B. , To the second starting port 2004 and the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 where the game ball B can be accepted according to the result of the ordinary lottery drawn by passing the game ball B through the gate portion 2003. The first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B in at least one of the first special lottery opening 2005 and the second big winning opening 2006. , Is equipped.

A plurality of (here, four) general winning openings 2001 are arranged at the lower part in the game area 5a, three on the left side and one on the right side with respect to the center in the left-right direction. The first starting port 2002 is arranged directly above the out port 1008 at the lowermost end in the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a. The gate portion 2003 is arranged below the center in the vertical direction near the right end of the front view in the game area 5a. The general winning opening 2001 on the right side is arranged directly below the gate portion 2003. The second starting port 2004 is arranged at a lower left of the gate portion 2003 and at a height slightly lower than the general winning opening 2001 on the right side. The first prize-winning opening 2005 is arranged below the second starting port 2004 and at a height slightly below the first starting port 2002. The second prize opening 2006 is arranged at a slightly lower position on the left side of the first prize opening 2005.

The table unit 2000 is a start port unit 2100 which is mounted directly above the out port 1008 in the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction and has one general winning port 2001 and a first start port 2002, and a start port. The side unit 2200, which is mounted along the inner rail 1002 on the left side of the unit 2100 and has two general winning openings 2001, and the right end of the front view in the game area 5a with respect to the center in the vertical direction. A gate unit 2300 which is attached to the lower side and has a gate portion 2003, and one general winning opening 2001, a second starting opening 2004, which is attached to a slightly upper side in the center of the front view in the game area 5a. A frame-shaped center accessory 2500 having the first prize opening 2005 and the second prize opening 2006, and a transparent front effect unit 2600 attached so as to close the frame of the center accessory 2500. And have.

The gate unit 2300 of the front unit 2000 is arranged at the right end of the front view in the game area 5a at the lower side with respect to the center in the vertical direction, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. The gate unit 2300 includes a gate portion 2003 formed so that the game balls B can always pass one by one in the vertical direction, and a gate sensor 2301 for detecting the game balls B passing through the gate portion 2003.

In the front unit 2000, the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 is sent to the back unit 3000 on the rear side of the game panel 1100, detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001, and then sent to the lower board holder 1200. It is discharged. Further, the game ball B received in the first start port 2002 is sent to the back unit 3000 on the rear side of the game panel 1100, detected by the first start port sensor 3002, and then discharged to the lower substrate holder 1200. Will be done.

Further, the game ball B received in the second start port 2004 is sent to the rear side of the game panel 1100 after being detected by the second start port sensor 2511, and is discharged to the lower substrate holder 1200. The game ball B received in the first prize opening 2005 or the second prize opening 2006 is detected by the first prize opening sensor 2512 or the second prize opening sensor 2513, and then moves to the rear side of the game panel 1100. It is sent and discharged to the lower substrate holder 1200.

[5-8-1. Center role]
The center accessory 2500 of the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 101 to 103. FIG. 103 is a front view of the center accessory and the table effect unit in the table unit of the game board. The center accessory 2500 of the table unit 2000 is arranged in the center of the front view in the game area 5a, and is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100. The center accessory 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and the lower movable effect unit 3100 and the upper front movable effect unit provided in the effect display device 1600 and the back unit 3000 arranged behind the game panel 1100 through the frame. The 3300 and the like can be visually recognized from the front. The entire circumference of the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 except for the lower side protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and the game ball B driven into the game area 5a is inside the frame. It is not possible to invade.

The center accessory 2500 includes one general winning opening 2001 arranged in the lower right corner of the front view on the outer circumference of the frame, and a second starting opening 2004 arranged slightly below the general winning opening 2001. (2) It has a first large winning opening 2005 arranged below the starting opening 2004 and a second large winning opening 2006 arranged slightly below the left side of the first large winning opening 2005. Further, the center accessory 2500 is capable of releasing a warp entrance 2501 in which the game ball B in the game area 5a is open to enter and a game ball B that has entered the warp entrance 2501 on the outer peripheral surface on the left side of the front view. It is provided with a warp outlet 2502 that is open in the frame, and a stage 2503 that can be released into the game area 5a after the game ball B released from the warp outlet 2502 is rolled in the left-right direction.

The stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500 has a curved shape with a concave center side in the left-right direction, and the position corresponding to directly above the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100, that is, the center accessory 2500 is placed on the game panel 1100 (panel plate). It is formed so that the position at the substantially center in the left-right direction is the lowest when it is attached to 1110). The stage 2503 is inclined so that the lowest portion in the center in the left-right direction becomes lower toward the front, and the game ball B can be discharged into the game region 5a from this portion. In the center accessory 2500, the height of the lowest portion of the stage 2503 is substantially the same as the height of the second starting port 2004.

When the center accessory 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, the raised portion (top) at the center of the stage 2503 in the left-right direction is located directly above the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100. As a result, when the game ball B is released from the center of the stage 2503, it is received by the first starting port 2002 with an extremely high probability.

In addition, the center accessory 2500 has a second start port sensor 2511 that detects the game ball B received in the second start port 2004 and a first large game ball B that detects the game ball B received in the first prize opening 2005. It includes a winning opening sensor 2512 and a second major winning opening sensor 2513 that detects a game ball B received in the second major winning opening 2006 (see FIG. 124). Further, the center accessory 2500 has a start port solenoid 2514 that opens and closes the second start port 2004 according to the result of a normal lottery drawn by passing the game ball B of the gate portion 2003, and the first start port 2002 or the second start. The first attacker solenoid 2515 that opens and closes the first special winning opening 2005 according to the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball B into the opening 2004, and the first starting port 2002 or the first. (2) The second attacker solenoid 2516 that opens and closes the second special winning opening 2006 according to the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball B into the starting port 2004 is provided.

When the center accessory 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, the right side of the upper surface in the left-right direction and the upper part of the right side of the upper surface are the outer circumferences (outer rail 1001 and right rail 1005) of the game area 5a in the front view. A gap slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B is formed between them. Further, in the state where the center accessory 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, the general winning opening 2001, the second starting opening 2004, the first large winning opening 2005, and the second large winning opening 2006 are arranged in the lower right corner of the front view. The portion of the lower right corner of the front view extends to the lower right corner in the game area 5a, and forms a space between the portion of the lower right corner and the portion of the upper part of the right side surface. The gate unit 2300 is arranged in the space.

Therefore, when the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a (so-called right-handed) so as to circulate on the right side of the center accessory 2500, the game ball B can be passed through the gate portion 2003 with high probability. At the same time, it is possible to accept the game ball B for the first prize opening 2005 and the second prize opening 2006 that are open (open) with a high probability.

[5-8-2. Table production unit]
The table effect unit 2600 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 103 to 107 and the like. FIG. 104 is a side sectional view of the front effect unit cut at the center in the left-right direction together with the center accessory and viewed from the right. FIG. 105 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the relationship between the LED in the front effect unit and the reflection recess of the front light guide plate. FIG. 106 is a front view showing a light emitting mode of the front light guide plate. FIG. 107 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the front light guide plate of the front effect unit is made to emit light.

The front effect unit 2600 of the table unit 2000 is attached to the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 so as to close the inside of the frame of the center accessory 2500. The front effect unit 2600 is attached to the transparent flat plate-shaped front light guide plate 2610 that closes the frame of the center accessory 2500, the reflector 2620 attached to the upper side of the front light guide plate 2610, and the upper surface of the reflector 2620. The center accessory is provided so as to cover the front light guide plate decorative substrate 2640 on which a plurality of LEDs 2630 that irradiate light toward the upper surface of the front light guide plate 2610 are mounted, the front light guide plate decorative substrate 2640, and the reflector 2620 from the front. It includes a front cover 2650 attached to the 2500.

The front light guide plate 2610 of the front effect unit 2600 is formed on the back surface of the transparent flat plate-shaped light guide plate main body 2611 and the light guide plate main body 2611, and is formed from any of a plurality of specific light input portions 2612 on the upper surface of the light guide plate main body 2611. It has a plurality of fine reflection recesses 2613 that reflect the incident light forward. The plurality of specific light input units 2612 of the front light guide plate 2610 are composed of the first specific light input unit 2612a, the second specific light input unit 2612b, the third specific light input unit 2612c, and the fourth specific light input unit 2612d. It is configured. The first specific light input unit 2612a, the second specific light input unit 2612b, the third specific light input unit 2612c, and the fourth specific light input unit 2612d divide the upper surface of the light guide plate main body 2611 into eight equal parts in the longitudinal direction (horizontal direction). Then, they are arranged in two rounds in order from left to right (the order in which the fourth specific light input unit 2612d is returned to the beginning and becomes the first specific light input unit 2612a).

The reflection recess 2613 has a flat surface that extends in a direction perpendicular to the straight line connected to the corresponding specific light input portion 2612 and is inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the rear surface of the light guide plate main body 2611. .. The reflection recess 2613 is recessed in a pent roof-shaped triangle. The reflection recess 2613 can reflect the light incident from the corresponding specific light input unit 2612 in a direction substantially parallel to the vertical line on the front surface of the light guide plate main body 2611. Further, the reflection recess 2613 can reflect the light incident from the non-corresponding specific light input unit 2612 in a direction inclined with respect to the vertical line on the front surface of the light guide plate main body 2611.

As a result, as shown by the broken line in FIG. 105, when light is incident from the corresponding specific light input unit 2612, it is reflected by the reflection recess 2613 in the front front (direction perpendicular to the paper surface) of the light guide plate main body 2611. However, the reflective recess 2613 appears to emit light from the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1. On the other hand, as shown by the alternate long and short dash line in FIG. 105, when light is incident from the uncorresponding specific light input portion 2612, it is reflected by the reflection recess 2613 in a direction other than the front front of the light guide plate main body 2611. From the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1, the reflective recess 2613 does not appear to emit light.

In this embodiment, the reflection recess 2613 is recessed in a triangular shape and extends in a direction perpendicular to the straight line connected to the corresponding specific light input portion 2612. It is not limited to the above, and any one extending in a direction perpendicular to the straight line connected to the corresponding specific light input unit 2612 may be used.

The plurality of reflection recesses 2613 correspond to any of the plurality of specific light input units 2612, and the plurality of first reflection recesses 2613a and the second specific light input unit 2612b corresponding to the first specific light input unit 2612a. A plurality of second reflection recesses 2613b corresponding to the above, a plurality of third reflection recesses 2613c corresponding to the third specific light input unit 2612c, and a plurality of fourth reflections corresponding to the fourth specific light input unit 2612d. It is composed of recesses 2613d and.

Further, the front light guide plate 2610 has a plurality of patterns 2614 capable of displaying light emission in different modes from each other by reflecting light forward from the reflection recesses 2613 of a specific group among the plurality of reflection recesses 2613. There is. The plurality of patterns 2614 include a first pattern 2614a composed of only a plurality of first reflective recesses 2613a, a second pattern 2614b composed of only a plurality of second reflective recesses 2613b, and a third composed of only a plurality of third reflective recesses 2613c. It is composed of a picture 2614c and a fourth picture 2614d composed of only a plurality of fourth reflection recesses 2613d.

As shown in FIGS. 103 and 106, the first pattern 2614a, the second pattern 2614b, the third pattern 2614c, and the fourth pattern 2614d are concentric and circulate in order from the outside to the center (next to the fourth pattern 2614d). Are arranged so as to return to the beginning and become the first pattern 2614a).

The reflector 2620 has a fixed recess 2621 into which the upper end of the front light guide plate 2610 is inserted. By inserting the front light guide plate 2610 into the fixed recess 2621, the reflector 2620 can sandwich the front side and the back side of the front light guide plate 2610, and the front light guide plate 2610 can be positioned without rattling. it can. On the bottom surface (upper surface) of the fixed recess 2621, through holes 2622 penetrating vertically are formed at a portion corresponding to a plurality of LEDs 2630 mounted on the front light guide plate decorative substrate 2640.

The front light guide plate decorative substrate 2640 has a strip-like shape extending to the left and right, and a plurality of LEDs 2630 are mounted on a portion of the lower surface directly above the fixing recess 2621 of the reflector 2620. The plurality of LEDs 2630 are mounted (attached) to the portions corresponding to the plurality of through holes 2622 of the reflector 2620, respectively. By attaching the front light guide plate decorative substrate 2640 to the upper surface of the reflector 2620, a plurality of LEDs 2630 are formed so as to face downward through the through holes 2622, respectively.

The plurality of LEDs 2630 are attached so as to correspond to the plurality of specific light receiving units 2612 of the front light guide plate 2610. The plurality of LEDs 2630 include a first LED group 2630a corresponding to the first specific light input unit 2612a, a second LED group 2630b corresponding to the second specific light input unit 2612b, and a third specific light input unit 2612c. It is composed of a third LED group 2630c corresponding to the above, and a fourth LED group 2630d corresponding to the fourth specific light input unit 2612d. The first LED group 2630a, the second LED group 2630b, the third LED group 2630c, and the fourth LED group 2630d divide a plurality of LEDs 2630 arranged in the left-right direction into eight equal parts in the left-right direction, and divide them from left to right. They are arranged in two rounds in order (the order in which the fourth LED group 2630d is returned to the beginning and becomes the first LED group 2630a). In the present embodiment, the first LED group 2630a, the second LED group 2630b, the third LED group 2630c, and the fourth LED group 2630d each have six LEDs 2630.

Next, the light emitting effect by the table effect unit 2600 of the present embodiment will be described in detail. When the first LED group 2630a of the front light guide plate decorative substrate 2640 is made to emit light, light is incident from the first specific light input portion 2612a into the light guide plate main body 2611, reflected to the front at the first reflection recess 2613a, and the remaining second light is reflected. Since the second reflection recess 2613b, the third reflection recess 2613c, and the fourth reflection recess 2613d are reflected to other than the front surface, only the first reflection recess 2613a can be seen by the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. The first pattern 2614a composed of the plurality of first reflection recesses 2613a can emit light (see FIG. 106 (a)).

When the second LED group 2630b of the front light guide plate decorative substrate 2640 is made to emit light, light is incident from the second specific light input portion 2612b into the light guide plate main body 2611, reflected to the front at the second reflection recess 2613b, and the remaining second light is reflected. Since the first reflection recess 2613a, the third reflection recess 2613c, and the fourth reflection recess 2613d are reflected to other than the front surface, only the second reflection recess 2613b can be seen by the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. The second pattern 2614b composed of the plurality of second reflection recesses 2613b can emit light (see FIG. 106 (b)).

When the third LED group 2630c of the front light guide plate decorative substrate 2640 is made to emit light, light is incident from the third specific light input portion 2612c into the light guide plate main body 2611, reflected to the front at the third reflection recess 2613c, and the remaining second light is reflected. Since the first reflection recess 2613a, the second reflection recess 2613b, and the fourth reflection recess 2613d are reflected to other than the front surface, only the third reflection recess 2613c can be seen by the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. The third pattern 2614c composed of the plurality of third reflection recesses 2613c can emit light (see FIG. 106 (c)).

When the fourth LED group 2630d of the front light guide plate decorative substrate 2640 is made to emit light, light is incident from the fourth specific light input unit 2612d into the light guide plate main body 2611, reflected to the front at the fourth reflection recess 2613d, and the remaining fourth. Since the first reflection recess 2613a, the second reflection recess 2613b, and the third reflection recess 2613c are reflected to other than the front surface, only the fourth reflection recess 2613d can be seen by the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. The fourth pattern 2614d, which is composed of a plurality of fourth reflection recesses 2613d, can emit light (see FIG. 106 (d)).

As described above, since the plurality of patterns 2614 arranged concentrically can be made to emit light, the plurality of LEDs 2630 are arranged in the first LED group 2630a, the second LED group 2630b, the third LED group 2630c, and the fourth LED 2630. When the LED group 2630d is made to emit light in this order, the first picture 2614a, the second picture 2614b, the third picture 2614c, and the fourth picture 2614d can be made to emit light in this order, and there is a movement that spreads from the center to the outside. It is possible to perform a light emitting effect like an animation.

On the other hand, when a plurality of LEDs 2630 are made to emit light in the order of the fourth LED group 2630d, the third LED group 2630c, the second LED group 2630b, and the first LED group 2630a, the fourth LED group 2614d, the third LED group 2614c, and the second The picture 2614b and the first picture 2614a can be made to emit light in this order, and a light emitting effect such as an animation with a movement that concentrates from the outside toward the center can be performed.

As described above, according to the front effect unit 2600, a plurality of (three or more) different patterns 2614 can be made to emit light by one front light guide plate 2610, so that each pattern can be displayed in an animation or the like. It is not necessary to provide a plurality of light guide plates, and the thickness in the front-rear direction can be made as thin as possible. Further, since the front light guide plate 2610 is attached to the center accessory 2500, the front light guide plate 2610 can be positioned as close as possible to the player side, and a large space is provided behind the front light guide plate 2610. It can be easily secured. Therefore, since a large space can be secured on the rear side of the front light guide plate 2610, the lower movable effect unit 3100, the upper rear movable effect unit 3200, the upper front movable effect unit 3300, etc. can be secured on the rear side of the front light guide plate 2610. Can be arranged, thereby improving the appearance in the game area 5a and making the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to the player, and in addition to the effect of the light emitting display of the pattern 2614, the lower movable effect. By performing movable effects with the unit 3100, the upper rear movable effect unit 3200, the upper front movable effect unit 3300, etc., it is possible to provide a variety of effects to the player, entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest. be able to.

Further, as shown in FIG. 107, the front light guide plate 2610 causes a plurality of translucent patterns 2614 due to point-like light emission of the plurality of reflection recesses 2613 to emerge in front of the effect unit, the decorative body, and the effect display device 1600. Since it is possible to show a light emitting decoration that moves like an animation, it is possible to give a strong impact to a player who is accustomed to the light emitting effect using a conventional light guide plate, and it is possible to surprise and entertain the player. It is possible to make the player think that there is something good, and it is possible to raise the player's expectation for the game and suppress the decline in the interest.

Further, since only the player seated in the front front of the pachinko machine 1 can see the light emission display of the pattern 2614 by the front light guide plate 2610 well, other players who are away from the front can see the pattern 2614. The light emission display becomes difficult to see, and it is possible to make it difficult for other players to notice that the effect using the front light guide plate 2610 is being performed, and it is possible to suppress the attention of other players. At the same time, the game can be played without hesitation of other players, and the game can be enjoyed and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

Further, since the front light guide plate 2610 is attached so as to be sandwiched between the fixing recesses 2621 of the reflector 2620, the plurality of LEDs 2630 attached to the front light guide plate decorative substrate 2640 are reliably positioned with respect to the upper surface of the front light guide plate 2610. can do. As a result, each LED 2630 (first LED group 2630a, second LED group 2630b, third LED group 2630c, fourth LED group 2630d) is arranged at a position corresponding to each specific light input unit 2612 of the front light guide plate 2610. Therefore, the light from each LED 2630 can be reflected forward and forward by the corresponding reflection recess 2613, and the corresponding pattern 2614 can be reliably emitted.

Further, since the front light guide plate 2610 is mounted in the frame of the center accessory 2500 in which the center accessory 2500 is attached in the center of the front view game area 5a, even if the pattern 2614 is emitted by the LED 2630, it emits light. The displayed pattern 2614 does not interfere with the game in the game area 5a, and the area where the game is actually performed can be visually recognized from the player side in a good state, making the game difficult to see. It is possible to prevent the player from giving a feeling of distrust and to enjoy the game in a good condition.

Further, since the light guide plate main body 2611 of the front light guide plate 2610 is fitted into the fixing recess 2621 of the reflector 2620, the front light guide plate 2610 and the reflector 2620 are compared with the case where the light guide plate main body 2611 of the front light guide plate 2610 is attached by two members as in the conventional case. It is possible to eliminate the rattling between the two LEDs 2630 and the front light guide plate 2610, and the plurality of LEDs 2630 can be reliably positioned at a desired position. Therefore, since the LED 2630 can be reliably positioned with respect to the specific light input unit 2612 of the front light guide plate 2610, the light from the LED 2630 can be reliably irradiated to the corresponding specific light input unit 2612, and only the intended pattern 2614 can be emitted. It is possible to reliably display light emission.

Further, since the plurality of specific light input units 2612 are arranged only on the upper side of the light guide plate main body 2611, the front cover 2650 (reflector 2620 and a plurality of LEDs 2630) is arranged only on the upper side of the light guide plate main body 2611. The front cover (frame body) is provided over the entire circumference of the light guide plate main body 2611 without the outer periphery of the light guide plate main body 2611 being surrounded by the front cover 2650 (reflector 2620 and a plurality of LEDs 2630). Since it is possible to prevent the effect image and the decorative body of the effect display device 1600 arranged in the above from being partitioned, the effect image and the like can be easily seen from the player side, and the effect image can be displayed to the player. It is possible to entertain in a good state and suppress a decrease in interest, and since there is no frame-shaped partition in the game area 5a in the front view, the pachinko machine 1 has a feeling of openness, and the game area 5a can be obtained. It can be made to look good inside and have an appealing power that strongly attracts the attention of the player.

Further, since the front light guide plate 2610 is attached to the frame-shaped center accessory 2500, the peripheral edge of the front light guide plate 2610 (reflector 2620) can be matched by matching the peripheral edge of the front light guide plate 2610 with the frame of the center accessory 2500. And a plurality of LEDs 2630) can be made difficult to see from the player side, and it can be made difficult for the player to notice the existence of the front light guide plate 2610. Therefore, when the pattern 2614 is displayed by light emission, the front light guide plate is displayed. It is possible to give a strong impact to a player who thought that 2610 does not exist and surprise him, and to entertain the light emission display of multiple patterns 2614 by the front light guide plate 2610 and suppress the decline in interest. it can.

Further, since the front cover 2650 hides the plurality of LEDs 2630 and the reflector 2620 from the player side, it is possible to prevent the reflector 2620 and the like from being visible and the appearance in the game area 5a from being deteriorated. , The appearance in the game area 5a can be improved, the appealing power to the player can be enhanced, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as the pachinko machine to be played. It is possible to entertain the game and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the front cover 2650 hides the plurality of LEDs 2630 from the player side, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the existence of the front light guide plate 2610 using the plurality of LEDs 2630. By making the picture 2614 of the front light guide plate 2610 emit light, the player can be greatly surprised by the light emission display that the player did not anticipate, and the light emission display of the picture 2614 can be enjoyed, and the player can enjoy the light emission display. It is possible to make people think that there is something good about the game, raise expectations for the game, and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the effect display device 1600 capable of displaying the effect image is provided behind the front light guide plate 2610, the light emission display of a plurality of different patterns 2614 by the front light guide plate 2610 and the effect image by the effect display device 1600. Since it is possible to show the player a combined effect, it is possible to perform various effects by appropriately combining them, and it is possible to make the player less likely to get bored, and the front light guide plate 2610 and the effect display device 1600. It is possible to entertain the player by the production by the above, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest in the game.

Further, since the effect display device 1600 is arranged behind the front light guide plate 2610, the distance from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 to the front light guide plate 2610 and the distance to the effect display device 1600 Is different, it is possible to give a sense of depth and a three-dimensional effect to the luminescent patterns 2614 by displaying the effect images related to the plurality of patterns 2614 luminescently displayed on the front light guide plate 2610. , It is possible to show the player a production (display production) that can strongly attract the interest of the player, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

In the above-described embodiment, the reflective recess 2613 is shown to have a triangular cross section and a constant extension, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the cross section is a semicircular arc shape and a constant extension, a cross section. May be polygonal and have a constant extension, a cross section that is curved and have a constant extension, and the like.

Further, the LED 2630 may be a single color or a full color. Further, the plurality of patterns 2614 may be four or more, and the number of the specific light input portion, the reflection recess, and the LED group can be appropriately selected according to the number of the patterns 2614.

[5-9. Back unit]
The back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. 108 to 118. FIG. 108 is a front view of the game board showing the lower front central decorative body in a state where the lower front central decorative body is made to emit light in the lower movable effect unit, and FIG. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state that the lower rear center decoration is made to emit light, and FIG. It is a front view of the game board which shows the central decoration body, the lower rear center decoration body, the lower left side decoration body, and the lower right side decoration in a state of emitting light. FIG. 111 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the gaming board is in the state of FIG. 110 and the pressing operation unit of the effect operation unit is in the raised position. Further, in FIG. 112, the four rotating decorative bodies, the left side rotating decorative body, the left sub-side rotating decorative body, the right side rotating decorative body, and the right sub-side rotating decorative body in the lower movable effect unit are developed and the decorative portions on each side are developed. It is explanatory drawing which shows the decoration of. FIG. 113 is an explanatory diagram schematically showing the type (size) of the arrow emitted and displayed in the lower movable effect unit.

Further, FIG. 114 is a front view of the game board showing the upper rear left decorative body and the upper rear right decorative body of the upper rear movable effect unit in a lowered state. FIG. 115 is an explanatory view schematically showing the drive mechanism of the upper rear movable effect unit from the front. FIG. 116 is an explanatory view showing the structure of the clutch mechanism of the upper rear movable effect unit. FIG. 117 is a front view of a game board showing a state in which the upper front movable decorative body of the upper front movable effect unit is lowered. FIG. 118 is an explanatory view showing the movement of the upper front movable decorative body of the upper front movable effect unit.

The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder in the game panel 1100, and the effect display device 1600 and the peripheral control unit are attached to the rear side. The back unit 3000 includes a general winning opening sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 of the front unit 2000, and a first starting port sensor that detects the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002. It includes 3002 and a magnetic sensor 3003 that detects magnetism acting in the vicinity of the first starting port 2002 (see FIG. 124).

The back unit 3000 has a box shape attached to the rear surface of the panel holder and the front is open, and has a square opening on the rear wall where the effect display device 1600 faces forward, and a back box at the lower part inside the back box. The lower movable effect unit 3100 attached, the upper rear movable effect unit 3200 attached to the upper part in the back box, and the upper front movable effect unit 3200 attached to the upper part in the back box in front of the upper rear movable effect unit 3200. It is equipped with a movable production unit 3300.

[5-9-1. Lower movable production unit]
The lower movable effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 108 to 113 and the like. The lower movable effect unit 3100 is attached to the lower part in the back box, and a part of the lower movable effect unit 3100 is located in front of the lower part of the effect display device 1600. The lower movable effect unit 3100 is a lower front center decoration unit 3110 attached below the effect display device 1600 near the front end of the back box, and a lower center effect unit 3110 arranged behind the lower front center decoration unit 3110. It includes a 3120, a lower left side effect unit 3150 and a lower right side effect unit 3170 arranged on the left and right sides of the lower center effect unit 3120, respectively.

The lower anterior central decorative unit 3110 includes a lower anterior central decorative body 3111 having a trapezoidal shape (inverted isosceles triangle shape with flat vertices) and translucency. The lower front center decoration unit 3110 is located behind the stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500 and the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100 in a state of being assembled on the game board 5. The lower front central decorative body 3111 can be light-emitting decorated by the lower central decorative substrate of the lower central effect unit 3120.

The lower center effect unit 3120 is mounted on the front surface of the lower center elevating base 3121 and the lower center elevating base 3121 which are vertically mounted in the back box behind the lower front center decoration unit 3110 to provide translucency. The lower central decorative substrate 3122 and the lower central decorative substrate (not shown) are arranged behind the lower rear central decorative body 3122 and have a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light toward the front. (Omitted) and a central movable unit 3125 attached to the upper part of the lower central elevating base 3121.

Although not shown, the lower center effect unit 3120 includes a unit base attached to the back box, a pair of elevating guides attached to the unit base and guiding the lower center elevating base in the vertical direction, and a unit. A rod-shaped arm member whose base end extends rotatably around an axis extending back and forth on the base, a sliding pin attached to the tip of the arm member and inserted into the slit of the lower center elevating base 3121, and an arm member. It is equipped with a lower center elevating drive motor that rotates.

Although not shown, the lower center elevating base 3121 has slits extending to the left and right, and a sliding pin attached to the tip of the arm member is slidably inserted into the slits. The lower center elevating base 3121 is located between a lowering position where the whole is behind the lower front central decorative body 3111 and an ascending position where the whole is above the lower front central decorative body 3111 by the lower central elevating drive motor. It is installed so that it can be raised and lowered.

The lower rear central decorative body 3122 is formed in a horizontally long rectangular shape, and has a plurality of light emitting regions 3122a arranged in a row in the vertical direction. The lower rear central decorative body 3122 can be light-emitting decorated by emitting light from the LED of the lower central decorative substrate. The lower central decorative substrate is mounted so that a plurality of LEDs can independently emit and decorate each light emitting region 3122a of the lower rear central decorative body 3122, and the lower central elevating base 3121 is raised. Occasionally, it is mounted so that it can irradiate light toward the lower front central ornament 3111 which is downward and forward.

Although not shown in detail, the central movable unit 3125 is attached to the upper end of the lower central elevating base 3121 at intervals in the left-right direction, and each of the central movable unit 3125 extends upward in a flat plate shape. A plurality of central rotation drive motors mounted on a plurality of mounting bases with their rotation shafts oriented in the left-right direction, and an outer circumference of each center rotation drive motor mounted on the rotation shafts of each center rotation drive motor. It is provided with a plurality of cubic rotating decorative bodies 3126, which cover the above. The plurality of rotary ornaments 3126 can be rotated around an axis extending to the left and right by a central rotation drive motor, and each of them is arranged coaxially in the left-right direction. Further, each of the rotating decorative bodies 3126 is formed with different decorative portions 3127 on four surfaces in the circumferential direction (see FIG. 112). The plurality of rotary ornaments 3126 can be rotated independently by their respective central rotation drive motors.

Further, although not shown, the central movable unit 3125 is attached below each rotating decorative body 3126 on the upper surface of the lower central elevating base 3121, and a plurality of central movable units 3125 capable of irradiating light toward each rotating decorative body 3126. It is provided with a lower center upper surface decorative substrate on which LEDs are mounted. Each rotating decorative body 3126 can be light-emittingly decorated by appropriately emitting the LED of the lower center upper surface decorative substrate.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the lower left side effect unit 3150 of the lower movable effect unit 3100 has a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped lower piece portion and a flat plate-shaped side extending upward from the left end of the lower piece portion. It has a flat upper side portion that extends from the upper end of the side portion and the side portion to the upper side of the lower piece portion to the right shorter than the lower piece portion, and has a front surface of the unit base of the lower center effect unit 3120. A columnar guide shaft with the lower and upper ends attached to the lower and upper pieces, respectively, near the right side of the side side of the left unit base and the left unit base installed in the back box on the left side of the view. A rod-shaped male screw member that is rotatably attached around an axis that extends vertically by the lower and upper pieces of the left unit base so as to extend parallel to the guide shaft, and has a male screw formed on the outer circumference. And the lower left side elevating base 3151 which has a nut screwed into the male screw member and is slidably attached to the guide shaft, and the lower left which is attached to the left unit base and rotates the male screw member. The side elevating drive motor, the lower left side decorative body 3152 attached to the front of the lower left side elevating base 3151 and having translucency, and the lower left side decorative body 3152 attached to the right side of the lower left side decorative body 3152 to the left. It includes a lower left side decorative substrate on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light are mounted.

The lower left side decorative body 3152 has a plurality of light emitting regions 3152a arranged in a row in the vertical direction, and each light emitting region is appropriately emitted by a plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower left side decorative substrate. Each of the 3152a can be independently luminescently decorated.

Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the lower left side effect unit 3150 is attached to the upper part of the lower left side elevating base 3151 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction and has a slit extending in the front-rear direction. The lower left slide drive motor attached to the rear side of the lower left side elevating base 3151 so that the rotating shaft extends upward below the slider, and the base end side attached to the rotating shaft of the lower left slide drive motor. A cam member having a columnar sliding pin that is slidably inserted into a slit of a slider is provided on the tip side extending in the horizontal direction from the base end side of the cage.

Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the lower left side effect unit 3150 has a mounting base that is mounted on a slider and extends upward in a flat plate shape, and a state in which the rotation axis is oriented in the left-right direction on the mounting base. It includes a left-side rotary drive motor that is attached, and a cubic left-side rotary decorative body 3153 that is mounted on the rotary shaft of the left-side rotary drive motor and covers the outer periphery of the left-side rotary drive motor. The left-side rotating decorative body 3153 has different decorative portions 3154 formed on four surfaces in the circumferential direction (see FIG. 112). Further, the left side rotation decoration body 3153 can be rotated around an axis extending to the left and right by a left side rotation drive motor.

Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the lower left side effect unit 3150 is attached below the left side rotation decoration body 3153 on the upper surface of the slider, and can irradiate light toward the left side rotation decoration body 3153. It is provided with a lower left side upper surface decorative substrate on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted. By appropriately emitting the LED of the lower left side upper surface decorative substrate, the left side rotating decorative body 3153 can be light-emitting decorated.

Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the lower left side effect unit 3150 is attached to the sub-mounting base which is mounted on the upper surface of the upper piece of the left unit base and extends upward in a flat plate shape, and the sub-mounting base. A cubic left sub-side rotation that is mounted on the rotation shaft of the left sub-side rotation drive motor and the left sub-side rotation drive motor that is mounted with the rotation shaft oriented in the left-right direction, and covers the outer circumference of the left sub-side rotation drive motor. It includes a decorative body 3155 and. The left sub-side rotating decorative body 3155 has different decorative portions 3156 formed on four surfaces in the circumferential direction (see FIG. 112). Further, the left sub-side rotation decoration body 3155 can be rotated around an axis extending to the left and right by a left sub-side rotation drive motor.

Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the lower left side effect unit 3150 is attached to the upper surface of the upper piece of the left unit base below the left sub-side rotating decoration 3155, and faces the left sub-side rotating decoration 3155. It is provided with a lower left sub-side upper surface decorative substrate on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light are mounted. The left sub-side rotating decorative body 3155 can be light-emitting and decorated by appropriately emitting the LED of the lower left sub-side upper surface decorative substrate.

The lower left side effect unit 3150 has a height at which the left sub-side rotating decoration 3155 attached to the left unit base can enter the lower left side rotating decoration 3153 in a state of being assembled on the game board 5. The lower central elevating base 3121 of the central effect unit 3120 is arranged at substantially the same height as the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3126 when the lower central elevating base 3121 is positioned (raised) to the ascending end. Further, in the lower left side effect unit 3150, when the left sub-side rotation decoration body 3155 is assembled on the game board 5, the left side rotation decoration body 3153 is placed between the lower left side rotation decoration unit 3150 and the leftmost rotation decoration body 3126 of the lower center production unit 3120. There is an interval that allows you to enter.

The lower left side effect unit 3150 rotates the male screw member by the lower left side elevating drive motor, so that the left side rotating decorative body 3153 is rotated together with the slider via the lower left side elevating base 3151, and the lower center effect unit 3120. The lower center elevating base 3121 can be moved up and down between a lowering position slightly higher than the height of the rotating decorative body 3126 in the lowering position and an ascending position at the same height as the left sub-side rotating decorative body 3155. Further, in the lower left side effect unit 3150, by rotating the cam member by the lower left slide drive motor, the left side rotation decoration body 3153 is moved to the appearance position adjacent to the lower center effect unit 3120 via the slider. , It can be slid in the left-right direction between the retracted position, which is located below the left sub-side rotating decoration body 3155, about half away from the lower center effect unit 3120.

Although detailed illustration is omitted, the lower right side effect unit 3170 of the lower movable effect unit 3100 has a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped lower piece portion and a flat plate-shaped side extending upward from the right end of the lower piece portion. It has a flat upper side portion that extends from the upper end of the side portion and the side portion to the upper side of the lower piece portion to the left, which is shorter than the lower piece portion, and is the front surface of the unit base of the lower center effect unit 3120. A columnar guide shaft with the lower and upper ends attached to the lower and upper pieces, respectively, near the left side of the side side of the right unit base and the right unit base installed in the back box on the right side of the view. A rod-shaped male screw member that is rotatably attached around an axis that extends vertically by the lower and upper pieces of the right unit base so as to extend parallel to the guide shaft, and has a male screw formed on the outer circumference. And the lower right side elevating base 3171 which has a nut screwed into the male screw member and is slidably attached to the guide shaft, and the lower right which is attached to the right unit base and rotates the male screw member. The side elevating drive motor, the lower right side decorative body 3172 that is attached to the front of the lower right side elevating base 3171 and has translucency, and the lower right side decorative body 3172 that is attached to the right side of the lower right side decorative body 3172 to the right. It includes a lower right side decorative substrate on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light are mounted.

The lower right side decorative body 3172 has a plurality of light emitting regions 3172a arranged in a row in the vertical direction, and each light emitting region is appropriately emitted by a plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower right side decorative substrate. Each of the 3172a can be independently luminescently decorated.

Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the lower right side effect unit 3170 is attached to the upper part of the lower right side elevating base 3171 so as to be slidable in the left-right direction and has a slit extending in the front-rear direction. The lower right slide drive motor attached to the rear side of the lower right side elevating base 3171 so that the rotation axis extends upward below the slider, and the base end side attached to the rotation axis of the lower right slide drive motor. A cam member having a columnar sliding pin that is slidably inserted into a slit of a slider is provided on the tip side extending in the horizontal direction from the base end side of the cage.

Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the lower right side effect unit 3170 has a mounting base that is mounted on a slider and extends upward in a flat plate shape, and a state in which the rotation axis is oriented in the left-right direction on the mounting base. It includes a right-side rotary drive motor that is attached, and a cubic right-side rotary decorative body 3173 that is mounted on the rotary shaft of the right-side rotary drive motor and covers the outer periphery of the right-side rotary drive motor. The right-side rotating decorative body 3173 has different decorative portions 3174 formed on four surfaces in the circumferential direction (see FIG. 112). Further, the right side rotation decoration body 3173 can be rotated around an axis extending to the left and right by a right side rotation drive motor.

Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the lower right side effect unit 3170 is attached below the right side rotating decoration body 3173 on the upper surface of the slider, and can irradiate light toward the right side rotating decoration body 3173. It is provided with a lower right side upper surface decorative substrate on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted. By appropriately emitting the LED of the lower right side upper surface decorative substrate, the right side rotating decorative body 3173 can be light-emitting decorated.

Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the lower right side effect unit 3170 is attached to the sub-mounting base which is attached to the upper surface of the upper piece of the right unit base and extends upward in a flat plate shape, and the sub-mounting base. A cubic right sub-side rotation that is attached to the rotation shaft of the right sub-side rotation drive motor and the right sub-side rotation drive motor that are mounted with the rotation shaft oriented in the left-right direction, and covers the outer circumference of the right sub-side rotation drive motor. It includes a decorative body 3175 and. The right sub-side rotating decorative body 3175 has different decorative portions 3176 formed on four surfaces in the circumferential direction (see FIG. 112). Further, the right sub-side rotation decoration body 3175 is made rotatable around an axis extending to the left and right by a right sub-side rotation drive motor.

Further, although detailed illustration is omitted, the lower right side effect unit 3170 is attached below the right sub-side rotating decoration 3175 on the upper surface of the upper piece of the right unit base, and faces the right sub-side rotating decoration 3175. It is provided with a lower right sub-side upper surface decorative substrate on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light are mounted. The right sub-side rotating decorative body 3175 can be light-emitting and decorated by appropriately emitting the LED of the lower right sub-side upper surface decorative substrate.

The lower right side effect unit 3170 is assembled on the game board 5 and has a height at which the right sub-side rotating decoration 3175 attached to the right unit base can enter the lower right side rotating decoration 3173. The lower central elevating base 3121 of the central effect unit 3120 is arranged at substantially the same height as the plurality of rotating decorative bodies 3126 when the lower central elevating base 3121 is positioned (raised) to the ascending end. Further, in the lower right side effect unit 3170, when the right sub-side rotation decoration body 3175 is assembled on the game board 5, the right side rotation decoration body 3173 is placed between the lower right side rotation decoration unit 3170 and the rightmost rotation decoration body 3126 of the lower center production unit 3120. There is an interval that allows you to enter.

In the lower right side effect unit 3170, by rotating the male screw member by the lower right side elevating drive motor, the right side rotating decorative body 3173 is attached to the lower right side effect unit 3120 together with the slider via the lower right side elevating base 3171. The lower center elevating base 3121 can be moved up and down between a lowering position slightly higher than the height of the rotating decorative body 3126 in the lowering position and an ascending position at the same height as the right sub-side rotating decorative body 3175. Further, in the lower right side effect unit 3170, by rotating the cam member by the lower right slide drive motor, the right side rotation decoration 3173 is moved to the appearance position adjacent to the lower center effect unit 3120 via the slider. , It can be slid in the left-right direction between the retracted position, which is located below the right sub-side rotating decoration body 3175, about half away from the lower center effect unit 3120.

As shown in FIG. 112, the lower movable effect unit 3100 has a decorative portion 3127 of each of the four rotating decorative bodies 3126, a decorative portion 3154 of the left side rotating decorative body 3153, a decorative portion 3156 of the left sub-side rotating decorative body 3155, and a right. Different decorations are formed on the decorative portion 3174 of the side rotating decorative body 3173 and the decorative portion 3176 of the right sub-side rotating decorative body 3175. The four rotating ornaments 3126, the left side rotating ornament 3153, the left subside rotating ornament 3155, the right side rotating ornament 3173, and the right subside rotating ornament 3175 are each formed into a dice-shaped cube and extend to the left and right. Different decorations are formed on the first to fourth surfaces around the axis of rotation.

When the front surfaces of the four rotating ornaments 3126, the left side rotating ornament 3153, the left subside rotating ornament 3155, the right side rotating ornament 3173, and the right subside rotating ornament 3175 are each facing the front, from the left. They are "Rotate", "One eye", "One eye", "Second eye", "Third eye", "Four eyes", "One eye", and "Rotate". In addition, when the second side of each is facing the front, it is "star", "super", "chi", "ya", "n", "su", "!", And "star" from the left. In addition, when the third side is facing the front, it is "!", "凰", "ge", "ki", "a", "tsu", "凰", "!" From the left. Furthermore, when the fourth side is facing the front, it is "celebration" "!" "O" "me" "de" "to" "u" "!!" from the left.

In this way, the four rotating decorations 3126, the left side rotating decoration 3153, the left sub-side rotating decoration 3155, the right side rotating decoration 3173, and the right sub-side rotating decoration 3175 are each facing the front with the same numbered faces. Therefore, a predetermined message can be shown to the player, and an expected value that becomes a "big hit" can be displayed depending on the content of the message.

Further, as shown in FIG. 113, the lower movable effect unit 3100 appropriately emits light from the lower front central decorative body 3111, the lower rear central decorative body 3122, the lower left side decorative body 3152, and the lower right side decorative body 3172. "Arrows" of different sizes can be displayed by light emission. Specifically, when only the lower front center decoration 3111 is made to emit light, a triangular "small arrow" in which the apex of the isosceles triangle points downward can be made to emit light (FIGS. 108 and 113 (a)). reference). Further, when the lower front central decorative body 3111 and the raised lower rear central decorative body 3122 are made to emit light, a downwardly pointing "middle arrow" having a rod extending upward larger than the "small arrow" is emitted and displayed. (See FIGS. 109 and 113 (b)). Further, in the state of the "middle arrow", the lower left side decoration 3152 and the lower right side decoration 3172 are raised, and the lower front center decoration 3111, the lower rear center decoration 3122, the lower left side decoration 3152, and the lower right are raised. When all the side decorations 3172 are made to emit light, a "large arrow" in which the upper end of the arrow pointing downward, which is larger than the "middle arrow", extends to the left and right can be emitted (FIGS. 110 and 113 (c)). See).

In this way, since it is possible to emit and display three arrows of different sizes, "small arrow", "medium arrow", and "large arrow", "big arrow", "medium arrow", and "large arrow" are "big hits" in that order. It is possible to display that the expected value is high.

Next, an effect using the lower movable effect unit 3100 will be described. In the lower movable effect unit 3100, as shown in FIG. 101 and the like, in the lower center effect unit 3120, the lower center elevating base 3121 is behind the lower front center decoration unit 3110 and is invisible from the front. The four rotating decorative bodies 3126 attached to the upper end of the lower central elevating base 3121 are located so as to be in contact with the upper end of the lower front central decorative body 3111 in the front view.

Further, in the normal state, in the lower left side effect unit 3150, the lower left side evacuation base 3151 is located at a lower position slightly above the upper end of the lower front center decoration unit 3110 and almost invisible from the front. The left side rotating decoration 3153 is separated from the lower center effect unit 3120 to the left via the slider, and about half of it is located in the retracted position below the left sub side rotating decoration 3155, and the left sub side rotating decoration 3155 is a game. It is located near the left end in the region 5a, which is downward from the center in the vertical direction.

Further, under a normal state, in the lower right side effect unit 3170, the lower right side evacuation base 3171 is located at a lower position slightly above the upper end of the lower front center decoration unit 3110 and almost invisible from the front. The right side rotating decoration 3173 is separated from the lower center effect unit 3120 to the right via the slider, and about half is located in the retracted position below the right sub side rotating decoration 3175, and the right sub side rotating decoration 3175 is a game. It is located near the right end in the region 5a, which is downward from the center in the vertical direction.

As one of the effects provided to the player in this normal state, for example, the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. According to the lottery result, after rotating the four rotating decorative bodies 3126, the rotation of each rotating decorative body 3126 is stopped, and the combination of the decorative portions 3127 facing forward in each rotating decorative body 3126 that has stopped rotating. To the player. As a result, the player can be thrilled depending on whether or not the rotation of the four rotating decorative bodies 3126 is stopped in a desired combination, and the movable effect of the four rotating decorative bodies 3126 can be enjoyed.

Then, when the combination of the decorative portions 3127 of the four rotating decorative bodies 3126 that have stopped rotating satisfies the predetermined conditions, the lower rear central decorative body 3122 attached to the lower central elevating base 3121 by the lower central decorative substrate. Is made to emit light, and the lower front central decorative body 3111 of the lower front central decorative unit 3110 located in front is made to emit light.

As a result, as shown in FIG. 108, the lower front center decorative body 3111 emits a downward arrow, and the downward arrow emits light to display the player's line of sight below the game area 5a. It is possible to guide the player to the effect operation unit 301 arranged in the above, to urge the player to operate the effect operation unit 301, and to easily participate in the player participation type effect that operates the effect operation unit 301. It is possible to entertain the player with the player participation type production and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Alternatively, from the normal state, the lower center elevating base 3121 is set according to the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004. Raise from the descending position to the ascending position. As a result, the lower rear central decorative body 3122 and the four rotating decorative bodies 3126 move to the center of the front view game area 5a so as to block a part of the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600. Not only can the person be surprised, but the player can be made to think that there is something good, and the expectation for the game can be raised. After that, after rotating the four rotating decorative bodies 3126, the rotation of each rotating decorative body 3126 is stopped, and the combination of the decorative portions 3127 facing forward in each rotating decorative body 3126 that has stopped rotating is given to the player. Make it visible. As a result, when the four rotating decorative bodies 3126 stop rotating in a desired combination with respect to the player, a "big hit" (an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous (sometimes referred to as a "big hit gaming state")). It can be made to think that it must be a lottery result), and the player is thrilled depending on whether or not the rotation of the four rotating decorative bodies 3126 is stopped in the desired combination, and the expectation for the lottery result is raised. It can be raised. Then, when the combination of the decorative portions 3127 of the four rotating decorative bodies 3126 that have stopped rotating satisfies the predetermined conditions, a plurality of lower central decorative substrates attached to the rising lower central elevating base 3121. The LED is made to emit light, and the lower rear central decorative body 3122 arranged in the front and the lower front central decorative body 3111 arranged in the lower front are made to emit light. As a result, as shown in FIG. 109, the lower rear central decorative body 3122 and the lower front central decorative body 3111 cause a large downward arrow to emit light. Therefore, the light emitting display of the large downward arrow causes the game. The line of sight of the person can be guided to the effect operation unit 301 arranged below the game area 5a to prompt the player to operate the effect operation unit 301, and the effect operation unit 301 can be displayed by emitting a large arrow. By operating it, it is possible to make the player think that it is a "big hit", and the player can operate the production operation unit 301 to enjoy the player participation type production.

Furthermore, the lower center elevating base 3121 is determined according to the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 from the normal state. Is raised from the descending position to the ascending position. As a result, the lower rear central decorative body 3122 and the four rotating decorative bodies 3126 move to the center of the front view game area 5a so as to block a part of the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600. Not only can the person be surprised, but the player can be made to think that there is something good, and the expectation for the game can be raised. Subsequently, after sliding the left and right left side rotating decorations 3153 and the right side rotating decorations 3173 to the appearance positions on the center side, respectively, the lower left side elevating base 3151 and the lower right side elevating base 3171 are respectively. Raise to the ascending position (see FIG. 110). As a result, the left sub-side rotating decoration 3155, the left side rotating decoration 3153, the four rotating decorations 3126, the right side rotating decoration 3173, and the right sub-side rotating decoration 3175 are arranged in a straight line in the left-right direction. Therefore, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the game by making the lottery result seem to be a "big hit". After that, the left sub-side rotating decoration 3155, the left side rotating decoration 3153, the four rotating decorations 3126, the right side rotating decoration 3173, and the right sub-side rotating decoration 3175 are rotated and then stopped to rotate to the left. The decorative part 3156 of the sub-side rotating decorative body 3155, the decorative part 3154 of the left side rotating decorative body 3153, the decorative part 3127 of each of the four rotating decorative bodies 3126, the decorative part 3174 of the right side rotating decorative body 3173, and the right sub-side rotating decorative body 3173. The player is made to visually recognize the combination of the decorative portion 3176 of the body 3175. At this time, since the plurality of decorative parts 3127 include the decorative part 3127 on which the number decoration is applied, the countdown is stopped by stopping the rotation of the number decoration part 3127 so as to face forward. It is possible to perform an effect as if it were playing, and the countdown effect can make the player think that the lottery result must be a "big hit" and enhance the interest in the game. Then, when the rotation of the left sub-side rotating decoration body 3155, the left side rotating decoration body 3153, the four rotating decoration bodies 3126, the right side rotating decoration body 3173, and the right sub-side rotating decoration body 3175 is stopped and the countdown is completed, The lower front center decoration body 3111, the lower rear center decoration body 3122, the lower left side decoration body 3152, and the lower right side decoration body 3172 are luminescently decorated. As a result, as shown in FIG. 110, a larger downward arrow (giant arrow) is emitted and displayed, so that the player can operate the effect operation unit 301 arranged at the tip of the huge arrow. It is possible to be sure that the lottery result is a "big hit", and the player can surely operate the effect operation unit 301. When this huge arrow is emitted and displayed, the effect display device 1600 is displayed with a message explaining the effect operation unit 301, the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301 is raised, and the effect operation unit 301 is rotated. The operation unit 302 is rotated at high speed (see FIG. 111). As a result, the rotation operation unit 302 rotates at a high speed, so that the player's interest can be enhanced. Therefore, the pressing operation unit 303 can be reliably pressed to entertain the player and reduce the interest. Can be suppressed.

As an effect using the lower movable effect unit 3100, in FIG. 111, the character "The rotation of the lower button is hot!" Is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the rotation operation unit 302 is focused on the player to perform the rotation operation. The faster the rotation speed of the unit 302, the higher the expected value of "big hit" is to be notified to the player. That is, the expected value is represented by the rotation speed of the rotation operation unit 302, and the effect image for notifying the player of the expected value is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

On the other hand, in FIG. 111, as an effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600, the lower movable effect unit 3100 has a lower front central decorative body 3111, a lower rear central decorative body 3122, and a lower left side decoration as shown in FIG. 113. It is also possible to display an effect image suggesting an operation method of the effect operation unit 301 in which the operation of the player is prompted by the "arrow" emitted by the body 3152, the lower right side decorative body 3172, and the like. Specifically, an effect image such as "press the button!", "Turn the dial!", "Turn the dial to the left!", "Turn the dial to the right!", Etc. is displayed. As a result, the operation of the effect operation unit 301 can be accurately performed, and the player participation type effect of operating the effect operation unit 301 can be surely enjoyed.

Then, when the player operates the effect operation unit 301, a predetermined effect image is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the expected value that becomes a "big hit" may be displayed by the effect image. Expected values were obtained using four rotating ornaments 3126, left side rotating ornament 3153, left subside rotating ornament 3155, right side rotating ornament 3173, and right subside rotating ornament 3175, each of which is formed in a dice shape. It may be displayed.

As an display of expected values using four rotating ornaments 3126, left side rotating ornaments 3153, left subside rotating ornaments 3155, right side rotating ornaments 3173, and right subside rotating ornaments 3175, each formed in a dice shape. Performs an effect of displaying an expected value of a "big hit" by combining each of the decorative parts 3127, the decorative part 3154, the decorative part 3156, the decorative part 3174, and the decorative part 3176, which face the front by each rotation and stop. .. Specifically, when only the four rotating decorative bodies 3126 of the lower central effect unit 3120 in the center are used, for example, there are the following three patterns. In the pattern a1, the expected value is displayed in a state in which the combination of the decorative portions 3127 facing the front when the four rotating decorative bodies 3126 stop rotating is a disjointed combination in which the player cannot read the meaning. No pattern. In the pattern a2, the expected value is high to some extent in the state where each rotating decorative body 3126 stops rotating with the second surface facing the front and the combination of the decorative portions 3127 is "chi", "ya", "n", and "su". The pattern displaying that. In the pattern a3, each rotating decorative body 3126 stops rotating with the third surface facing the front, and the combination of the decorative portions 3127 is in a state of "ge", "ki", "a", and "tsu", and the expected value is extremely high. The pattern displaying that. In this way, the expected value can be displayed by the pattern displayed by the rotation stop of the four rotating decorative bodies 3126, and the expected value becomes higher in the order of the pattern a1, the pattern a2, and the pattern a3.

Further, as an effect using the lower movable effect unit 3100, all of the four rotating ornaments 3126, the left side rotating ornament 3153, the left subside rotating ornament 3155, the right side rotating ornament 3173, and the right subside rotating ornament 3175 ( Using the dice-shaped rotating body of eight), the effect of displaying the expected value of "big hit" by combining the decorative part 3127, the decorative part 3154, the decorative part 3156, the decorative part 3174, and the decorative part 3176 is produced. You may do it. Specifically, there are the following six patterns. In the pattern b1, the combinations of the decorative portion 3127, the decorative portion 3154, the decorative portion 3156, the decorative portion 3174, and the decorative portion 3176 that have stopped rotating are different combinations (the expected value is not displayed). In pattern b2, the left sub-side rotating decoration 3155 is "凰" or "star", the left side rotating decoration 3153 is "!" Or "凰", and the four central rotating decorations 3126 are "chi" "ya" " "S", the right side rotating decoration 3173 is a combination of "!" Or "凰", and the right sub-side rotating decoration 3175 is a combination of "凰" or "star" (chance display). In pattern b3, the left sub-side rotating decoration 3155 is "凰" or "star", the left side rotating decoration 3153 is "!" Or "凰", and the four central rotating decorations 3126 are "ge" "ki" " A "" "tsu", the right side rotating decoration 3173 is a combination of "!" Or "凰", and the right sub-side rotating decoration 3175 is a combination of "凰" or "star" (Gekiatsu display). In pattern b4, the left sub-side rotating decoration 3155 is "凰" or "star", the left side rotating decoration 3153 is "super", and the four central rotating decorations 3126 are "chi" "ya" "n" "su". , The right side rotating decoration 3173 is "!", And the right sub side rotating decoration 3175 is a combination of "凰" or "star" (super chance display). In pattern b5, the left sub-side rotating decoration 3155 is "凰" or "star", the left side rotating decoration 3153 is "super", and the four central rotating decorations 3126 are "ge" "ki" "a" "tsu". , The right side rotating decoration 3173 is a combination of "!", And the right sub side rotating decoration 3175 is a combination of "凰" or "star" (super gekiatsu display). In pattern b6, the left sub-side rotating decoration 3155 is "celebration", the left side rotating decoration 3153 is "!", The four central rotating decorations 3126 are "o", "me", "de", "to", and the right side. The combination of the rotating decoration body 3173 is "U" and the right sub-side rotating decoration body 3175 is "!!" ("Big hit" confirmed). In this way, it is displayed by stopping the rotation of eight rotating bodies of four rotating decorative bodies 3126, left side rotating decorative body 3153, left sub-side rotating decorative body 3155, right side rotating decorative body 3173, and right sub-side rotating decorative body 3175. The expected value can be displayed by the pattern, and the expected value increases in the order of pattern b1, pattern b2, pattern b3, pattern b4, pattern b5, and pattern b6.

In the above-mentioned effect, if the player does not operate the effect operation unit 301 within a certain period of time after the operation of the effect operation unit 301 is prompted, the effect of displaying the above-mentioned expected value is not performed. The light emission display of "arrow" is also turned off. On the other hand, when the player operates the effect operation unit 301 within a certain period of time after the operation of the effect operation unit 301 is prompted, the effect of displaying the above-mentioned expected value is continuously performed using the remaining effect time. When the effect time ends, the above-mentioned effect ends and the light emitting display of the "arrow" turns off to end the effect.

As described above, according to the lower movable effect unit 3100, when the game state changes due to the game being performed in the game area 5a in the normal state (the game ball to the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004). Depending on the result of the first special lottery or the second special lottery drawn by the acceptance of B), the four rotating decorations 3126 arranged side by side on the upper side of the lower front center decoration 3111 may rotate or the lower center. The four rotating decorative bodies 3126 arranged side by side by the elevating base 3121 rise together with the lower rear central decorative body 3122, and the four rotating decorative bodies 3126 raised by the lower central elevating base 3121 rotate, and the lower left A pair of left side rotating decorations 3153 and right side rotating decorations 3173 slide in the left-right direction by the lower left slide drive motor of the side effect unit 3150 and the lower right slide drive motor of the lower right side effect unit 3170 (slide mechanism). The left side rotating decoration body 3153 and the right side rotating decoration body 3173 rotate, and the left side rotating decoration body 3153 and the right side rotating decoration body 3153 and the right side rotating decoration body are provided by the slide mechanism and the lower left side lifting base 3151 and the lower right side lifting base 3171. The four rotating decorations 3126, the left sub-side rotating decoration 3155, and the right sub-side rotating decoration 3175, on which 3173 is rising, are lined up in the left-right direction, and the left sub-side rotating decoration 3155 and the right sub-side rotating decoration 3175 rotate. Since it is possible to show the player a movable effect such as, the player can be shown to the central movable unit 3125 (four rotating decorations 3126), the left side rotating decoration 3153 and the right side rotating decoration 3173, and the left sub-side rotation. The decorative body 3155 and the right sub-side rotating decorative body 3175 and the like can be noticed, and the movable effect by them can be enjoyed.

Further, when the lower center elevating base 3121 is located at the descending end, the lower rear central decorative body 3122 is made to emit light and the lower front central decorative body 3111 is made to emit light, so that a downward arrow is emitted and the lower center is raised / lowered. By raising the base 3121 and causing the lower rear center decoration 3122 and the lower front center decoration 3111 to emit light by a plurality of LEDs on the lower center decoration substrate, a large downward arrow can be displayed by emitting light, or a pair of lower left side elevating and lowering. By raising the base 3151 and the lower right side elevating base 3171 to make the lower left side decorative body 3152 and the lower right side decorative body 3172 emit light, a larger downward arrow can be emitted and displayed. The effect can also entertain the player, and the downward arrow displayed by the light emitting can guide the player's line of sight to the lower effect operation unit 301, so that the player can operate the effect operation unit 301. Can be encouraged. Then, in the effect operation unit 301, the rotation operation unit 302 rotates, the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302, or presses the pressing operation unit 303, thereby participating in the player participation type production. Can be entertained.

Therefore, since it is possible to perform various movable effects, light emitting effects, and player participation type effects as described above, it is possible to provide a player with various patterns of effects by appropriately combining them. , It is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored, and it is also possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the production pattern. Therefore, it is possible to surprise the player by performing an unexpected production. It is possible to entertain and suppress the decline in interest in the game.

Further, as described above, the lower front center decoration body 3111, the lower rear center decoration body 3122, the lower left side decoration body 3152, the lower right side decoration body 3172, and the like cause the player to emit a downward arrow to display a downward arrow. When prompting the operation of the effect operation unit 301, the effect display device 1600 is provided with an effect image prompting the operation of the effect operation unit 301, an effect image explaining the operation of the effect operation unit 301, and an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous. By displaying an effect image showing the relationship between the occurrence of the effect and the effect operation unit 301, etc., it is possible to strongly encourage the player to participate in the player participation type effect of operating the effect operation unit 301. The production operation unit 301 can be easily operated, and the player participation type production can be enjoyed and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

[5-9-2. Movable production unit after the upper part]
The upper rear movable effect unit 3200 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 114 to 116 and the like. The upper rear movable effect unit 3200 is attached to the upper part in the back box above the effect display device 1600. The upper rear movable effect unit 3200 includes an upper rear left unit 3210 attached to the upper left corner in the back box and an upper rear right unit 3230 attached to the upper right corner in the back box.

The upper rear left unit 3210 of the upper rear movable production unit 3200 is attached to the left base 3211 mounted in the back box and the left base 3211 so as to be slidable in an oblique direction from the upper left to the lower right, although detailed illustration is omitted. The left slider 3212, the linear rack gear 3213 attached to the left slider 3212, the upper rear left drive motor 3214 attached to the left base 3211 with the rotation axis facing the front-rear direction, and the upper rear left. A clutch mechanism 3250 attached to the drive motor 3214 and connected to the rotation shaft of the upper rear left drive motor 3214 on the input side, and a spur gear-shaped drive gear 3215 connected to the output side of the clutch mechanism 3250. A spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3216 that meshes with the drive gear 3215 and is rotatably attached to the left base 3211, and a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3216 that meshes with the first transmission gear 3216 and is rotatably attached to the left base 3211. The spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 3217, the third transmission gear 3218 that meshes with the second transmission gear 3217 and is rotatably attached to the left base 3211, and the third transmission gear 3218 and the rack gear 3213, respectively. It includes a spur gear-shaped pinion gear 3219 that is meshed and rotatably attached to the left base 3211.

Further, the upper rear left unit 3210 is attached to the lower end of the left slider 3212 and is attached to the rear side of the flat upper rear left decorative body 3220 extending to the left and right and the upper rear left decorative body 3220 to the front surface. It is equipped with an upper rear left decorative board on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted. The upper rear left decorative body 3220 can be light-emitting decorated by emitting light from a plurality of LEDs on the upper rear left decorative substrate.

The upper rear left unit 3210 can raise and lower the upper rear left decorative body 3220 via the rack gear 3213 by driving the upper rear left drive motor 3214.

The upper rear right unit 3230 of the upper rear movable production unit 3200 is attached to the right base 3231 installed in the back box and the right base 3231 so as to be slidable in an oblique direction from the upper right to the lower left, although detailed illustration is omitted. The right slider 3232, the linear rack gear 3233 attached to the right slider 3232, the upper rear right drive motor 3234 attached to the right base 3231 with the rotation axis facing the front-rear direction, and the upper rear right drive. A clutch mechanism 3250 attached to the motor 3234 and connected to the rotation shaft of the upper rear right drive motor 3234 on the input side, and a spur gear-shaped drive gear 3235 connected to the output side of the clutch mechanism 3250. A spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3236 that meshes with the gear 3235 and is rotatably attached to the right base 3231 and a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 3236 that meshes with the first transmission gear 3236 and is rotatably attached to the right base 3231. The spur gear-shaped second transmission gear 3237, the third transmission gear 3238 that meshes with the second transmission gear 3237 and is rotatably attached to the right base 3231, and the third transmission gear 3238 and the rack gear 3233, respectively. It is equipped with a spur gear-shaped pinion gear 3239 that is rotatably attached to the right base 3231.

Further, the upper rear right unit 3230 is attached to the lower end of the right slider 3232 and is attached to the rear side of the flat upper rear right decorative body 3240 extending to the left and right and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 to the front surface. It is equipped with an upper rear right decorative board on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted. The upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be light-emitting decorated by emitting light from a plurality of LEDs on the upper rear right decorative substrate.

The upper rear right unit 3230 can raise and lower the upper rear right decorative body 3240 via the rack gear 3233 by driving the upper rear right drive motor 3234.

The clutch mechanism 3250 has a tubular accommodating case 3251 and a plurality of projecting portions 3252a radially extending to the vicinity of the inner surface of the accommodating case 3251 in the accommodating case 3251, and has an upper rear left drive motor 3214 or an upper portion. An input member 3252 to which the rotation shaft of the rear right drive motor 3234 is attached, and a plurality of transmission grooves 3253a inserted in the accommodating case 3251 with a protrusion 3252a of the input member 3252 having a circumferential gap. A plurality of cam surfaces 3253b formed so that the distance from the inner surface of the accommodating case 3251 becomes narrower as it approaches the projecting portion 3252a of the input member 3252, and the drive gear 3215 or the drive gear 3235 projecting from the accommodating case 3251. The output member 3253 having the output shaft 3253c to which the output member 3253 is attached, the plurality of rollers 3254 inserted between the plurality of cam surfaces 3253b of the output member 3253 and the inner surface of the accommodating case 3251, and the accommodating case 3251. It has a tightening spring 3255 that is tightened from the outside, a storage recess 3256a that houses the storage case 3251 and the tightening spring 3255, and a main body housing 3256 that can be attached to the left base 3211 or the right base 3231, and the main body housing. It is provided with a lid member 3257 that closes the accommodating recess 3256a of the 3256 and through which the output shaft 3253c of the output member 3253 penetrates, and a bearing 3258 that is attached to the lid member 3257 and through which the output shaft 3253c is inserted. (See FIGS. 116 (a) to 116 (c)).

In the clutch mechanism 3250, when the input member 3252 is rotated by the upper rear left drive motor 3214 or the upper rear right drive motor 3234, the plurality of protruding portions 3252a of the input member 3252 become the circumferential ends of the transmission groove 3253a of the output member 3253. The abutment causes the output member 3253 to rotate, and the drive gear 3215 or the drive gear 3235 attached to the output shaft 3253c of the output member 3253 rotates. That is, the clutch mechanism 3250 can directly transmit the rotation from the upper rear left drive motor 3214 or the upper rear right drive motor 3234 to the drive gear 3215 or the drive gear 3235 side.

Further, when the clutch mechanism 3250 rotates the output member 3253 from the drive gear 3215 or the drive gear 3235 side via the output shaft 3253c, the cam surface 3253b of the output member 3253 moves in the direction of the protruding portion 3252a of the input member 3252. Therefore, the space between the cam surface 3253b and the inner surface of the storage case 3251 becomes narrow, and the roller 3254 is bitten between them. As a result, the rotation of the output member 3253 is blocked, the rotation of the drive gear 3215 or the drive gear 3235 is locked, and the rotation from the drive gear 3215 or the drive gear 3235 side is rearward via the input member 3252. It is not transmitted to the left drive motor 3214 or the upper rear right drive motor 3234 side. Therefore, even if a force for moving the upper rear left decorative body 3220 or the upper rear right decorative body 3240 acts downward due to gravity, the clutch mechanism 3250 causes the drive gear 3215 or the drive gear 3235 via the output member 3253. Since the rotation is locked, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 do not move downward without permission, and a load is applied to the upper rear left drive motor 3214 or the upper rear right drive motor 3234. It is possible to keep the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 stopped at an arbitrary position.

In the clutch mechanism 3250 of the present embodiment, the accommodating case 3251 is tightened from the outer peripheral side by a tightening spring 3255 made of a coil spring, and the tightening spring 3255 and the accommodating case 3251 are accommodated in the accommodating recess 3256a of the main body housing 3256. Therefore, when the rotational load (torque) applied to the output member 3253 from the drive gear 3215 or the drive gear 3235 side via the output shaft 3253c becomes larger than a predetermined value, the tightening force (urging force) of the tightening spring 3255 is increased. ), The accommodation case 3251 rotates, the circumferential end of the transmission groove 3253a of the output member 3253 comes into contact with the protruding portion 3252a of the input member 3252, and the rotation is transmitted to the input member 3252. As a result, when the output member 3253 is to be rotated with a strong force from the output side, slippage occurs between the tightening spring 3255 tightening the accommodation case 3251 and the accommodation case 3251, and the rotational force is applied to the upper rear left. Since it can be transmitted to the drive motor 3214 side and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 side and escaped, the roller 3254 may be strongly bitten and the lock cannot be released, or the output member 3253 and the storage case 3251 may be damaged. It can be prevented from doing so.

Further, as shown in FIG. 116 (d), the clutch mechanism 3250 inserts two rollers 3254 between the protrusions 3252a between the inner surface of the housing case 3251 and the cam surface 3253b, and also inserts the two rollers 3254. May be configured so that each of the lock springs 3260 is urged toward the protruding portion 3252a side close to each of the two. As a result, when a force for rotating the output member 3253 acts from the upper rear left decorative body 3220 side and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 side, the roller 3254 is immediately moved to the cam surface 3253b of the output member 3253 and the storage case 3251. It can be engaged with the inner surface, and the rotation (rotation angle) of the output member 3253 from the action of rotation from the upper rear left decorative body 3220 side and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 side to the lock is applied. It can be reduced as much as possible.

Next, an effect using the upper rear movable effect unit 3200 will be described. In a normal state, the upper rear movable effect unit 3200 is located above the effect display device 1600 and behind the upper front movable effect unit 3300, as shown in FIG. 101 and the like. The upper rear right decorative body 3240 is invisible from the player side. In this normal state, the upper rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 are not driven, respectively, but as described above, the upper rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 , The rotation of the drive gear 3215 and the drive gear 3235 is locked via the output member 3253 by the clutch mechanism 3250 interposed between the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240, and the upper part. The rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 do not move downward without permission.

As a result, in order to prevent the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 from moving downward, the upper rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 are continuously driven or moved downward. It is not necessary to provide an electric lock mechanism for preventing the pachinko machine 1, and the configuration of the pachinko machine 1 can be simplified. Further, since the presence of the clutch mechanism 3250 can prevent the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 from moving without permission, the game board 5 is being transported or attached to the island equipment of the game hall. Even if vibration or acceleration acts at the time of the above, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 remain in the state of the origin at the time of shipment, and there is no need to perform unnecessary origin adjustment. It is possible to reduce the time and effort required to install the game board 5, and it is possible to suppress an increase in the burden on the game hall side.

In this normal state, the upper rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear left drive motor 3214 according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004. When the upper rear right drive motor 3234 is driven, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 move diagonally downward toward the center via the clutch mechanism 3250, respectively, and the upper rear left decorative body 3220 The right end of the upper rear right ornament 3240 abuts to form one large ornament (see FIG. 114). As a result, a large decorative body extending to the left and right appears on the upper part of the front surface of the effect display device 1600, so that the player can be surprised, the player can be entertained, and the decline in interest can be suppressed.

As described above, according to the upper rear movable effect unit 3200 of the present embodiment, the upper rear left drive motor 3214, the upper rear right drive motor 3234, the left slider 3212, and the right slider 3232 (upper rear left decorative body 3220 and upper rear right). Since the clutch mechanism 3250 is provided between the decorative body 3240), vibrations from the effect operating unit 301 and other movable decorative bodies that can be operated by the player, the left slider 3212, the right slider 3232, and the upper part are provided. Even if the output member 3253 on the output side of the clutch mechanism 3250 tries to rotate due to the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 trying to descend due to gravity acting on the rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240, the output is output. The roller 3254 is pressed against the inner surface of the accommodating case 3251 by the cam surface 3253b of the member 3253, and the roller 3254 is engaged between the inner surface of the accommodating case 3251 and the cam surface 3253b. The transmission of rotation from the left decorative body 3220 side and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 side) to the upper rear left drive motor 3214 side and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 side is blocked, and the rotation of the output member 3253 is locked. Therefore, it is possible to restrict the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 from descending arbitrarily, and the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are unexpected via the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232. It is possible to prevent the player from moving (falling), and to prevent the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 from giving distrust to the player due to unintended movement. This makes it possible for the player to enjoy the movements of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, as described above, even if the upper rear left decorative body 3220 side and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 side try to descend, the rotation of the output member 3253 can be restricted and locked by the clutch mechanism 3250. Since the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be stopped at an arbitrary height position via the right slider 3232, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are various. It is possible to show the player a variety of production patterns that stop ascending and descending at the position, making it difficult for the player to get bored with the movable production of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240, and suppressing the decline in interest. Can be made to.

Further, since the clutch mechanism 3250 is provided, even if the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are stopped at arbitrary positions in the vertical direction via the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232, the upper rear left decorative body 3240 is provided. The drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 can be prevented from being loaded, and the upper rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 can be prevented from being damaged at an early stage due to overload, and the upper part can be prevented from being damaged. It is possible to avoid interruption of the game due to damage to the rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234, prevent the player from being uncomfortable, and suppress the deterioration of the player's interest in the game. be able to.

Further, as shown in FIG. 116 (d), two rollers 3254 are inserted between the protruding portions 3252a between the inner surface of the housing case 3251 and the cam surface 3253b, and the two rollers 3254 are each connected by the lock spring 3260. When the protrusions 3252a, which are close to each other, are urged, the rollers 3254 are immediately applied when a force for rotating the output member 3253 is applied from the upper rear left decorative body 3220 side and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 side. Can be engaged between the cam surface 3253b of the output member 3253 and the inner surface of the storage case 3251, and the lock is released after rotation from the upper rear left decorative body 3220 side and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 side acts. The rotation of the output member 3253 up to this point can be reduced as much as possible. As a result, when the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 are moved downward by the upper rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234, the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 are smoothly lowered without jerking. Therefore, the player does not feel uncomfortable with the movement of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240, and enjoys the movable effect by the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

Further, by moving the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 downward to bring the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 into contact with each other, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear left decorative body 3240 and the upper rear left decorative body 3240 are brought into contact with each other. Since the upper rear right decorative bodies 3240 can be combined to form a large decorative body, the appearance of the large decorative bodies by combining them can give a strong impact to the player and entertain the player. At the same time, it is possible to make the player think that an advantageous gaming state (for example, "big hit game") in which the player is advantageous to the player due to the appearance of a large decorative body may occur, and expectations for the game can be expected. It is possible to enhance the feeling and suppress the decline in interest. When the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are in contact with each other and united, they try to move the upper rear right decorative body 3240 or the upper rear left decorative body 3220 on the other side by contacting each other. However, since each of them is equipped with a clutch mechanism 3250, a force for moving the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 (rotating from the output side). Even if a force) is applied, the roller 3254 is caught between the cam surface 3253b of the output member 3253 and the inner surface of the storage case 3251 to lock the movement of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240. It is possible to prevent the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 from moving due to contact with each other, and the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be prevented from moving due to the reaction of the contact. It is also possible to prevent the 3240 from returning, and it is possible to surely entertain the player with a movable effect in which the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are in contact with each other and unite, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest. ..

Further, in the clutch mechanism 3250, the accommodating case 3251 is tightened by the tightening spring 3255, and the tightening spring 3255 and the accommodating case 3251 are accommodated in the accommodating recess 3256a of the main body housing 3256. The 3253 is rotated and the roller 3254 is pressed against the inner surface of the accommodating case 3251 by the cam surface 3253b of the output member 3253 to engage the roller 3254 between the inner surface of the accommodating case 3251 and the cam surface 3253b of the output member 3253. Therefore, when a force for rotating the housing case 3251 acts via a plurality of rollers 3254, the force (torque) for rotating the housing case 3251 is the frictional resistance due to the tightening force of the tightening spring 3255. If it is larger than, slippage occurs between the accommodating case 3251 and the tightening spring 3255, and the accommodating case 3251 rotates. Then, as the accommodating case 3251 rotates, the output member 3253 rotates via the plurality of rollers 3254, and the circumferential end of the transmission groove 3253a of the output member 3253 comes into contact with the protruding portion 3252a of the input member 3252. The rotation is transmitted to the input member 3252. As a result, when the output member 3253 is to be rotated with a strong force from the output side, slippage occurs between the tightening spring 3255 tightening the accommodation case 3251 and the accommodation case 3251, and the rotational force is applied to the upper rear left. Since it can be transmitted to the drive motor 3214 side and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 side and escaped, the roller 3254 may be strongly bitten and the lock cannot be released, or the output member 3253 and the storage case 3251 may be damaged. It is possible to embody the pachinko machine 1 that can prevent the above-mentioned action and effect.

[5-9-3. Upper front movable production unit]
The upper front movable effect unit 3300 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 117 and 118. The upper front movable effect unit 3300 is attached to the front side of the upper rear movable effect unit 3200 in the upper part of the back box above the effect display device 1600 in front view. The upper front movable effect unit 3300 is attached to the horizontally long unit base 3301 attached to the upper part in the back box, the upper front drive motor 3302 attached to the unit base 3301, and the unit base 3301 so as to be able to move up and down in the vertical direction. It is equipped with an upper front movable decorative body 3350 that moves up and down by being driven by an upper front drive motor 3302.

The upper front movable decorative body 3350 is arranged on both the left and right sides of the circular central decorative body 3351 and the central decorative body 3351 which are attached so as to be able to move up and down (downward) in the center of the unit base 3301 in the horizontal direction. A pair of first protruding decorative portions 3352a and a pair of first protruding decorative portions 3352a are connected to each other and are rotatably attached to the rear side of the central decorative body 3351 around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. The first protruding decorative body 3352 having the connecting rod 3352b, the pair of second protruding decorative portions 3353a arranged on the left and right sides of the central decorative body 3351, and the pair of second protruding decorative portions 3353a are connected to each other. It has a second connecting rod 3353b that is coaxially attached to the first connecting rod 3352b of the first protruding decorative body 3352 and rotatably attached to the rear side of the central decorative body 3351 around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. The second protruding decorative body 3353 and the like are provided.

In the first protruding decorative body 3352, a pair of first protruding decorative portions 3352a are formed in a long protruding isosceles triangle shape with the central decorative body 3351 side as the base. In the pair of first protruding decorative portions 3352a, the first protruding decorative portion 3352a on the right side of the central decorative body 3351 is arranged rearward in the front-rear direction with respect to the first protruding decorative portion 3352a on the left side. Further, the first protruding decorative body 3352 has a link attaching portion 3352c to which the tip of the second link rod 3304 on the right side, which will be described later, is rotatably attached to the tip of the first protruding decorative portion 3352a on the right side.

In the second protruding decorative body 3353, a pair of second protruding decorative portions 3353a are formed in a long protruding isosceles triangle shape with the central decorative body 3351 side as the base. In the pair of second protruding decorative portions 3353a, the second protruding decorative portion 3353a on the left side of the central decorative body 3351 is arranged rearward in the front-rear direction with respect to the second protruding decorative portion 3353a on the right side. Further, the second protruding decorative body 3353 has a link attaching portion 3353c to which the tip of the second link rod 3304 on the left side, which will be described later, is rotatably attached to the tip of the second protruding decorative portion 3353a on the left side.

In the upper front movable decorative body 3350, the first protruding decorative portion 3352a of the first protruding decorative body 3352 and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a of the second protruding decorative body 3353 are formed in the same shape and the same size. There is. The upper front movable decorative body 3350 has a second protruding decorative portion 3353a on the left side behind the first protruding decorative portion 3352a on the left side and a first protruding decorative portion 3352a on the right side behind the second protruding decorative portion 3353a on the right side. Positionally, the first protruding decorative body 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353 are configured to overlap in the front-rear direction.

Although not shown, the upper front movable decorative body 3350 has a plurality of LEDs on the front side of the central decorative body 3351, the pair of first protruding decorative portions 3352a, and the pair of second protruding decorative portions 3353a. Has an upper front central decorative substrate, a first protruding decorative portion decorative substrate, and a second protruding decorative portion decorative substrate on which the central decorative body 3351, a pair of first protruding decorative portions 3352a, and a pair of The second protruding decorative portion 3353a can be independently luminescently decorated.

Further, the upper front movable effect unit 3300 is rotatably attached to the unit base 3301 around an axis whose base end extends in the front-rear direction at a symmetrical position with the center in the left-right direction of the front surface in between, and outward in the left-right direction. A pair of first link rods 3303 extending in a rod shape and a pair of first link rods 3303 are rotatably attached to the tips of the pair of first link rods 3303 around an axis whose base end side extends forward and backward, and the tip side protrudes first. A pair of second link rods 3304 rotatably attached to the link mounting portion 3352c of the decorative body 3352 and the link mounting portion 3353c of the second protruding decorative body 3353 around an axis extending back and forth, and the front surface of the unit base 3301. It is provided with an upper stopper 3305 that protrudes forward from the front and regulates the upward rotation of the tip side of the first link rod 3303, and a lower stopper 3306 that regulates the downward rotation of the tip side of the first link rod 3303. ing.

Next, an effect using the upper front movable effect unit 3300 will be described. In the normal state of the upper front movable effect unit 3300, as shown in FIG. 101 and the like, the upper front movable decorative body 3350 is raised, and the central decorative body 3351 is located near the upper end in the left-right direction of the game area 5a. At the same time, the first protruding decorative body 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353 extend horizontally and overlap each other in the front-rear direction (see FIG. 118 (a)). In this normal state, since the first protruding decorative body 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353 overlap each other in the front-rear direction, the player can be made to recognize that the decorative body is one. Further, in the normal state, the pair of first link rods 3303 are in contact with the upper stopper 3305, respectively, and further rotation in the direction in which the tip side moves upward is prevented.

In this normal state, the upper front drive motor 3302 is driven according to the result of the first special lottery or the result of the second special lottery drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004. Then, the central decorative body 3351 moves downward together with the first protruding decorative body 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353. At this time, the first protruding decorative body 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353 move downward while remaining horizontally extended. By moving the first protruding decorative body 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353 downward, the second link rod 3304 on the right side and the second link rod 3304 on the left side, which are attached to the link mounting portion 3352c of the first protruding decorative portion 3352a on the right side, and the left side. The second link rod 3304 on the left side attached to the link attachment portion 3353c of the second protruding decorative portion 3353a of the above moves downward, and a pair of second link rods 3304 are attached to their respective tips. Each of the first link rods 3303 rotates so that the tip side moves downward.

Then, when the pair of first link rods 3303 rotating with the downward movement of the upper front movable decorative body 3350 (central decorative body 3351) abut on the lower stopper 3306, further rotation was prevented. It becomes a state (see FIG. 118 (b)). When the central decorative body 3351 further moves downward after the pair of first link rods 3303 abut on the lower stopper 3306, the first protruding decorative portion 3352a on the right side and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a on the left side are moved. Since the downward movement is restricted by the left and right second link rods 3304, the first protruding decorative body 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353 are located at the center of the first connecting rod 3352b and the second connecting rod 3353b. Centering on the center of the central decorative body 3351), the first protruding decorative portion 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a on the side opposite to the side to which the second link rod 3304 is attached rotate in the downward movement direction, respectively. (See FIG. 118 (c)). As a result, the first protruding decorative portion 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a arranged on the left and right sides of the central decorative body 3351 rotate around the central decorative body 3351 so that the scissors open. The entire upper front movable decorative body 3350 can be enlarged, and the player can be surprised and the deterioration of the interest in the game can be suppressed.

As described above, according to the upper front movable effect unit 3300, under the normal state, the first protruding decorative body 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353 of the upper front movable decorative body 3350 are overlapped in the front-rear direction to form one decorative body. When the upper front movable decorative body 3350 is lowered, the overlapping first protruding decorative portion 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a are rotated and opened so that the tips are separated from each other. It is possible to surprise the player who has recognized it as one decorative body, and to enjoy the movement of the upper front movable decorative body 3350.

Further, by the action of the first link rod 3303 and the second link rod 3304, the first protruding decoration body 3352 and the second protruding decoration body 3353 can be moved to the central decoration body 3351 by simply moving the upper front movable decoration body 3350 downward. It is not necessary to separately provide a drive motor for rotating the first protruding decorative body 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353 because the first protruding decorative body 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353 can be rotated and opened in directions opposite to each other.

[6. Peripheral control unit configuration]
Next, the overall configuration of the peripheral control unit 1500 arranged behind the game panel 1100 provided in the game board 5 shown in FIG. 12 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 119 to 123. 119 is a front exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit, FIG. 120 is a rear exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit, FIG. 121 is a front view of the peripheral control unit, and FIG. 122 is an X-ray line of FIG. 121. It is a cross-sectional view of FIG. 123, and FIG. 123 is a view taken along the line A of FIG. 121. Here, the back side of the pachinko machine 1 will be described as the front side of the peripheral control unit 1500.

As shown in FIGS. 119 and 120, the peripheral control unit 1500 includes a transparent cover body 1501 that is open at the rear and has a box shape that is longer in the left-right direction than in the up-down direction, and a main control that controls the progress of the game. A peripheral control board 1510 that can control the progress of the effect based on a command from the main control board 1310 of the unit 1300, a peripheral data ROM board 1520 that is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510, and a peripheral control board 1510. A liquid crystal output board 1530 electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a metal shield plate 1540 capable of reducing (suppressing) electromagnetic noise invading the liquid crystal output board 1530. , A conductive elastic member 1545 attached (adhered) to a predetermined position of the metal shield plate 1540, and a transparent base body 1502 that closes the opening of the cover body 1501. In the internal space of the cover body 1501, various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are attached at predetermined positions together with the metal shield plate 1540, so that the shield plate 1540 is formed. A peripheral control board box 1505 (sealed board box) is formed by the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 by being sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and various substrates and closing the opening of the cover body 1501 with the base body 1502.

[6-1. Cover body]
In addition to the peripheral control board 1510, various control information (peripheral data) controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 can be stored in the various boards mounted in the internal space of the cover body 1501. There are a ROM board 1520 and a liquid crystal output board 1530 capable of outputting drawing data for drawing an image to the effect display device 1600. The peripheral control board 1510 has a horizontally long rectangular shape having a region of about two-thirds when the cover body 1501 is viewed from the back surface, and is arranged so as to be packed on the left side of the cover body 1501. The peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 have a square shape in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 in the remaining one-third of the area when the cover body 1501 is viewed from the back, and the upper right corner of the cover body 1501. On the other hand, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 has a square shape that is twice as large as the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and is arranged on the lower right side of the cover body 1501.

The boards of the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are electrically connected by a board-to-board connector described later, and the boards of the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected by a board-to-board connector described later. Is connected. As a result, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected and are the same ground. (GND). The ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 97 and electricity. Is connected.

The cover body 1501 is made of a non-conductive resin, is transparently molded, and covers the upper side, left side, lower side, and right side of a horizontally long rectangular cover flat plate 1501a (plate thickness: 2 mm) when viewed from the front. The side walls 1501b to 1501e are formed in a box shape having an opening by projecting each of the side walls 1501b to 1501e toward the rear (front side of the pachinko machine 1).

The cover flat plate 1501a is for mounting the air cooling fan FAN at a position slightly on the upper right side of the center thereof when viewed from the front and corresponding to the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the peripheral control board 1510 attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The FAN mounting recess 1501aa having a square shape is formed so as to project toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. On the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa, a plurality of arc-shaped slit holes 1501aa are formed along a plurality of concentric circles centered on the center in the vertical and horizontal directions of the bottom surface. Further, at the four corners of the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa, a cylindrical shape to be inserted through the through holes th1 to th4 at positions corresponding to the through holes th1 to th4 formed at the four corners of the air-cooled fan FAN having a square shape. Guide protrusions 1501ab1 to 1501ab4 having a height (distance dimension shorter than the distance dimension in the depth direction of the air-cooled fan FAN) are formed so as to project toward the side opposite to the opening side of the cover body 1501. By forming the arc-shaped slit holes 1501aa, it is possible to prevent fraudulent acts of illegally taking out various electronic components and the like provided in the peripheral control board 1510 from the peripheral control board 1510.

Further, the cover flat plate 1501a is formed with a pair of mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 diagonally in the vicinity of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa. When the air-cooled fan FAN is pushed into the FAN mounting recess 1501aa and mounted, the front surface of the air-cooled fan FAN and the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 are arranged on the same plane. ing. In this state, a metal countersunk head screw (a screw having a shape in which the pan head and the flat washer are integrated), which is not shown, is screwed into the pair of mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 from the front to the rear of the cover flat plate 1501a, respectively. As a result, the flat washer, which is the seat portion of the pan head screw with a seat, comes into contact with the front surface of the air-cooled fan FAN and the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, so that the air-cooled fan FAN pops out from the FAN mounting recess 1501aa. Can be prevented.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a gap having a predetermined distance dimension between the front surface of the peripheral control IC 1510a (the surface on which the product number and model are printed) and the rear surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa ( In this embodiment, 2.3 mm) is formed.

The cover flat plate 1501a communicates with the FAN mounting recess 1501aa and is located higher than the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa (a distance dimension shorter than the distance dimension from the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa). The wiring lead-out recess 1501ab is formed so as to project toward the opening of the cover body 1501. When the air-cooled fan FAN is attached to and fixed to the FAN mounting recess 1501aa, a plurality of wires from the air-cooled fan FAN can be drawn out from the wiring drawer recess 1501ab.

The cover flat plate 1501a has a position corresponding to the connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume control switch 1510d attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a along the lower side thereof when viewed from the front. The connector recess 1501ac is the FAN mounting recess 1501aa as two closed, almost horizontally long rectangular regions (to be exact, a convex region with the volume control switch 1510d and the connector CN1 at the top and the connector CN2 to the connector CN7 at the bottom). It is formed so as to project toward the opening side of the cover body 1501 at a position lower than the bottom surface (a position having a longer distance dimension than the distance dimension from the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa). There is. On the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac, connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 and volume adjustment holes 1501ac8 are formed at positions corresponding to the connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume adjustment switch 1510d, respectively. The bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac occupies a region on the lower right side when the cover flat plate 1501a is viewed from the front. Therefore, as a countermeasure against insufficient strength and warpage of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) caused by an increase in the area of the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac, the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac has connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 and volume adjustment. Two reinforcing ribs 1510aci1 and 1510aci2 elongated in the vertical direction are formed so as to project forward at predetermined intervals at positions that do not interfere with the holes 1501ac8.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the connectors CN1 to CN7 and the volume control switch 1510d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 have connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 formed on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac. And the volume adjustment hole 1501ac8 is exposed.

The cover flat plate 1501a is a horizontally long rectangular region having one closed position corresponding to the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a along the lower side thereof when viewed from the front. The opening of the cover body 1501 at a position where the connector recess 1501ad is lower than the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa (a position having a longer distance dimension than the distance dimension from the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa). It is formed so as to project toward the side, and the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ad and the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac are arranged on the same plane. On the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ad, connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 are formed at positions corresponding to the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530, respectively.

When the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 are exposed from the connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 formed on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ad, respectively. ..

Further, the cover flat plate 1501a has a wiring outlet opening 1501ae formed at a position corresponding to CN10 provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 along the left side side thereof when viewed from the front. The mounting recess 1501af for mounting the wiring cover body 1503 having a horizontally long rectangular shape that communicates with the wiring drawer opening 1501ae and can close the wiring drawer opening 1501ae is compared with the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa described above. It is formed at a high position (a position having a distance dimension shorter than the distance dimension from the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa) so as to project toward the opening of the cover body 1501. The mounting recess 1501af is located at a position corresponding to the through hole 1503a formed in the wiring cover body 1503, and has a predetermined height of a cylindrical shape inserted into the through hole 1503a (a distance shorter than the distance dimension in the depth direction of the wiring cover body 1503). The protruding portion 1501afa having a dimension) is formed so as to project toward the side opposite to the opening side of the cover body 1501, and the mounting holes 1501afb1 are located at positions corresponding to the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503. , 1501afb2 are formed, respectively.

When the wiring cover body 1503 is fitted into the mounting recess 1501af, the front surface of the wiring cover body 1503 and the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 are arranged on the same plane. ing. In this state, by inserting metal pan screws (not shown) into the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503 and screwing them into the mounting holes 1501afb1 and 1501afb2 from the front to the rear, respectively. , The wiring cover body 1503 can be fixed to the mounting recess 1501af.

When the wiring cover body 1503 is fixed to the mounting recess 1501af, the wiring outlet opening 1501ae is closed and a plurality of wirings (to transmit drawing data to the effect display device 1600) connected to the connector CN10 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530. The wiring cover body 1503 can function as a cover that protects the wiring from being touched. The wiring cover body 1503 is made of a non-conductive resin and is transparently molded.

When the cover body 1501 is viewed from the front, plate-shaped guide portions 1501ca and 1501cc are formed in the vicinity of the opening side of the cover body 1501 on the left side cover side wall 1501c and projecting outward at a predetermined center interval. At the same time, a hinge hooking portion 1501cc arranged above the guide portion 1501ca and projecting outward, and a hinge hooking portion 1501cd arranged below the guide portion 1501cc and projecting outward are formed. A chamfer is formed on the rear surface side of the left end of the guide portions 1501ca and 1501cc. On the other hand, L-shaped hooks 1501cca and 1501cda protruding forward are formed on the front side of the left end of the hinge hooking portions 1501cc and 1501cd. Further, in the center of the cover body 1501 of the cover side wall 1501e on the right side, a cover-side sealing portion 1501ea protruding outward is formed.

The cover flat plate 1501a corresponds to the four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 when viewed from the back surface so that the peripheral control board 1510 is arranged so as to be packed on the left side of the back surface of the cover body 1501. At the positions, four mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 are formed so as to project from the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. The periphery of the four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 is a copper foil for soldering (so-called "land") 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 having a circular shape on the surface side of the peripheral control board 1510, and peripheral control. Copper foils for soldering (so-called "lands") 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 having a circular shape are formed on the back surface side of the substrate 1510, and these lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 and 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 are peripheral control substrates, respectively. A wiring pattern is formed on the peripheral control board 1510 so as to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of 1510.

When the peripheral control board 1510 is mounted on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the through hole 1540c1a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c1 of the metal shield plate 1540 described later is mounted on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Arranged so as to match the boss hole 1501ag1, the through hole 1540c2a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 described later is aligned with the mounting boss hole 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Arrange as follows. Then, among the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510, the through holes 1510r1 and 1510r4 are formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c1 of the shield plate 1540, and the through holes 1540c1a and the shield plate 1540 are L-shaped. The through holes 1540c2a formed in the mounting piece 1540c1 and the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 and 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a are arranged so as to be aligned with the through holes 1510r2 and 1510r3 formed in the peripheral control board 1510. , The cover flat plate 1501a is arranged so as to match the mounting boss holes 1501ag2 and 1501ag3 formed on the back surface side. Then, the peripheral control board 1510 can be fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by inserting a metal pan head screw (not shown) into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 and screwing it toward the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4. As a result, the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 are sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the peripheral control board 1510. In this state, of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 formed on the front surface side of the peripheral control board 1510, the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 and the back surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 correspond to each other. In addition to being in contact with each other, the land 1510rf2 and 1510rf3 and the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag2 and 1501ag3 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a are in contact with each other. Further, the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 formed on the back surface side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seating surface of the metal pan head screw are in contact with each other. Further, the shaft (screw portion) of the metal pan head screw is screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

As a result, the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 are electrically connected to the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 formed on the peripheral control board 1510, respectively, so that the metal shield plate is electrically connected. The 1540 will be circuit grounded to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 is the same because the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected. The metal shield plate 1540 is circuit grounded to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510, so that the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output are output. The circuit will be grounded to the ground (GND) of the board 1530. Further, as described above, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 and electricity. The metal shield plate 1540 is circuit grounded to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510, so that the circuit is grounded to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630. ..

When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the head of the metal pan head screw inserted and screwed into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 opens the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. It is arranged inward from the end face on the side (that is, so as not to protrude outward from the end face on the opening side of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e).

The cover flat plate 1501a corresponds to the four through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 when viewed from the back surface so that the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is arranged on the upper right side of the back surface of the cover body 1501. A pair of mounting boss holes 1501ah1, 1501ah2 and a pair of mounting boss projecting portions 1501ai1, 1501ai2 are formed diagonally from the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. Has been done. The four through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 are surrounded by soldering copper foils (so-called "lands") 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 having a circular shape on the surface side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520. Copper foils for soldering (so-called “lands”) 1520 rb1 to 1520 rb4 having a circular shape are formed on the back surface side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and these lands 1520 rf1 to 1520 rf4 and 1520 rb1 to 1520 rb4 are respectively formed. A wiring pattern is formed on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 so as to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520.

When the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a through hole 1540b1a formed in the L-shaped attachment piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 described later is formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Arrange so as to match the mounting boss hole 1501ah2. Then, the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r3 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Then, a metal pan head screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and screwed toward the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 can be fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. As a result, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 is sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520. In this state, of the lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 formed on the front surface side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, the lands 1520rf4 and the back surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 are in contact with each other. At the same time, the lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf3 and the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a and the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss hole 1501ah1 are in contact with each other. It will be in contact. Further, the lands 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 formed on the back surface side of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the seating surface of the metal pan head screw are in contact with each other. Further, the shaft (screw portion) of the metal pan head screw is screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

As a result, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 is in a state of being electrically connected to the land 1520rf4 formed on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, so that the metal shield plate 1540 is in a state of being electrically connected to the peripheral data. The circuit will be grounded to the ground (GND) of the ROM board 1520. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is the same because the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected. The metal shield plate 1540 is circuit grounded to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, so that the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output are output. The circuit will be grounded to the ground (GND) of the board 1530. Further, as described above, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 and electricity. The metal shield plate 1540 is circuit grounded to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, thereby being circuit grounded to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630. Become.

When the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the head of the metal pan screw inserted into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 and screwed into the cover side wall 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. It is arranged inside the end face on the opening side (that is, so as not to protrude outside from the end face on the opening side of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e), and is placed on the back surface of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The back surface of the peripheral control board 1510 to be fixed is arranged on the same plane.

The cover flat plate 1501a corresponds to the four through holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 when viewed from the back surface so that the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is arranged on the lower right side of the back surface of the cover body 1501. At the positions, a pair of mounting boss holes 1501am1,1501am2 and a pair of mounting boss projecting portions 1501an1,1501an2 are formed diagonally so as to project from the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. ing. Around the four through holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, a copper foil for soldering (so-called "land") 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 having a circular shape on the surface side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and a liquid crystal output Copper foils for soldering (so-called "lands") 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 having a circular shape on the back surface side of the substrate 1530 are formed, and these lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 and 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 are liquid crystal output substrates, respectively. A wiring pattern is formed on the liquid crystal output board 1530 so as to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the 1530.

When the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the through hole 1540b2a formed in the L-shaped attachment piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540 described later is attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Arrange so as to match the boss hole 1501 am1. Then, the through holes 1530r2 and 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Then, a metal pan head screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and the liquid crystal is screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The output board 1530 can be fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. As a result, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540 is sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. In this state, of the lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 formed on the front surface side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, the lands 1530rf1 and the back surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540 are in contact with each other. At the same time, the lands 1530rf2 to 1530rf4 and the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss protrusions 1501n1, 1501n2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a and the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss hole 1501am2 are in contact with each other. In addition to this, the lands 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 formed on the back surface side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the seating surface of the metal pan head screw are in contact with each other. Further, the shaft (screw portion) of the metal pan head screw is screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

As a result, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540 is in a state of being electrically connected to the land 1530rf1 formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, so that the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the liquid crystal output substrate. The circuit will be grounded to the ground (GND) of 1530. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is the same because the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are electrically connected. The metal shield plate 1540 is grounded to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530, so that the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM are used. The circuit will be grounded to the ground (GND) of the board 1520. Further, as described above, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 and electricity. The metal shield plate 1540 is circuit grounded to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530, so that the circuit is grounded to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630. ..

When the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the head of the metal pan screw inserted and screwed into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 opens the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. It is arranged inside the end surface on the side (that is, so as not to protrude outward from the end surface on the opening side of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e), and is fixed to the back surface of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The back surface of the peripheral control board 1510 and the back surface of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a are arranged on the same plane.

Various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached together with the metal shield plate 1540 at predetermined positions on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, so that the shield plate 1540 becomes the cover body 1501. The gap having the above-mentioned predetermined distance dimension between the surface of the peripheral control IC 1510a (the surface on which the product number and model are printed) and the rear surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa in a state where the peripheral control IC 1510a is sandwiched and fixed by the various substrates. (2.3 mm in this embodiment) is formed.

In the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes are formed on the right side, the lower right side, the lower left side, and the left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa, respectively. When the blades of the air-cooled fan FAN mounted in the FAN mounting recess 1501aa rotate, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be expelled to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500, thereby causing the peripheral control unit 1500. By taking in air from the outside of the cover body 1501 through these ventilation holes 1501az, the inner space of the cover body 1501 (particularly, the peripheral control IC 1510a) can be air-cooled. These ventilation holes 1501az are formed to have a diameter of 3 mm, a pitch width in the left-right direction of 6.5 mm, and a pitch width in the up-down direction of 6.0 mm to 6.5 mm.

[6-2. Base body]
The base body 1502 that closes the opening of the cover body 1501 is made of a non-conductive resin, is molded transparently, and is formed on the upper side, the left side, the lower side, and the right side of the horizontally long rectangular base flat plate 1502a when viewed from the front. The base side walls 1502b to 1502e are formed in a box shape having an opening by projecting each of the base side walls 1502b to 1502e toward the front (the back side of the pachinko machine 1). The size of the openings formed by the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502 is one size larger than the size of the openings formed by the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. As a result, in a state where the opening of the cover body 1501 is closed by the base body 1502 by covering the cover body 1501 with the base body 1502, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 are inside the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502. Is fitted and inscribed (surface contact).

When viewed from the front of the base flat plate 1502a, wiring is provided to the connectors CN2 to CN7 at positions that do not interfere with the connectors CN2 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 at predetermined intervals along the lower side. The peripheral control board 1510 is warped by the force when the connector for connection is inserted, and the vertically elongated disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 are formed to prevent the electrical wiring pattern formed on the peripheral control board 1510 from being disconnected. The force for inserting the connector for connecting the wiring to the connector CN1 and the force for operating the volume adjustment switch 1510d at positions that do not interfere with the connector CN1 and the volume adjustment switch 1510d provided on the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 is warped, and an elongated wire breakage prevention rib portion 1502aa4 is formed in the left-right direction to prevent the electrical wiring pattern formed on the peripheral control board 1510 from being broken.

Further, the base flat plate 1502a is located on the right side when viewed from the front thereof, at a position corresponding to the L-shaped circuit ground piece 1540d formed by bending the metal shield plate 1540 described later. A rectangular through-hole 1502ab long in the vertical direction is formed, which is one size larger than the back surface shape of the ground piece 1540d.

When the base body 1502 is viewed from the front, an engaging portion 1502ca protruding outward is formed in the vicinity of the opening side of the base body 1502 of the base side wall 1502c on the left side. The engaging portion 1502ca includes guide receiving portions 1502caa and 1502cab at positions corresponding to the plate-shaped guide portions 1501ca and 1501cc formed on the cover body 1501, and hinge hooking portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501. Hinge receiving portions 1502 cc and 1502 cad are formed at corresponding positions, respectively. The hinge receiving portions 1502ca and 1502cad are formed with U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf.

The plate-shaped guide portions 1501ca and 1501cc formed on the cover body 1501 described above are inserted into the guide receiving portions 1502ca and 1502cab, and the hinge receiving portions 1502ca and 1502cad are inserted into the U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf described above. The hinged portions 1501cc and 1501cd L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda formed on the cover body 1501 are inserted. Then, in a state where the hinge receiving portions 1502ca and 1502cad U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf are in contact with the hinge hanging portions 1501cc and 1501cd L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda formed on the cover body 1501. By wrapping around, the hinge receiving portions 1502ca and 1502cad U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf are hooked on the hinge hook portions 1501cc and 1501cd L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda formed on the cover body 1501. It is designed to be able to engage.

Further, in the center of the base side wall 1502e on the right side, a base-side sealing portion 1502ea is formed so as to project outward at a position corresponding to the cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501. Further, through holes 1502eb1 and 1502eb2 for attaching the peripheral control unit 1500 to the game panel 1100 provided in the game board 5 are formed on the upper side and the lower side of the base side wall 1502e on the right side, respectively.

[6-3. Shield plate]
The metal shield plate 1540 capable of reducing (suppressing) electromagnetic noise entering the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is a horizontally long rectangular shield when viewed from the front. L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1, 1540b2 bent rearward by a predetermined distance dimension (12 mm from the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a in this embodiment) at the upper center of the left side and the lower center of the left side of the flat plate 1540a (plate thickness: 1.2 mm). Are formed respectively.

Further, the metal shield plate 1540 has a predetermined distance dimension (in the present embodiment) on the upper right side and the lower right side of the horizontally long rectangular shield flat plate 1540a (plate thickness: 1.2 mm) when viewed from the front. L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 bent rearward by 12 mm from the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a are formed, respectively, and at the center of the horizontally long rectangular shield flat plate 1540a (plate thickness: 1.2 mm). An L-shaped circuit ground piece 1540d bent rearward by a predetermined distance dimension (25 mm from the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a in this embodiment) is formed between the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2. A conductive elastic member 1545 is attached (bonded) to the back surface of the L-shaped circuit ground piece 1540d from the upper end to the lower end.

The shield flat plate 1540a is formed with notches around it so as not to interfere with the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e, and is substantially located at a position corresponding to the FAN mounting recess 1501aa and the wiring lead-out recess 1501ab of the cover flat plate 1501a. A square opening 1540aa is formed. As a result, various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached together with the metal shield plate 1540 at predetermined positions on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, whereby the shield plate 1540 is formed. In a state where the cover body 1501 is sandwiched and fixed by various substrates, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 do not interfere with the outer peripheral circumference of the shield flat plate 1540a, respectively, and the FAN mounting recess 1501aa of the cover flat plate 1501a and the FAN mounting recess 1501aa and The wiring lead-out recess 1501ab is inserted without contacting the opening 1540aa of the shield flat plate 1540a.

The metal shield plate 1540 is formed by bending so that the back surface of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1, 1540b2 and the back surface of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1, 1540c2 are arranged in the same plane. The back surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1, 1540b2, 1540c1, 1540c2 and the front surface of the shield flat plate 1540a are formed so as to be parallel surfaces. In the present embodiment, the distance dimension from the front surface of the shield flat plate 1540a to the back surface of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1, 1540b2, 1540c1, 1540c2 is 13.2 mm.

Through holes 1540b1a and 1540b2a are formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1 and 1540b2 at positions corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ah2 and 1501am1 formed on the back surface of the cover body 1501 described above, respectively. As described above, the mounting boss holes 1501ah2 are projected from the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501 at positions corresponding to the four through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520. It is one of the mounting boss holes of the pair of mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed in the above. As described above, the mounting boss holes 1501am1 are projected from the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501 at positions corresponding to the four through holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. It is one of the pair of mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed.

Through holes 1540c1a and 1540c2a are formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 at positions corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 and 1501ag4 formed on the back surface of the cover body 1501 described above, respectively. As described above, these mounting boss holes 1501ag1 and 1501ag4 are located at positions corresponding to the four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 from the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. Two of the four mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed so as to be projected.

Various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached together with the metal shield plate 1540 at predetermined positions on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, so that the shield plate 1540 becomes the cover body 1501. In a state of being sandwiched and fixed by various substrates, a distance dimension of a predetermined height between the front surface of various substrates (the surface facing the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a (this implementation). In the form, a space having 14.8 mm) is formed, and two spaces are formed by arranging the metal shield plate 1540 in this space.

These two spaces have a distance dimension of a first predetermined height between the front surface of various substrates (the surface facing the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 described later. A second space (12 mm in the present embodiment) is provided between the first space 1505a (see FIG. 122) and the front surface of the shield plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 described later and the back surface of the cover plate 1501a. It is composed of a second space 1505b (see FIG. 122) having a distance dimension (1.6 mm in this embodiment) of a predetermined height.

In the first space 1505a, various electronic components and the like provided in the peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control IC 1510a, control ROM 1510b described later, SDRAM 1510c described later, real-time clock IC (not shown), backup power supply 1510e described later, power supply creation circuit (not shown), etc. Resistors not shown, capacitors not shown, LEDs ML1 to ML4 described later, special connectors SCN1, SCN2 described later, various electronic components provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (peripheral data ROM 1520a described later, resistors not shown, capacitors not shown), The second space 1505b is accommodated while the special connector SCN3, etc. described later) and various electronic components (resistors (not shown, capacitors not shown, special connector SCN4, etc.) described later are accommodated in the liquid crystal output board 1530. Does not contain various electronic components at all. By accommodating various electronic components that are easily affected by electromagnetic wave noise in the first space 1505a, it is possible to take measures against electromagnetic wave noise, and various electronic components that generate heat in the second space 1505b. This is because the heat generated from various electronic components and the like in the first space 1505a is efficiently transferred to the second space 1505b via the metal shield plate 1540 by not accommodating the above. That is, the metal shield plate 1540 has a function as a heat radiating plate in addition to a function of reducing (suppressing) electromagnetic noise.

In the shield flat plate 1540a of the shield plate 1540, ventilation holes 1540az having the same shape are formed at positions corresponding to the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. That is, these ventilation holes 1540az are formed to have a diameter of 3 mm, a pitch width in the left-right direction of 6.5 mm, and a pitch width in the vertical direction of 6.0 mm to 6.5 mm, similarly to the ventilation holes 1501az. There is. When the blades of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN mounting recess 1501aa of the cover body 1501 rotate, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be expelled to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500. Air is taken in from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and the ventilation holes 1540az formed in the shield flat plate 1540a of the shield plate 1540, thereby taking in the cover body 1501. The first space 1505a (particularly, the peripheral control IC 1510a) of the inner space of the above can be air-cooled, and the metal shield plate 1540 can be air-cooled.

[6-4. Conductive elastic member]
The conductive elastic member 1545 attached (adhered) to the back surface of the L-shaped circuit ground piece 1540d of the metal shield plate 1540 is a conductive member having cushioning properties (elasticity), and includes the conductive coating portion 1545a and the conductive coating portion 1545a. It is composed of a foam 1545b having a rectangular shape as a core material covered by the conductive coating portion 1545a, and a conductive adhesive tape 1545c attached to the conductive coating portion 1545a. Examples of the covering portion 1545a include those in which a metal coating of copper and nickel is formed on a polyester woven fabric, those in which a conductive layer of copper and nickel is formed on a polyimide film, and the like. Examples of the foam 1545b include polyurethane foam having heat resistance. As the conductive adhesive tape 1545c, for example, a conductive double-sided adhesive tape using an acrylic pressure-sensitive adhesive can be mentioned. The surface of the conductive adhesive tape 1545c is protected by peel paper until it is used, and the peel paper is peeled off when the conductive coating portion 1545a is attached (adhered) to another member.

The conductive elastic member 1545 has a rectangular shape having a width of 5 mm and a height of 3 mm, and the conductive adhesive tape 1545c has a rectangular shape having a width of 2 mm and a height of 0.035 mm. have.

[6-5. Various connectors]
The peripheral control board 1510 mounted in the internal space of the cover body 1501 includes a CPU, RAM, VDP, sound source, a serial ATA controller (Advanced Technology Attainment, hereinafter referred to as "SATA controller"), and various I / O interfaces. Peripheral control IC1510a in which etc. are integrated on one semiconductor chip, and various programs and productions that can control the progress and demonstration of the game production (demo production performed while waiting for the player) are defined. An SDRAM (Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory) capable of transferring and storing various control information (peripheral data) stored in a control ROM 1510b that stores various schedule data in advance and a peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in a peripheral data ROM board 1520. Various types include a SRAM 1510c composed of 1510c1 and 1510c2, a slide-type volume adjustment switch 1510d that can adjust the volume, and a backup power supply 1510e that can supply power to a real-time clock IC (not shown) even when the power is turned off. It includes a power supply creation circuit (not shown) that creates a power supply voltage, and various connectors CN1 to CN7.

The control ROM 1510b provided in the peripheral control board 1510 has a storage capacity of 128 Mbit, and the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 each have a storage capacity of 2 Gbit. The peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 has a storage capacity of 62 Gbit.

Various I / O interfaces of the peripheral control board 1510 include various serial I / Os and various parallel I / Os. Examples of various serial I / Os include SPI (Serial Peripheral Interface) communication, UART (Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transfer) communication, and I2C (Inter-Integrated Circuit) communication.

In this embodiment, UART communication is adopted as a communication method for receiving a command from the main control board 1310 (communication is performed via the connector CN5), various boards provided on the game board 5 side, and various boards provided on the door frame side. SPI communication or I2C communication is adopted as a communication method for transmitting control data to the connector (communication is performed via the corresponding connector among the connector CN3, the connector CN6, and the connector CN7).

In the present embodiment, SPI communication or I2C communication is used to provide an electrical drive source on the game board 5 side (for example, various motors provided in the lower movable effect unit 3100, which communicate via the connector CN6). Or, an electric drive source provided on the door frame 3 side (for example, an operation ring drive motor 342 provided in the effect operation unit 300, an operation button elevating drive motor 367, etc., which communicate via the connector CN3). Drive data is transmitted to the drive control IC, and a plurality of LEDs provided on the game board 5 side (communication via the connector CN7) and a plurality of LEDs provided on the door frame 3 side (via the connector CN3). It transmits light emission data to the LED control IC, and various sensors provided on the game board 5 side (for example, the lower movable effect unit 3100, the upper rear movable effect unit 3200, and the upper front). Various detection sensors provided in the movable effect unit 3300, which receive signals from the connector CN6 as detection data, and various sensors provided on the door frame 3 side (for example, the effect operation unit 300). These are various detection sensors provided, and communicate via the connector CN3) to receive signals as detection data. In the present embodiment, the transfer rate by SPI communication is set to 250 kbps, and the transfer rate by I2C communication is set to 1 kbps.

As various parallel I / Os, there are GPIO (General Purpose Input / Output, general-purpose IO). In the present embodiment, a signal from the air-cooled fan FAN that conveys the rotation state of the air-cooled fan FAN provided in the peripheral control unit 1500 of the game board 5 is input to the GPIO (via the connector CN1), or is provided on the game board 5 side. No signals from various sensors that confirm the operation of the controlled object and the origin position are input to the GPIO (via the connector CN6), and control signals for the controlled object (not shown) provided on the game board 5 side are input from the GPIO (connector CN6). It outputs (via) or outputs a signal from GPIO to LEDML4 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 for notifying that the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating.

In the present embodiment, for example, GPIO is assigned to the connector CN1, SPI communication and I2C communication are assigned to the connector CN3 (that is, the connector CN3 is assigned as a connector in which SPI communication and I2C communication coexist). , Connector CN5 is assigned UART communication, connector CN6 is assigned SPI communication and GPIO (that is, connector CN6 is assigned as a connector in which SPI communication and GPIO coexist), and connector CN7 is assigned SPI communication. Is assigned.

The SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a can establish communication conforming to the SATA standard with the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and realizes a high transfer rate of 2 Gbps (supports up to 3 Gbps). The SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a transfers various control information (peripheral data) from the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a at high speed according to the instruction of the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a. , It is possible to transfer to SRAM 1510c1 and 1510c2 at high speed.

The SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 are DDR3 SDRAMs (Double Data Rate3 Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory), and can realize high-speed data communication speed. In the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, various control information (peripheral data) from the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is transferred at high speed by the SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a.

The peripheral control board 1510 further includes a special connector SCN1 for connecting the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the boards, and a special connector SCN2 for connecting the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the boards. The peripheral data ROM board 1520 includes a special connector SCN3 for connecting the peripheral control board 1510 and the boards. The liquid crystal output board 1530 includes a special connector SCN4 for connecting the peripheral control board 1510 and the boards.

The peripheral control board 1510 outputs drawing data of an image to be drawn on a display device such as an effect display device from the special connector SCN2 in the form of a plurality of types of video signals. Examples of the plurality of types of video signal methods include a plurality of types of methods such as an RGB method, an LVDS method, a MIPI (Mobile Indicator Interface) method, an eDP (Embedded DisplayPort) method, and a clockless method. In, four systems (a total of four systems) are adopted: one RGB system, two LVDS systems (first LVDS system, second LVDS system), and MIPI system. Further, in the present embodiment, one of the two LVDS system systems (for example, the first LVDS system system) is adopted as the system of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600. ing. A peripheral control board that uses, for example, an eDP system instead of the MIPI system, with one RGB system, two LVDS systems (first LVDS system, second LVDS system), and one eDP system. You can also create 1510.

Further, the peripheral control board 1510 further includes LEDML1 in the vicinity of the control ROM 1510b, LEDML2 in the vicinity of the SDRAM 1510c, LEDML3 in the vicinity of the special connector SCN1, and LEDML4 in the vicinity of the special connector SCN2. As will be described later, the peripheral control board 1510 is directly supplied with various voltages (DC + 37V, DC + 12V, and DC + 5V) from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620. The LEDML1 confirms (monitors) the state in which the direct current + 5V is supplied, and the lighting state is maintained in the state in which the direct current + 5V is supplied. The LEDML2 confirms (monitors) the state in which the direct current + 12V is supplied, and the lighting state is maintained in the state in which the direct current + 12V is supplied. The LEDML3 confirms (monitors) the state in which the direct current + 37V is supplied, and the lighting state is maintained in the state in which the direct current + 37V is supplied. The LEDML4 confirms (monitors) the operation of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and the lighting state is maintained in the state where the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating.

Various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached together with the metal shield plate 1540 at predetermined positions on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, so that the shield plate 1540 becomes the cover body 1501. In a state of being sandwiched and fixed by the various substrates, as described above, a predetermined height is provided between the front surface of the various substrates (the surface facing the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. A space having a distance dimension (14.8 mm in the present embodiment) is formed, and two spaces are formed by arranging the metal shield plate 1540 in this space. As described above, these two spaces have a first predetermined height between the front surface of various substrates (the surface facing the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540. Between the first space 1505a (see FIG. 122) having the distance dimension (12 mm in this embodiment) and the front surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. It is composed of a second space 1505b (see FIG. 122) having a distance dimension of 2 predetermined heights (1.6 mm in this embodiment).

As described above, the first space 1505a accommodates various electronic components provided in the peripheral control board 1510, various electronic components provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and various electronic components provided in the liquid crystal output board 1530. ing. The inside of the first space 1505a formed in this way can be brightly illuminated by lighting the LEDs ML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface of the peripheral control board 1510.

The special connectors SCN1 and SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 are provided on the peripheral control board 1510 in that they are provided with a floating mechanism. The structure is completely different from the connectors CN1 to CN7 and the connectors CN8 to CN10 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530. These connectors CN1 to CN10 are sockets, respectively, and the socket and the plug are fitted by inserting and pushing the plug of the corresponding connector in the direction perpendicular to the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530. The sockets of the connectors CN1 to CN10 have a structure in which the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 do not move in the vertical direction when the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fitted.

The special connectors SCN1 and SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 are plugs, respectively, and the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 are sockets, respectively.

The socket and the plug are fitted by inserting the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and pushing it in. When the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is fitted, the socket is viewed from the front of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (peripheral control board 1510) in the front-rear direction (the back and front of the pachinko machine 1). The structure is provided with a floating mechanism that can absorb the error in the front-rear direction that occurs when pushing in by moving in a predetermined distance range (in the direction of). The socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is the peripheral data ROM board 1520 in a state where the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is attached and fixed at a predetermined position on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. Even if the (peripheral control board 1510) is moved to the maximum within the predetermined distance range described above when viewed from the front, the front surface (upper surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN3 does not come into contact with the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. A gap is formed between the front surface (upper surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN3 and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501.

The socket and the plug are fitted by inserting the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided in the liquid crystal output board 1530 into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and pushing it in. When the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fitted, the socket is in the front-rear direction (direction between the back surface and the front surface of the pachinko machine 1) when the liquid crystal output board 1530 (peripheral control board 1510) is viewed from the front. ), The structure is provided with a floating mechanism that can absorb the error in the front-rear direction that occurs when pushing in by moving within a predetermined distance range. The socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 is the liquid crystal output board 1530 (peripheral control) in a state where the liquid crystal output board 1530 is attached and fixed at a predetermined position on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. Special so that the front surface (upper surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN4 does not come into contact with the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 even if the substrate 1510) is moved to the maximum within the predetermined distance range described above when viewed from the front. A gap is formed between the front surface (upper surface) of the socket of the connector SCN4 and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501.

Here, the reason why the special connector SCN3 is adopted for the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the special connector SCN4 is adopted for the liquid crystal output board 1530 will be briefly described. The peripheral data ROM board 1520 includes a peripheral data ROM 1520a that can store various control information (peripheral data) that is the control target of the peripheral control board 1510. As various control information (peripheral data), image data such as a background image, a character image, a pattern image, etc. for drawing various effect images on the effect display device 1600, and various decorative substrates provided in the door frame 3 and the game board 5. Light emission data that defines the light emission mode (lighting, gradation, blinking, extinguishing, etc.) of various LEDs mounted on the door frame 3, sound data such as music, voice, warning sound, notification sound, etc. Drive data and the like for driving and controlling various movable effect bodies provided can be mentioned.

The peripheral data ROM 1520a is a NAND type flash (nonvolatile) memory, which is cheaper than the NOR type flash (nonvolatile) memory, has a large capacity, and can write various data at high speed. The peripheral data ROM 1520a has a low operating voltage, can suppress power consumption, and can realize a high transfer rate by communication conforming to the SATA standard.

In this way, by adopting the NAND flash (nonvolatile) memory as the peripheral data ROM 1520a, it is possible to realize cost reduction, contribute to reduction of power consumption, and read various stored data at a high transfer speed. it can. However, although the peripheral data ROM 1520a can suppress power consumption due to its low operating voltage, it is easily affected by noise due to its low operating voltage. Further, it is necessary to accurately and surely transmit various data stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a from the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the configuration of electrically connecting the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness) is not adopted, and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the peripherals are not adopted. By adopting a configuration in which the control board 1510 is electrically connected by an inter-board connector, the influence of noise invading the inter-board transmission line is reduced.

The procedure for mounting various boards in the internal space of the cover body 1501 will be described later, but the peripheral data ROM board 1520 inserts the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided in itself into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided in the peripheral control board 1510. Since it is necessary to fix the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a together with the peripheral control board 1510 after pushing in, the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided with the above-mentioned floating mechanism is adopted. By absorbing the error in the front-rear direction that occurs when the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a together with the peripheral control board 1510, a plurality of connection terminals formed on the plug and the socket are formed. It is possible to reliably form a transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 by preventing damage to the peripheral control board 1510.

Further, as described above, since the cover body 1501 is made of a non-conductive resin, the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 may warp after molding, although it is within the design dimensional distance tolerance. Even in such a case, by adopting the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided with the above-mentioned floating mechanism, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is fixed to the back surface side of the warped cover flat plate 1501a together with the peripheral control board 1510. By absorbing the error in the front-rear direction that occurs during this operation, it is possible to prevent damage to the multiple connection terminals formed between the plug and the socket, and to provide a transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520. It can be reliably formed.

The liquid crystal output board 1530 outputs the drawing data of the image to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 transmitted from the peripheral control board 1510 from the connector CN10, so that the effect progresses to the effect display device 1600 (for example, for the player). An image telling that a jackpot gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal state will occur, an image telling that the jackpot gaming state will not occur, and a state in which the jackpot gaming state does not occur but the jackpot gaming state occurs compared to the normal state. It is an important board for drawing an image (such as an image that conveys that it is approaching) as an image. Therefore, it is necessary to accurately and surely transmit the drawing data of the image drawn on the effect display device 1600 from the peripheral control board 1510 to the liquid crystal output board 1530. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the configuration of electrically connecting the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the peripheral control board 1510 via wiring (harness) is not adopted, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the peripheral control board 1530 and the peripheral control board are not adopted. By adopting a configuration in which the 1510 is electrically connected by an inter-board connector, the influence of noise invading the inter-board transmission line is reduced.

The procedure for mounting various substrates in the internal space of the cover body 1501 will be described later, but the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 inserts the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided in itself into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided in the peripheral control board 1510. Since it is necessary to fix the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a together with the peripheral control board 1510 after pushing in, the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided with the above-mentioned floating mechanism is adopted. By absorbing the error in the front-rear direction that occurs when the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a together with the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed in, a plurality of connection terminals formed on the plug and the socket can be connected. It is possible to prevent damage and reliably form a transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530.

Further, as described above, since the cover body 1501 is made of a non-conductive resin, the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 may warp after molding, although it is within the design dimensional distance tolerance. Even in such a case, the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the back surface side of the warped cover flat plate 1501a together with the peripheral control board 1510 by adopting the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided with the above-mentioned floating mechanism. By absorbing the error in the front-rear direction that occurs at that time, it is possible to prevent damage to the multiple connection terminals formed between the plug and the socket, and to ensure the transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530. Can be formed.

When the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, as described above, the back surface of the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 Since the back surface and the back surface of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are arranged on the same plane, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are arranged on the peripheral control board 1510 with respect to the front surface. Compared with the case of three-dimensional arrangement, the distance dimension of the peripheral control unit 1500 in the front-rear direction (that is, the depth direction) can be reduced. Therefore, for example, a large movable effect unit (movable effect body is operated on the game board 5). It can contribute to securing the distance dimension in the depth direction for arranging the electric drive source and the drive mechanism capable of arranging, and various sensors for detecting the origin position and the operating position).

[6-6. How to assemble the peripheral control unit]
Here, a method of assembling the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described. First, the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed in. Subsequently, the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed in.

Subsequently, in order to attach the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the through hole 1540c1a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c1 of the metal shield plate 1540 Is arranged so as to match the mounting boss hole 1501ag1 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through hole 1540c2a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 is provided on the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. The mounting boss is arranged so as to match the mounting boss hole 1501ag4 formed on the side, and the through hole 1540b1a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 is formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Arranged so as to be aligned with the hole 1501ah2, and the through hole 1540b2a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540 is arranged so as to be aligned with the mounting boss hole 1501am1 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. To do.

Subsequently, the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r3 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. The holes 1530r2 and 1530r4 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. As a result, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are arranged to correspond to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 are arranged to correspond to the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The arrangement corresponds to the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed in.

Subsequently, a metal pan head screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and screwed toward the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and metal pan head screws (not shown) are inserted into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 to form the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing into the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2. As a result, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 is sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540 is held. It is in a state of being sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530.

Subsequently, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are arranged as they are or finely adjusted because they are arranged to correspond to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. If necessary, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are finely adjusted and arranged so as to match the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and penetrated. The peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a by inserting a metal pan head screw (not shown) into the holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 and screwing it toward the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4. As a result, the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 are sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the peripheral control board 1510. That is, various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached together with the metal shield plate 1540 at predetermined positions on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a to cover the shield plate 1540. It is in a state of being sandwiched and fixed by the body 1501 and various substrates.

In this way, of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral control substrate 1510 is finally fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

The peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a to restrain the movement in the vertical and horizontal directions, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is the cover flat plate 1501a. The mounting bosses formed on the back surface side are inserted into the protruding portions 1501an1 and 1501an2 to restrain the movement in the vertical and horizontal directions, whereas the peripheral control board 1510 has the mounting bosses for restraining the vertical and horizontal directions. The protruding portion is not formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. By fixing the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the vertical and horizontal directions are constrained, and the dimensional error due to such restraint is suppressed by covering the peripheral control substrate 1510. Absorbed by the dimensional tolerances of the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a when fixed to the back surface side of the 1501a. You can do it.

Subsequently, in a state where the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and the peripheral control substrate 1510 are fixed to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the plate-shaped guide portions 1501ca and 1501cc formed on the cover body 1501 are provided. The guide receiving portions 1502ca and 1502ca formed in the engaging portion 1502ca of the base body 1502 are inserted, and the hinge hook portions 1501cc and 1501cd L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cda formed in the cover body 1501 are inserted into the base body. It is inserted into the U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502ca and 1502cad formed on the engaging portion 1502ca of 1502.

Subsequently, the U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502ca and 1502cad are in contact with the L-shaped hook portions 1501cca and 1501cd of the hinge hanging portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501. The base body 1502 wraps around so as to cover the opening side of the cover body 1501, and the L-shaped circuit ground piece 1540d of the metal shield plate 1540 passes through the through hole 1502ab of the base body 1502 and covers the base body 1502 as it is. In the state of covering the body 1501, the L-shaped circuit ground piece 1540d protrudes from the back surface of the base body 1502, and a metal anchor rivet (not shown) is inserted into the cover side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501. Insert the metal one-way screw and screw it toward the base-side sealing portion 1502ea formed on the base body 1502. When the metal one-way screw is screwed in, the tip surface of the metal anchor rivet expands outward at the base side sealing portion 1502ea, so that the cover side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 are formed. The base side sealing portion 1502ea and the base side sealing portion 1502ea are sealed.

In such a sealed state, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 are fitted inside the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502, and are inscribed (surface contact). Further, in the sealed state in this way, the L-shaped circuit ground piece 1540d of the metal shield plate 1540 is in a state of protruding from the back surface of the base body 1502, and the L-shaped circuit ground piece 1540d is projected from the back surface of the base body 1502. The distance dimension (protruding length) extending to the back surface of the above is 6.8 mm.

In addition, in order to release such a sealed state, the cover side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 must be broken by a tool. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the peripheral control board box 1505 composed of the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, and a deterrent against fraudulent acts on the peripheral control board box 1505. Has been raised.

Subsequently, the air-cooled fan FAN is pushed into the FAN mounting recess 1501a formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, and a plurality of screws from the air-cooled fan FAN are connected from the wiring drawer recess 1501ab formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. A metal countersunk head screw (a screw having a shape in which a pan head and a flat washer are integrated), which is not shown, is screwed into the drawer and the mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 from the front to the rear of the cover flat plate 1501a, respectively.

Subsequently, in order to connect a plurality of wirings (harnesses) to the effect display device 1600 to the connector CN10 of the liquid crystal output board 1530 via the wiring lead-out opening 1501ae formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. The wiring cover body 1503 is fitted into the mounting recess 1501af formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 by inserting and attaching the connector. A metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503 and screwed into the mounting holes 1501afb1 and 1501afb2 from the front to the rear of the wiring cover body 1503, respectively. The 1503 is fixed to the mounting recess 1501af. As a result, the plurality of wirings are covered by the wiring cover body 1503 and cannot be touched.

Subsequently, the peel paper of the conductive adhesive tape 1545c of the conductive elastic member 1545 is peeled off, and the conductive elastic member is attached to the back surface of the L-shaped circuit ground piece 1540d of the metal shield plate 1540 protruding from the back surface of the base body 1502. Attach (adhere) the adhesive tape 1545c of 1545.

When the peripheral control unit 1500 assembled in this way is attached to a mounting portion formed on the rear side of the game panel 1100 provided in the game board 5 and on the back side of a transparent synthetic resin box accommodating the effect display device 1600. When the peripheral control unit 1500 is viewed from the front, the left side of the peripheral control unit 1500 (the engaging portion 1502ca side formed on the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500) is placed on the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box. A transparent synthetic resin box that is inserted into the mounting groove that constitutes the mounting portion formed in the above, and a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1502eb1 and 1502eb2 formed in the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500. It is fixed by screwing it toward the mounting hole that constitutes the mounting portion formed on the back side of the.

As described above, the effect display device 1600 includes a frame-shaped metal frame, a metal back cover that closes the entire rear surface of the metal frame, and a transparent synthetic resin box. A liquid crystal panel, a backlight, a drive circuit, and the like are housed in a frame-shaped metal frame. The entire rear surface of this frame-shaped metal frame is closed and fixed by a metal back cover, and is housed in a transparent synthetic resin box. Further, as described above, the effect display device 1600 is controlled by the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the display device 1600, and is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line such as the peripheral control board 1510 housed in the peripheral control unit 1500. By being connected to, it becomes the same ground (GND). When the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the mounting portion formed on the back surface side of the transparent synthetic resin box of the effect display device 1600, the L-shaped circuit ground piece of the metal shield plate 1540 protruding from the back surface of the base body 1502. As shown in FIG. 123, the 1540d hits the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 through the conductive elastic member 1545 through a through hole (not shown) formed on the back surface side of the transparent synthetic resin box. It will be in contact. At this time, the conductive elastic member 1545 is pushed in and collapses in the height direction (in the present embodiment, the height of the conductive elastic member 1545 collapses by 1 mm to 1.5 mm), so that the dimensional tolerance and the assembly error cause a dimensional deviation. Can be absorbed by the conductive elastic member 1545. As a result, the metal shield plate 1540 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 are electrically and securely connected, and the peripheral control board accommodated in the peripheral control unit 1500 is provided. Since it can be electrically connected to a ground (GND) line such as 1510 to form the same ground (GND), an environment resistant to electromagnetic noise should be constructed for the peripheral control unit 1500 and its surroundings. Can be done.

In the assembly method described above, in the procedure for mounting various substrates in the internal space of the cover body 1501, for example, first, a through hole 1540c1a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c1 of the metal shield plate 1540 is formed. Arranged so as to match the mounting boss hole 1501ag1 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the through hole 1540c2a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 is provided on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The mounting boss hole 1501ah2 is arranged so as to match the mounting boss hole 1501ag4 to be formed, and the through hole 1540b1a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 is formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The through hole 1540b2a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540 is arranged so as to be aligned with the mounting boss hole 1501am1 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

Subsequently, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is arranged at the above-mentioned predetermined position on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the peripheral control board 1510 (the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is arranged on the upper right side of the cover body 1501 when the cover body 1501 is viewed from the back side. The liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the above-mentioned predetermined position on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the peripheral control board 1510 (the liquid crystal output board 1530 is a cover body when the cover body 1501 is viewed from the back surface). After fixing to (located on the lower right side of 1501), the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed in. The socket of the special connector SCN4 provided in the liquid crystal output board 1530 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed in, and the peripheral control board 1510 is pushed into the above-mentioned predetermined position (the peripheral control board 1510 has a cover body 1501). It can also be fixed to the left side of the cover body 1501 when viewed from the back side.). Even in the mounting procedure of such various boards, by adopting the sockets of the special connectors SCN3 and SCN4 provided with the above-mentioned floating mechanism, the error in the front-rear direction generated when pushing the board is absorbed, so that the plug and the socket can be connected. It is possible to prevent damage to a plurality of connection terminals formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and to surely form transmission paths between the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the peripheral control board 1510, and to form the liquid crystal output board 1530 and its peripherals. It is possible to reliably form a transmission line between the control board 1510 and the board.

By the way, there are a plurality of types of game boards mounted on pachinko machines with different game specifications. In the present embodiment, various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 can be divided into three parts and attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. The peripheral control board 1510 is a board that can be used in common regardless of the game specifications of the game board mounted on the pachinko machine, and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is attached to the peripheral data ROM 1520a for each game specification of the game board. The peripheral data corresponding to the above is stored as a substrate that depends on the game specifications of the game board, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is a substrate that depends on the method of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600.

As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 is a board that does not depend on the game specifications of the game board and does not depend on the method of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600, and becomes a common board. Therefore, it can be reused (reused). Further, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 provided with the peripheral data ROM 1520a in which the peripheral data corresponding to each game specification of the game board is stored and the peripheral control board 1510 are electrically connected by the above-mentioned inter-board connector. Therefore, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be easily replaced according to the game specifications of the game board.

As described above, there are a plurality of types of video signal systems input to a display device such as an effect display device, such as an RGB system, an LVDS system, a MIPI system, an eDP system, and a clockless system. The liquid crystal output board 1530 and the peripheral control board 1510 corresponding to these plurality of types of methods are electrically connected by the above-mentioned inter-board connector. That is, the liquid crystal output board 1530 can be easily replaced according to the method of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600. In the present embodiment, as described above, one of the two LVDS system systems (for example, the first LVDS system system) is used as the system of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600. Is adopted, the liquid crystal output board 1530 corresponding to the method (LVDS method) of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 by the above-mentioned inter-board connector.

Further, in the present embodiment, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are made of non-conductive resin and are transparently molded, and the peripheral control board is contained in the internal space of the cover body 1501. Various substrates such as the 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are attached to the predetermined positions together with the metal shield plate 1540, so that the shield plate 1540 is sandwiched and fixed by the cover body 1501 and the various substrates. Then, the metal shield plate 1540 is configured to be circuit-grounded to the ground (GND) of various substrates. Further, as described above, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are the same as the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. Is connected. Therefore, the electromagnetic noise invading from the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 is used as a circuit ground via the metal shield plate 1540, and is grounded on various boards (GND) and grounded on the power supply board 630. (GND), and the frame ground board 559 shown in FIG. 86 (b) can be guided to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall and removed. As a result, it is not necessary for each of the various boards (including the power supply board 630) to be provided with a dedicated filter for removing such electromagnetic noise, which contributes to cost reduction of the various boards (including the power supply board 630). Can be done.

Here, the arrangement of the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and the ventilation holes 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes formed in the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540. And the arrangement of. As described above, the ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes can air-cool the inner space of the cover body 1501 and also have a function of confirming the presence or absence of fraud.

Specifically, when the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled as described above, as shown in FIG. 121, the ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes arranged on the right side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are peripheral control boards. The part number and model (or control number) printed on the surface of the control ROM 1510b provided in 1510, the state of the IC pin of the control ROM 1510b, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, the orientation of the IC and the part number). , Pin number, etc.), that is, the surface of the control ROM 1510b, the state of the IC pin, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 are confirmed from multiple directions. The regions are distributed and arranged so as to have an area larger than the shape of the control ROM 1510b so that the control ROM 1510b can be formed. Thereby, in addition to the correspondence between the control ROM 1510b and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510, the modification of the control ROM 1510b can be confirmed through the ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes. .. Further, since the LEDML1 arranged in the vicinity of the control ROM 1510b is maintained in the lighting state while the DC + 5V from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 is supplied, the DC + 5V is originally supplied. Although it has a function to check (monitor) the state in which it is being printed, it also has a function as a spotlight that illuminates the control ROM 1510b brightly, thereby improving the visibility of the surface of the control ROM 1510b and the state of the IC pin. It is possible to contribute to the improvement of the visibility of the contents printed on the peripheral control board 1510 and the improvement of the visibility of the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510.

Further, the ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes arranged on the left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa can confirm the connection state of the inter-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The area is larger than the shape of the inter-board connector (the shape composed of the special connector SCN1 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520), and further provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The product number and model (or control number) printed on the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, the state of the IC pin of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520, respectively (for example). , Connector pin number, IC orientation, part number, pin number, etc.), that is, the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, the state of the IC pins, the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral data ROM board. The contents silk-printed on the 1520 and the data are distributed and arranged so as to be a large area where the contents can be substantially confirmed from multiple directions. As a result, the correspondence between the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510, and the contents silk-printed on the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520. In addition to the correspondence with the above, the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is modified, and the inter-board connector modified by the special connector SCN1 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520. It can be confirmed through the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes. Further, since the LEDML3 arranged in the vicinity of the special connector SCN1 is maintained in a lit state while the DC + 37V from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 is supplied, the DC + 37V is originally supplied. Although it has a function to check (monitor) the supplied state, it is a spotlight that brightly illuminates the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN1 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 in the peripheral data ROM board 1520. By further having the above functions, the visibility of the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a is improved, the visibility of the state of the IC pin is improved, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520, respectively. It is possible to contribute to the improvement of the visibility of the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN1 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520. ..

Further, the ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes arranged on the lower left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa can confirm the connection state of the inter-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530. The area is larger than the shape of the inter-board connector (the shape composed of the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 on the liquid crystal output board 1530), and further, the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board. The contents silk-printed on each of the 1530s (for example, the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.) are distributed and arranged so that they can be visually recognized. As a result, the correspondence between the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the silk-printed contents on the peripheral control board 1510, and the silk-printed contents on the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the liquid crystal output board 1530. In addition to the correspondence, the modification of the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided in the liquid crystal output board 1530 is confirmed through the ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes. can do. Further, since the LEDML4 arranged in the vicinity of the special connector SCN2 is maintained in a lit state while the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating, the operation of the peripheral control IC 1510a is originally confirmed (monitored). Although it has a function, it has a function as a spotlight that brightly illuminates the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 by the special connector SCN4. Improved visibility of the silk-printed contents on the liquid crystal output board 1530, and improved visibility of the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530. , Can be contributed to.

Further, the ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes arranged on the lower right side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa include the part number and model printed on the surface of the SDRAM 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided in the peripheral control board 1510, and the SDRAM 1510c1. The state of the IC pins of the 1510c2 and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.) can be visually recognized, that is, the surfaces of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2. And, the state of the IC pin and the content silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 are dispersed so as to be a region larger than the shape of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 so that the contents can be confirmed from multiple directions. Have been placed. Thereby, in addition to the correspondence between the SDRAMs 1510c1, 1510c2 and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510, the modification of the SDRAMs 1510c1, 1510c2 can be confirmed through the ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes. Can be done. Further, the LEDML2 arranged in the vicinity of the SDRAM 1510c composed of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 is maintained in a lit state while the DC + 12V from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 is supplied. Originally, it has a function of confirming (monitoring) the state in which DC + 12V is supplied, but by further having a function as a spotlight that illuminates the SDRAM 1510c brightly, the surface of the SDRAM 1510c (that is, the SRAM 1510c1, 1510c2) is provided. It is possible to contribute to the improvement of the visibility of the IC pin, the improvement of the visibility of the state of the IC pin, and the improvement of the visibility of the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510.

Further, among the plurality of blades constituting the vane of the air-cooled fan FAN, the gap between the blades (specifically, the gap between the blades when the inspector rotates the vane of the air-cooled fan FAN). The part number of the peripheral control IC 1510a provided in the peripheral control board 1510 can be confirmed from. As a result, it is possible to confirm whether or not an unauthorized substrate is arranged around the peripheral control IC 1510a through the ventilation holes 1501az having a plurality of circular shapes.

In this embodiment, as the LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided in the peripheral control board 1510, a surface-mounted type having a wide angle of about 120 degrees and a weak directivity type are adopted. It is also suitable for use as lighting. Various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached together with the metal shield plate 1540 at predetermined positions on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, so that the shield plate 1540 becomes the cover body 1501. In a state of being sandwiched and fixed by the various substrates, as described above, a predetermined height is provided between the front surface of the various substrates (the surface facing the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. A space having a distance dimension (14.8 mm in the present embodiment) is formed, and two spaces are formed by arranging the metal shield plate 1540 in this space. As described above, these two spaces have a first predetermined height between the front surface of various substrates (the surface facing the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540. Between the first space 1505a (see FIG. 122) having the distance dimension (12 mm in this embodiment) and the front surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. It is composed of a second space 1505b (see FIG. 122) having a distance dimension of 2 predetermined heights (1.6 mm in this embodiment). As described above, the first space 1505a accommodates various electronic components provided in the peripheral control board 1510, various electronic components provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and various electronic components provided in the liquid crystal output board 1530. ing. The inside of the first space 1505a formed in this way can be brightly illuminated by lighting the LEDs ML1 to LEDML4 provided on the surface of the peripheral control substrate 1510, which is also suitable for use as lighting.

Further, since the shield plate 1540 is made of metal, it has a gloss, and is a region of the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540, which faces the light emitting surfaces of the LEDs ML1 to LEDML4 provided in the peripheral control board 1510. It also has a function as a reflecting unit capable of reflecting the light emitted by the LEDs ML1 to LEDML4 and directing the light emitted from the LEDML1 to the LEDML4 to the peripheral control board 1510 again. These reflective portions may be configured to be further coated with a glossy colored paint.

Further, in the vicinity of the peripheral control unit 1500 near the game board 5, as shown in FIG. 4, a ball tank 552 and a tank rail 553 are arranged above the game board 5, and a payout unit 560 is arranged on the side of the game board 5. Are arranged, so that the game balls rub against each other in the ball path composed of these, and are charged and electrostatically discharged, which becomes a noise source. Therefore, in the vicinity of the game board 5 on which the ball path is formed, there is an environment affected by electromagnetic noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball. In addition, the pachinko machines 1 are lined up behind the island equipment in the game hall. As described above, the surroundings of the game board 5 are in an environment that is extremely susceptible to electromagnetic noise. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are transparently molded as a non-conductive resin as described above, and are formed in the internal space of the cover body 1501. In addition, various substrates such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached at predetermined positions together with the metal shield plate 1540, and the shield plate 1540 is sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the various boards. By fixing the shield plate 1540 made of metal, the circuit ground is electrically connected to the ground (GND) of various substrates. Further, in the present embodiment, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are the grounds of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 as described above. By electrically connecting to the (GND) line, the same ground (GND) was adopted.

As a result, electromagnetic noise invading from the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 is used as a circuit ground via the metal shield plate 1540. A game is played from the ground (GND) of various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530, the ground (GND) of the power supply board 630, and the frame ground board 559 shown in FIG. 86 (b). It can be removed by guiding it to the ground of the island equipment in the hall. In other words, the electromagnetic noise that has entered from the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 is transmitted through a metal shield plate 1540 to a circuit called a circuit ground. As the ground, it can be removed by guiding it from the frame ground board 559 to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall.

By the way, conventionally, a game machine equipped with a ROM for storing image data such as a design, various background images, characters, characters, a production control board on which a CPU for controlling a display device for displaying various images, etc. is mounted. It has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2016-116667 (Fig. 2)). By the way, there are a plurality of types of video signal systems input to the display device. Therefore, in the gaming machine described in this document, it is necessary to modify the effect control board according to the video signal input to the display device to manufacture the effect control board, and it is difficult to suppress the cost of the effect control board. there were.

[7. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIG. 124. FIG. 124 is a block diagram schematically showing a control configuration of a pachinko machine. As shown in the figure, the main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 is composed of a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 633 attached to the main body frame 4. Each control is shared. The main control board 1310 controls the game operation (progress of the game). The peripheral control board 1510 controls the progress of the effect based on various commands from the main control board 1310. The payout control board 633 includes a payout control unit 633a that controls the payout of the game ball B and the like, and a launch control unit 633b that controls the launch of the game ball B by rotating the handle 182.

[7-1. Main control board]
Although detailed illustration is omitted, the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game is a main control that is a microprocessor having a built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. MPU, main control I / O port as an input / output device (I / O device), main control input circuit for inputting detection signals from various detection switches, and main control solenoid drive for driving various solenoids. It includes a circuit and a RAM clear switch for completely erasing the information stored in the RAM built in the main control MPU. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the main control MPU also has a built-in watchdog timer for monitoring its operation (system) and a function for preventing fraud.

The main control MPU of the main control board 1310 has a first start port sensor 3002 for detecting the game ball B received in the first start port 2002, and a second start for detecting the game ball B received in the second start port 2004. It was accepted by the mouth sensor 2511, the general winning opening sensor 3001 that detects the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, the gate sensor 2301 that detects the game ball B that passed through the gate portion 2003, and the first large winning opening 2005. The first big winning opening sensor 2512 that detects the game ball B, the second big winning opening sensor 2513 that detects the game ball B received in the second big winning opening 2006, and the illegal magnetism in the game area 5a are detected. The detection signals from the magnetic sensor 3003, etc. are input to the main control I / O port via the main control input circuit, respectively.

The main control MPU outputs a control signal from the main control I / O port to the main control solenoid drive circuit based on these detection signals, so that the start port solenoid 2514, the first attacker solenoid 2515, and the second attacker solenoid are The drive signal is output to 2516, and the status indicator, normal symbol display, normal hold indicator, first special symbol display, first special hold number indicator of the function display unit 1400 from the main control I / O port, The drive signal is output to the second special symbol display, the second special hold number display, the round display, and the like.

In the present embodiment, the first starting port sensor 3002, the second starting port sensor 2511, the gate sensor 2301, the first winning opening sensor 2512, and the second winning opening sensor 2513 are non-contact type electromagnetic waves. While the proximity switch of the type is used, the contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch is used for the general winning opening sensor 3001. This is because the game ball B frequently enters the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 and frequently passes through the gate portion 2003, so that the first start port sensor 3002 and the second start port sensor 2511 , And the detection of the game ball B by the gate sensor 2301 also frequently occurs. Therefore, the proximity switch having high durability and long life is used for the first start port sensor 3002, the second start port sensor 2511, and the gate sensor 2301.

In addition, when an advantageous gaming state (“big hit” game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 is opened and the game ball B frequently enters. , The detection of the game ball B by the first prize opening sensor 2512 and the second prize opening sensor 2513 also frequently occurs. Therefore, the proximity switch having high durability and long life is also used for the first prize opening sensor 2512 and the second prize opening sensor 2513. On the other hand, in the general winning opening 2001 in which the game ball B does not enter frequently, the detection by the general winning opening sensor 3001 does not occur frequently. Therefore, the general winning opening sensor 3001 uses a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch.

Further, the main control MPU transmits various information related to the game (game information) and various commands related to payout to the payout control board 633, and receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633. Or Further, the main control MPU transmits various commands related to the control of the game effect and various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the main control I / O port to the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510. When the main control MPU receives various commands related to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633, the main control MPU shapes these various commands and transmits them to the peripheral control IC 1510a.

Various voltages (DC + 37V, DC + 12V, and DC + 5V) from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 are supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633. The power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter, simply referred to as "capacitor") as a backup power source for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power supply is cut off. It is equipped with. With this capacitor, the main control MPU can store various information in the RAM in the power off processing even when the power is cut off. When the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on, the various stored information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM. The operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch is also output to the payout control board 633.

Further, the main control board 1310 is provided with a power failure monitoring circuit. This power failure monitoring circuit monitors a decrease in various voltages supplied from the power supply board 630, and outputs a power failure warning signal as a power failure warning when those voltages are equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage. This power failure warning signal is input to the main control I / O port of the main control MPU, and is also output to the payout control board 633 and the like.

[7-2. Payout control board]
The payout control board 633, which controls the payout of the game ball B, performs launch control by the payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to payout and the launch solenoid 542, and launches by ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 145. It includes a control unit 633b, an error LED display that displays the status of the pachinko machine 1, and an error release switch for canceling the error displayed on the error LED display.

[7-2-1. Payout control unit]
Although detailed illustration is omitted, the payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to payout on the payout control board 633 is a micro that has a built-in ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like. A payout control MPU that is a processor, a payout control I / O port as an I / O device, an external WDT (external watchdog timer) for monitoring whether or not the payout control MPU is operating normally, and a payout. It includes a payout motor drive circuit for outputting a drive signal to the payout motor 584 of the device 580, and a payout control input circuit for inputting detection signals from various detection switches related to payout. In addition to the built-in ROM and RAM, the payout control MPU also has a built-in function to prevent fraud.

The payout control MPU of the payout control unit 633a receives various information (game information) related to the game from the main control board 1310 and various commands related to payout in the payout control I / O port in a serial manner, or receives various commands from the main control board 1310. In addition to the operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch being input to the payout control I / O port via the payout control input circuit, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 and the detection from the ball cutout detection sensor 574 The signal, the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591, and the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are input to the payout control I / O port via the payout control input circuit.

The detection signal from the ball cut detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570, the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 of the payout device 580, and the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 are paid out control via the payout control input circuit. It is input to the payout control I / O port of the MPU.

Further, the detection signal from the door frame opening switch that detects the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 and the detection signal from the main body frame opening switch that detects the opening of the main body frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are the payout control input circuits. Is input to the payout control I / O port of the payout control MPU via.

Further, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 of the foul cover unit 150 is input to the payout control I / O port of the payout control MPU via the payout control input circuit.

The payout control MPU outputs a drive signal for driving the payout motor 584 from the payout control I / O to the payout motor 584 via the payout motor drive circuit, and displays the status of the pachinko machine 1 on the error LED display. The signal for this is output from the payout control I / O port to the error LED display, and the command for indicating the status of the pachinko machine 1 is transmitted from the payout control I / O port to the main control board 1310 in a serial manner. Or, the number of balls of the game ball B actually paid out is output from the payout control I / O port to the external terminal board 558. The external terminal plate 558 is connected to a hall computer installed on the game hall side. This hall computer monitors the player's game by grasping the number of balls of the game ball B paid out by the pachinko machine 1 and the game information of the pachinko machine 1.

The error LED display (not shown) is a segment display, which displays alphanumeric characters, figures, and the like to indicate the status of the pachinko machine 1. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display are as follows. For example, when the figure "-" is displayed, it is notified that it is "normal", and when the number "0" is displayed, it means that it is "connection abnormality" (specifically, with the main control board 1310). Notifies that there is an abnormality in the electrical connection between the payout control board 633 and the board, and when the number "1" is displayed, it means that the ball is out (specifically, the ball is out). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 574, it notifies that there is no game ball B in the payout device 580), and when the number "2" is displayed, it means that it is a "ball" (specifically, it is a ball. Based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the game ball B is caught between the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the payout blade 589, and the payout blade 589 is difficult to rotate). When the number "3" is displayed, it is notified that a "count switch error" has occurred (specifically, a problem has occurred in the payout detection sensor 591 based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591). , When the number "5" is displayed, a "retry error" is notified (specifically, the number of retries of the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit value), and the number "6" is displayed. When it is displayed, it indicates that it is "full" (specifically, it means that the game ball B stored in the foul cover unit 150 is full based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154). When the number "7" is displayed, it is notified that "CR is not connected" (the electrical connection is disconnected in any of the payout control board 633 to the CR unit). When the number "9" is displayed, it is informed that it is "in stock" (specifically, the number of balls of the game ball B that has not been paid out has reached a predetermined number). ..

The ball lending request signal of the game ball B from the ball lending button 224 and the return request signal of the prepaid card from the return button 225 are input to the CR unit. The CR unit serially transmits a signal specifying the number of balls of the game ball B to be rented according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 633, and this signal is received by the payout control I / O port of the payout control MPU. .. Further, the CR unit updates the remaining amount of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of balls of the rented game ball B, and outputs a display signal of the remaining amount to the ball lending operation unit 220, and this signal is used for ball lending. It is input and displayed on the ball rental display unit of the operation unit 220.

[7-2-2. Launch control unit]
The launch control unit 633b performs launch control by the launch solenoid 542 and ball feed control by the ball feed solenoid 145. Although not shown in detail, the launch control unit 633b has a launch control input circuit for inputting detection signals from various detection switches related to launch, an oscillation circuit for outputting a clock signal at regular time intervals, and the clock signal. Based on this, a launch timing control circuit that outputs a launch reference pulse for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a, a launch solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the launch solenoid 542 based on this launch reference pulse, and launch. It is provided with a ball feed solenoid drive circuit that outputs a drive signal to the ball feed solenoid 145 based on a reference pulse. The launch timing control circuit generates a launch reference pulse so that 100 game balls B are launched toward the game region 5a per minute based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit, and outputs the launch reference pulse to the launch solenoid drive circuit. , Generates a ball feed reference pulse obtained by multiplying the launch reference pulse by a predetermined number and outputs it to the ball feed solenoid drive circuit.

In relation to the handle unit 180, whether or not the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped by the detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 that detects whether or not the palm or finger is touching the handle 182 and the player's will. The detection signal from the single-shot button operation sensor 194 that detects this is input to the firing control input circuit and then input to the firing timing control circuit. When the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal plate are electrically connected, they are input to the launch control input circuit as a CR connection signal and input to the launch timing control circuit. A signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189 that electrically adjusts the strength of launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a according to the rotation position of the handle 182 is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

In this launch solenoid drive circuit, based on the signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, the launch reference pulse generates a drive current for launching the game ball B toward the game region 5a with a launch strength commensurate with the rotation position of the handle 182. When it is input, it is output to the firing solenoid 542. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 145 when the ball feeding reference pulse is input, so that the game ball stored in the upper dish 201 of the dish unit 200 One ball B is received in the ball feeding unit 140, and when the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the output of the constant current is stopped to move the received game ball B to the ball launching device 540 side. send. In this way, the drive current output from the launch solenoid drive circuit to the launch solenoid 542 is variably controlled, whereas the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 145 is constant. It is controlled.

Various voltages (DC + 37V, DC + 12V, and DC + 5V) from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 are directly supplied to the payout control board 633. The power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 633 includes a capacitor as a backup power source for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power supply is cut off. With this capacitor, the payout control MPU can store various information in the RAM of the payout control board 633 in the power off processing even when the power is cut off. When the RAM clear switch of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on, the various stored information is completely erased (cleared) from the RAM of the payout control board 633.

[7-3. Peripheral control board]
As described above, the peripheral control board 1510 controls the progress of the effect based on various commands from the main control board 1310, and includes a CPU, RAM, VDP, sound source, SATA controller, various I / O interfaces, and the like. Is stored in the peripheral control IC 1510a integrated on one semiconductor chip, the control ROM 1510b that stores various schedule data that regulates the progress of various programs and effects in advance, and the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The power is cut off to the SDRAM 1510c composed of the CPUs 1510c1 and 1510c2 that can transfer and store the control information (peripheral data), the slide-type volume adjustment switch 1510d that can adjust the volume, and the real-time clock IC (not shown). It includes a backup power supply 1510e that can supply power even at any time, a power supply creation circuit (not shown) that creates various power supply voltages, and a peripheral control input circuit (not shown). Examples of the various I / O interfaces include various serial I / O ports and various parallel I / O ports.

The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a transmits various control information (peripheral data) stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 when the power is turned on (including the case of recovering from a power failure). Controls the transfer. Since the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the peripheral data ROM 1520a and the SDRAM 1510c1 and 1510c2 have a transfer rate of 2 Gbps as described above, the control information stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a is transferred to the peripheral data ROM 1510c2. Transferred at high speed. As the control information (peripheral data), as described above, image data such as a background image, a character image, and a pattern image for drawing various effect images on the effect display device 1600, and the door frame 3 and the game board 5 are provided. Light emission data that defines light emission modes (lighting, gradation, blinking, extinguishing, etc.) of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards, sound data such as music, voice, warning sound, notification sound, door frame 3 and games. It is drive data and the like for driving and controlling various movable effect bodies provided on the board 5.

The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a uses the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a to temporarily store information or delete the information during processing. Further, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a completes the startup of its own system, the CPU reads various control information (peripheral data) transferred to the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 from the main control board 1310 based on various commands, and proceeds with the production. ..

Further, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a has started up its own system and receives various commands from the main control board 1310, the CPU reads and reads various schedule data stored in the control ROM 1510b based on the various commands. Various control information (peripheral data) transferred to the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 is read out according to the schedule data, and control is performed to draw an image on the effect display device 1600. The various effects are advanced by controlling the sound so as to flow the sounds such as music and sound effects according to the various effects.

The VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a reads the image data from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 based on the instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, generates drawing data for drawing the image on the effect display device 1600, and generates drawing data on the liquid crystal output board 1530. Control the output. This drawing data is transmitted to the effect display device 1600 via the liquid crystal output board 1530, and various images are drawn on the effect display device 1600.

The sound source of the peripheral control IC 1510a is a vibration speaker provided on the door frame 3 or the main body frame 4 or the like by reading sound data from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, generating and outputting the sound data based on the instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a. Control is performed so that sounds such as music and sound effects according to various effects flow from the 354, the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, the main body frame speaker 622 of the main body frame 4, and the like. When the slide-type volume adjustment switch 1510d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is operated, the volume adjustment operation signal is input to various parallel I / O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a via the peripheral control input circuit. The sound source of the peripheral control IC 1510a can adjust the volume according to the input volume adjustment operation signal based on the instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker on the door frame 3 side can be adjusted. Outputs acoustic signals (for example, 2ch stereo signal, 4ch stereo signal, 2.1ch surround signal, 4.1ch surround signal, etc.) to the 464 and the main body frame speaker 622 for bass of the main body frame 4. By doing so, it is possible to provide a more realistic sound effect (acoustic effect) than before.

When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a has started up its own system and receives various commands from the main control board 1310, it reads various schedule data stored in the control ROM 1510b based on these various commands, and the read schedule data. The game board side light emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a color LED or the like provided on each decorative substrate of the game board 5 is read from the DRAM 1510c1 and 1510c2 along the above, and various serial I The game board side drive data for transmitting from the / O port to each decorative board of the game board 5 and outputting the drive signal to the drive motor for operating various effect units provided on the game board 5 is transmitted from the DRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2. It can be read out and transmitted from various serial I / O ports to each drive board that drives the drive motor and / or drive solenoid of the game board 5, the operation ring drive motor 342 provided on the door frame 3, and the operation button elevating drive motor. Door side drive data for outputting drive signal to 367 etc., and door side for outputting lighting signal, blinking signal or gradation lighting signal to color LED etc. provided on each decorative substrate of door frame 3. The light emission data and the door side drive light emission data composed of the light emission data are read from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 and transmitted from various serial I / O ports to the door frame 3 side.

The detection signals from various detection sensors for detecting the positions of the lower movable effect unit 3100, the upper rear movable effect unit 3200, and the upper front movable effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 provided on the game board 5 are peripheral control inputs. It is received by various serial I / O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a via a circuit. Further, the detection signal from the pressure detection sensor 381 of the effect operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3, the detection signal from the first rotation detection sensor 347, and the detection signal from the second rotation detection sensor 348 are peripheral control inputs. It is received by various serial I / O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a via a circuit. Further, signals from the air-cooled fan FAN that conveys the rotation state of the air-cooled fan FAN provided in the peripheral control unit 1500 of the game board 5 are input to various parallel I / O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a via the peripheral control input circuit. ..

Various voltages (DC + 37V, DC + 12V, and DC + 5V) are directly supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620. The power supply creation circuit (not shown) provided in the peripheral control board 1510 has a plurality of control voltages corresponding to various electronic components provided in the peripheral control board 1510 from one voltage (for example, DC + 12V) among various voltages from the power supply board 630. Types are created and supplied.

The peripheral control IC 1510a includes an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown), and the peripheral control IC 1510a uses the external WDT to diagnose whether or not its own system is out of control.

[8. Ground wire system]
As described above, the frame grounding board 559 shown in FIG. 86 can once collect electromagnetic noise generated in various places and ground (earth) to the island equipment of the game hall. Here, the system of the ground wire by the frame ground substrate 559 will be described with reference to FIG. 125. 125 is a diagram showing the configuration of the frame grounding board 559, FIG. 125A is a side view of the frame grounding board 559, and FIG. 125B is a mounting surface of the frame grounding board 559, FIG. 125 (a). c) is a circuit diagram of the frame ground board 559, and FIG. 125 (d) is a table showing a description of each ground terminal provided on the frame ground board 559. As shown in FIG. 125 (a), the frame ground board 559 is in a state where its mounting surface is facing downward (that is, in a state where the connector insertion ports of the ground terminals ECN1 to ECN5 are facing downward). It is housed and mounted inside the substrate accommodating portion 551a formed on the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551 shown in FIG. 86 (b).

As shown in FIG. 125 (b), the frame ground board 559 has ground terminals ECN1, ECN5, ECN4, and ECN2 arranged in a row from the right side to the left side along the upper side thereof, and the center of the left side thereof. The lower ground terminal ECN3 is arranged. Briefly explaining the ground terminals ECN1 to ECN5, as shown in FIG. 125 (d), the ground terminal ECN1 is provided as an interface ground on the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 98. It is electrically connected to the connection terminal via the interface ground wire, and the ground terminal ECN2 is electrically connected as an island equipment ground via the ground connection terminal and the island equipment ground wire in the island equipment of the game hall. The ground terminal ECN3 is connected to the ball tank 552 (specifically, outside the side wall of the ball tank 552 near the substrate accommodating portion 551aa) as a ball tank ground as a ball tank ground. One end of the ball tank ground wire is attached by a metal screw (not shown), and the other end of the ball tank ground wire is electrically connected. The ground terminal ECN4 is shown in FIG. 81 as a main body frame metal ground. One end of the main body frame metal ground wire is attached to the metal main body frame reinforcing frame 530 (specifically, the upper side of the main body frame reinforcing frame 530) of the main body frame base unit 500 of the main body frame 4 by a metal screw (not shown). The other end of the main body frame metal ground wire is electrically connected, and the ground terminal ECN5 is provided as a power supply ground on the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 97. It is electrically connected to the connection terminal via the power supply ground wire.

In the circuit of the frame ground board 559, as shown in FIG. 125 (c), the ground terminal ECN3 as the ball tank ground is electrically connected to one end of the resistor ER1, and the other end of the resistor ER1 is used as the power supply ground. The ground terminal ECN5, the ground terminal ECN2 as the island equipment ground, and the ground terminal ECN1 as the interface ground are electrically connected to each other, and the ground terminal ECN4 as the main body frame metal ground is electrically connected to one end of the resistor ER2. At the same time, the other end of the resistor ER2 is electrically connected to the ground terminal ECN5 as the power supply ground, the ground terminal ECN2 as the island equipment ground, and the ground terminal ECN1 as the interface ground. That is, the other end of the resistor ER1 and the other end of the resistor ER2 are electrically connected. In this embodiment, 510 ohms (Ω) and 2 watts (W) are used as resistors ER1 and ER2.

The electromagnetic noise flowing through the ground terminal ECN1 as the interface ground is guided to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall via the ground terminal ECN2 as the island equipment ground and the island equipment ground wire, and is removed, and is grounded as the ball tank ground. The electromagnetic noise flowing through the terminal ECN3 is guided to the ground of the island equipment in the game hall via the ground terminal ECN2 as the island equipment ground and the island equipment ground wire, and is removed, and then flows to the ground terminal ECN4 as the main body frame metal ground. The electromagnetic noise is removed by being guided to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall via the ground terminal ECN2 as the island equipment ground and the island equipment ground wire, and the electromagnetic noise flowing through the ground terminal ECN5 as the power supply ground is the island equipment. It is guided to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall and removed via the ground terminal ECN2 as the ground and the island equipment ground wire.

As shown in FIG. 82, a ball tank 552, a payout unit 560, and the like are attached to the payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4. The ball tank 552 is supplied with the game ball B from the island equipment of the game hall, and the game ball B is supplied from the ball tank 552 to the payout unit 560. The game ball B is polished in the island equipment of the game hall or rubs against each other in the circulation between the island equipment and the pachinko machine 1, and is charged and electrostatically discharged to emit electromagnetic noise. Therefore, static electricity tends to accumulate in the area where the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560, which can retain the game ball B, and the surrounding area thereof.

Therefore, in the present embodiment, the frame grounding substrate 559 is arranged in the vicinity of the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560 where static electricity is likely to be accumulated, and as a result, the ball tank 552 and the ball tank 552 which are strongly affected by electromagnetic noise as a result of the easy accumulation of static electricity are dispensed. In contrast to the metal main body frame reinforcing frame 530 in the main body frame base unit 500 of the main body frame 4 which is in the vicinity of the unit 560, in the frame grounding board 559, the ground terminal ECN3 as a ball tank ground and the main body frame metal The ground terminal ECN4 as the ground and the ground terminal ECN4 as the ground are gradually passed through the resistors ER1 and ER2, respectively, and attenuated to suppress the instantaneous discharge of high voltage. It is possible to lead to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall via the ground wire. In other words, the electromagnetic noise that has entered from the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560, where static electricity tends to accumulate, is used as the frame ground called the frame ground from the frame ground board 559 via the ball tank 552 and the metal body frame reinforcement frame 530. By guiding to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall, the electromagnetic noise invading from the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560 can be removed by flowing to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall.

On the other hand, when electromagnetic noise enters the metal shield plate 1540 housed in the peripheral control board box 1505 shown in FIG. 119, the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 It invades the ground (GND) line, flows into the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630, and from the ground connection terminal of the power supply board 630 to the ground terminal ECN5 as the power supply ground in the frame ground board 559 via the power supply ground wire. It is guided from the ground terminal ECN2 as the ground of the island equipment to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall via the island equipment ground wire and is removed. In other words, the electromagnetic noise that has entered from the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 uses a metal shield plate 1540 as a circuit ground called a circuit ground. By guiding the frame ground board 559 to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall through the ground, the electromagnetic noise invading from the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is sent to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall to be removed. can do.

In the present embodiment, among the ground terminals ECN1 to ECN5, the ground terminal ECN3 as the ball tank ground and the ground terminal ECN4 as the main body frame metal ground are regions that are strongly affected by electromagnetic noise as described above. Since it corresponds to (around it), a large ground terminal is adopted, and as described above, the ground terminal ECN2 as the island equipment ground transmits the electromagnetic noise that has flowed into the frame ground board 559 in the game hall. A large ground terminal is used because it is guided to the ground of the island equipment and removed. The ground terminals ECN2 to ECN4 that employ this large ground terminal are squares with a cross-sectional shape of 1.14 mm on each side, rated current: 7A (when using AC / DC, AWG # 18), rated voltage: It has the general specifications of 250V (AC / DC) and applicable current range: AWG # 22 to # 18, and its height is 13.4 mm as shown in FIG. 125 (a) (earth terminal ECN2 to 2). When the housing corresponding to ECN4 is inserted, the mounting height becomes 18.6 mm).

On the other hand, the electromagnetic noise flowing into the ground terminal ECN1 as the interface ground and the ground terminal ECN5 as the power supply ground is smaller than the above-mentioned ground terminals ECN2 to ECN4, and the current is small. As for the ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5, small ground terminals are adopted. The ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5 that employ this small ground terminal are squares with a cross-sectional shape of 0.64 mm on each side, and have a rated current of 3A (when using AC / DC and AWG # 22) and a rated voltage: It has a general specification of 250V (AC / DC) and applicable current range: AWG # 30 to # 22, and its height is 7 mm as shown in FIG. 125 (a) (ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5). When the corresponding housing is inserted, the mounting height will be 9.8 mm).

In the present embodiment, each ground wire (island equipment ground wire, ball tank ground wire, main body frame ground wire) electrically connected to the ground terminals ECN2 to ECN4 is electrically connected to the ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5. Since the current due to electromagnetic noise is larger than each ground wire (interface ground wire, power supply ground wire), each ground wire (island equipment ground wire, ball tank) electrically connected to the ground terminals ECN2 to ECN4. The thickness of the ground wire (ground wire, main body frame ground wire) is thicker than the thickness of each ground wire (interface ground wire, power supply ground wire) electrically connected to the ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5. In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 125 (a), 1.6 mm is adopted as the plate thickness of the frame grounding substrate 559.

In this way, the electromagnetic noise generated in various places is once collected on the frame ground board 559 and guided from the frame ground board 559 to the ground of the island equipment in the game hall to be removed. The substrate 559 has a function of exerting a static elimination action.

Further, since the electromagnetic noise generated in various places is once collected on the frame grounding board 559 and guided from the frame grounding board 559 to the grounding of the island equipment of the game hall to be removed, the pachinko machine 1 can be removed. The ground wire (wiring) from the ball tank 552 arranged on the upper side is routed to the power supply board 630 arranged on the lower side of the pachinko machine 1, and the electromagnetic noise is once collected on the power supply board 630 to form the island facility of the game hall. Compared to the configuration in which the ground wire is guided to the ground and removed, the ground wire (wiring) can be routed extremely easily.

Further, since the external terminal board 558 and the frame ground board 559 are configured to be arranged in the board accommodating portion 551aa of the payout base 551 in a close state, a plurality of external terminals provided on the external terminal board 558 are provided. (In this embodiment, 10 external terminals called external terminals XCN1 to XCN10 are provided.) And the work of electrically connecting the hall computer provided in the game hall by wiring, and the frame grounding board 559. Since the work of electrically connecting the ground terminal ECN2 as the island equipment ground and the ground connection terminal provided in the island equipment of the game hall with the island equipment ground wire (wiring) can be performed as a series of work. It can contribute to the improvement of workability.

Further, since the frame ground board 559 is configured so that it can be arranged in the board accommodating portion 551aa of the payout base 551, the ground terminal ECN2 as the island equipment ground of the frame ground board 559 and the island equipment of the game hall can be used. Various control boards (for example, the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 that controls the progress of the game) provided with the island equipment ground wire (wiring) that electrically connects the provided ground connection terminal to the game board 5. Since it can be arranged so as to be separated from the peripheral control board 1510 capable of controlling the progress of the peripheral control board, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510, the liquid crystal output board 1530, etc.), various control boards It is possible to eliminate an adverse effect on the electronic components (including the connector) provided in the above.

Further, by arranging the frame grounding substrate 559 in the vicinity of the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560 where static electricity easily accumulates, the ball tank 552, which is strongly affected by electromagnetic noise, and the main body frame 4 in the vicinity of the payout unit 560. The metal main body frame reinforcing frame 530 in the main body frame base unit 500, and the ground terminal ECN3 as the ball tank ground and the ground terminal ECN4 as the main body frame metal ground in the frame grounding board 559, respectively. Extremely shorten the length of the electrically connected ground wire (ball tank ground wire, main body frame metal ground wire) to guide electromagnetic noise from the frame ground board 559 to the ground of the island equipment in the game hall and remove it. Can be done.

Further, by arranging the frame grounding board 559 in the vicinity of the ball tank 552 where static electricity easily accumulates and the dispensing unit 560, the ball tank 552 where static electricity easily accumulates and the frame grounding board 559 which exerts a static elimination action are electrically connected. The length of the ball tank ground wire (wiring) is the length of the metal ground wire (wiring) of the main body frame that electrically connects the metal main body frame reinforcement frame 530 and the frame ground board 559 that exerts the static elimination effect, and the power supply. The length of the power supply ground wire (wiring) that electrically connects the board 630 and the frame ground board 559 that exerts the static elimination effect, and the interface that electrically connects the interface board 635 and the frame ground board 559 that exerts the static elimination action. It can be configured to be the shortest compared to the length of the ground wire (wiring).

Further, by arranging the frame grounding substrate 559 in the vicinity of the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560 where static electricity easily accumulates, the ball tank 552, which is strongly affected by electromagnetic noise, and the main body frame 4 in the vicinity of the payout unit 560. In contrast to the metal main body frame reinforcing frame 530 in the main body frame base unit 500, and the ground terminal ECN3 as a ball tank ground and the ground terminal ECN4 as a main body frame metal ground in the frame grounding board 559, Although a large current flows, it is reduced by the resistors ER1 and ER2 of the frame ground board 559, so that the operation of the power supply board 630 is not affected. It can be removed by guiding it to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall via the ground wire.

Incidentally, as conventionally disclosed in, each ground is once integrated on the power supply board arranged on the CR unit side at the bottom of the main body frame so that the power supply AC24V of the CR unit can be easily supplied, and the grounds are once integrated through the power supply board. A gaming machine that is connected to the ground of the island equipment and grounded has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-120595 (paragraph [0335], FIG. 68, FIG. 69)). Since the power supply board is generally heavy, it is often arranged downward in the gaming machine. Therefore, in order to consolidate the ground on the power supply board, it is necessary to route the ground wire from the ball tank on the upper part of the gaming machine, the prize ball device, or the like toward the lower power supply board. By routing the ground wire in this way, electromagnetic noise may be transmitted to various control boards existing in the middle, which may have an unexpected effect. In addition, since the ground wire is integrated on the power supply board, if any problem occurs on the power supply board, the ground may be affected, or conversely, the current may flow through the ground wire, which may affect the operation of the power supply board. there were. In addition, when the grounding point of the island equipment is above the gaming machine, it may be complicated because it is necessary to route the grounding wires collected on the power supply board from the bottom to the top again.

[9. Game content]
The content of the game played by the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 102 and the like. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 is operated by the player by rotating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 arranged in the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3. However, the game board 5 is driven into the upper part of the game area 5a through the space between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002, and the game by the game ball B is started. The game ball B driven into the upper part of the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center accessory 2500 depending on the driving strength. The striking strength of the game ball B can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 182, and the more the handle 182 is rotated, the stronger the striking force can be. That is, the game ball B can be hit at intervals of 0.6 seconds.

Further, in the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted in front of the game panel 1100 (panel plate 1110) at appropriate positions in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and the game ball B comes into contact with the obstacle nails N. As a result, the flow speed of the game ball B is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball B so that the movements can be enjoyed. Further, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail N, a wind turbine (not shown) that rotates due to the contact of the game ball B is provided at an appropriate position.

When the game ball B driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 enters the left side of the front view from the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500, it comes into contact with a plurality of obstacle nails N while contacting the plurality of obstacle nails N. It will flow down the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500. Then, when the game ball B flowing down the area on the left side of the center accessory 2500 enters the warp inlet 2501 opened on the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500, it is supplied to the stage 2503 from the warp outlet 2502.

The game ball B supplied to the stage 2503 rolls on the stage 2503 and moves back and forth from side to side, and is released from the center in the left-right direction to the front. When the game ball B is released into the game area 5a from the center of the stage 2503, it is received by the first start port 2002 with a high probability because the portion is located directly above the first start port 2002. When the game balls B are received in the first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Will be done.

The game ball B released into the game area 5a from the stage 2503 of the center accessory 2500 may be accepted by the first start port 2002 or the general winning opening 2001 of the start port unit 2100.

By the way, if the game ball B that has flowed down to the left side of the center accessory 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2501, it is moved to the center side in the left-right direction by the side unit 2200 and the obstacle nail N, and the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200. Alternatively, it may be accepted by the first starting port 2002 of the starting port unit 2100, the general winning opening 2001, or the like. Then, when the game balls B are received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Will be done.

On the other hand, when the game ball B driven into the upper part of the center accessory 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the center accessory 2500 (so-called right-handed strike). , Is discharged to the upper part of the gate unit 2300 through the right side of the center accessory 2500. In addition to the gate portion 2003 of the gate unit 2300, this portion is provided with a second starting port 2004 of the center accessory 2500 and a general winning opening 2001, and passes through the gate portion 2003 with a certain probability.

Then, when the right-handed game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003, a normal lottery is performed on the main control board 1310, and when the lottery normal lottery result is "normal hit", the second starting port is closed. 2004 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the game ball B can be accepted into the second starting port 2004. Then, when the game balls B are received in the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of the game balls B are transferred from the payout device 580 to the upper plate 201 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. It will be paid out.

In the present embodiment, in the ordinary lottery performed by passing the game ball B through the gate portion 2003, a certain amount of time is set from the start of the ordinary lottery to suggesting the result of the ordinary lottery (for example, 0). 0.01 to 60 seconds, also referred to as normal fluctuation time). The suggestion of the normal lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 of the game board 5. The second starting port 2004 is normally opened after the lapse of the fluctuation time.

If the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003 between the time when the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003 and the time when the normal lottery result is suggested, the suggestion of the normal lottery result cannot be started. The start of the suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the previous ordinary lottery result is completed. In addition, the maximum number of pending lottery results is four, and more than that, even if the game ball B passes through the gate portion 2003, it is discarded without being reserved. As a result, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the hold.

In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, when the game ball B is received in the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the main control board 1310 has an advantageous gaming state (for example, "big hit", which is advantageous to the player. A lottery of special lottery results that generate "medium hit", "small hit", "probability fluctuation (probability change) hit", and "time reduction (time reduction) hit" is performed. It is suggested to the player over a predetermined time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as a special fluctuation time). In addition, a lottery is drawn when the game ball B is accepted at the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. The special lottery results include "miss", "small hit", "2R big hit", "5R big hit", "15R big hit", "probability change (probability change)", "time reduction (time reduction)", " There are "probability change time reduction hit", "probability change time reduction no hit", etc.

The special lottery result (first special lottery result and second special lottery result) drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004 is the result of the special lottery that causes an advantageous gaming state. In this case, after the lapse of the special fluctuation time, the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 is in a state where the game ball B can be accepted in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. When the game ball B is accepted into the first prize opening 2005 or the second prize opening 2006 when the first prize opening 2005 or the second prize opening 2006 is open, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 A predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) of game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 to the upper plate 201. Therefore, when the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 allows the game ball B to be accepted, it is often possible to make the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 accept the game ball B. The game ball B can be paid out, and the player can be entertained.

When the special lottery result is "small hit", the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 is the game ball B for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds and 0.6 seconds). The opening / closing pattern is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice) to close after the open state is acceptable. On the other hand, when the special lottery result is "big hit", a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) after the first big winning opening 2005 or the second big winning opening 2006 is in an open state where the game ball B can be accepted. If either the progress or the acceptance of a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls B into the first prize opening 2005 or the second prize opening 2006 is satisfied, the game balls B cannot be accepted. The opening / closing pattern (one opening / closing pattern is referred to as one round) in the closed state is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, 2 rounds for "2R jackpot", 5 rounds for "5R jackpot", and 15 rounds for "15R jackpot" are repeated to generate an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player.

In "big hit", after the big hit game is over, the probability that a special lottery result such as "big hit" will be drawn is changed ("probability change hit"), or the display time of the production image suggesting the special lottery result is changed. ("Time saving hit") There is a "hit".

In the present embodiment, from the start of the special lottery to the suggestion of the result of the special lottery due to the acceptance of the game ball B into the first start port 2002 and the second start port 2004, the first start port 2002 and When the game ball B is accepted in the second starting port 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started. Therefore, the suggestion of the special lottery result is started until the suggestion of the special lottery result previously drawn is completed. It is put on hold. The number of reserved special lottery results is limited to four for each of the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, and for more than that, the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. Even if the game ball B is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is not reserved and is discarded. As a result, the increase in the burden on the game hall side is suppressed by accumulating the hold.

The suggestion of the special lottery result is performed by the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600. In the function display unit 1400, the special lottery result is suggested by being directly controlled by the main control board 1310. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 suggests the special lottery result by repeatedly turning on and off the plurality of LEDs to blink for a predetermined time and then by combining the lit LEDs.

On the other hand, in the effect display device 1600, based on the command from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 indirectly controls and suggests the special lottery result as the effect image. The effect image suggesting the result of the special lottery on the effect display device 1600 is a pattern sequence in which three pattern rows consisting of a plurality of patterns are displayed side by side in the left-right direction, and each pattern sequence is changed to display the pattern sequence in a variable manner. Are stopped and displayed in sequence, and each of the three picture rows that are stopped and displayed is stopped and displayed so that the patterns correspond to the special lottery result. When the special lottery result is other than "missing", after the three pattern rows are stopped and each pattern is stopped and displayed, a definite image suggesting the special lottery result is displayed on the effect display device 1600 and the lottery is performed. An advantageous gaming state (for example, a small hit game, a big hit game, etc.) occurs according to the result of the special lottery.

In addition, the time suggesting the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 (LED blinking time (variable time)) and the time suggesting the special lottery result in the effect display device 1600 (the pattern sequence fluctuates and the confirmed image is displayed. It is different from the time until it is displayed), and the function display unit 1400 is set to a longer time.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the effect operation in the effect operation unit 300 in the door frame 3 is performed according to the lottery special lottery result. A player participation type effect can be performed in which the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the unit 301 are operated. In the player participation type production, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated or vibrated by the operation ring drive motor 342, the rotation operation can be assisted, the rotation operation can be hindered, and the operation button elevating drive motor can be used. The pressing operation unit 303 can be raised by 367 to make it stand out, and the player participation type production can be enjoyed by operating the effect operation unit 301.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, each decorative board provided on the door frame 3, each decorative board provided on the game board 5, front effect unit 2600, lower movable effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, and upper rear It is possible to perform light emission effect, movable effect, etc. by appropriately using the movable effect unit 3200, the upper front movable effect unit 3300, etc., and it is possible to entertain the player by various effects, and the player's game. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest in.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in the player participation type production in which the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 are operated, when the player makes a mistake or does not perform the operation to be operated, the correct operation is performed. Notify the player to that effect. Specifically, for example, when the pressing operation of the central pressing operation unit 303a is required, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is pressed, or when the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated, the vibration speaker 354 vibrates. The effect display device 1600 is displayed to that effect.

Further, in the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to displaying the effect image for suggesting the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the table effect unit of the table unit 2000 on the game board 5 according to the lottery special lottery result. It is possible to perform light emission effect, movable effect, display effect, etc. by appropriately using 2600, the lower movable effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000, the upper rear movable effect unit 3200, the upper front movable effect unit 3300, and the like. It is possible to entertain the player by various productions, and it is possible to suppress the decrease in the player's interest in the game.

Incidentally, conventionally, game machines such as pachinko machines have a game area in which a game is played by driving a game medium by a player's operation, and a plurality of game machines planted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in the game area. Obstacle nails and multiple entrances (general winning opening, starting opening, variable winning opening (variable starting opening, large) that are allowed to accept game media in the game area and give benefits according to the acceptance of the game medium It has a winning slot, a winning slot for a character, a V winning slot, etc.). Then, when the game medium is accepted at the reception, benefits (payout of the game medium, occurrence of an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous, etc.) are given, so that the game medium is sent to the reception for the player. It is possible to entertain the driving operation of the game medium so that it can be accepted.

As this type of gaming machine, a plurality of gaming machines are arranged so as to be movable in the vertical direction between the vicinity of the upper edge and the vicinity of the center in the front view gaming area, and can be rotated around an axis extending in the front-rear direction and project outward. (For example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2010-279548) has been proposed. In the technique of this document, in a normal state, the rotating decoration is positioned near the upper edge, and the rotating decoration is lowered to the vicinity of the center according to the changing state of the game as the game is performed in the game area. By rotating, the plurality of rotating ornaments rotate in a state of protruding outward, so that the whole becomes large, the player can be surprised, and the player can be suggested that an opportunity has arrived.

However, in the technique as described in the above document, in the normal state where the rotation is stopped, a plurality of rotating ornaments visible from the player side project outward due to the rotation, so that the whole becomes large. Since the appearance does not change significantly, some players may get tired of the production by multiple rotating ornaments at an early stage, and the production may not be enjoyable, which may reduce the interest in the game. It was.

[10. Characteristic effects of this embodiment]
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment,
As a result, under the normal state, the central decorative body 3351 in the upper front movable effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 is located at the raised retracted position near the upper edge in the front view game area 5a, and the two firsts. The first position where the pair of the first protruding decorative portion 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a of the protruding decorative body 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353 overlap each other back and forth on each of the left and right sides of the central decorative body 3351. Is located in. Here, the first protruding decorative portion 3352a is arranged on the left side of the central decorative body 3351, and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a is arranged on the front side on the right side. For this reason, the central decorative body 3351 can be seen near the upper edge in the front view gaming area 5a, and the first protruding decorative portion 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a are visible on the left and right sides of the central decorative body 3351, respectively. The central decorative body 3351 and the two first protruding decorative portions 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a decorate the inside of the game area 5a to improve the appearance of the pachinko machine 1. In the normal state, the two first protruding decorative portions 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a located at the first position overlap each other in the front-rear direction, so that the first protruding decorative portion 3352a and the second protruding portion 3352a on the front side are overlapped with each other. Since only the decorative portion 3353a can be seen from the front (player side), it is possible to make it difficult to notice the existence of the first protruding decorative portion 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a on the rear side. It can be recognized that the number of the first protruding decorative portion 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a is only the number currently visible. When the LEDs mounted on the upper front central decorative substrate, the first protruding decorative portion decorative substrate, and the second protruding decorative portion decorative substrate are made to emit light in a normal state, the central decorative body 3351, the first protruding decorative portion 3352a, and the second Since the two protruding decorative portions 3353a can be light-emitting decorated, the central decorative body 3351, the first protruding decorative portion 3352a, and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a can be used to provide the central decorative body 3351, the first protruding decorative portion 3352a, and the second protruding decorative portion 3352a. The portion 3353a can be made to stand out, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the upper front movable decoration body 3350 such as the central decoration body 3351. Further, in a normal state, the central decorative body 3351 and the two first protruding decorative bodies 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353 are in the retracted position near the upper edge of the front view game area 5a, so that the front view game The effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 arranged in the center of the area 5a is not blocked by the upper front movable decorative body 3350 such as the central decorative body 3351, and is in good condition from the player side. The effect image can be visually recognized, and the player can entertain the effect image.

In this normal state, the upper front drive motor 3302 is driven according to the game state that changes as the game is played in the game area 5a, and the central decorative body 3351 is lowered from the retracted position toward the lower appearance position. Then, the central decorative body 3351 and the two first protruding decorative bodies 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353 descend together. At this time, on the left side of the central decorative body 3351, the second protruding decorative portion 3353a of the second protruding decorative body 3353, and on the right side of the central decorative body 3351, the first protruding decorative portion 3352a of the remaining first protruding decorative body 3352. The lower ends of the second link rods 3304 arranged on the left and right are attached to each other, and the upper ends of the second link rods 3304 arranged on the left and right sides are rotatably attached to the unit base 3301 within a predetermined range. Since it is attached to the tip of the first link rod 3303 so that it can slide in the same vertical direction as the movement direction of the central decorative body 3351, it is attached to the unit base 3301 respectively, so that it descends together with the central decorative body 3351. The left and right second link rods 3304 are the same as the moving direction of the central decorative body 3351 by the two first protruding decorative bodies 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353 (first protruding decorative portion 3352a and second protruding decorative portion 3353a). It is pulled downward and the upper end of the second link rod 3304 slides downward with respect to the unit base 3301. Since the upper ends of the left and right second link rods 3304 can be slid vertically by the first link rod 3303 within a range shorter than the moving distance (elevation distance) of the central decorative body 3351, the central decorative body Before the 3351 reaches the appearance position of the descending end, the upper end portions of the left and right second link rods 3304 each reach the lower end portion in the sliding direction. Then, after the upper end of the second link rod 3304 reaches the lower end in the sliding direction, when the central decorative body 3351 further moves in the direction of the lower appearance position, the lower end of the second link rod 3304 is further displayed. On the right side of the two first protruding decorations 3352 and the second protruding decoration 3353 that try to descend together with the central decoration 3351 by the left and right second link rods 3304 because they cannot move in the direction (downward) of The first protruding decorative portion 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a on the left side are pulled toward the upper unit base 3301, and this force causes the two first protruding decorative bodies 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353 to be centrally decorated. The first connecting rod 3352b and the second connecting rod 3353b attached to the rear side of the body 3351 rotate in different directions with respect to the axis extending back and forth around the center of the central decorative body 3351, and both left and right sides. The first protruding decorative portion 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a of the above move from the first position where the front and rear overlaps are eliminated to the second position where the front and rear overlap is eliminated. As a result, the first protruding decorative portion 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a, which were visible on both the left and right sides of the central decorative body 3351, rotate in two so that the fan spreads, and becomes the central decorative body 3351. The four first protruding decorative portions 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a extending radially around the central decorative body 3351 can form one large decoration and show it to the player. Therefore, since all the numbers of the first protruding decorative portion 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a appear around the central decorative body 3351 moved to the center of the game area 5a, the first protruding decorative portion 3352a and the second By increasing the number of protruding decorative portions 3353a, the player can be surprised, and by expanding the four first protruding decorative portions 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a around the central decorative body 3351, the entire decoration can be achieved. Can be increased, giving a strong impact to the player and suppressing a decline in interest.

Further, as described above, when the central decorative body 3351 is lowered from the retracted position of the rising end to the appearance position of the falling end by the upper front drive motor 3302, the upper ends of the left and right second link rods 3304 become the lower ends in the sliding direction. The two first protruding decorative portions 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a on the left and right sides of the central decorative body 3351 overlap each other until they reach (the end of the first link rod 3303 that rotates downward on the tip side). After the upper end of the second link rod 3304 reaches the lower end in the sliding direction, the central decoration 3351 descends in the direction of the appearance position (downward). ), The two left and right first protruding decorative portions 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a rotate from the first position where they overlap each other to the second position where the overlap is eliminated, and radiate around the central decorative body 3351. Since the central decorative body 3351 and the two first protruding decorative bodies 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353 can show the player a movable effect of two-step movement, the upper front drive motor 3302 By appropriately controlling the above, it is possible to stop the movement (directing) in the first stage or move (directing) to the second stage, and the central decorative body 3351 and the two first protruding decorative bodies 3352. And the variation of the movable effect using the second protruding decorative body 3353 can be increased, the player can be entertained by various effects, and the player can be less likely to get bored. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest in.

Further, since the central decorative body 3351 can be moved from the retracted position of the rising end to the appearance position of the descending end by the upper front drive motor 3302 according to the game state, the central decorative body 3351 can be moved from the retracted position of the ascending end to the appearance position of the descending end. When the game state changes, the player can be thrilled and excited depending on whether or not the central decorative body 3351 descends to the appearance position, and the player can be entertained. Then, when the central decorative body 3351 is lowered from the retracted position to the appearance position side by the upper front drive motor 3302 and moved to the first stage where the first protruding decorative body 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353 do not rotate, the center is formed. Since the decorative body 3351 and the two first protruding decorative bodies 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353 move downward in the normal state, it seems that there may be something good for the player. It can be made to have a sense of expectation for the game. Further, when the central decorative body 3351 is lowered to the appearance position of the descending end to the second stage, that is, the four first protruding decorative portions 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a spread radially around the central decorative body 3351. The central decorative body 3351 and the four first protruding decorative portions 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a can show the player a large decoration, and the central decorative body 3351 and the four first protruding decorative portions 3352a and Since the second protruding decorative portion 3353a can be lowered to make the player feel as if a bulletin board from heaven is given to the player, an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous to the player. It is possible to make people think that this will occur, raise expectations for the game, make it difficult for the player to get bored, and suppress a decline in the interest in the game.

In this way, when the central decorative body 3351 is lowered from the retracted position to the appearance position, the movements of the central decorative body 3351 and the two first protruding decorative bodies 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353 can be changed in two steps. Therefore, the possibility (expected value) of an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous differs between when the player stops in the first stage and when the player stops in the second stage. It is possible to suggest that the expected value is higher in the second stage than in the first stage, and the central decorative body 3351 and the two first protruding decorative bodies 3352 and the second protruding decoration can be recognized. Various expected values can be displayed to the player with the body 3353.

Further, the central decorative body 3351 is lowered to the appearance position near the center in the front view game area 5a, and the central decorative body 3351 is lowered to the appearance position to secure a space around the central decorative body 3351. For facilitation, the four first protruding decorative portions 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a can be moved from the first position to the second position and spread radially around the central decorative body 3351 at the appearance position. The body 3351 and the two first protruding ornaments 3352 and the second protruding ornament 3353 can form as large a decoration as possible. Therefore, when the central decorative body 3351 is lowered to the appearance position by the upper front drive motor 3302 according to the game state, the central decorative body 3351 and the four first protrusions radiating around the central decorative body 3351 near the center of the game area 5a. Since the large decoration by the decoration portion 3352a and the second protruding decoration portion 3353a can be shown to the player, the player can be surprised and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the center of the game area 5a. At the same time, it is possible to enjoy a large decoration by the central decorative body 3351 and the four first protruding decorative portions 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

Further, when the central decorative body 3351 is moved from the retracted position to the appearance position by the upper front drive motor 3302, the two first protruding decorative portions 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a on the left and right sides of the central decorative body 3351 are in the first positions. Because one upper front drive motor 3302 moves the central decoration body 3351 and the two first protrusion decoration bodies 3352 and the second protrusion decoration body 3353 by one upper front drive motor 3302. When performing an effect (movable effect) using the central decorative body 3351, the two first protruding decorative bodies 3352, and the second protruding decorative body 3353, it is sufficient to control only one upper front drive motor 3302, which is suitable for the effect. Such a load can be reduced. Therefore, when performing the effect using the central decorative body 3351 and the two first protruding decorative bodies 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353, the effect using other movable decorative bodies, luminescent decorative bodies, and the like is performed at the same time. However, since it is possible to suppress an increase in the load applied to the control of the effect, the control of the effect becomes unstable due to the overload, and the upper front drive motor 3302 causes the central decorative body 3351 and the two first protruding decorative bodies 3352. And the movement of the second protruding decorative body 3353 can be prevented from being jerky, and the effect of using the central decorative body 3351, the two first protruding decorative bodies 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353 can be surely exhibited. The pachinko machine 1 can be used to achieve the above-mentioned effects.

Further, as described above, while the central decorative body 3351 is descending to the appearance position, the two first protruding decorative portions 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a on the left and right sides of the central decorative body 3351 are moved to the second position. Since it is moved, the speed at which the first protruding decorative portion 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a move (rotate) to the second position becomes relatively faster than the moving speed of the central decorative body 3351. Therefore, the four first protruding decorative portions 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a can be made to move as if they suddenly spread around the central decorative body 3351, which surprises the player and surprises the player with the central decorative body 3351 and the second second. It is possible to enjoy the production using the one protruding decorative body 3352 and the second protruding decorative body 3353.

Further, as described above, after the central decorative body 3351 has moved from the retracted position to the appearance position to some extent, the first protruding decorative portions 3352a and the second protruding decorative portions 3353a on the left and right sides of the central decorative body 3351 are first moved. I am trying to move from the position to the second position. That is, after moving the first protruding decorative portion 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a from the vicinity of the upper edge of the front view game area 5a to the central side to some extent, the first protruding decorative portion 3351 is radially spread around the central decorative body 3351. Since it is moved from the position to the second position, when the four first protruding decorative portions 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a move to the second position, the first protruding decorative portion 3352a and the second protruding decoration The portion 3353a can be made difficult to come into contact with other members, and damage to the first protruding decorative portion 3352a, the second protruding decorative portion 3353a and other members can be prevented.

Further, when a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper front central decorative substrate, the first protruding decorative portion decorative substrate, and the second protruding decorative portion decorative substrate are made to emit light, the central decorative body 3351 and the four first protruding decorative portions 3352a and Since the second protruding decorative portion 3353a can be independently luminescently decorated, the central decorative body 3351 and the first protruding decorative portion 3351 and the first protruding decorative portion 3353a can be decorated by the light emitting decoration of the central decorative body 3351, the first protruding decorative portion 3352a, and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a. The decorative portion 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a can be made to stand out, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the upper front movable decorative body 3350 such as the central decorative body 3351. Therefore, before the central decoration body 3351 and the two first protrusion decoration bodies 3352 and the second protrusion decoration body 3353 are lowered from the retracted position to the appearance position by the upper front drive motor 3302, the upper front center decoration substrate and the first protrusion decoration A player can illuminate the central decorative body 3351 and the first protruding decorative portions 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a on both the left and right sides by a plurality of LEDs mounted on the partial decorative substrate and the second protruding decorative portion decorative substrate. Because the central decorative body 3351 and the like can be focused on, the player can be excited and excited depending on whether or not the central decorative body 3351 and the like are moved to the appearance position by the upper front drive motor 3302, and the player can be enjoyed. You can evacuate.

Then, the central decorative body 3351 is lowered to the appearance position on the central side of the game area 5a by the upper front drive motor 3302, and the four first protruding decorative portions 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a are radially formed around the central decorative body 3351. When it spreads to, it can surprise the player and make him think that there is something good, and can raise the player's expectation for the game. When the central decorative body 3351 is lowered to the appearance position, the central decorative body 3351 and the four first protruding decorative parts 3352a and the first by the upper front central decorative substrate, the first protruding decorative portion decorative substrate and the second protruding decorative portion decorative substrate are used. (Ii) When the protruding decoration portion 3353a is light-emittingly decorated, the decoration that shines greatly in the center of the game area 5a can be shown to the player, so that the player is in an advantageous gaming state (for example, "big hit game"). ”) Can be thought to occur, and it is possible to raise expectations for the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state and suppress a decline in interest.

Further, since the effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the front view game area 5a, when the central decorative body 3351 is lowered to the central appearance position in the game area 5a by the upper front drive motor 3302, it is centered. Since (a part of) the effect image is blocked by the decorative body 3351, the two first protruding decorative bodies 3352, and the second protruding decorative body 3353, it is possible to make the player notice the descent of the central decorative body 3351 and the like and pay attention to it. It is possible to show the four first protruding decorative portions 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a that move from the first position to the second position and radiate around the central decorative body 3351. Therefore, in the center of the gaming area 5a, a large decoration by the central decorative body 3351 and the four first protruding decorative portions 3352a and the second protruding decorative portion 3353a can be surely shown to the player, and the above-mentioned effects It can be a pachinko machine 1 that surely plays.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the frame-shaped center accessory 2500 is arranged in the center of the front view game area 5a, and the game ball B is located in the area excluding the frame of the center accessory 2500. Can play games that are distributed. A front effect unit 2600 provided with a transparent front light guide plate 2610 is attached to the center accessory 2500 so as to close the inside of the frame, and the effect is arranged rearward through the front light guide plate 2610. You can enjoy the effect image displayed on the display device 1600. In this state, a predetermined LED2630 of a plurality of LEDs2630s attached to the upper peripheral edge of the front light guide plate 2610 via a reflector 2620 according to a game state that changes as the game is played in the game area 5a. When (any of the first LED group 2630a, the second LED group 2630b, the third LED group 2630c, and the fourth LED group 2630d) is made to emit light, the identification on the peripheral surface of the front light guide plate 2610 corresponding to the LED 2630. The light input unit 2612 (any of the first specific light input unit 2612a, the second specific light input unit 2612b, the third specific light input unit 2612c, and the fourth specific light input unit 2612d) is irradiated with light, and the specific input unit is irradiated with light. The corresponding pattern 2614 (any of the first pattern 2614a, the second pattern 2614b, the third pattern 2614c, and the fourth pattern 2614d) is emitted and displayed by the light incident on the front light guide plate 2610 from the light unit 2612. The Rukoto. More specifically, the periphery of the light guide plate main body 2611 of the front light guide plate 2610 is fitted into the fixed recess 2621 of the reflector 2620, and from the plurality of through holes 2622 penetrating the fixed recess 2621 to the specific light input portion 2612 side. Since a plurality of LEDs are attached to the reflector 2620 via the front light guide plate decorative substrate 2640 so as to face each other, the LEDs 2630 can be brought as close as possible to the peripheral surface (specific light incident unit 2612) of the light guide plate main body 2611. It is possible to reliably irradiate the corresponding specific light input unit 2612 with the light from the LED 2630, and it is possible to prevent the light from the LED 2630 from diffusing through the through hole 2622. It is possible to prevent the portion 2612 from being irradiated with light.

Then, the light incident from the specific light input portion 2612 into the light guide plate main body 2611 corresponds to the reflection recess 2613 (first reflection recess 2613a, second reflection recess 2613b, third reflection recess 2613c, fourth reflection recess 2613d). ,), The light irradiated in the reflection recess 2613 is reflected or refracted in a predetermined direction. At this time, since the reflection recess 2613 extends in a direction perpendicular to the straight line connected to the corresponding specific light input portion 2612, the light reflected or refracted by the reflection recess 2613 is projected in a predetermined direction. Since the direction perpendicular to the surface of the light guide plate main body 2611 is included, the light guide plate main body 2611 is seen by the reflective recess 2613 in the eyes of the player sitting in front of the game area 5a (light guide plate main body 2611). The light reflected or refracted in the direction perpendicular to the surface of the surface reaches, the reflection recess 2613 appears to shine, and the pattern 2614 composed of the reflection recess 2613 appears to be emitted and displayed. On the other hand, the light incident on the light guide plate main body 2611 from the specific light input unit 2612 also reaches the reflection recess 2613 that does not correspond to the specific light input unit 2612, but the reflection recess 2613 that does not correspond to the specific light input unit 2612. Since the light extends in a direction different from the direction perpendicular to the straight line connected to the specific light input portion 2612 in which the light is incident, the direction of the light reflected or refracted by the reflection recess 2613 is perpendicular to the surface of the light guide plate main body 2611. The direction is inclined with respect to the above direction, and it does not reach the eyes of the player sitting in front of the game area 5a, and the uncorresponding reflective recess 2613 does not appear to shine. In this way, when the specific light input unit 2612 is irradiated with light by the LED 2630, only the reflection recess 2613 corresponding to the specific light input unit 2612 reflects or refracts the light in the direction perpendicular to the surface of the light guide plate main body 2611. Then, it reaches the eyes of the player sitting in front of the game area 5a, and it is possible to show the player that only the pattern 2614 composed of the corresponding reflective recesses 2613 is displayed by light emission. ..

Therefore, by appropriately selecting the LED 2630 to emit light and changing the specific light input unit 2612 to be irradiated with light, the pattern 2614 emitted and displayed on the front light guide plate 2610 can be variously changed. By displaying the 2614 with light emission, it is possible to surprise and entertain the player, make it difficult for the player to get bored, and suppress a decrease in interest in the game. Since the plurality of patterns 2614 of the front light guide plate 2610 are formed so as to be sequentially related to each other, a plurality of LEDs 2630 (first LED group 2630a, second LED group 2630b, third LED group) are formed according to the gaming state. When the 2630c and the fourth LED group 2630d) are sequentially emitted, a plurality of patterns (first pattern 2614a, second pattern 2614b, third pattern 2614c, fourth pattern 2614d) are sequentially emitted and displayed on the front light guide plate 2610 for animation. It is possible to show the player a moving light emitting display like this.

Specifically, the first pattern 2614a, the second pattern 2614b, the third pattern 2614c, and the fourth pattern 2614d are displayed in the order of light emission, and after the last fourth pattern 2614d, the first pattern 2614a returns to the beginning again. When the light emission display is repeated in order from the beginning, the player can be shown the light emission display that keeps moving from the outside toward the center by the plurality of patterns 2614 of the front light guide plate 2610. It is possible to give the person the illusion that the momentum is concentrated, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the game by making the person think that there is something good. On the other hand, on the contrary, the fourth pattern 2614d, the third pattern 2614c, the second pattern 2614b, and the first pattern 2614a are displayed in the order of light emission, and after the last first pattern 2614a, the first pattern 2614a is returned to the beginning and the second pattern is displayed again. When the light emission display is repeated in order from the four patterns 2614d, the player can be shown the light emission display that keeps moving from the center to the outside by the plurality of pictures of the light guide plate. It is possible to make the person have the illusion that it spreads from the center or that it is moving forward, and it is possible to make the player feel that the gaming state will change. In this way, since it is possible to show the player a moving light emitting display like an animation, the moving light emitting display by the front light guide plate 2610, which has never been seen in the pachinko machine 1 so far, is strong against the player. It can give an impact, can strongly attract the interest of the player, and can make the player think that an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous will occur. It is possible to raise expectations and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the front light guide plate 2610 is mounted in the frame of the center accessory 2500 in which the center accessory 2500 is attached in the center of the front view game area 5a, even if the pattern 2614 is emitted by the LED 2630, it emits light. The displayed pattern 2614 does not interfere with the game in the game area 5a, and the area where the game is actually performed can be visually recognized from the player side in a good state, making the game difficult to see. It is possible to prevent the player from giving a feeling of distrust and to enjoy the game in a good condition.

Further, since the light guide plate main body 2611 of the front light guide plate 2610 is fitted into the fixing recess 2621 of the reflector 2620, the front light guide plate 2610 and the reflector 2620 are compared with the case where the light guide plate main body 2611 of the front light guide plate 2610 is attached by two members as in the conventional case. It is possible to eliminate the rattling between the two LEDs 2630 and the front light guide plate 2610, and the plurality of LEDs 2630 can be reliably positioned at a desired position. Therefore, since the LED 2630 can be reliably positioned with respect to the specific light input unit 2612 of the front light guide plate 2610, the light from the LED 2630 can be reliably irradiated to the corresponding specific light input unit 2612, and only the intended pattern 2614 can be emitted. It is possible to reliably display light emission.

Further, since the pattern 2614 is composed of a plurality of reflection recesses 2613 extending in a direction perpendicular to the straight line connected to the specific light input unit 2612, the plurality of specific light input units 2612 are formed on the light guide plate main body 2611. It can be arranged on a specific side (here, the upper side) on the peripheral edge, and by arranging a plurality of specific light receiving units 2612 on the upper side of the light guide plate main body 2611, the front cover 2650 (reflector 2620 and a plurality of LEDs 2630) is guided. It can be arranged only on the upper side of the light plate main body 2611. As a result, the front cover (frame body) is provided over the entire circumference of the light guide plate main body 2611 without the outer periphery of the light guide plate main body 2611 being surrounded by the front cover 2650 (reflector 2620 and a plurality of LEDs 2630). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the effect image and the decorative body of the effect display device 1600 arranged at the rear from being partitioned, so that the effect image and the like can be easily seen from the player side, and the player can see the effect image. It is possible to entertain the production image in a good state and suppress the deterioration of the interest, and it is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 with a feeling of openness because there is no frame-shaped partition in the game area 5a in the front view. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 have an appealing power that enhances the appearance in the game area 5a and strongly attracts the attention of the player.

Further, as described above, since a single front light guide plate 2610 can display a plurality of (four in this case) patterns 2614 by light emission, it is not necessary to use a plurality of light guide plates as in the conventional case, and a plurality of light guide plates are used. Since the dimension in the front-rear direction related to the light emission display of the picture 2614 can be made as small (thin) as possible and the front light guide plate 2610 is attached to the center accessory 2500, the front light guide plate 2610 can be moved to the player side. The position can be set as close as possible, and it is possible to easily secure a wide space behind the front light guide plate 2610. Therefore, since a large space can be secured on the rear side of the front light guide plate 2610, the lower movable effect unit 3100, the upper rear movable effect unit 3200, the upper front movable effect unit 3300, etc. can be secured on the rear side of the front light guide plate 2610. Can be arranged, thereby improving the appearance in the game area 5a and making the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to the player, and in addition to the effect of the light emitting display of the pattern 2614, the lower movable effect. By performing movable effects with the unit 3100, the upper rear movable effect unit 3200, the upper front movable effect unit 3300, etc., it is possible to provide a variety of effects to the player, entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest. be able to.

Further, since the front light guide plate 2610 is attached to the frame-shaped center accessory 2500, the peripheral edge of the front light guide plate 2610 (reflector 2620) can be matched by matching the peripheral edge of the front light guide plate 2610 with the frame of the center accessory 2500. And a plurality of LEDs 2630) can be made difficult to see from the player side, and it can be made difficult for the player to notice the existence of the front light guide plate 2610. Therefore, when the pattern 2614 is displayed by light emission, the front light guide plate is displayed. It is possible to give a strong impact to a player who thought that 2610 does not exist and surprise him, and to entertain the light emission display of multiple patterns 2614 by the front light guide plate 2610 and suppress the decline in interest. it can.

Further, since the front cover 2650 hides the plurality of LEDs 2630 and the reflector 2620 from the player side, it is possible to prevent the reflector 2620 and the like from being visible and the appearance in the game area 5a from being deteriorated. , The appearance in the game area 5a can be improved, the appealing power to the player can be enhanced, and the pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as the pachinko machine to be played. It is possible to entertain the game and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the front cover 2650 hides the plurality of LEDs 2630 from the player side, it is possible to make it difficult for the player to notice the existence of the front light guide plate 2610 using the plurality of LEDs 2630. By making the picture 2614 of the front light guide plate 2610 emit light, the player can be greatly surprised by the light emission display that the player did not anticipate, and the light emission display of the picture 2614 can be enjoyed, and the player can enjoy the light emission display. It is possible to make people think that there is something good about the game, raise expectations for the game, and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the effect display device 1600 capable of displaying the effect image is provided behind the front light guide plate 2610, the light emission display of a plurality of different patterns 2614 by the front light guide plate 2610 and the effect image by the effect display device 1600. Since it is possible to show the player a combined effect, it is possible to perform various effects by appropriately combining them, and it is possible to make the player less likely to get bored, and the front light guide plate 2610 and the effect display device 1600. It is possible to entertain the player by the production by the above, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest in the game.

Further, since the effect display device 1600 is arranged behind the front light guide plate 2610, the distance from the player seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 to the front light guide plate 2610 and the distance to the effect display device 1600 Is different, it is possible to give a sense of depth and a three-dimensional effect to the luminescent patterns 2614 by displaying the effect images related to the plurality of patterns 2614 luminescently displayed on the front light guide plate 2610. , It is possible to show the player a production (display production) that can strongly attract the interest of the player, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in the interest in the game.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game board 5 having the game area 5a has a left slider 3212 that moves in the vertical direction and an upper rear left decorative body 3220 in which decorations are formed on the right slider 3232. An upper rear left decorative substrate and an upper rear right decorative substrate on which a plurality of LEDs for illuminating the upper rear right decorative body 3240, the upper rear left decorative body 3220, and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are mounted are attached. Therefore, the weight applied to the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 is heavy, and the force for moving the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 downward due to gravity acts greatly. In this state, when the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) is transported or the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) is installed in the island facility of the game hall, the pachinko machine 1 is tilted or vibrates in the pachinko machine 1. When a force for moving the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 further acts, the upper rear left drive motor 3214, the upper rear right drive motor 3234, the left slider 3212, and the left slider 3212. Since the clutch mechanism 3250 is provided between the right slider 3232 (upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240), the clutch mechanism 3250 is caused by the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 trying to descend. Even if the output member 3253 on the output side of the above is about to rotate, the roller 3254 is pressed against the inner surface of the accommodating case 3251 by the cam surface 3253b of the output member 3253, and the roller 3254 is moved between the inner surface of the accommodating case 3251 and the cam surface 3253b. In the bitten state, a force for rotating the storage case 3251 acts on the plurality of rollers 3254. At this time, since the outer peripheral side of the accommodating case 3251 is tightened by the tightening spring 3255, frictional resistance is generated between the accommodating case 3251 and the tightening spring 3255, and the accommodating case is interposed via the plurality of rollers 3254. The frictional resistance generated between the accommodating case 3251 and the tightening spring 3255 resists the force for rotating the 3251, so that the accommodating case 3251 does not rotate and the rotation of the output member 3253 is locked. It becomes a state. In this way, output is performed according to the rotational load from the output member 3253 side (upper rear left decorative body 3220 side and upper rear right decorative body 3240 side) to the upper rear left drive motor 3214 side and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 side. Since the rotation of the member 3253 is locked, it is possible to restrict the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 from descending arbitrarily. Therefore, since the clutch mechanism 3250 can lock the movement of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are arbitrary during transportation or installation. By moving to, it is possible to prevent the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 from colliding with other members at the moving end and damaging the left slider 3212, the right slider 3232 and other members, and the player can prevent the player from being damaged. In addition, the movable effect of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be surely enjoyed and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

Further, when the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5) is shipped at the manufacturing factory, even if the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are shipped in the state of the origin position, the upper rear left by the clutch mechanism 3250. Since it is possible to prevent the decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 from moving without permission, the origin adjustment of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 when installed in the island facility of the game hall. It is not necessary to perform the above, the labor required for installing the pachinko machine 1 can be saved, and the burden on the installation can be reduced.

Further, when installing or maintaining the pachinko machine 1 (game board 5), the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are moved from the regular positions (origin position) for some reason. In this case, when the operator manually moves the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 to the proper positions, the clutch mechanism 3250 uses a tightening spring as a torque limiter on the outer peripheral side of the accommodating case 3251. By tightening with 3255, the rotation on the output side is locked according to the load of rotation so that the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 do not move. An even stronger force is applied (acting) on the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 in an attempt to move the 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 to rotate the storage case 3251 via a plurality of rollers 3254. When the force is greater than the frictional resistance generated between the accommodating case 3251 and the tightening spring 3255, slippage occurs between the accommodating case 3251 and the tightening spring 3255 against the frictional resistance. The storage case 3251 will rotate, and the output member 3253 will rotate together with the storage case 3251 to release the lock, and the rotation of the output member 3253 will be performed via the input member 3252 on the upper rear left drive motor 3214 side and. Since it is transmitted to the upper rear right drive motor 3234 side, the strong force acting on the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 is applied to the upper rear left drive motor 3214 side and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 side. It is possible to prevent the upper rear left decorative body 3220, the upper rear right decorative body 3240, the clutch mechanism 3250, and the like from being damaged.

Further, the upper rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right unit 3230 of the upper rear left unit 3210 in the upper rear movable production unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 according to the game state that changes as the game is performed in the game area 5a. When the upper rear right drive motor 3234 is driven, its rotation is transmitted via the clutch mechanism 3250, and the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 attached to the left base 3211 and the right base 3231 are in the front view game area 5a. Since the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240, which move downward from the upper part of the inside and are attached to the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232, are lowered, respectively, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear left decorative body 3220 The lowering (appearance) of the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can surprise the player, and the player is made to pay attention to the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240, and the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear It is possible to entertain the movement and decoration of the right decorative body 3240, and it seems that there is something good for the player by lowering the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240. It is possible to raise the expectation for the game and suppress the decline in the interest.

At this time, a clutch mechanism 3250 is provided between the upper rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 and the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 (upper rear left decorative body 3220 and upper rear right decorative body 3240), respectively. Therefore, vibration from the effect operation unit 301 and other movable decorative bodies that can be operated by the player, left slider 3212 and right slider 3232, upper rear left decorative body 3220, upper rear right decorative body 3240, and upper part. Even if the output member 3253 on the output side of the clutch mechanism 3250 tries to rotate due to the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 trying to descend due to gravity acting on the rear left decorative substrate and the upper rear right decorative substrate, the output member 3253 The roller 3254 is pressed against the inner surface of the accommodating case 3251 by the cam surface 3253b of the above, and the roller 3254 is engaged between the inner surface of the accommodating case 3251 and the cam surface 3253b. A force to rotate it will act. At this time, since the outer peripheral side of the accommodating case 3251 is tightened by the tightening spring 3255, frictional resistance is generated between the accommodating case 3251 and the tightening spring 3255, and the accommodating case is interposed via the plurality of rollers 3254. The frictional resistance generated between the accommodating case 3251 and the tightening spring 3255 resists the force for rotating the 3251, so that the accommodating case 3251 does not rotate and the rotation of the output member 3253 is locked. It becomes a state. In this way, output is performed according to the rotational load from the output member 3253 side (upper rear left decorative body 3220 side and upper rear right decorative body 3240 side) to the upper rear left drive motor 3214 side and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 side. Since the rotation of the member 3253 is locked, it is possible to restrict the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 from descending arbitrarily, and the upper rear left decoration 3220 and the upper rear left decoration 3220 via the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232. It is possible to prevent the upper rear right decorative body 3240 from making unexpected movements (falling), and the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 make unintended movements, which makes the player feel distrustful. It is possible to prevent the player from giving the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 to enjoy the movement of the upper rear left decorative body 3240 and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, as described above, even if the upper rear left decorative body 3220 side and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 side try to descend, the rotation of the output member 3253 can be restricted and locked by the clutch mechanism 3250. Since the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be stopped at an arbitrary height position via the right slider 3232, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are various. It is possible to show the player a variety of production patterns that stop ascending and descending at the position, making it difficult for the player to get bored with the movable production of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240, and suppressing the decline in interest. Can be made to.

Further, since the clutch mechanism 3250 is provided, even if the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are stopped at arbitrary positions in the vertical direction via the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232, the upper rear left decorative body 3240 is provided. The drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 can be prevented from being loaded, and the upper rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 can be prevented from being damaged at an early stage due to overload, and the upper part can be prevented from being damaged. It is possible to avoid interruption of the game due to damage to the rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234, prevent the player from being uncomfortable, and suppress the deterioration of the player's interest in the game. be able to.

Further, as shown in FIG. 116 (d), two rollers 3254 are inserted between the protruding portions 3252a between the inner surface of the housing case 3251 and the cam surface 3253b, and the two rollers 3254 are each connected by the lock spring 3260. When the protrusions 3252a, which are close to each other, are urged, the rollers 3254 are immediately applied when a force for rotating the output member 3253 is applied from the upper rear left decorative body 3220 side and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 side. Can be engaged between the cam surface 3253b of the output member 3253 and the inner surface of the storage case 3251, and the lock is released after rotation from the upper rear left decorative body 3220 side and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 side acts. The rotation of the output member 3253 up to this point can be reduced as much as possible. As a result, when the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 are moved downward by the upper rear left drive motor 3214 and the upper rear right drive motor 3234, the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232 are smoothly lowered without jerking. Therefore, the player does not feel uncomfortable with the movement of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240, and enjoys the movable effect by the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240. It is possible to suppress a decrease in the interest of the player in the game.

Further, since the clutch mechanism 3250 has a relatively simple configuration using a housing case 3251, an input member 3252, an output member 3253, a plurality of rollers 3254, and the like, the clutch mechanism is provided with two planetary gear mechanisms. By reducing the size of the clutch mechanism 3250, the space for arranging the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 (or other members) can be increased in comparison with the above. It is possible to make it easier to secure, and the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be relatively enlarged and conspicuous, and the large upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be used. It is possible to make the pachinko machine 1 having a high appeal to the player by strongly attracting the interest of the player.

Further, since the upper rear left unit 3210 and the upper rear right unit 3230 having the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are provided, respectively, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the respective upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are provided according to the game state. By appropriately raising and lowering the upper rear right decorative body 3240 via the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232, respectively, the two upper rear left decorative bodies 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 play a movable effect of various patterns. It is possible to show it to a person, make it difficult for the player to get bored, and suppress a decline in the interest in the game. At this time, since the upper rear left unit 3210 and the upper rear right unit 3230 each have a clutch mechanism 3250, as described above, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240, respectively. Since the clutch moves smoothly, it is possible to entertain the player with the movements of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240, and it is possible to suppress the deterioration of the player's interest in the game.

Further, when the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 of the upper rear left unit 3210 and the upper rear right unit 3230 are moved downward according to the game state, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper portion are moved downward. By bringing the rear right decorative bodies 3240 into contact with each other, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be combined to form a large decorative body. By doing so, a strong impact can be given to the player, the player can be entertained, and an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous to the player due to the appearance of a large decorative body (for example, " It is possible to make people think that a big hit game) will occur, raise expectations for the game, and suppress a decline in interest. When the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are in contact with each other and united, they try to move the upper rear right decorative body 3240 or the upper rear left decorative body 3220 on the other side by contacting each other. Since each of them is equipped with a clutch mechanism 3250, a force for moving the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 (from the output side) Even if a force (force to rotate) acts, the roller 3254 is caught between the cam surface 3253b of the output member 3253 and the inner surface of the storage case 3251, and the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240. The movement of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be prevented from moving due to the contact between the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear left decorative body 3240 due to the reaction of the contact. It is also possible to prevent the upper rear right decorative body 3240 from returning, and the player can surely entertain the player with a movable effect in which the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 are brought into contact with each other to reduce the interest. It can be suppressed.

Further, it is possible to illuminate the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 by emitting light of a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper rear left decorative board and the upper rear right decorative board according to the game state. Therefore, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be made to stand out and attract the player's attention strongly, and the decoration and movement of the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be made. The upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be decorated with light emission to make the player think that there is something good for the game. It is possible to raise the expectation for the LED and suppress the decline in interest. Further, by providing the upper rear left decorative substrate and the upper rear right decorative substrate, the weight related to the left base 3211 and the right base 3231 increases, and the gravity and inertial force acting on the left base 3211 and the right base 3231 increase. Further, as described above, since the clutch mechanism 3250 is provided, the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 can be reliably stopped via the left base 3211 and the right base 3231. The upper rear left decorative substrate and the upper rear right decorative substrate can prevent the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240, which can be light-emittingly decorated, from unintentionally moving, and the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear left decorative body 3240 and It is possible to make the upper rear right decorative body 3240 perform a desired movement with a high effect, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, in the clutch mechanism 3250, the accommodating case 3251 is tightened by the tightening spring 3255, and the tightening spring 3255 and the accommodating case 3251 are accommodated in the accommodating recess 3256a of the main body housing 3256. The 3253 is rotated and the roller 3254 is pressed against the inner surface of the accommodating case 3251 by the cam surface 3253b of the output member 3253 to engage the roller 3254 between the inner surface of the accommodating case 3251 and the cam surface 3253b of the output member 3253. Therefore, when a force for rotating the housing case 3251 acts via a plurality of rollers 3254, the force (torque) for rotating the housing case 3251 is the frictional resistance due to the tightening force of the tightening spring 3255. If it is larger than, slippage occurs between the accommodating case 3251 and the tightening spring 3255, and the accommodating case 3251 rotates. Then, as the accommodating case 3251 rotates, the output member 3253 rotates via the plurality of rollers 3254, and the circumferential end of the transmission groove 3253a of the output member 3253 comes into contact with the protruding portion 3252a of the input member 3252. The rotation is transmitted to the input member 3252. As a result, when the output member 3253 is to be rotated with a strong force from the output side, slippage occurs between the tightening spring 3255 tightening the accommodation case 3251 and the accommodation case 3251, and the rotational force is applied to the upper rear left. Since it can be transmitted to the drive motor 3214 side and the upper rear right drive motor 3234 side and escaped, the roller 3254 cannot be strongly bitten and unlocked, or the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decoration. It is possible to prevent the body 3240, the output member 3253, and the storage case 3251 from being damaged, and it is possible to embody the pachinko machine 1 that surely achieves the above-mentioned effects.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in a normal state, in the front view game area 5a, the lower left side elevating base 3151 and the lower right side on the left and right sides of the lower center elevating base 3121 and the lower center elevating base 3121. After lowering the elevating base 3171 respectively, the left side rotating decoration body 3153 and the right side rotating decoration body 3153 and the right side rotating decoration body are provided by sliders and the like (slide mechanism) attached to the lower left side elevating base 3151 and the lower right side elevating base 3171, respectively. The 3173 is slid outward in the left-right direction, and the pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation unit 301 attached to the upper surface of the plate unit 200 below the game area 5a is retracted downward. In this normal state, the effect image displayed by the effect display device 1600 can be seen in the center of the front view game area 5a, and the lower front center decoration 3111 (lower rear center decoration) is located in the center in the left-right direction at the lower part of the game area 5a. The four rotating ornaments 3126 arranged in the left-right direction of the body 3122) and the central movable unit 3125 attached to the upper part thereof can be seen, and the four rotating ornaments 3126 are separated from the left and right ends of the row to the outside in the left-right direction. The left side rotating decoration body 3153 and the right side rotating decoration body 3173 and the left sub side rotating decoration body 3155 and the right sub side rotating decoration body 3175 can be seen above the left side rotating decoration body 3153 and the right side rotating decoration body 3173 of the lower left side effect unit 3150 and the lower right side effect unit 3170, respectively. Further, on the upper surface of the dish unit 200 below the game area 5a, an annular rotation operation unit 302 and a pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring can be seen as an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player. ing.

In this state, when the game state changes due to the game being played in the game area 5a (the first special lottery result or the first special lottery result drawn by accepting the game ball B into the first start port 2002 or the second start port 2004). (Ii) (depending on the result of the special lottery), the four rotating ornaments 3126 arranged side by side on the upper side of the lower front central ornament 3111 rotate, or the four rotating ornaments arranged side by side by the lower center elevating base 3121. The 3126 rises together with the lower rear center decoration 3122, the four rotating decorations 3126 raised by the lower center elevating base 3121 rotate, and the lower left slide drive motor and lower right side of the lower left side effect unit 3150. A pair of left side rotating decorations 3153 and right side rotating decorations 3173 slide in the left-right direction by a lower right slide drive motor or the like (sliding mechanism) of the effect unit 3170, or left side rotating decorations 3153 and right side rotating decorations 3153. The four rotating ornaments 3126 and the left where the left side rotating ornament 3153 and the right side rotating ornament 3173 are raised by the slide mechanism and the lower left side elevating base 3151 and the lower right side elevating base 3171. It is possible to show the player a movable effect such that the sub-side rotating decoration 3155 and the right sub-side rotating decoration 3175 are lined up in the left-right direction, and the left sub-side rotating decoration 3155 and the right sub-side rotating decoration 3175 rotate. Therefore, the player is made to pay attention to the central movable unit 3125 (four rotating decorations 3126), the left side rotating decoration 3153 and the right side rotating decoration 3173, the left subside rotating decoration 3155 and the right subside rotating decoration 3175, and the like. At the same time, it is possible to enjoy the movable production by them.

Further, when the lower center elevating base 3121 is located at the descending end, the lower rear central decorative body 3122 is made to emit light and the lower front central decorative body 3111 is made to emit light, so that a downward arrow is emitted and the lower center is raised / lowered. By raising the base 3121 and causing the lower rear center decoration 3122 and the lower front center decoration 3111 to emit light by a plurality of LEDs on the lower center decoration substrate, a large downward arrow can be displayed by emitting light, or a pair of lower left side elevating and lowering. By raising the base 3151 and the lower right side elevating base 3171 to make the lower left side decorative body 3152 and the lower right side decorative body 3172 emit light, a larger downward arrow can be emitted and displayed. The effect can also entertain the player, and the downward arrow displayed by the light emitting can guide the player's line of sight to the lower effect operation unit 301, so that the player can operate the effect operation unit 301. Can be encouraged. Then, in the effect operation unit 301, the rotation operation unit 302 rotates, the player rotates the rotation operation unit 302, or presses the pressing operation unit 303, thereby participating in the player participation type production. Can be entertained.

Therefore, since it is possible to perform various movable effects, light emitting effects, and player participation type effects as described above, it is possible to provide a player with various patterns of effects by appropriately combining them. , It is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored, and it is also possible to make it difficult for the player to predict the production pattern. Therefore, it is possible to surprise the player by performing an unexpected production. It is possible to entertain and suppress the decline in interest in the game.

Further, four rotating ornaments 3126, a pair of left side rotating ornaments 3153 and a right side rotating ornament 3173, and a pair of left subside rotating ornaments 3155 and a right subside rotating ornament 3175 are extended in the left-right direction, respectively. It is designed to rotate independently around the axis, and has four decorative parts 3127, 3154, and 3156, which are different from each other in the circumferential direction. Therefore, when they are rotated, the player side is affected. The facing surfaces (decorative portion 3127, decorative portion 3154, decorative portion 3156) can be changed, and the appearance (decoration) in the game area 5a can be variously changed to entertain the player.

Further, when the four rotating decorations 3126, the pair of left side rotating decorations 3153 and the right side rotating decoration 3173, and the pair of left subside rotating decorations 3155 and the right subside rotating decoration 3175 are stopped rotating, By stopping the rotation of each of the decorative parts 3127, the decorative part 3154, and the decorative part 3156 facing the player side so as to be a predetermined combination, various messages can be displayed to the player as decorations. Since it can be provided, there is a possibility that an advantageous gaming state (for example, "big hit game") in which the player is advantageous may occur due to the combination of the decorative portion 3127, the decorative portion 3154, and the decorative portion 3156 that are stopped rotating. By representing (expected value), each of the four rotating ornaments 3126, the pair of left side rotating ornaments 3153 and the right side rotating ornament 3173, and the pair of left subside rotating ornaments are represented according to the gaming state. When the 3155 and the right sub-side rotating decorative body 3175 are rotated, the player can be thrilled depending on whether or not the combination of the decorative portion 3127, the decorative portion 3154, and the decorative portion 3156, which have higher expectations, stops rotating. , It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, since the lower rear central decorative body 3122 has a plurality of light emitting regions 3122a arranged in a row in the vertical direction and each of which can emit light independently, if the plurality of light emitting regions 3122a are simultaneously emitted, one light emitting region 3122a is provided. A downward arrow can be displayed to emit light, and if a plurality of light emitting regions 3122a are repeatedly emitted from the top, the player's line of sight is directed to the lower effect operation unit 301 by the light emission flowing from the top to the bottom. It can be easily guided, and the operation of the effect operation unit 301 can be further promoted, so that the player can surely operate the effect operation unit 301.

Further, since the effect operation unit 301 has an annular rotation operation unit 302 and a pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring, the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is performed by the player. Since the pressing operation of the or pressing operation unit 303 can be performed, the pattern of the player participation type production can be diversified by appropriately combining the operations of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303. It is possible to prevent the decline of interest by making it difficult to get bored.

Further, since the pressing operation unit 303 is arranged in the ring of the annular rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 is surrounded by the rotation operation unit 302, the diameter of the rotation operation unit 302 should be increased. The large rotation operation unit 302 can strongly attract the player's attention. Therefore, as described above, when the player's line of sight is guided downward by the light emitting display of the downward arrow by the lower rear central decorative body 3122 and the lower front central decorative body 3111, the rotation operation unit 302 (pressing operation unit 303). ) Can be easily noticed, so that the player can be strongly urged to operate the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303, and enjoy the operation of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303. It is possible to suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the pressing operation unit 303 is arranged in the ring of the annular rotation operation unit 302, as described above, the downward arrow emission display by the lower rear central decoration body 3122 and the lower front center decoration body 3111 is displayed. When the player looks below the arrow, the rotating rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be seen, so that the rotation speed of the rotation operation unit 302 may cause an advantageous gaming state for the player. At the same time, the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 can be strongly urged, the pressing operation unit 303 can be reliably pressed, and the expectation for the game can be increased. It is possible to suppress the decline in the interest of the person.

Further, since the pressing operation unit 303 can be in a state of being lowered and a state of protruding upward, the pressing operation unit 303 can be seen to be large and conspicuous when the pressing operation unit 303 is in a protruding state. It is possible to make the player think that there is a high possibility that an advantageous gaming state will occur in which the player is advantageous. On the other hand, since the pressing operation unit 303 is less noticeable when the pressing operation unit 303 is lowered, it is possible to make the player think that the possibility of an advantageous gaming state is low, and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made to think. Depending on the advancing / retreating position of, the player can be made to suggest the possibility (expected value) that an advantageous gaming state may occur.

Further, since the possibility (expected value) that an advantageous gaming state occurs for the player can be suggested by the advancing / retreating position of the pressing operation unit 303, as described above, the lower rear central decorative body 3122 and the lower front When the downward arrow is emitted by the central decorative body 3111 or the like, the player can be thrilled depending on whether or not the pressing operation unit 303 protrudes, which raises the player's expectation and the pressing operation. The pressing operation of the unit 303 can be enjoyed, the player is less likely to get bored, and the deterioration of the interest can be suppressed.

Further, since the effect display device 1600 capable of displaying the effect image in the center of the front view game area 5a is provided, in addition to the game performed in the game area 5a, the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 is used. It is also possible to entertain the player, make it difficult for the player to get bored, and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the effect display device 1600 is arranged in the center of the front view game area 5a behind the lower movable effect unit 3100, the lower center elevating base 3121 is used together with the lower rear center decorative body 3122 according to the game state. The four rotating ornaments 3126 can be raised, or the left side rotating ornament 3153 and the right side rotating ornament can be raised together with the lower left side ornament 3152 and the lower right side ornament 3172 by the lower left side elevating base 3151 and the lower right side elevating base 3171. When the body 3173 is raised, a part of the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 is blocked by the four rotating decorative bodies 3126, the left side rotating decorative body 3153, the right side rotating decorative body 3173, and the like. Since it is possible to make the player notice the rise of the four rotating decorations 3126, the left side rotating decoration 3153, the right side rotating decoration 3173, etc., it is possible to surely show the player the effect using them. It is possible to entertain the player and suppress the decline in interest.

Further, since the effect image can be displayed in the center of the front view game area 5a, as described above, the lower front center decoration body 3111, the lower rear center decoration body 3122, the lower left side decoration body 3152, and the lower right side When the decorative body 3172 or the like emits a downward arrow to urge the player to operate the lower effect operation unit 301, the effect display device 1600 is provided with an effect image prompting the operation of the effect operation unit 301 or an effect operation unit. By displaying an effect image explaining the operation of the 301, an effect image showing the relationship between the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state in which the player is advantageous and the effect operation unit 301, and the like, the effect operation unit 301 is displayed to the player. It is possible to strongly encourage participation in the player-participation-type production that operates the player, and it is possible to make the production operation unit 301 easier to operate, so that the player-participation-type production can be enjoyed and the decline in interest can be suppressed. ..

Further, as described above, since various combinations of effects can be shown to the player, for example, the lower center elevating base 3121, the lower left side elevating base 3151, and the lower right side elevating base 3171 are usually lowered. From the state, when the left and right left side rotation decorations 3153 and the right side rotation decorations 3173 are moved to the center side in the left-right direction by the slide mechanism such as the lower left slide drive motor and the lower right slide drive motor, they are arranged side by side. The left side rotating decoration 3153 and the right side rotating decoration 3173 are located on the left and right sides of the row of the two rotating decorations 3126, and the four rotating decorations 3126 and the pair of left side rotating decorations 3153 and the right side rotating decoration are located. Since the body 3173 and the body 3173 are arranged side by side, the player can be surprised and the player can be entertained.

In this state, the lower center elevating base 3121, the lower left side elevating base 3151, and the lower right side elevating base 3171 raise the four rotating decorations 3126, the pair of left side rotating decorations 3153, and the right side rotating decoration 3173. , Four rotating ornaments 3126, a pair of left side rotating ornaments 3153 and a right side rotating ornament 3173, and a pair of left subside rotating ornaments 3155 and a right subside rotating ornament 3175 are arranged in a row in the left-right direction. Since it is possible to show the player a large horizontal decoration that crosses the game area 5a, it can have a strong impact on the player, and I think there is something good about it. It is possible to raise expectations for the game.

Then, the four rotating ornaments 3126, the pair of left side rotating ornaments 3153 and the right side rotating ornament 3173, and the pair of left subside rotating ornaments 3155 and the right subside rotating ornament 3175 are left and right in an appropriate combination. When they are rotated and then stopped rotating in a lined state, the player is thrilled depending on whether or not the combination of each decorative portion 3127, decorative portion 3154, and decorative portion 3156 stops rotating in the desired combination. It is possible to entertain the rotation (movable effect) of the four rotating decorative bodies 3126 and the like, and when each decorative portion 3127 and the like are stopped rotating in a desired combination, the gaming state is advantageous to the player. It is possible to be convinced of the occurrence of, and it is possible to raise the expectation for the occurrence of an advantageous gaming state and suppress the decline in interest.

After that, the lower rear central decorative body 3122 (lower front central decorative body 3111), the lower left side decorative body 3152, and the lower right side decorative body 3172 emit a downward arrow to display the downward arrow, thereby directing the player's line of sight downward. It can be guided to the unit 301, and the player can be urged to operate the effect operation unit 301.

At this time, since it is possible to suggest the possibility (expected value) that an advantageous gaming state may occur depending on the size of the downward arrow displayed by light emission, if the arrow displayed by light emission is small, it continues to the player. It is possible to make people think that it can be recovered by operating the effect operation unit 301, and if the arrow displayed by the light emission is small, it is possible to be sure that an advantageous gaming state has occurred. Therefore, in any case, the expectation for the game should be increased. It is possible to entertain the subsequent operation of the production operation unit 301 and suppress the deterioration of the interest.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, as a main control board capable of controlling the progress of the game, an effect is produced based on a command from the main control board 1310 included in the main control unit 1300 of FIG. As an effect control board capable of controlling the progress, a peripheral control board 1510 included in the effect control unit 1500 of FIG. 12 is provided. The pachinko machine 1 further includes a peripheral data ROM board 1520 of FIG. 119 as a ROM board and a liquid crystal output board 1530 of FIG. 119 as a video signal output board. The peripheral data ROM board 1520 has the peripheral data ROM 1520a of FIG. 119 as a ROM in which control information (peripheral data) related to the effect based on the game specifications is stored in advance. The liquid crystal output board 1530 can output a signal compatible with the method of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600 of FIG. 101 to the effect display device 1600 as a display device.

Between the boards of the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520, as first connectors, a plug of the special connector SCN1 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 of FIG. 119 and a special connector provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 of FIG. 119 are provided. It is electrically connected to the SCN3 socket by a board-to-board connector that can be connected between boards. Between the boards of the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530, as a second connector different from the first connector, a plug of the special connector SCN2 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 of FIG. It is electrically connected to the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided in the above by the inter-board connector which can be connected between the boards.

The peripheral control board 1510 can control the progress of the effect by the control information (peripheral data) read from the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and can output the video signal to the liquid crystal output board 1530 by a plurality of types of methods. .. Examples of the plurality of types of video signal systems include an RGB system, an LVDS system, a MIPI system, an eDP system, and a clockless system. In the present embodiment, as a plurality of types of video signal systems, there are four systems (a total of four systems): one RGB system, two LVDS systems (first LVDS system, second LVDS system), and MIPI system. ) Is adopted.

The peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are housed in the peripheral control board box 1505 of FIG. 119 as the same board box.

In this way, the peripheral data ROM 1520a in which control information (peripheral data) related to the effect based on the game specifications is stored in advance is provided on a dedicated board called the peripheral data ROM board 1520 which is a separate board from the peripheral control board 1510, and the effect display device. A substrate that outputs a signal compatible with the method of the video signal input to the 1600 is provided on a dedicated substrate called a liquid crystal output substrate 1530, which is a separate substrate from the peripheral control substrate 1510. That is, the peripheral control board 1510 is adapted to the method of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600 unless it is modified according to the control information (peripheral data) related to the effect based on the game specifications and newly manufactured. Since it is not modified and newly manufactured, it can be configured as a common board that does not depend on the game specifications or the method of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600. As a result, it is not necessary to manufacture a plurality of types of peripheral control boards 1510 according to the game specifications and the method of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600, and the cost is reduced by manufacturing only the same peripheral control board 1510. Can contribute to. Therefore, the cost of the peripheral control board 1510 can be suppressed.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the payout device 580 of FIG. 77 is provided with one payout passage 580a to which the game ball B stored in the ball tank 552 of FIG. 77 is supplied. ing. The payout device 580 includes at least the payout motor 584 of FIG. 89 and the payout blade 589 of FIG. 89 as a ball feed rotating portion. The payout motor 584 is capable of rotating the rotation axis by 18 degrees as a predetermined angle according to the step drive. The payout blade 589 rotates via the drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the payout gear 588a of the payout gear member 588, in which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 constitutes the rotation transmission member. As a result, a plurality of ball accommodating portions 589b are formed at equal intervals (three are formed at equal intervals every 120 degrees) as ball receiving recesses capable of receiving and sending out the game balls B one by one. ..

The reduction ratio of the rotation transmission member is predetermined so that the number of step drives to the payout motor 584 corresponding to the delivery of one game ball B by the payout blade 589 is not an integer. Specifically, the reduction ratio n is set to the number of teeth Z0 (= 9) of the drive gear 585 / the number of teeth Z3 (= 24) of the payout gear 588a of the payout gear member 588 by calculation by mechanics. The rotation angle of the payout blade 589 can be detected by a plurality of detection pieces 588b of the payout gear member 588 as a light-shielding piece provided coaxially with the rotation axis of the payout blade 589. Specifically, the blade rotation detection sensor 590 can detect the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588.

As described above, the number of step drives to the payout motor 584 corresponding to the delivery of one game ball B by the payout blade 589 is determined in advance by the reduction ratio of the rotation transmission member, which is not an integer. The positioning position is different each time the ball is paid out. As a result, the contact positions between the game ball and the payout blade 589 are different each time, so that the positions where tar and dust are attached can be dispersed. Further, of course, if the reduction ratio n of the rotation transmission member described above is set so as to cause such a positioning error, the error is accumulated, but even if the error is accumulated every time one game ball is paid out, the payout blade 589 The rotation angle is detected by a plurality of detection pieces 588b of the payout gear member 588 of FIG. 89 provided coaxially with the rotation axis of the payout blade 589, and is reset when the accumulated error accumulates to some extent. As a result, the accuracy of the number of game balls to be paid out is guaranteed. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, the rotation position of the ball feed rotating portion that receives and sends out the game ball is changed each time the game ball is discharged to disperse the position where the tar and dust adhere to the sling and dust. On the other hand, it is possible to have a strong payout device 580.

Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the progress of the production based on the normal lottery result, the first special lottery result, or the second special lottery result as the lottery result by the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300. The peripheral control unit 1500 of FIG. 119 is provided as an effect control means capable of controlling the above. The peripheral control unit 1500 has at least a peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 of FIG. 119 as an effect information storage unit, a peripheral control IC 1510a provided in the peripheral control board 1510 of FIG. 119 as a main effect control unit, and a shield of FIG. 119. It is equipped with a metal shield plate 1540. The peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can store the effect information related to the effect. The peripheral control IC 1510a provided in the peripheral control board 1510 is based on various control information (peripheral data) as effect information read from the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and is used as a normal lottery result, a first special lottery result, or a second special lottery result. It is possible to control the progress of the production based on the lottery result. The metal shield plate 1540 is formed of a metal conductive member and has the ventilation hole 1540az shown in FIG. 119 as an opening.

The peripheral control IC 1510a provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 have established communication (serial communication) conforming to the SATA standard as communication by the serial method. The peripheral control unit 1500 is a transparent case formed of a non-conductive member (molded by a non-conductive resin), and has a peripheral control IC 1510a provided in the peripheral control board 1510 inside the peripheral control board box 1505 of FIG. The peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the data ROM board 1520 and the metal shield plate 1540 are housed in the peripheral control IC 1510a provided in the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520. A ventilation hole 1540az is formed as an opening at the position of the corresponding metal shield plate 1540d.

As described above, the peripheral control IC 1510a provided in the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the metal shield plate 1540 are formed of the non-conductive member (by the non-conductive resin). Since it is housed inside the transparent peripheral control board box 1505 (which is molded), communication (communications) conforming to the SATA standard between the peripheral control IC 1510a provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520. (Serial communication) can be performed in a state where it is not easily affected by noise by the shield 1540 formed of a conductive member made of metal. As a result, the peripheral control IC 1510a provided in the peripheral control board 1510 can accurately read various control information (peripheral data) which is production information from the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520. Therefore, various control information (peripheral data), which is the effect information, can be accurately read out.

[11. Another example]
It goes without saying that the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and can be implemented in various aspects as long as it belongs to the technical scope of the present invention.

For example, in the above-described embodiment, as a movable effect unit, a rotating decorative body 3126 is formed with a plurality (four) decorative portions 3127 that are rotatable around an axis extending to the left and right and are different from each other in the circumferential direction. Although four are provided coaxially with each other, the present invention is not limited to this, and a rotating decorative body in which a plurality of decorative parts that are rotatable around an axis extending vertically and are different from each other in the circumferential direction are formed. It may be provided with at least one, at least one rotating decorative body that can rotate around an axis extending in the front-rear direction, at least one movable decorative body that slides in the left-right direction, and the like. ..

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the clutch mechanism 3250 is used for the upper rear left decorative body 3220 and the upper rear right decorative body 3240 which move up and down via the left slider 3212 and the right slider 3232, but the present invention is limited thereto. A clutch mechanism 3250 may be provided between a movable decorative body that moves in the left-right direction, a movable decorative body that rotates around an axis extending in the front-rear direction, and a drive motor.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the clutch mechanism 3250 includes a housing case 3251, an input member 3252, an output member 3253, and a roller 3254, but the present invention is not limited to this, and the rotation from the drive motor. A deceleration unit that temporarily decelerates the speed and a speed conversion unit that shifts the decelerated rotation and transmits the decelerated rotation to the output side. It is composed of a first planetary gear mechanism having an impossible fixed ring gear, a second solar gear connected to the first sun gear, a second planetary gear, and a second planetary gear mechanism having a rotatable rotary ring gear. , A carrier having support shafts for supporting each of the first planet gear mechanism and the second planet gear mechanism is arranged on both sides, and a ring is provided between the first planet gear mechanism and the second planet gear mechanism. A difference in the number of teeth may be provided between at least one gear of the gear and the sun gear so that the rotation from the drive motor is reduced and transmitted to the rotary ring gear.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510 is provided with the plugs of the special connectors SCN1 and SCN2, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is provided with the socket of the special connector SCN3, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is provided with the socket of the special connector SCN4. However, it may be arranged so that the direction in which information or signals flow can be visually recognized. In such a case, the side that transmits information or signals can be a plug (or socket), and the side that receives information or signals can be a socket (or socket). For example, in the above-described embodiment, various control information (peripheral data) stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is transferred from the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the peripheral control board 1510, so that the peripheral data The ROM board 1520 is the transmitting side, and the peripheral control board 1510 is the receiving side. In such a case, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is provided with a special connector (or a special connector that serves as a socket) as a plug, and the peripheral control board 1510 is provided with a special connector (or a plug) that serves as a socket. Special connector) can be provided. Further, in the above-described embodiment, since the peripheral control board 1510 outputs a plurality of types of video signal methods to the liquid crystal output board 1530, the peripheral control board 1510 is the transmitting side and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is the receiving side. In such a case, the peripheral control board 1510 is provided with a special connector (or a special connector that serves as a socket) as a plug, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is provided with a special connector (or a plug) that serves as a socket. Special connector) can be provided.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are made of a non-conductive resin and are transparently molded, but the polycarbonate contains carbon and is conductive. It may be made of resin and may be molded in opaque black, or if the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are made of conductive resin, it may be molded in a translucent colored color. It may have been done. Even with this configuration, since the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are made of conductive resin, the peripheral control board described above is placed on the back surface side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a). By fixing various substrates such as 1510, peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and liquid crystal output substrate 1530 with metal pan screws, as described above, the circuit is grounded to the ground (GND) of these various substrates. Can be configured. As a result, the noise that has entered from the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 can be passed to the ground (GND) of various substrates as a circuit ground, and the noise can be removed.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the payout blade 589 is provided with a plurality of blade pieces 589a having an arc shape extending outward in a flat plate shape at intervals of an angle of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. However, four may be provided at intervals of 90 degrees in the circumferential direction. FIG. 126 is a modified example of the payout device, and is a cut-back cross-sectional view of the payout device provided with the payout blade 589 provided with four blade pieces 589a having an arc shape and provided with a radio wave sensor. FIG. 126 is a rear sectional view of the payout device of the payout unit corresponding to the above-mentioned FIG. 89 cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the payout blade, and has the same reference numerals as those in FIG. 89. When the payout blade 589 includes four blade pieces 589a having an arc shape, although not shown in FIG. 126, the above-mentioned payout gear member 588 is a flat plate-shaped detection piece having an arc shape extending outward. Four 588b are provided at intervals of 90 degrees in the circumferential direction, and the 90 degree region in the circumferential direction of the payout gear member 588 is set as the light shielding range in the 45 degree region where the detection piece 588b is formed. It is managed by a total of 18 steps of rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 and 9 steps of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 with the region of 45 degrees where the detection piece 588b is not formed as the light receiving range. As described above, the reduction ratio n is selected, and the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 rotates 18 steps with respect to the payout of one ball of the game ball B. In other words, when the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 rotates 18 steps, the drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, and the second transmission so that the payout blade 589, which rotates integrally with the payout gear member 588, can rotate 90 degrees. The reduction ratio n can be determined by selecting the number of teeth of the payout gear 588 and the payout gear 588 of the gear 587 and the payout gear member 588, respectively.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the payout device 580 is attached by a payout device main body 581 and a payout device rear lid 582 at the downstream end of the payout passage 580a, and includes a payout detection sensor 591 that detects the game ball B. However, a radio wave sensor that detects radio waves may be provided in the vicinity of the payout detection sensor 591. The payout detection sensor 591 uses a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch to detect the passage of the game ball B, but when affected by radio waves, the game ball B actually passes through. Nevertheless, it is possible to make it appear that the game ball B has not passed due to a malfunction. In this case, the payout control board 633 to which the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 is input determines that the payout of the game ball B is not completed based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591, and determines that the payout of the game ball B is not completed, and the payout motor. By controlling the excessive rotation of the rotation axis of 584, a large amount of the game ball B is paid out. In order to detect such a fraudulent act of illegally acquiring the game ball B (referred to as "radio wave goto"), as shown in FIG. 126, a radio wave sensor 594 is provided in the vicinity of the upper side of the payout detection sensor 591. Can be provided and configured in. When the payout control board 633 determines that an abnormal radio wave is being emitted based on the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 594, the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 594 is input to the payout control board 633. The rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is urgently stopped, and a radio wave goto notification command to that effect is transmitted to the main control board 1310. At this time, the payout control board 633 may be configured to output a radio wave goto notification signal to the hall computer via the external terminal board 558. When the main control board 1310 receives an 8-bit wide radio wave goto notification command from the payout control board 633, the main control board 1310 sets the radio wave goto notification command to an 8-bit width to a 16-bit width and sets the radio wave goto warning sound to the maximum volume. Along with flowing from various speakers, various LEDs are set to a warning notification light emitting mode (for example, a light emitting mode blinking in red), and the radio wave is shaped so that the radio wave goto can be notified and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. When the peripheral control board 1510 receives a radio wave goto notification command having a width of 16 bits, the effect display device 1600 displays a large message "An abnormality has occurred" and controls various LEDs to a warning notification light emitting mode. To do.

Instead of the radio wave sensor 594, a contact type ball passing sensor 594', which is a contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch, may be used. The detection signal from the contact type ball passing sensor 594'is input to the payout control board 633, and the payout control board 633 is divided into a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 and a detection signal from the contact type ball passing sensor 594'. Based on this, when the number of balls paid out from the game ball B does not match, it can be configured so that it can be determined that some kind of fraud has been performed. When the payout control board 633 determines that some kind of fraud has been performed, it urgently stops the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 and transmits a goto notification command to that effect to the main control board 1310. At this time, the payout control board 633 may be configured to output a goto notification signal to the hall computer via the external terminal board 558. When the main control board 1310 receives an 8-bit wide goto notification command from the payout control board 633, the main control board 1310 sets the goto notification command to an 8-bit width to a 16-bit width, sets the goto warning sound to the maximum volume, and sets the goto warning sound to the maximum volume from various speakers. Along with the flow, various LEDs are set to a warning notification light emission mode (for example, a light emission mode blinking in red), and the LED is shaped so that the goto can be notified and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. When the peripheral control board 1510 receives a goto notification command having a width of 16 bits, the effect display device 1600 displays a large message "An abnormality has occurred" and controls various LEDs in a warning notification light emitting mode. ..

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the payout motor 584 is a stepping motor, but it may be a DC motor. In this case, when the DC motor is step-driven, the rotation shaft is configured to step-rotate at 18 degrees as a predetermined angle accordingly. That is, the DC motor rotates its rotation axis by 18 degrees in one step rotation.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is transmitted via the drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the payout gear 588a of the payout gear member 588, which constitute the rotation transmission member. Although it was configured to decelerate and rotate the payout blade 589, the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 was rotated at a low speed to rotate a rotation transmission member (a plurality of gears (for example, the first transmission gear 586',, The speed may be increased and the payout blade 589 may be rotated via the second transmission gear 587'and the payout gear 588a')) of the payout gear member 588. In this way, the speed-up ratio of the rotation transmission member is determined in advance so that the number of step drives to the payout motor 584, which is commensurate with the delivery of one game ball by the payout blade 589, is not an integer. The positioning position is different each time one ball is paid out. As a result, the contact positions between the game ball and the payout blade 589 are different each time, so that the positions where tar and dust are attached can be dispersed. Further, of course, if the speed increase ratio of the rotation transmission member described above is set so as to cause such a positioning error, the error is accumulated, but even if the error is accumulated every time one game ball is paid out, the payout blade 589 The rotation angle is detected by a plurality of detection pieces 588b (light-shielding pieces) of the payout gear member 588 provided coaxially with the rotation axis of the payout blade 589, and is reset when the accumulated error accumulates to some extent. As a result, the accuracy of the number of game balls to be paid out is guaranteed. Therefore, even in the pachinko machine 1 in which the speed increase ratio of such a rotation transmission member is determined in advance, the rotation position of the payout blade 589 that receives and sends out the game ball is changed every time the game ball is paid out, and the tar and dust are changed. It is possible to have a payout device 580 that is strong against tar and dust by dispersing the positions where the deposits adhere.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are attached together with the metal shield plate 1540 at predetermined positions on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. In a state where the shield plate 1540 is sandwiched and fixed by the cover body 1501 and various substrates, a predetermined value is provided between the front surface of the various substrates (the surface facing the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. A space having a height distance dimension (14.8 mm in this embodiment) is formed, and two spaces are formed by arranging a metal shield plate 1540 in this space. One space is a distance dimension of a first predetermined height between the front surface of various substrates (the surface facing the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the back surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 (the present embodiment). Then, a distance dimension of a second predetermined height between the first space 1505a having (12 mm), the front surface of the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540, and the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a (in the present embodiment). It was composed of a second space 1505b having (1.6 mm). In other words, the distance dimension of the first predetermined height was formed to be larger than the distance dimension of the second predetermined height. When a large movable effect unit (an electric drive source and a drive mechanism capable of operating the movable effect body, and various sensors for detecting the origin position and the operation position) is arranged on the game board 5, and is in the depth direction. If there is a margin in the distance dimension of, the distance dimension of the first predetermined height and the distance dimension of the second predetermined height may be configured as the same predetermined height distance dimension, or the second predetermined height distance dimension may be configured. The distance dimension of the predetermined height may be made larger than the distance dimension of the first predetermined height. Even with this configuration, it is possible to take measures against electromagnetic noise by accommodating various electronic components and the like that are easily affected by electromagnetic noise in the first space 1505a, and heat in the second space 1505b. By not accommodating the various electronic components and the like that emit the above, the heat generated from the various electronic components and the like in the first space 1505a can be efficiently transferred to the second space 1505b via the metal shield plate 1540.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the metal shield plate 1540d is formed with a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1540az, so that the product number printed on the surface of the control ROM 1510b provided on the peripheral control board 1510. The model (or control number), the state of the IC pin of the control ROM 1510b, and the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.) can be visually recognized. The part number and model printed on the surface of the SDRAM 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, the state of the IC pins of the SDRAM 1510c1 and 1510c2, and the silk-printed contents on the peripheral control board 1510 (for example, the orientation of the IC, (Part number, pin number, etc.) can be visually recognized, and the part number and model (or control number) printed on the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the IC pin of the peripheral data ROM 1520a. And the contents silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (for example, the number of pins of the connector, the orientation of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.) can be visually recognized. However, it is also possible to provide a rectangular opening at the position of the metal shield plate 1540d corresponding to the control ROM 1510b, the SDRAM 1510c1, 1510c2, and the peripheral data ROM 1520a. In addition to the control ROM 1510b, the SDRAMs 1510c1, 1510c2, and the peripheral data ROM 1520a, a rectangular opening may be provided at the position of the metal shield plate 1540d so that the surroundings can be visually recognized. .. Further, the shape of the inter-board connector (special connector SCN1 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520) so that the connection state of the inter-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be confirmed. It is also possible to provide a rectangular opening at the position of the metal shield plate 1540d corresponding to a larger area (a shape composed of the special connector SCN3), or to provide a peripheral control board 1510 and a liquid crystal output board. From the shape of the inter-board connector (the shape composed of the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 on the liquid crystal output board 1530) so that the connection state of the inter-board connector with the 1530 can be confirmed. It can also be configured to provide a rectangular opening at the position of the metal shield plate 1540d corresponding to the large area.

Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 has been described as an example, but the gaming machine to which the present invention can be applied is not limited to the pachinko machine, and a gaming machine other than the pachinko machine, for example, a slot machine (rotary cylinder type). It can also be applied to a game machine) or a fusion game machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused (a machine that plays a slot game using a game ball). Here, a slot machine as a rotating drum type gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG. 127. FIG. 127 is a schematic perspective view of the slot machine.

As shown in FIG. 127, the slot machine 6000 includes a front door 6002 and a main body portion 6004. The front door 6002 and the main body portion 6004 are connected to each other via a hinge (not shown). The front door 6002 can be opened from the main body portion 6004 by inserting the key into the keyhole 6005 provided at the right end of the front door 6002 and turning it clockwise with this hinge as the center of rotation.

A game panel 6006 is provided on the upper half of the front door 6002, and a protruding portion protruding forward from the game panel 6006 is formed on the lower half of the front door 6002. A medal insertion slot 6008, bet buttons 6010, 6012, a start lever 6014, a left stop button 6016, a middle stop button 6018, a right stop button 6020, and the like are arranged along the lower edge of the game panel 6006. Further, a storage settlement button 6022 and a decorative plate 6024 are arranged in the lower half of the front door 6002, and a saucer 6026 is provided below the decorative plate 6024. These bet buttons 6010, 6012, start lever 6014, left stop button 6016, middle stop button 6018, right stop button 6020, storage settlement button 6022, etc. are electrically connected to the main control board 1310 that controls the progress of the game. Has been done. The main control board 1310 is housed in the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300, and is attached and fixed to a board holder (not shown) provided inside the main body portion 6004.

A rectangular display window (not shown) is formed at a substantially central position of the game panel 6006, and three variable rotating bodies (not shown) installed inside the slot machine 6000 through this display window, an effect device (not shown), and the like are displayed. It can be seen through. Three variable rotating bodies (not shown) are attached and fixed to a main body side mounting member (not shown) provided inside the main body portion 6004. On the other hand, the effect device (not shown) is attached and fixed to a door-side mounting member (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the front door 6002.

On these variable rotating bodies, a translucent symbol band on which a plurality of types of symbols (for example, bell, watermelon, cherry, 7, V, etc.) are printed as symbol information is attached to each tubular frame. ing. Such a tubular variable rotating body is called a reel or a drum in a gaming machine such as a slot machine, and an output shaft of a stepping motor (not shown) and each variable rotating body are connected to each other. These stepping motors are driven and controlled by the main control board 1310, and when the output shaft of the stepping motor rotates, a plurality of types of symbols continuously change from the top to the bottom from the above-mentioned display window. It is designed to look like.

The effect device includes a plurality of movable effect bodies (not shown), the effect display device 1600 described above, various decorative boards on which a plurality of LEDs (not shown) are mounted, and a peripheral control unit 1500 described above. The peripheral control unit 1500 controls the operation of a plurality of movable effectors, the drawing control of the effect display device 1600, the light emission control of a plurality of LEDs mounted on various decorative boards, etc., based on various commands from the main control board 1310. By performing various controls, the progress of the production is controlled. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 described above.

In the main control board 1310, a predetermined number of medals are inserted into the medal insertion slot 6008 as a game medium, and the variable display of the symbol information is started based on the operation of the start lever 6014, and the left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018, and the right The variable display of the symbol information is stopped based on the operation of the stop button 6020 or the passage of a predetermined time. Then, the main control board 1310 generates a profit-giving state (big hit game state) on condition that the symbol information has a predetermined specific display mode, and pays out a large amount of medals as a game medium to the tray 6026.

In the fusion gaming machine, the medal insertion slot 6008 becomes the ball insertion slot 6008', and the main control board 1310 inserts a predetermined number of game balls as a game medium into the ball insertion slot 6008' to operate the starting lever 6014. Based on this, the variable display of the symbol information is started, and the variable display of the symbol information is stopped based on the operation of the left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018, the right stop button 6020, or the passage of a predetermined time. Then, the main control board 1310 generates a profit-giving state (big hit game state) on condition that the symbol information is in a predetermined specific display mode, and pays out a large amount of the game ball as a game medium to the saucer 6026.

1 ... Pachinko machine, 2 ... Outer frame, 3 ... Door frame, 4 ... Main body frame, 5 ... Game board, 5a ... Game area, 558 ... External terminal board, 559 ... Frame ground board, 560 ... Payout unit, 570 ... Ball Induction unit, 580 ... payout device, 580a ... payout passage, 580b ... ball ejection passage, 581 ... payout device main body, 582 ... payout device rear lid, 583 ... payout device front lid, 584 ... payout motor, 585 ... drive gear, 586 ... first transmission gear, 587 ... second transmission gear, 588 ... payout gear member, 588a ... payout gear, 588b ... detection piece, 589 ... payout blade, 589a ... blade piece, 589b ... ball accommodating part, 590 ... blade rotation detection Sensor, 591 ... Payout detection sensor, 592 ... Movable piece for ball removal, 593 ... Ball removal lever, 600 ... Upper full tank path unit, 610 ... Lower full tank path unit, 630 ... Power supply board, 633 ... Payout control board, 1300 ... Main control unit, 1310 ... Main control board, 1500 ... Production control unit, 1501 ... Cover body, 1502 ... Base body, 1503 ... Wiring cover body, 1510 ... Peripheral control board, 1520 ... Peripheral data ROM board, 1530 ... Liquid crystal Output board, 1540 ... Shield plate, 1545 ... Conductive elastic member, 1600 ... Production display device.

Claims (2)

A gaming machine in which the effect control means capable of controlling the progress of the effect based on the lottery result is housed in a protective case made of transparent resin.
The effect control means is divided into at least a first substrate, a second substrate, and a third substrate.
The at least three substrates are housed in one protective case made of the transparent resin.
The first board includes a ROM in which data related to the game production is stored in advance.
The second board can receive the data of the ROM provided in the first board through the first connector and create a video signal, and the video signal is transmitted to the third board through the second connector. Output and
The third board outputs a signal of a video signal system suitable for the display device to the display device.
further,
The first metal plate with conductivity and
A second metal plate with conductivity and
Conductive elastic part with conductivity and elasticity,
With
The first metal plate has substantially the same area as the effect control means composed of the three substrates inside the transparent resin protective case, and is arranged so as to overlap the effect control means. The second metal plate is not provided on the transparent resin protective case, while a part of the transparent resin protective case is provided on the transparent resin protective case. It is provided on the outside of the transparent resin protective case.
When the protective case made of transparent resin is attached to the gaming machine, the first metal plate and the second metal plate are electrically connected via the conductive elastic portion. A game machine to play.
A gaming machine in which the effect control means capable of controlling the progress of the effect based on the lottery result is housed in a protective case made of transparent resin.
The effect control means is divided into at least a first substrate, a second substrate, and a third substrate.
The at least three substrates are housed in one protective case made of the transparent resin.
The first board includes a ROM in which data related to the game production is stored in advance.
The second board can receive the data of the ROM provided in the first board through the first connector and create a video signal, and the video signal is transmitted to the third board through the second connector. Output and
The third board outputs a signal of a video signal system suitable for the display device to the display device.
further,
The first metal plate with conductivity and
A second metal plate with conductivity and
Conductive elastic part with conductivity and elasticity,
With
The first metal plate is connected to a ground line which is a reference potential of the effect control means, and at least a part of the first metal plate is exposed to the outside of the transparent resin protective case. On the other hand, the second metal plate is not provided in the protective case made of transparent resin, but is provided outside the protective case made of transparent resin.
When the protective case made of transparent resin is attached to the gaming machine, the first metal plate and the second metal plate are electrically connected via the conductive elastic portion.
Connect the ground line and the first metal plate before Symbol presentation control means Te near smell of the first location metal plate which is electrically connected to the second metal plate via the conductive elastic portion A gaming machine characterized by what it has done.

Images